<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<searchText>
	<page id="1">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical network protectionSepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80Catalogue20]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical network protectionSepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80Catalogue20]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="2">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80General contentIntroduction1 2 3 4 5Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40Sepam series 80Additional modules and accessoriesOrder fo]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80General contentIntroduction1 2 3 4 5Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40Sepam series 80Additional modules and accessoriesOrder fo]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="3">
		<raw><![CDATA[TheGuidingSystem,thenewwaytocreateyour electricalinstallationsAcomprehensiveofferofproductswithconsistentdesign The Guiding System is first and foremost a Merlin Gerin productoffercoveringallelectricaldistributionneeds. However,whatmakesallthedifferenceisthattheseproducts havebeendesignedtooperatetogheter:mechanical andelectricalcompatibility,interoperability,modularity, communication.Thus the electrical installation is both optimised and more efficient: better continuity of supply, enhanced safety for people and equipment, guaranteed upgradeability, effective monitoring and control. Toolstosimplifydesignandimplementation With the Guiding System, you have a comprehensive range of tools - the Guiding Tools - that will help you increase your product knowledge and product utilisation. Of course this is in compliance with current standards and procedures. These tools include technical booklets and guides, design aid software, training courses, etc. and are regularly updated.0ForagenuinepartnershipwithyouBecause each electrical installation is unique, there is no standard solution. With the Guiding System, the variety of combinations allows for genuine customisation solutions. You can create and implement electrical installations to meet your creative requirements and design knowledge. You and Merlin Gerin���s Guiding System form a genuine partnership.FormoredetailsontheGuidingSystem, consultwww.merlin-gerin.c]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[TheGuidingSystem,thenewwaytocreateyour electricalinstallationsAcomprehensiveofferofproductswithconsistentdesign The Guiding System is first and foremost a Merlin Gerin productoffercoveringallelectricaldistributionneeds. However,whatmakesallthedifferenceisthattheseproducts havebeendesignedtooperatetogheter:mechanical andelectricalcompatibility,interoperability,modularity, communication.Thus the electrical installation is both optimised and more efficient: better continuity of supply, enhanced safety for people and equipment, guaranteed upgradeability, effective monitoring and control. Toolstosimplifydesignandimplementation With the Guiding System, you have a comprehensive range of tools - the Guiding Tools - that will help you increase your product knowledge and product utilisation. Of course this is in compliance with current standards and procedures. These tools include technical booklets and guides, design aid software, training courses, etc. and are regularly updated.0ForagenuinepartnershipwithyouBecause each electrical installation is unique, there is no standard solution. With the Guiding System, the variety of combinations allows for genuine customisation solutions. You can create and implement electrical installations to meet your creative requirements and design knowledge. You and Merlin GerinAAAs Guiding System form a genuine partnership.FormoredetailsontheGuidingSystem, consultwww.merlin-gerin.c]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="4">
		<raw><![CDATA[Aconsistentdesignofoffersfrom All Merlin Gerin offers are designed according toelectrical,mechanicalandcommunication Medium Voltage to Low Voltage consistencyrules. Theproductsexpressthisconsistencybytheir overalldesignandsharedergonomics.Electricalconsistency:Each product complies with or enhances system performance at co-ordination level: breaking capacity, Isc, temperature rise, etc. for more safety, continuity of supply (discrimination) or economic optimisation (cascading). The leading edge technologies employed in Merlin Gerin���s Guiding System ensure high performance levels in discrimination and cascading of protection devices, electrodynamic withstand of switches and current distributors, heat loss of devices, distribution blocks and enclosures. Likewise , inter-product ElectroMagnetic Compatibilty (EMC) is guaranteed.0Discrimination guarantees co-ordination between the operating characteristics of serial-connected circuit-breakers. Should a fault occurs downstream, only the circuit-breaker placed immediately upstream from the fault will trip.Mechanical consistency:Each product adopts dimensional standards simplifying and optimising its use within the system. It shares the same accessories and auxiliaries and complies with global ergonomic choices (utilisation mode, operating mode, setting and configuration devices, tools, etc.) making its installation and operation within the system a simpler process.Direct connection of the Canalis KT busbar trunking on the Masterpact 3200 A circuit breaker.Communicationconsistency:Thanks to the use of standard Web technologies, you can offer your customers intelligent Merlin Gerin switchboards allowing easy access to information: follow-up of currents, voltages, powers, consumption history, etc.Each product complies with global choices in terms of communication protocols (Modbus, Ethernet, etc.) for simplified integration in the management, supervision and monitoring systems.GuidingTools for more efficient design  andimplementation ofyourinstallation]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Aconsistentdesignofoffersfrom All Merlin Gerin offers are designed according toelectrical,mechanicalandcommunication Medium Voltage to Low Voltage consistencyrules. Theproductsexpressthisconsistencybytheir overalldesignandsharedergonomics.Electricalconsistency:Each product complies with or enhances system performance at co-ordination level: breaking capacity, Isc, temperature rise, etc. for more safety, continuity of supply (discrimination) or economic optimisation (cascading). The leading edge technologies employed in Merlin GerinAAAs Guiding System ensure high performance levels in discrimination and cascading of protection devices, electrodynamic withstand of switches and current distributors, heat loss of devices, distribution blocks and enclosures. Likewise , inter-product ElectroMagnetic Compatibilty (EMC) is guaranteed.0Discrimination guarantees co-ordination between the operating characteristics of serial-connected circuit-breakers. Should a fault occurs downstream, only the circuit-breaker placed immediately upstream from the fault will trip.Mechanical consistency:Each product adopts dimensional standards simplifying and optimising its use within the system. It shares the same accessories and auxiliaries and complies with global ergonomic choices (utilisation mode, operating mode, setting and configuration devices, tools, etc.) making its installation and operation within the system a simpler process.Direct connection of the Canalis KT busbar trunking on the Masterpact 3200 A circuit breaker.Communicationconsistency:Thanks to the use of standard Web technologies, you can offer your customers intelligent Merlin Gerin switchboards allowing easy access to information: follow-up of currents, voltages, powers, consumption history, etc.Each product complies with global choices in terms of communication protocols (Modbus, Ethernet, etc.) for simplified integration in the management, supervision and monitoring systems.GuidingTools for more efficient design  andimplementation ofyourinstallation]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="5">
		<raw><![CDATA[0SM6Medium voltage switchboard system from 1 to 36 kVSepamProtection relaysMasterpactProtection switchgear from 100 to 6300 ATrihal MV/LV dry cast resin transformer from 160 to 5000 kVAEvolis MV vacuum switchgear and components from 1 to 2 kV.The Technical guideThese technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: The electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of highperformance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.CAD software and toolsThe CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedure]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[0SM6Medium voltage switchboard system from 1 to 36 kVSepamProtection relaysMasterpactProtection switchgear from 100 to 6300 ATrihal MV/LV dry cast resin transformer from 160 to 5000 kVAEvolis MV vacuum switchgear and components from 1 to 2 kV.The Technical guideThese technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: The electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of highperformance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.CAD software and toolsThe CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedure]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="6">
		<raw><![CDATA[CompactProtectionswitchgearsystem from 100 to 630 A0Multi 9Modular protection switchgear systemupto125APrismaPlusFunctionalsystemforelectrical distributionswitchboards upto3200APragma Enclosures for distribution switchboards up to 160 ACanalis Prefabricated Busbar Trunking from 25 to 4000 APowerLogic Power managementTraining Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner���s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.merlin-gerin.com This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures��� bselection guides from the e-catalog bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts�]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CompactProtectionswitchgearsystem from 100 to 630 A0Multi 9Modular protection switchgear systemupto125APrismaPlusFunctionalsystemforelectrical distributionswitchboards upto3200APragma Enclosures for distribution switchboards up to 160 ACanalis Prefabricated Busbar Trunking from 25 to 4000 APowerLogic Power managementTraining Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginnerAAAs courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.merlin-gerin.com This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochuresAAA bselection guides from the e-catalog bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contactsA]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="7">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures��� bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts���These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installation]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochuresAAA bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contactsAAAThese technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installation]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="8">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80IntroductionSepamforgreatersimplicity SepamnetworkprotectionforyourpeaceofmindSepam to boost productivity8 9 10 12 13 14 1 1Sepam offers flexibility to match your needsPanoramaofSepamapplications SelectionguideforallapplicationsFeeder protection Incomer protectionSubstationapplicationsBusbarapplicationsTransformer feeder protection Transformer incomer protection16 189 TransformerapplicationsMotor applications Generatorapplications Capacitorapplications Communicationnetworksandprotocols Implementation ExamplesofarchitecturesSelection table Description24 28 32 34 36 37 4040 4AvailableSepamdataSepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80 Additional modules and accessories Order form047 85 139 2]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80IntroductionSepamforgreatersimplicity SepamnetworkprotectionforyourpeaceofmindSepam to boost productivity8 9 10 12 13 14 1 1Sepam offers flexibility to match your needsPanoramaofSepamapplications SelectionguideforallapplicationsFeeder protection Incomer protectionSubstationapplicationsBusbarapplicationsTransformer feeder protection Transformer incomer protection16 189 TransformerapplicationsMotor applications Generatorapplications Capacitorapplications Communicationnetworksandprotocols Implementation ExamplesofarchitecturesSelection table Description24 28 32 34 36 37 4040 4AvailableSepamdataSepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80 Additional modules and accessories Order form047 85 139 2]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="9">
		<raw><![CDATA[IntroductionSepamforgreatersimplicity1PE0AconsistentrangeofprotectionrelaysIt is made up of three series of relays, with increasing performance levels: bSepam series 20 for usual applications bSepam series 40 for demanding applications bSepam series 80 for custom applications.The Sepam range of protection relays is designed for all protection applications on medium-voltage public and industrial distribution networks.Sepam, a consistent range of protection relays.PE09Amulti-functionalrangeofdigitalrelaysEach Sepam series offers all the functions required for the intended application: beffective protection of life and property baccurate measurements and detailed diagnosis bintegral equipment control blocal or remote indications and operation.Integral equipment control by Sepam.PE00ASepamsolutionforeveryapplicationFor each electrotechnical application, Sepam offers the relay suited to the protection needs of your network. The Sepam range covers the following applications: bsubstations (incomer or feeder type) btransformers bmotors bgenerators bbusbars bcapacitors.A Sepam solution for every applicatio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[IntroductionSepamforgreatersimplicity1PE0AconsistentrangeofprotectionrelaysIt is made up of three series of relays, with increasing performance levels: bSepam series 20 for usual applications bSepam series 40 for demanding applications bSepam series 80 for custom applications.The Sepam range of protection relays is designed for all protection applications on medium-voltage public and industrial distribution networks.Sepam, a consistent range of protection relays.PE09Amulti-functionalrangeofdigitalrelaysEach Sepam series offers all the functions required for the intended application: beffective protection of life and property baccurate measurements and detailed diagnosis bintegral equipment control blocal or remote indications and operation.Integral equipment control by Sepam.PE00ASepamsolutionforeveryapplicationFor each electrotechnical application, Sepam offers the relay suited to the protection needs of your network. The Sepam range covers the following applications: bsubstations (incomer or feeder type) btransformers bmotors bgenerators bbusbars bcapacitors.A Sepam solution for every applicatio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="10">
		<raw><![CDATA[IntroductionSepamnetworkprotection foryourpeaceofmindPE0SchneiderElectric,aglobalofferWorldleaderinPoweretControlThe future will call increasingly on electricity with growing needs, new modes of production and new applications. The world leader in electric distribution and automation et control, Schneider Electric makes electricity safe, as well as facilitating and improving its use.1WorldwidepresenceSchneider Electric, by your side in over 130 countries.With sites on every continent, Schneider Electric contributes to customer performance through its unique selection of products, solutions and services, as well as its dynamic policy of innovation. Continuous,worldwideavailability With over 5000 points of sale in 130 countries, you can be sure of finding the range of products meeting your needs and complying perfectly with local standards. Technicalassistancearoundtheglobe Our technicians are always on hand to provide solutions tailored to your needs. Schneider Electric provides all the technical assistance you require, wherever you may be. Visit the www.merlin-gerin.com site to find contact information for Schneider Electric in your country.SchneiderElectric,amanufacturerof protectionrelaysSepam,over25yearsofexperienceBreaking new ground back in 1982, Merlin Gerin marketed the first multi-functional digital protection relay, the Sepam 10. Today, with the Sepam range, you benefit from more than 25 years of experience on the part of our RetD teams.PE09Installedbaseb200 000 Sepam relays in over 90 countries bpresence in every sector of activity: venergy: production and distribution vinfrastructures: airports, tunnels, public transport, water treatment vindustry: automobiles, mines, semi-conductors, metallurgy, petrochemicals vcommercial sector: shopping centres, hospitals.Sepam,guaranteedqualityProtection relays must be totally reliable. That level of reliability is obtained by total quality at every step, from design on through to operation. bdesign based on dependability studies and complying with the functional-safety requirements of standard IEC 61508 bdevelopment and production certified ISO 9001 benvironment-friendly production, certified ISO 14001 bservice quality ensured by decentralized logistics and support bcompliance with international standards and local certification.DE51860DE51861DE5186]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[IntroductionSepamnetworkprotection foryourpeaceofmindPE0SchneiderElectric,aglobalofferWorldleaderinPoweretControlThe future will call increasingly on electricity with growing needs, new modes of production and new applications. The world leader in electric distribution and automation et control, Schneider Electric makes electricity safe, as well as facilitating and improving its use.1WorldwidepresenceSchneider Electric, by your side in over 130 countries.With sites on every continent, Schneider Electric contributes to customer performance through its unique selection of products, solutions and services, as well as its dynamic policy of innovation. Continuous,worldwideavailability With over 5000 points of sale in 130 countries, you can be sure of finding the range of products meeting your needs and complying perfectly with local standards. Technicalassistancearoundtheglobe Our technicians are always on hand to provide solutions tailored to your needs. Schneider Electric provides all the technical assistance you require, wherever you may be. Visit the www.merlin-gerin.com site to find contact information for Schneider Electric in your country.SchneiderElectric,amanufacturerof protectionrelaysSepam,over25yearsofexperienceBreaking new ground back in 1982, Merlin Gerin marketed the first multi-functional digital protection relay, the Sepam 10. Today, with the Sepam range, you benefit from more than 25 years of experience on the part of our RetD teams.PE09Installedbaseb200 000 Sepam relays in over 90 countries bpresence in every sector of activity: venergy: production and distribution vinfrastructures: airports, tunnels, public transport, water treatment vindustry: automobiles, mines, semi-conductors, metallurgy, petrochemicals vcommercial sector: shopping centres, hospitals.Sepam,guaranteedqualityProtection relays must be totally reliable. That level of reliability is obtained by total quality at every step, from design on through to operation. bdesign based on dependability studies and complying with the functional-safety requirements of standard IEC 61508 bdevelopment and production certified ISO 9001 benvironment-friendly production, certified ISO 14001 bservice quality ensured by decentralized logistics and support bcompliance with international standards and local certification.DE51860DE51861DE5186]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="11">
		<raw><![CDATA[IntroductionSepam offers flexibility to match yourneeds11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Baseunit Parameterandprotectionsettingssavedon removablememorycartridge 42logicinputsand23relayoutputswith3 optionalmodules Connectiontocommunicationnetworks Temperaturesensors Low-level analog output Synchro-checkmodule SoftwaretoolsPE0Enhancementthroughtheadditionof optionalmodulestokeeppacewithyour ever-changinginstallationTo adapt to as many situations as possible and allow for future installation upgrades, optional modules may be added to Sepam at any time for new functions. bplug et play modules, easy to install and connect bcomplete setup using software.Sepam series 80 and its optional modules.A choice of user-machine interfaces (UMI) to meetyouroperatingneedsbadvanced UMI for all Sepam relays: von front panel vor remote UMI installed in the most convenient location for the facility manager bmimic-based UMI for Sepam series 80, offering local switchgear control.PE00AsoftwaretoolforallSepamrelaysThe SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam series 20, series 40 and series 80. bthe ergonomics are designed to guide you in setting up Sepam bfuture compatibility is ensured with all Sepam versions.SFT2841: a single software tool for all Sepam relays]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[IntroductionSepam offers flexibility to match yourneeds11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Baseunit Parameterandprotectionsettingssavedon removablememorycartridge 42logicinputsand23relayoutputswith3 optionalmodules Connectiontocommunicationnetworks Temperaturesensors Low-level analog output Synchro-checkmodule SoftwaretoolsPE0Enhancementthroughtheadditionof optionalmodulestokeeppacewithyour ever-changinginstallationTo adapt to as many situations as possible and allow for future installation upgrades, optional modules may be added to Sepam at any time for new functions. bplug et play modules, easy to install and connect bcomplete setup using software.Sepam series 80 and its optional modules.A choice of user-machine interfaces (UMI) to meetyouroperatingneedsbadvanced UMI for all Sepam relays: von front panel vor remote UMI installed in the most convenient location for the facility manager bmimic-based UMI for Sepam series 80, offering local switchgear control.PE00AsoftwaretoolforallSepamrelaysThe SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam series 20, series 40 and series 80. bthe ergonomics are designed to guide you in setting up Sepam bfuture compatibility is ensured with all Sepam versions.SFT2841: a single software tool for all Sepam relays]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="12">
		<raw><![CDATA[IntroductionSepamtoboostproductivityEasyoperationTo ensure fast and effective servicing, thereby reducing the operating and maintenance costs of your electric installation, all operating and maintenance information is available: blocally and remotely bin your language.1Local operationPE00All the data required for local equipment operation are clearly displayed on the LCD screen of the UMI (User-Machine Interface). bUMI screens can be translated to your language balarms and operating messages can be personalized.Customized Chinese advanced UMI.RemoteoperationPE0All Sepam relays can be connected to two types of communication networks: ban S-LAN (supervisory local area network) to remotely control and monitor Sepam relays connected to a supervision system (SCADA or RTU) ban E-LAN (engineering local area network), reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and centralized installation diagnosis using the SFT2841 software.Sepam connection to two communication networks.ImprovedcontinuityofserviceWith Sepam, all data is available for optimum management and use of the electric installation. bThe clear and complete information supplied by Sepam following a fault trip enables the operator to restore power as quickly as possible. bPreventive maintenance of switchgear is made easier by the diagnosis functions provided by Sepam. bThe predictive information supplied by the motor-protection functions optimises process control.PE0ReducedmaintenancecostsThe Sepam range is designed to reduce maintenance time and cost for your protection system. bSepam modules and connectors may be removed without any particular precautions. bThe optional modules are the same for the entire Sepam range, thus reducing the stock of replacement parts. bSepam series 80 has a removable memory cartridge to simplify maintenance operations.Sepam series 80 memory cartridg]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[IntroductionSepamtoboostproductivityEasyoperationTo ensure fast and effective servicing, thereby reducing the operating and maintenance costs of your electric installation, all operating and maintenance information is available: blocally and remotely bin your language.1Local operationPE00All the data required for local equipment operation are clearly displayed on the LCD screen of the UMI (User-Machine Interface). bUMI screens can be translated to your language balarms and operating messages can be personalized.Customized Chinese advanced UMI.RemoteoperationPE0All Sepam relays can be connected to two types of communication networks: ban S-LAN (supervisory local area network) to remotely control and monitor Sepam relays connected to a supervision system (SCADA or RTU) ban E-LAN (engineering local area network), reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and centralized installation diagnosis using the SFT2841 software.Sepam connection to two communication networks.ImprovedcontinuityofserviceWith Sepam, all data is available for optimum management and use of the electric installation. bThe clear and complete information supplied by Sepam following a fault trip enables the operator to restore power as quickly as possible. bPreventive maintenance of switchgear is made easier by the diagnosis functions provided by Sepam. bThe predictive information supplied by the motor-protection functions optimises process control.PE0ReducedmaintenancecostsThe Sepam range is designed to reduce maintenance time and cost for your protection system. bSepam modules and connectors may be removed without any particular precautions. bThe optional modules are the same for the entire Sepam range, thus reducing the stock of replacement parts. bSepam series 80 has a removable memory cartridge to simplify maintenance operations.Sepam series 80 memory cartridg]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="13">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsPanoramaofSepamapplications1The selection guide proposes the Sepam types suited to your protection needs, based on the characteristics of your application. The most typical applications are presented with the corresponding Sepam and each application example is described by: b a single-line diagram indicating: v equipment to be protected v network configuration v position of measurement sensors b standard and specific Sepam functions to be implemented to protect the application. The list of functions is given for information purposes. Earthing, whether direct or via an impedance, is represented by the same pictogram, i.e. the pictogram corresponding to a direct connection.PE0Sepamseries20Forusualapplications Characteristics b10 logic inputs b8 relay outputs b communication port b8 temperature-sensor inputsPE0 DE51730 DE51734 DE51733 DE51732 DE51731Sepamseries40Fordemandingapplications Characteristics b10 logic inputs b8 relay outputs blogical equation editor b communication port b16 temperature-sensor inputsSepamseries80PE0 PE0Forcustomapplications Characteristics b42 logic inputs b23 relay outputs blogical equation editor b communication ports for multi-master or redundant architectures b16 temperature-sensor inputs bremovable memory cartridge with parameter and protection settings for fast return to service following replacement bbattery backup to save historical and disturbancerecording data bmimic-based UMI for local device control under safe conditions boptional Logipam programming software to program specific functionsMDE51736DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsPanoramaofSepamapplications1The selection guide proposes the Sepam types suited to your protection needs, based on the characteristics of your application. The most typical applications are presented with the corresponding Sepam and each application example is described by: b a single-line diagram indicating: v equipment to be protected v network configuration v position of measurement sensors b standard and specific Sepam functions to be implemented to protect the application. The list of functions is given for information purposes. Earthing, whether direct or via an impedance, is represented by the same pictogram, i.e. the pictogram corresponding to a direct connection.PE0Sepamseries20Forusualapplications Characteristics b10 logic inputs b8 relay outputs b communication port b8 temperature-sensor inputsPE0 DE51730 DE51734 DE51733 DE51732 DE51731Sepamseries40Fordemandingapplications Characteristics b10 logic inputs b8 relay outputs blogical equation editor b communication port b16 temperature-sensor inputsSepamseries80PE0 PE0Forcustomapplications Characteristics b42 logic inputs b23 relay outputs blogical equation editor b communication ports for multi-master or redundant architectures b16 temperature-sensor inputs bremovable memory cartridge with parameter and protection settings for fast return to service following replacement bbattery backup to save historical and disturbancerecording data bmimic-based UMI for local device control under safe conditions boptional Logipam programming software to program specific functionsMDE51736DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="14">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsSelectionguideforallapplicationsProtectionfunctionsBasic SpecificApplicationsSubstation Busbar Transformer Motor Generator Capacitor1current protection Breaker failureS20 S23T20 T23M20voltage and frequency protection disconnection by ���rate of change of frequency���B21 B22Page 47current, voltage and frequency protection directional earth fault directional earth fault and phase overcurrentS40 S41 S42T40 M41 T42G40current, voltage and frequency protection directional earth fault directional earth fault and phase overcurrent disconnection by ���rate of change of frequency��� current, voltage and transformer and frequency protection transformermachine unit differential machine differentialS80 S81 S82 S84B80 T81 T82 M81 G82T87M88G88M87 B83G87Page 85current, voltage and voltage and frequency protection frequency protection for two sets of busbarscurrent, voltage and capacitor-bank frequency protection unbalanceC86Page14Page 16Page18Page24Page28Page3]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsSelectionguideforallapplicationsProtectionfunctionsBasic SpecificApplicationsSubstation Busbar Transformer Motor Generator Capacitor1current protection Breaker failureS20 S23T20 T23M20voltage and frequency protection disconnection by AAArate of change of frequencyAAAB21 B22Page 47current, voltage and frequency protection directional earth fault directional earth fault and phase overcurrentS40 S41 S42T40 M41 T42G40current, voltage and frequency protection directional earth fault directional earth fault and phase overcurrent disconnection by AAArate of change of frequencyAAA current, voltage and transformer and frequency protection transformermachine unit differential machine differentialS80 S81 S82 S84B80 T81 T82 M81 G82T87M88G88M87 B83G87Page 85current, voltage and voltage and frequency protection frequency protection for two sets of busbarscurrent, voltage and capacitor-bank frequency protection unbalanceC86Page14Page 16Page18Page24Page28Page3]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="15">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsSubstationapplications Feeder protection1ProtectionfunctionsANSI codeS20S23   B22S40   S41   S42      S80   S81      S82                v vS84                  v vPhase overcurrent (1) 50/51  Earth fault / 50N/51N  Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF Negative sequence / unbalance   Thermal overload for cables 49RMS Directional phase overcurrent (1)  Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC Directional active overpower P Directional active underpower P Positive sequence undervoltage 27D Remanent undervoltage R Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)  Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9 Neutral voltage displacement 9N Negative sequence overvoltage  Overfrequency H Underfrequency L Rate of change of frequency R v Recloser (4 cycles) (2) 9 Synchro-check (3)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module. (4) 2 undervoltage (L-L) and 1 undervoltage (L-N).    2/1 (4)           v      v      v        v v        v vvbfeeder short-circuit and overload protection. Protectionoflow-capacitancefeedersinimpedanceearthedorsolidly earthedneutralsystems:SepamS20,S23,S40orS80 bno voltage and frequency monitoring. bvoltage and frequency monitoring.DE52581 DE51686FeederprotectionProtectionofhigh-capacitancefeedersinimpedanceearthedor compensatedorisolatedneutralsystems:SepamS41orS81 bspecific feeder protection: 67N/67NC.DE516]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsSubstationapplications Feeder protection1ProtectionfunctionsANSI codeS20S23   B22S40   S41   S42      S80   S81      S82                v vS84                  v vPhase overcurrent (1) 50/51  Earth fault / 50N/51N  Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF Negative sequence / unbalance   Thermal overload for cables 49RMS Directional phase overcurrent (1)  Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC Directional active overpower P Directional active underpower P Positive sequence undervoltage 27D Remanent undervoltage R Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)  Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9 Neutral voltage displacement 9N Negative sequence overvoltage  Overfrequency H Underfrequency L Rate of change of frequency R v Recloser (4 cycles) (2) 9 Synchro-check (3)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module. (4) 2 undervoltage (L-L) and 1 undervoltage (L-N).    2/1 (4)           v      v      v        v v        v vvbfeeder short-circuit and overload protection. Protectionoflow-capacitancefeedersinimpedanceearthedorsolidly earthedneutralsystems:SepamS20,S23,S40orS80 bno voltage and frequency monitoring. bvoltage and frequency monitoring.DE52581 DE51686FeederprotectionProtectionofhigh-capacitancefeedersinimpedanceearthedor compensatedorisolatedneutralsystems:SepamS41orS81 bspecific feeder protection: 67N/67NC.DE516]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="16">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsSubstationapplications Incomer protectionbbusbar short-circuit protection. Incomerprotection:SepamS20,S23,S40orS80 bno voltage and bbusbar voltage and frequency monitoring. frequency monitoring.DE52582 DE51688Incomerprotectionbline voltage and frequency monitoring.DE51689Protectionof2incomers:SepamS80 bwith automatic source transfer (ATS) and synchrocheck (ANSI 25).DE516901Parallelincomerprotection:SepamS42orS82 bspecific line or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC.Parallel-incomerprotectionwithdisconnectionfunction:SepamS20+B22 orSepamS84 bdisconnection-specific functions: bdisconnection-specific functions: 27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R. 27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R, 32P, 37P.DE52583 DE51692 DE51694DE51691Protectionofanincomerorcouplingcircuitbreakerwithloadshedding basedonfrequencyvariations:SepamS84 bload-shedding-specific functions: 81L, 81R.DE51693 DE51695Ring-incomerprotection:SepamS42orS82 bline or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC bdirectional logic discriminatio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsSubstationapplications Incomer protectionbbusbar short-circuit protection. Incomerprotection:SepamS20,S23,S40orS80 bno voltage and bbusbar voltage and frequency monitoring. frequency monitoring.DE52582 DE51688Incomerprotectionbline voltage and frequency monitoring.DE51689Protectionof2incomers:SepamS80 bwith automatic source transfer (ATS) and synchrocheck (ANSI 25).DE516901Parallelincomerprotection:SepamS42orS82 bspecific line or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC.Parallel-incomerprotectionwithdisconnectionfunction:SepamS20+B22 orSepamS84 bdisconnection-specific functions: bdisconnection-specific functions: 27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R. 27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R, 32P, 37P.DE52583 DE51692 DE51694DE51691Protectionofanincomerorcouplingcircuitbreakerwithloadshedding basedonfrequencyvariations:SepamS84 bload-shedding-specific functions: 81L, 81R.DE51693 DE51695Ring-incomerprotection:SepamS42orS82 bline or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC bdirectional logic discriminatio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="17">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsBusbarapplications1ProtectionfunctionsANSI codeB21B22B80            vB83            vPhase overcurrent (1) 50/51 Earth fault / 50N/51N Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF Negative sequence / unbalance  Positive sequence undervoltage 27D   Remanent undervoltage R   Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)  2/1 (3) 2/1 (3) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9   Neutral voltage displacement 9N   Negative sequence overvoltage  Overfrequency H   Underfrequency L   Rate of change of frequency R  Synchro-check (2)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module. (3) 2 undervoltage (L-L) and 1 undervoltage (L-N]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsBusbarapplications1ProtectionfunctionsANSI codeB21B22B80            vB83            vPhase overcurrent (1) 50/51 Earth fault / 50N/51N Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF Negative sequence / unbalance  Positive sequence undervoltage 27D   Remanent undervoltage R   Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)  2/1 (3) 2/1 (3) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9   Neutral voltage displacement 9N   Negative sequence overvoltage  Overfrequency H   Underfrequency L   Rate of change of frequency R  Synchro-check (2)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module. (3) 2 undervoltage (L-L) and 1 undervoltage (L-N]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="18">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsBusbarapplicationsbvoltage and frequency monitoring. Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on busbars: SepamB21orB22 bload-shedding-specific function: 81L. bload-shedding-specific functions: 81L, 81R.DE51722 DE51723Voltage monitoring1bbusbar short-circuit protection bvoltage and frequency monitoring. Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on 2 both halfbusbars:SepamB83DE51696Couplingcircuit-breakerprotectionbbusbar short-circuit protection bline voltage and frequency monitoring. Additionalbusbarvoltagemonitoring:SepamB80DE51697Incomerprotectionwithadditionalbusbarvolta]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsBusbarapplicationsbvoltage and frequency monitoring. Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on busbars: SepamB21orB22 bload-shedding-specific function: 81L. bload-shedding-specific functions: 81L, 81R.DE51722 DE51723Voltage monitoring1bbusbar short-circuit protection bvoltage and frequency monitoring. Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on 2 both halfbusbars:SepamB83DE51696Couplingcircuit-breakerprotectionbbusbar short-circuit protection bline voltage and frequency monitoring. Additionalbusbarvoltagemonitoring:SepamB80DE51697Incomerprotectionwithadditionalbusbarvolta]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="19">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications1Standard transformer application diagrams do not take voltage levels into account: b the transformer primary winding is always at the top b the transformer secondary winding is always at the bottom. The transformer primary and secondary windings need to be protected. The Sepam proposed can be installed on either the primary or secondary winding of the transformer. The other winding can be protected by an incomer or feeder type substation application Sepam.Protectionfunctions ANSI codePhase overcurrent (1) Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload for machines (1) Restricted earth fault differential Two-winding transformer differential Directional phase overcurrent (1) Directional earth fault (1) Directional active overpower Overfluxing (V / Hz) Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Thermostat / Buchholz (2) Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (3) 50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS REF T  67N/67NC P  27D R  9 9N  H L 26/63 38/49TT20 T23    T40    T42    T81     T82     T87                        v v  RTDs v        v v  RTDs v        v v  RTDs v      v v v v v v    RTDs RTDs RTDs      v v  RTDsSynchro-check (4)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check modul]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications1Standard transformer application diagrams do not take voltage levels into account: b the transformer primary winding is always at the top b the transformer secondary winding is always at the bottom. The transformer primary and secondary windings need to be protected. The Sepam proposed can be installed on either the primary or secondary winding of the transformer. The other winding can be protected by an incomer or feeder type substation application Sepam.Protectionfunctions ANSI codePhase overcurrent (1) Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload for machines (1) Restricted earth fault differential Two-winding transformer differential Directional phase overcurrent (1) Directional earth fault (1) Directional active overpower Overfluxing (V / Hz) Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Thermostat / Buchholz (2) Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (3) 50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS REF T  67N/67NC P  27D R  9 9N  H L 26/63 38/49TT20 T23    T40    T42    T81     T82     T87                        v v  RTDs v        v v  RTDs v        v v  RTDs v      v v v v v v    RTDs RTDs RTDs      v v  RTDsSynchro-check (4)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check modul]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="20">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer feeder protectionbtransformer short-circuit and overload protection binternal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T). Transformerfeederprotectionwithoutvoltagemonitoring:SepamT20,T23 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G. bneutral point: 50G/51G.DE52584 DE52585Transformerfeederprotection1Transformerfeederprotectionwithvoltagemonitoring:SepamT40orT81 Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G.DE51698Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer feeder protectionbtransformer short-circuit and overload protection binternal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T). Transformerfeederprotectionwithoutvoltagemonitoring:SepamT20,T23 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G. bneutral point: 50G/51G.DE52584 DE52585Transformerfeederprotection1Transformerfeederprotectionwithvoltagemonitoring:SepamT40orT81 Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G.DE51698Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="21">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer feeder protection1Transformerfeederprotectionwithvoltagemonitoringandadditional currentmeasurement:SepamT81 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: 50G/51G btank earth leakage: bsecondary: 50G/51G. 50G/51G.DE51699 DE51700 DE51702Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC.Transformerfeederdifferentialprotection:SepamT87 Transformer differential protection: 87T Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G. bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: bsecondary: vREF vREF v50G/51G v50G/51G. bsecondary: vREF v50G/51G.DE51701 DE5170]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer feeder protection1Transformerfeederprotectionwithvoltagemonitoringandadditional currentmeasurement:SepamT81 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: 50G/51G btank earth leakage: bsecondary: 50G/51G. 50G/51G.DE51699 DE51700 DE51702Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC.Transformerfeederdifferentialprotection:SepamT87 Transformer differential protection: 87T Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G. bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: bsecondary: vREF vREF v50G/51G v50G/51G. bsecondary: vREF v50G/51G.DE51701 DE5170]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="22">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer incomer protectionbtransformer short-circuit and overload protection binternal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T). Transformerincomerprotectionwithoutvoltagemonitoring:SepamT20, Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bsecondary: 50G/51G. bneutral point: 50G/51G.DE52586 DE52587Transformerincomerprotection1Transformerincomerprotectionwithvoltagemonitoring:SepamT40orT81 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bsecondary: 50G/51G. bsecondary: vREF v50G/51G.DE51704 DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer incomer protectionbtransformer short-circuit and overload protection binternal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T). Transformerincomerprotectionwithoutvoltagemonitoring:SepamT20, Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bsecondary: 50G/51G. bneutral point: 50G/51G.DE52586 DE52587Transformerincomerprotection1Transformerincomerprotectionwithvoltagemonitoring:SepamT40orT81 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bsecondary: 50G/51G. bsecondary: vREF v50G/51G.DE51704 DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="23">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer incomer protection1Transformerincomerdifferentialprotection:SepamT87 Transformer differential protection: 87T Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: 50G/51G bsecondary: 50G/51G. bsecondary: bsecondary: vREF vREF v50G/51G. v50G/51G.Earth fault protection: bprimary: vREF v50G/51G bsecondary: 50G/51G.Earth fault protection: bprimary: vREF v50G/51G bsecondary: vREF v50G/51G.DE51711DE51707DE51708DE51709Protectionof2non-coupledtransformerincomers:SepamT81 bautomatic source transfer (ATS) bsynchro-check (ANSI 25).DE51706DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer incomer protection1Transformerincomerdifferentialprotection:SepamT87 Transformer differential protection: 87T Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: 50G/51G bprimary: 50G/51G bsecondary: 50G/51G. bsecondary: bsecondary: vREF vREF v50G/51G. v50G/51G.Earth fault protection: bprimary: vREF v50G/51G bsecondary: 50G/51G.Earth fault protection: bprimary: vREF v50G/51G bsecondary: vREF v50G/51G.DE51711DE51707DE51708DE51709Protectionof2non-coupledtransformerincomers:SepamT81 bautomatic source transfer (ATS) bsynchro-check (ANSI 25).DE51706DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="24">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer incomer protectionParalleltransformerincomerprotection:SepamT42orT82 btransformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67 btransformer secondary earth fault protection: 50G/51G, 59N.DE517121btransformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67 btransformer secondary earth fault protection: 67N/67NC, 64REF bwith synchro-check (ANSI 25).DE51718Parallelincomerdifferentialprotection:SepamT87 btransformer differential protection: 87T bdirectional transformer protection: 67 btransformer secondary earth fault protection: 50G/51G, 67N/67NC 64REF.DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsTransformerapplications Transformer incomer protectionParalleltransformerincomerprotection:SepamT42orT82 btransformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67 btransformer secondary earth fault protection: 50G/51G, 59N.DE517121btransformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67 btransformer secondary earth fault protection: 67N/67NC, 64REF bwith synchro-check (ANSI 25).DE51718Parallelincomerdifferentialprotection:SepamT87 btransformer differential protection: 87T bdirectional transformer protection: 67 btransformer secondary earth fault protection: 50G/51G, 67N/67NC 64REF.DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="25">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applications1ProtectionfunctionsPhase overcurrent (1) Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload for machines (1) Two-winding transformer differential Machine differential Directional earth fault (1) Directional active overpower Directional reactive overpower Field loss (underimpedance) Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Loss of synchronization Overspeed (2 set points) (2) Underspeed ( set points) (2) Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Thermostat / Buchholz Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (3)ANSI code50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS T 87M 67N/67NC P 32Q/40 0  48/51LR/14  78PS   27D R  9 9N  H L 26/63 38/49TM20 M41    M81    M87    M88                      v v         v v  RTDs         v v         v  RTDs        v v         v v  RTDs        v  RTDs v  RTDsThe figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input module]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applications1ProtectionfunctionsPhase overcurrent (1) Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload for machines (1) Two-winding transformer differential Machine differential Directional earth fault (1) Directional active overpower Directional reactive overpower Field loss (underimpedance) Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Loss of synchronization Overspeed (2 set points) (2) Underspeed ( set points) (2) Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Thermostat / Buchholz Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (3)ANSI code50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS T 87M 67N/67NC P 32Q/40 0  48/51LR/14  78PS   27D R  9 9N  H L 26/63 38/49TM20 M41    M81    M87    M88                      v v         v v  RTDs         v v         v  RTDs        v v         v v  RTDs        v  RTDs v  RTDsThe figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input module]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="26">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applicationsbinternal motor fault protection bpower supply fault protection bdriven load fault protection bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T). Motor protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20 bdirect starting. bauto-transformer btwo-way. starting.DE51724 DE51737 DE51738Motor protection1Motor protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M41 or M81 bdirect starting. bauto-transformer btwo-way. starting.DE51725 DE51739 DE51740Motor differential protection: Sepam M87 Motor differential protection: 87M. bdirect starting. bauto-transformer starting.DE51742Phase protection by self-balancing-differential scheme: 50/51. bdirect starting.DE51741DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applicationsbinternal motor fault protection bpower supply fault protection bdriven load fault protection bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T). Motor protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20 bdirect starting. bauto-transformer btwo-way. starting.DE51724 DE51737 DE51738Motor protection1Motor protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M41 or M81 bdirect starting. bauto-transformer btwo-way. starting.DE51725 DE51739 DE51740Motor differential protection: Sepam M87 Motor differential protection: 87M. bdirect starting. bauto-transformer starting.DE51742Phase protection by self-balancing-differential scheme: 50/51. bdirect starting.DE51741DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="27">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applications1bmotor and transformer protection against internal faults bpower supply fault protection bdriven load fault protection binternal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T). Motor-transformer unit protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20 btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G.Note: monitoring of motor insulation must be ensured by another device.DE51744Motor-transformer unit protectionMotor-transformer unit protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M41 bmotor earth fault protection: 59N btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G.DE51745Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring: Sepam M81 bmotor earth fault protection: 59N bmotor earth fault protection: 50G/51G btransformer primary earth fault btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G protection: 50G/51G btransformer monitoring: Buchholz, btransformer monitoring: Buchholz, thermostat, temperature measurement. thermostat, temperature measurement.DE51747 DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applications1bmotor and transformer protection against internal faults bpower supply fault protection bdriven load fault protection binternal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T). Motor-transformer unit protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20 btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G.Note: monitoring of motor insulation must be ensured by another device.DE51744Motor-transformer unit protectionMotor-transformer unit protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M41 bmotor earth fault protection: 59N btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G.DE51745Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring: Sepam M81 bmotor earth fault protection: 59N bmotor earth fault protection: 50G/51G btransformer primary earth fault btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G protection: 50G/51G btransformer monitoring: Buchholz, btransformer monitoring: Buchholz, thermostat, temperature measurement. thermostat, temperature measurement.DE51747 DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="28">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applicationsMotor-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam M88 Motor-transformer unit differential protection: 87T. bmotor earth fault protection: 50G/51G bmotor earth fault protection: 59N btransformer primary earth fault btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G. protection: 50G/51G.DE51748 DE5174]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsMotor applicationsMotor-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam M88 Motor-transformer unit differential protection: 87T. bmotor earth fault protection: 50G/51G bmotor earth fault protection: 59N btransformer primary earth fault btransformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G. protection: 50G/51G.DE51748 DE5174]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="29">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplications1ProtectionfunctionsPhase overcurrent (1) 50/51    Earth fault / 50N/51N    Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF    Negative sequence / unbalance     Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS    Restricted earth fault differential REF  T Two-winding transformer differential Machine differential 87M  Directional phase overcurrent (1)    Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC   Directional active overpower P    Directional reactive overpower 32Q/40    Directional active underpower P  Field loss (underimpedance) 0   Loss of synchronization 78PS   v v Overspeed (2 set points) (2)  v v  Underspeed ( set points) (2) Voltage-restrained phase 50V/51V    overcurrent Underimpedance B   Inadvertent energization 50/27   Third harmonic 27TN/64G2   undervoltage / 00% stator earth fault G Overfluxing (V / Hz)    Positive sequence undervoltage 27D   Remanent undervoltage R   Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)     Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9    Neutral voltage displacement 9N    Negative sequence overvoltage     Overfrequency H    Underfrequency L    v Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v v v Temperature monitoring 38/49T 16 RTDs 16 RTDs 16 RTDs (16 RTDs) (3) v v Synchro-check (4)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.ANSI codeG40G82G87G88            v v              v v 16 RTDs]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplications1ProtectionfunctionsPhase overcurrent (1) 50/51    Earth fault / 50N/51N    Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF    Negative sequence / unbalance     Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS    Restricted earth fault differential REF  T Two-winding transformer differential Machine differential 87M  Directional phase overcurrent (1)    Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC   Directional active overpower P    Directional reactive overpower 32Q/40    Directional active underpower P  Field loss (underimpedance) 0   Loss of synchronization 78PS   v v Overspeed (2 set points) (2)  v v  Underspeed ( set points) (2) Voltage-restrained phase 50V/51V    overcurrent Underimpedance B   Inadvertent energization 50/27   Third harmonic 27TN/64G2   undervoltage / 00% stator earth fault G Overfluxing (V / Hz)    Positive sequence undervoltage 27D   Remanent undervoltage R   Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)     Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9    Neutral voltage displacement 9N    Negative sequence overvoltage     Overfrequency H    Underfrequency L    v Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v v v Temperature monitoring 38/49T 16 RTDs 16 RTDs 16 RTDs (16 RTDs) (3) v v Synchro-check (4)  The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.ANSI codeG40G82G87G88            v v              v v 16 RTDs]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="30">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplicationsbinternal generator fault protection bnetwork fault protection bdriving machine fault protection bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T) bvoltage and frequency monitoring. Protectionofaseparategenerator:SepamG40 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: b50G/51G b50G/51G. b59N.DE51750 DE51751Generatorprotection1Protectionofageneratorcoupledtoothergeneratorsortoanetwork: SepamG82 Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67. Control fault protection. Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: b50G/51G b00 % stator earth fault b64REF and 50G/51G b59N. 64G. b50N/51N.DE51752 DE51753 DE5175]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplicationsbinternal generator fault protection bnetwork fault protection bdriving machine fault protection bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T) bvoltage and frequency monitoring. Protectionofaseparategenerator:SepamG40 Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: b50G/51G b50G/51G. b59N.DE51750 DE51751Generatorprotection1Protectionofageneratorcoupledtoothergeneratorsortoanetwork: SepamG82 Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67. Control fault protection. Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: b50G/51G b00 % stator earth fault b64REF and 50G/51G b59N. 64G. b50N/51N.DE51752 DE51753 DE5175]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="31">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplications1DE51755Generatordifferentialprotection:SepamG87 Phase protection by self-balancing differential scheme: 50/51. Earth fault protection: 50G/51G.Generator differential protection: 87M. Earth fault protection: b50G/51G b59N.DE51756 DE51757Earth fault protection: b00 % stator earth fault 64G.DE51758Earth fault protection: b50N/51N.bgenerator and transformer protection against internal faults bnetwork fault protection bdriving machine fault protection bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T) bvoltage and frequency monitoring. Separategenerator-transformerunitprotection.SepamG40 Earth fault protection: b50G/51G.Note: monitoring of generator insulation must be ensured by another device.DE51759Generator-transformerunitprotectio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplications1DE51755Generatordifferentialprotection:SepamG87 Phase protection by self-balancing differential scheme: 50/51. Earth fault protection: 50G/51G.Generator differential protection: 87M. Earth fault protection: b50G/51G b59N.DE51756 DE51757Earth fault protection: b00 % stator earth fault 64G.DE51758Earth fault protection: b50N/51N.bgenerator and transformer protection against internal faults bnetwork fault protection bdriving machine fault protection bRTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T) bvoltage and frequency monitoring. Separategenerator-transformerunitprotection.SepamG40 Earth fault protection: b50G/51G.Note: monitoring of generator insulation must be ensured by another device.DE51759Generator-transformerunitprotectio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="32">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplicationsProtectionofagenerator-transformerunitcoupledtoothergeneratorsorto anetwork:SepamG82 Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67. Control fault protection. Internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63). bgenerator earth fault protection: bgenerator earth fault protection: 50G/51G 00 % stator earth fault G btransformer secondary earth fault btransformer secondary earth fault protection: protection: v50G/51G v50G/51G v59N. v59N.DE51760 DE517611Generator-transformerunitdifferentialprotection:SepamG88 Generator-transformer unit differential protection: 87T. bgenerator earth fault protection: bgenerator earth fault protection: 50G/51G 00% stator earth fault G btransformer secondary earth fault btransformer secondary earth fault protection: protection: v50G/51G. v50G/51G v64REF.DE51762 DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsGeneratorapplicationsProtectionofagenerator-transformerunitcoupledtoothergeneratorsorto anetwork:SepamG82 Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67. Control fault protection. Internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63). bgenerator earth fault protection: bgenerator earth fault protection: 50G/51G 00 % stator earth fault G btransformer secondary earth fault btransformer secondary earth fault protection: protection: v50G/51G v50G/51G v59N. v59N.DE51760 DE517611Generator-transformerunitdifferentialprotection:SepamG88 Generator-transformer unit differential protection: 87T. bgenerator earth fault protection: bgenerator earth fault protection: 50G/51G 00% stator earth fault G btransformer secondary earth fault btransformer secondary earth fault protection: protection: v50G/51G. v50G/51G v64REF.DE51762 DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="33">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsCapacitorapplications1ProtectionfunctionsPhase overcurrent (1) Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload for capacitors (1) Capacitor-bank unbalance Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (2)ANSI code50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS 51C 27D R  9 9N  H L 38/49TS20 S23   S40   C86              v  RTDs     The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) With optional MET148-2 temperature input module]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsCapacitorapplications1ProtectionfunctionsPhase overcurrent (1) Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload for capacitors (1) Capacitor-bank unbalance Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (2)ANSI code50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS 51C 27D R  9 9N  H L 38/49TS20 S23   S40   C86              v  RTDs     The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) With optional MET148-2 temperature input module]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="34">
		<raw><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsCapacitorapplicationsCapacitorbankprotectionProtection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) without voltage monitoring:SepamS20,S23 bcapacitor bank short-circuit protection.DE525881Protection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) with voltage monitoring: Sepam S40 or C86 bcapacitor bank short-circuit protection bvoltage and frequency monitoring boverload protection: ANSI 49RMS (Sepam C86 only).DE51765Protectionofadouble-starconnectedcapacitorbankwith1to4steps: Sepam C86 bcapacitor bank short-circuit protection bvoltage and frequency monitoring bspecific overload protection, self-adapted to the number of connected steps bunbalance protection: 51C.DE517]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Selection guide for all applicationsCapacitorapplicationsCapacitorbankprotectionProtection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) without voltage monitoring:SepamS20,S23 bcapacitor bank short-circuit protection.DE525881Protection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) with voltage monitoring: Sepam S40 or C86 bcapacitor bank short-circuit protection bvoltage and frequency monitoring boverload protection: ANSI 49RMS (Sepam C86 only).DE51765Protectionofadouble-starconnectedcapacitorbankwith1to4steps: Sepam C86 bcapacitor bank short-circuit protection bvoltage and frequency monitoring bspecific overload protection, self-adapted to the number of connected steps bunbalance protection: 51C.DE517]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="35">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationCommunicationnetworksand protocols1DE53103All Sepam relays communicate and can be integrated in a communication architecture. All Sepam information can be accessed remotely.TwotypesofcommunicationnetworkSepam relays can be connected to two types of networks, thus providing access to different types of information: ba supervisory local area network or S-LAN ban engineering local area network or E-LAN. Examples of communication architectures are presented on pages 36 and 37.Supervisory local area network (S-LAN)An S-LAN is used for supervision functions concerning the installation and the electric network. It can be used to connect a set of communicating devices using the same communication protocol to a centralized supervision system. Sepam can be connected to an S-LAN using one of the following communication protocols: bModbus RTU bModbus TCP/IP bDNP3 bIEC 60870-5-103 bIEC 61850Engineering local area network (E-LAN)Sepam connection to two communication networks (S-LAN and E-LAN).An E-LAN is intended for Sepam parameter-setting and operating functions. It can be used to connect a set of Sepam units to a PC running the SFT2841 software. In this configuration, the operator has remote and centralized access to all Sepam information, with no need to develop any special communication software. The operator can easily: bset up the Sepam general parameters and functions bcollect all Sepam operating and diagnostics information bmanage the protection system for the electric network bmonitor the status of the electric network brun diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electric network.CommunicationprotocolsModbus RTUModbus RTU is a data-transmission protocol, a de facto standard since 1979 widely used in industry and accepted by many communicating devices. For more information on the Modbus RTU protocol, visit www.modbus.org.Modbus TCP/IPThe Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol offers the same functions as Modbus RTU as well as compatibility with multi-master architecturesDNP3DNP3 is a data-transmission protocol specially suited to the needs of distributors for remote control/monitoring of substations in the electric network. For more information on the DNP3 protocol, visit www.dnp.org.IEC 60870-5-103IEC 60870-5-103 is an accompanying standard for the standards in the IEC 60870-5 series. It defines communication between protection devices and the various devices in a control system (supervisor or RTU) in a substation. For more information on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, visit www.iec.ch.IEC 61850The standards in the IEC 61850 series define a protocol for communication in electrical substations. The Ethernet-based protocol offers advanced characteristics and interoperability between multi-vendor devices. The Sepam relay handles the station bus, in compliance with standards IEC 618506, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4 and 8-1. For more information on the IEC 61850 protocol, visit www.iec.c]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationCommunicationnetworksand protocols1DE53103All Sepam relays communicate and can be integrated in a communication architecture. All Sepam information can be accessed remotely.TwotypesofcommunicationnetworkSepam relays can be connected to two types of networks, thus providing access to different types of information: ba supervisory local area network or S-LAN ban engineering local area network or E-LAN. Examples of communication architectures are presented on pages 36 and 37.Supervisory local area network (S-LAN)An S-LAN is used for supervision functions concerning the installation and the electric network. It can be used to connect a set of communicating devices using the same communication protocol to a centralized supervision system. Sepam can be connected to an S-LAN using one of the following communication protocols: bModbus RTU bModbus TCP/IP bDNP3 bIEC 60870-5-103 bIEC 61850Engineering local area network (E-LAN)Sepam connection to two communication networks (S-LAN and E-LAN).An E-LAN is intended for Sepam parameter-setting and operating functions. It can be used to connect a set of Sepam units to a PC running the SFT2841 software. In this configuration, the operator has remote and centralized access to all Sepam information, with no need to develop any special communication software. The operator can easily: bset up the Sepam general parameters and functions bcollect all Sepam operating and diagnostics information bmanage the protection system for the electric network bmonitor the status of the electric network brun diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electric network.CommunicationprotocolsModbus RTUModbus RTU is a data-transmission protocol, a de facto standard since 1979 widely used in industry and accepted by many communicating devices. For more information on the Modbus RTU protocol, visit www.modbus.org.Modbus TCP/IPThe Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol offers the same functions as Modbus RTU as well as compatibility with multi-master architecturesDNP3DNP3 is a data-transmission protocol specially suited to the needs of distributors for remote control/monitoring of substations in the electric network. For more information on the DNP3 protocol, visit www.dnp.org.IEC 60870-5-103IEC 60870-5-103 is an accompanying standard for the standards in the IEC 60870-5 series. It defines communication between protection devices and the various devices in a control system (supervisor or RTU) in a substation. For more information on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, visit www.iec.ch.IEC 61850The standards in the IEC 61850 series define a protocol for communication in electrical substations. The Ethernet-based protocol offers advanced characteristics and interoperability between multi-vendor devices. The Sepam relay handles the station bus, in compliance with standards IEC 618506, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4 and 8-1. For more information on the IEC 61850 protocol, visit www.iec.c]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="36">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationCommunicationnetworksand protocolsOtherprotocolsA gateway / protocol converter must be used to connect Sepam to a communication network based on other protocols. IEC 60870-5-101 The CN1000 gateway developed by EuroSystem enables Sepam connection to IEC 60870-5-101 networks. This gateway is quick and simple to implement using the supplied configuration software integrating all Sepam parameters. For more information on the CN1000 gateway, visit www.euro-system.fr]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationCommunicationnetworksand protocolsOtherprotocolsA gateway / protocol converter must be used to connect Sepam to a communication network based on other protocols. IEC 60870-5-101 The CN1000 gateway developed by EuroSystem enables Sepam connection to IEC 60870-5-101 networks. This gateway is quick and simple to implement using the supplied configuration software integrating all Sepam parameters. For more information on the CN1000 gateway, visit www.euro-system.fr]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="37">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationImplementation1PE00SepamcommunicationinterfacesAcompleterangeofaccessoriesSepam connects to a communication network via a communication interface. Selection of the interface depends on the communication architecture: bnumber of networks to be connected: v1 network, S-LAN or E-LAN v2 networks, S-LAN and E-LAN bcommunication protocol selected for the S-LAN: Modbus RTU, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 bnetwork physical interface: v2-wire or 4-wire RS485 vEthernet vfiber optic, with star or ring architecture. Sepam communication interfaces are presented in detail on page 179. Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 units can be directly connected to the Ethernet network via the ACE 850 communication interface. In this way they make full use of Ethernet network performance and all IEC 61850 functions. bCompatible communication protocols: vModbus TCP/IP vIEC 61850 bNetwork physical interface: v10 baseT /100 base TX (star architecture) v100 base FX (star architecture).DirectSepamconnectiontotheEthernetnetworkA complete range of Sepam communication interfacesEasyimplementationPE80033-36The communication interfaces are remote modules that are easy to install and connect. The SFT2841 software is used for complete setup of the communication interfaces: bprotocol selection and setup of the functions specific to each protocol bsetup of the physical interface. The SFT850 software is used for advanced configuration of the IEC 61850 protocol for both the ECI850 server and the ACE850 communication interface: bcomplete Sepam-configuration database (.icd) bprocessing of system-configuration files (.scd) bcreation and processing of ECI850 and ACE850 configuration files (.cid).Advanced configuration of IEC 61850 protocolSepam IEC 61850 serverThe entire Sepam range can be connected to an IEC 61850 system via the Sepam ECI850 server, representing the most economical solution. The server also ensures compatibility with the E-LAN network.PE0Ethernet gateways in a Modbus environmentSepam can be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP network in a totally transparent manner via the EGX100 gateway or the EGX400 server.EGX100gatewayThe EGX100 offers access to enhanced communication and multi-master architectures. It provides IP (Internet Protocol) connection for communication on all types of networks, notably intranets and internet.EGX400serverAccess to Sepam information via a web browser.In addition to Ethernet TCP/IP connection, the EGX400 offers a web server and HTML pages designed specially to present the essential Sepam information. This information may be accessed in clear text and at no risk on any PC connected to the intranet/internet and equipped with a web browse]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationImplementation1PE00SepamcommunicationinterfacesAcompleterangeofaccessoriesSepam connects to a communication network via a communication interface. Selection of the interface depends on the communication architecture: bnumber of networks to be connected: v1 network, S-LAN or E-LAN v2 networks, S-LAN and E-LAN bcommunication protocol selected for the S-LAN: Modbus RTU, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 bnetwork physical interface: v2-wire or 4-wire RS485 vEthernet vfiber optic, with star or ring architecture. Sepam communication interfaces are presented in detail on page 179. Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 units can be directly connected to the Ethernet network via the ACE 850 communication interface. In this way they make full use of Ethernet network performance and all IEC 61850 functions. bCompatible communication protocols: vModbus TCP/IP vIEC 61850 bNetwork physical interface: v10 baseT /100 base TX (star architecture) v100 base FX (star architecture).DirectSepamconnectiontotheEthernetnetworkA complete range of Sepam communication interfacesEasyimplementationPE80033-36The communication interfaces are remote modules that are easy to install and connect. The SFT2841 software is used for complete setup of the communication interfaces: bprotocol selection and setup of the functions specific to each protocol bsetup of the physical interface. The SFT850 software is used for advanced configuration of the IEC 61850 protocol for both the ECI850 server and the ACE850 communication interface: bcomplete Sepam-configuration database (.icd) bprocessing of system-configuration files (.scd) bcreation and processing of ECI850 and ACE850 configuration files (.cid).Advanced configuration of IEC 61850 protocolSepam IEC 61850 serverThe entire Sepam range can be connected to an IEC 61850 system via the Sepam ECI850 server, representing the most economical solution. The server also ensures compatibility with the E-LAN network.PE0Ethernet gateways in a Modbus environmentSepam can be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP network in a totally transparent manner via the EGX100 gateway or the EGX400 server.EGX100gatewayThe EGX100 offers access to enhanced communication and multi-master architectures. It provides IP (Internet Protocol) connection for communication on all types of networks, notably intranets and internet.EGX400serverAccess to Sepam information via a web browser.In addition to Ethernet TCP/IP connection, the EGX400 offers a web server and HTML pages designed specially to present the essential Sepam information. This information may be accessed in clear text and at no risk on any PC connected to the intranet/internet and equipped with a web browse]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="38">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationExamplesofarchitecturesSeven typical communication architectures are presented in the examples below. Each architecture is presented with: ba simplified diagram bthe characteristics of the implemented networks. The physical architecture of the communication networks and the connection to networks depends on the type of network (RS485 or fiber optic) and the communication interfaces used. Sepam communication interfaces are presented in detail on page 160.1Example 1. Single S-LAN networkS-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103 Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) or fiber opticDE53249 DE53251 DE53250Example 2. Single E-LAN networkE-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) or fiber opticExample 3. Parallel S-LAN and E-LAN networksS-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103 2-wire RS485 (twisted-pair) or fiber opticE-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU 2-wire RS485 (twisted-pai]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationExamplesofarchitecturesSeven typical communication architectures are presented in the examples below. Each architecture is presented with: ba simplified diagram bthe characteristics of the implemented networks. The physical architecture of the communication networks and the connection to networks depends on the type of network (RS485 or fiber optic) and the communication interfaces used. Sepam communication interfaces are presented in detail on page 160.1Example 1. Single S-LAN networkS-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103 Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) or fiber opticDE53249 DE53251 DE53250Example 2. Single E-LAN networkE-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) or fiber opticExample 3. Parallel S-LAN and E-LAN networksS-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103 2-wire RS485 (twisted-pair) or fiber opticE-LAN characteristicsProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU 2-wire RS485 (twisted-pai]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="39">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationExamplesofarchitecturesProtocol Physical mediumModbus RTU Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485)CharacteristicsofEthernetnetworkProtocol Physical medium Functions of EGX100 or EGX400 gateway Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or 100 Base Fx Modbus TCP / Modbus RTU conversion Multiplexing between S-LAN and E-LAN networksDE531061Example 4. S-LAN and E-LAN networks over Ethernet TCP/IPCharacteristics of Modbus network between Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)������������������������������ ��������������������������������� ������������������������������������������ ������������������������������������������ ������������������������������������������ ���������������������������Example 5. Two parallel S-LAN networks (Sepam series 80)S-LAN characteristicsProtocol Modbus RTU DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103 Physical medium Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) or fiber optic Note: the two communication ports on Sepam series 80 can also be used to create two redundant S-LANs connected to a single supervisor/RTU. An E-LAN can be added to the two S-LANs.DE531]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationExamplesofarchitecturesProtocol Physical mediumModbus RTU Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485)CharacteristicsofEthernetnetworkProtocol Physical medium Functions of EGX100 or EGX400 gateway Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or 100 Base Fx Modbus TCP / Modbus RTU conversion Multiplexing between S-LAN and E-LAN networksDE531061Example 4. S-LAN and E-LAN networks over Ethernet TCP/IPCharacteristics of Modbus network between Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAExample 5. Two parallel S-LAN networks (Sepam series 80)S-LAN characteristicsProtocol Modbus RTU DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103 Physical medium Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) or fiber optic Note: the two communication ports on Sepam series 80 can also be used to create two redundant S-LANs connected to a single supervisor/RTU. An E-LAN can be added to the two S-LANs.DE531]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="40">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationExamplesofarchitecturesExample 6: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IPProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) ���������������������������������������������DE53104Characteristics of Modbus network between Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)������������������������������ ������������������1CharacteristicsofEthernetnetworkProtocole Support physique Sepam ECI850 server functions IEC 61850 Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx Modbus RTU / IEC 61850 conversion Multiplexing between S-LAN and E-LAN networks������������������ ��������������� ������������������������������������������ ������������������������������������������ ������������������������������������������ ���������������������������Example 7: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IP (Sepam series 80)CharacteristicsofEthernetnetworkProtocol Physical medium IEC 61850 Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or 100 Base FxDE53105������������������������������ ������������������ ��������������� ������������������������������������������ ������������������������������������������������ ��������������������������������������������������������������� ������������������������ ������������������ ���������������Note: in order to ensure the guaranteed performance of the protection system when involving peer-to-peer communication through GOOSE messages, we stronly recommend : b to use fiber-optic links b to build a fault-tolerant backbone fiber-optic ring, as shown in the example b to use 61850 compatible managed switches.������������������������ ������������������������������������������ ��������������������������������� ������������������������������������������ ������������������������������������������ ��������������������������]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationExamplesofarchitecturesExample 6: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IPProtocol Physical medium Modbus RTU Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4wire RS485) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAADE53104Characteristics of Modbus network between Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA1CharacteristicsofEthernetnetworkProtocole Support physique Sepam ECI850 server functions IEC 61850 Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx Modbus RTU / IEC 61850 conversion Multiplexing between S-LAN and E-LAN networksAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAExample 7: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IP (Sepam series 80)CharacteristicsofEthernetnetworkProtocol Physical medium IEC 61850 Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or 100 Base FxDE53105AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAANote: in order to ensure the guaranteed performance of the protection system when involving peer-to-peer communication through GOOSE messages, we stronly recommend : b to use fiber-optic links b to build a fault-tolerant backbone fiber-optic ring, as shown in the example b to use 61850 compatible managed switches.AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="41">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata Selection table1Modbus RTUseries 20 series 40DatatransmittedfromSepamtothesupervisorMetering and diagnosisMeasurements Energy Network diagnosis Machine diagnosis Switchgear diagnosis Sepam diagnosis Logipam counters b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bseries 80DNP3series 20series 40series 80IEC 60870-5-103series 20 series 40series 80IEC 61850ECI850* series 40series 80b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bbbbb b (1) (1) (1) bb b (1) (1) (1) b b (1) (1) (1) b (1) (1) b bb b (1) (1) (1) b b (1) (1) (1) b (1) (1) b bbbbRemoteindicationsAlarms and internal status conditions Logic inputs Logic outputs Logic equationsb bb b b b b bb bb b bb bb b bb b b b(1) (1) (1)DatatransmittedfromthesupervisortoSepamb b b bPulse-type remote-control orders, in direct mode Pulse-type remote-control orders, in ���Select Before Operate��� mode Maintained remote-control orders (for Logipam) Remote control securityb bbb(1) (1)b bDataaccessibleviaspecialfunctionsTime-taggingb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bTime-tagged events Unsollicited events Time-setting and synchronizationRemotesettingSelection of the protectionsetting group Reading/writing of protection settings Reading of general parameters Reading/writing of analog output (MSA141)b b b bb b b bb b b bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbNetwork diagnosisTransfer of disturbancerecording data Tripping contexts Out-of-sync contextbb bb b b bbbb bbbb bbb (1) (1)b (1) (1) bMiscellaneousIdentification of SepambbbbbbbbbPeer-to-peerdataProtectionrelatedb b b bLogic discrimination Inter-tripping Fast load-sheddingUser-definedLogipam contacts * To or from the Sepam series 80, series 40 and series 20 units, depending on the case. (1) Depending on the modelling of the IEC 61850 logic nodes]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata Selection table1Modbus RTUseries 20 series 40DatatransmittedfromSepamtothesupervisorMetering and diagnosisMeasurements Energy Network diagnosis Machine diagnosis Switchgear diagnosis Sepam diagnosis Logipam counters b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bseries 80DNP3series 20series 40series 80IEC 60870-5-103series 20 series 40series 80IEC 61850ECI850* series 40series 80b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bbbbb b (1) (1) (1) bb b (1) (1) (1) b b (1) (1) (1) b (1) (1) b bb b (1) (1) (1) b b (1) (1) (1) b (1) (1) b bbbbRemoteindicationsAlarms and internal status conditions Logic inputs Logic outputs Logic equationsb bb b b b b bb bb b bb bb b bb b b b(1) (1) (1)DatatransmittedfromthesupervisortoSepamb b b bPulse-type remote-control orders, in direct mode Pulse-type remote-control orders, in AAASelect Before OperateAAA mode Maintained remote-control orders (for Logipam) Remote control securityb bbb(1) (1)b bDataaccessibleviaspecialfunctionsTime-taggingb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bTime-tagged events Unsollicited events Time-setting and synchronizationRemotesettingSelection of the protectionsetting group Reading/writing of protection settings Reading of general parameters Reading/writing of analog output (MSA141)b b b bb b b bb b b bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbNetwork diagnosisTransfer of disturbancerecording data Tripping contexts Out-of-sync contextbb bb b b bbbb bbbb bbb (1) (1)b (1) (1) bMiscellaneousIdentification of SepambbbbbbbbbPeer-to-peerdataProtectionrelatedb b b bLogic discrimination Inter-tripping Fast load-sheddingUser-definedLogipam contacts * To or from the Sepam series 80, series 40 and series 20 units, depending on the case. (1) Depending on the modelling of the IEC 61850 logic nodes]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="42">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata DescriptionDatatransmittedfromSepamtothe supervisorMetering and diagnosisThe values measured by Sepam that may be remote accessed are divided into the following categories: bmeasurements: currents, voltages, frequency, power, temperatures, etc. benergy: calculated or pulse-type energy counters bnetwork diagnosis: phase displacement, tripping currents, unbalance ratio, etc. bmachine diagnosis: temperature rise, motor starting time, remaining operating time before overload tripping, waiting time after tripping, etc. bswitchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, operating time and number of operations, circuit breaker charging time, etc. bSepam diagnosis: partial or major fault, etc. bLogipam counters.1RemoteindicationsThe logic-state information that may be remote accessed are divided into the following categories: balarms and internal status conditions bstatus of logic inputs bstatus of logic outputs bstatus of nine LEDs on the front panel of Sepam bstatus of logic-equation output bits. Alarmsandinternalstatusconditions The alarms and internal status conditions are remote indications (TS) pre-assigned to protection and control functions. Remote indications depend on the type of Sepam and can be re-assigned by Logipam. The remote indications that can be accessed via the communication link include: ball protection-function alarms bmonitoring-function alarms: CT or VT fault, control fault bSepam status data: vSepam not reset vremote setting inhibited, remote-control orders inhibited bstatus data on the following functions: vrecloser: in service / inhibited, reclosing in progress / successful, permanent trip vdisturbance recording: records inhibited / stored.Datatransmittedfromthesupervisorto SepamPulse-typeremote-controlordersPulse-type remote-control orders (TC) may be carried out in two modes (selected by parameter setting): bdirect mode bconfirmed SBO (select before operate) mode. Remote-control orders are pre-assigned to metering, protection and control functions and depend on the type of Sepam. They are used for the following, in particular: bto control breaking device opening and closing bto reset Sepam and initialize peak-demand measurements bto select the active group of settings by enabling group A or B bto inhibit or enable the following functions: recloser, thermal overload protection, disturbance recording. Remote-control orders can be re-assigned by Logipam.Remote-controlsecurityTransmission of Sepam series 80 remote controls and settings over a Modbus S-LAN can be password protecte]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata DescriptionDatatransmittedfromSepamtothe supervisorMetering and diagnosisThe values measured by Sepam that may be remote accessed are divided into the following categories: bmeasurements: currents, voltages, frequency, power, temperatures, etc. benergy: calculated or pulse-type energy counters bnetwork diagnosis: phase displacement, tripping currents, unbalance ratio, etc. bmachine diagnosis: temperature rise, motor starting time, remaining operating time before overload tripping, waiting time after tripping, etc. bswitchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, operating time and number of operations, circuit breaker charging time, etc. bSepam diagnosis: partial or major fault, etc. bLogipam counters.1RemoteindicationsThe logic-state information that may be remote accessed are divided into the following categories: balarms and internal status conditions bstatus of logic inputs bstatus of logic outputs bstatus of nine LEDs on the front panel of Sepam bstatus of logic-equation output bits. Alarmsandinternalstatusconditions The alarms and internal status conditions are remote indications (TS) pre-assigned to protection and control functions. Remote indications depend on the type of Sepam and can be re-assigned by Logipam. The remote indications that can be accessed via the communication link include: ball protection-function alarms bmonitoring-function alarms: CT or VT fault, control fault bSepam status data: vSepam not reset vremote setting inhibited, remote-control orders inhibited bstatus data on the following functions: vrecloser: in service / inhibited, reclosing in progress / successful, permanent trip vdisturbance recording: records inhibited / stored.Datatransmittedfromthesupervisorto SepamPulse-typeremote-controlordersPulse-type remote-control orders (TC) may be carried out in two modes (selected by parameter setting): bdirect mode bconfirmed SBO (select before operate) mode. Remote-control orders are pre-assigned to metering, protection and control functions and depend on the type of Sepam. They are used for the following, in particular: bto control breaking device opening and closing bto reset Sepam and initialize peak-demand measurements bto select the active group of settings by enabling group A or B bto inhibit or enable the following functions: recloser, thermal overload protection, disturbance recording. Remote-control orders can be re-assigned by Logipam.Remote-controlsecurityTransmission of Sepam series 80 remote controls and settings over a Modbus S-LAN can be password protecte]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="43">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata Description1IEC 61850 logical nodesSepam supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node depends on the applicationNodesL: system logical nodesPhysical device information Logical node zero Differential Directional overpower Directional underpower Rate of change of frequency Ground detector Motor restart inhibition Motor starting time supervision Sensitive directional earth fault Time overcurrent Overfrequency Overvoltage Protection trip conditioning Thermal overload Undercurrent Undervoltage Underfrequency Voltage controlled time overcurrent Volts per Hz Zero speed or underspeed Breaker failure Autoreclosing Synchronism-check or synchronizing Switch controller Generic process I/O Harmonics or interharmonics Metering Measurement Sequence and imbalance Metering statistics Circuit breaker Capacitor bankSepam series20Busbarb bSepam series20Othersb bSepam series40b bSepam series80b b bLPHD LLN0 PDIFP:logicalnodesforprotectionfunctionsb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bPDOP PDUP PFRC PHIZ PMRI PMSS PSDE PTOC PTOF PTOV PTRC PTTR PTUC PTUV PTUF PVOC PVPH PZSU RBRFR:logicalnodesforprotectionrelatedfunctionsRREC RSYN CSWI GGIO MHAIC:logicalnodesforcontrol GG:logicalnodesforgenericreferences M : logical nodes for metering and measurementMMTR MMXU MSQI MSTA XCBR ZCAPX:logicalnodesforswitchgear Z:logicalnodesforfurtherpowersystemequipment b GOOSE messages allows peer-to-peer communication between protection devices in a standardized way. Sepam series 80 with ACE850 communication module supports GOOSE messages for: bimproved system protection: vlogic discrimination vinter-tripping bimproved system control: vuser-defined Logipam contacts. High level of performance and security of these messages is ensured by: buse of fiber optic data link buse of IEC 61850 compatible managed switches Ethernet bselection of a fault-tolerant communication architecture.IEC 61850 GOOSE messag]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata Description1IEC 61850 logical nodesSepam supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node depends on the applicationNodesL: system logical nodesPhysical device information Logical node zero Differential Directional overpower Directional underpower Rate of change of frequency Ground detector Motor restart inhibition Motor starting time supervision Sensitive directional earth fault Time overcurrent Overfrequency Overvoltage Protection trip conditioning Thermal overload Undercurrent Undervoltage Underfrequency Voltage controlled time overcurrent Volts per Hz Zero speed or underspeed Breaker failure Autoreclosing Synchronism-check or synchronizing Switch controller Generic process I/O Harmonics or interharmonics Metering Measurement Sequence and imbalance Metering statistics Circuit breaker Capacitor bankSepam series20Busbarb bSepam series20Othersb bSepam series40b bSepam series80b b bLPHD LLN0 PDIFP:logicalnodesforprotectionfunctionsb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bPDOP PDUP PFRC PHIZ PMRI PMSS PSDE PTOC PTOF PTOV PTRC PTTR PTUC PTUV PTUF PVOC PVPH PZSU RBRFR:logicalnodesforprotectionrelatedfunctionsRREC RSYN CSWI GGIO MHAIC:logicalnodesforcontrol GG:logicalnodesforgenericreferences M : logical nodes for metering and measurementMMTR MMXU MSQI MSTA XCBR ZCAPX:logicalnodesforswitchgear Z:logicalnodesforfurtherpowersystemequipment b GOOSE messages allows peer-to-peer communication between protection devices in a standardized way. Sepam series 80 with ACE850 communication module supports GOOSE messages for: bimproved system protection: vlogic discrimination vinter-tripping bimproved system control: vuser-defined Logipam contacts. High level of performance and security of these messages is ensured by: buse of fiber optic data link buse of IEC 61850 compatible managed switches Ethernet bselection of a fault-tolerant communication architecture.IEC 61850 GOOSE messag]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="44">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata DescriptionTime-taggingTime-taggedeventsThe time-tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes (events) so that they can be accurately organized over time. Sepam systematically time-tags the following events: bstatus changes of all logic inputs bstatus changes of all remote indications (TS - alarms and internal status conditions). Each event is time-tagged to within one millisecond. The number of stacks of time-tagged events managed by Sepam on each communication port and the volume of each stack in terms of the numbers of events depend on the communication protocol used. Modbus RTU DNP3Number of event stacks for each Sepam communication port Number of events per stack    001IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 00 Depending on configuration Depending on configurationWhatever the communication protocol used, Modbus RTU, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 events may be used by a remote monitoring and control system for data logging and histories, for example.UnsollicitedeventsUsing the DNP3 and IEC 61850 protocols, Sepam can spontaneously transmit timetagged events to the supervisor. The transmission of unsollicited events must be activated during setup.Time-settingandsynchronizationThe Sepam internal clock manages the date and time. Time-setting is possible: bvia the Sepam display busing the SFT2841 software bvia the communication link. To ensure long-term time stability or to coordinate a number of devices, Sepam units can be synchronized: bby an external pulse to a dedicated logic input bvia the communication lin]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata DescriptionTime-taggingTime-taggedeventsThe time-tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes (events) so that they can be accurately organized over time. Sepam systematically time-tags the following events: bstatus changes of all logic inputs bstatus changes of all remote indications (TS - alarms and internal status conditions). Each event is time-tagged to within one millisecond. The number of stacks of time-tagged events managed by Sepam on each communication port and the volume of each stack in terms of the numbers of events depend on the communication protocol used. Modbus RTU DNP3Number of event stacks for each Sepam communication port Number of events per stack    001IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 00 Depending on configuration Depending on configurationWhatever the communication protocol used, Modbus RTU, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 events may be used by a remote monitoring and control system for data logging and histories, for example.UnsollicitedeventsUsing the DNP3 and IEC 61850 protocols, Sepam can spontaneously transmit timetagged events to the supervisor. The transmission of unsollicited events must be activated during setup.Time-settingandsynchronizationThe Sepam internal clock manages the date and time. Time-setting is possible: bvia the Sepam display busing the SFT2841 software bvia the communication link. To ensure long-term time stability or to coordinate a number of devices, Sepam units can be synchronized: bby an external pulse to a dedicated logic input bvia the communication lin]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="45">
		<raw><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata Description1RemotesettingSepamparameterandprotectionsettingsThe following remote-setting functions are available: bselection of the protection-setting group breading of general parameters breading of protection settings (remote reading) bwriting of protection settings (remote setting). The writing of protection settings may be inhibited by parameter setting.S-LAN and E-LAN networksThe availability of remote-setting functions over the S-LAN depends on the communication protocol used. All remote-setting functions are available over the E-LAN using the SFT2841 software.OtherdataaccessibleviaspecialfunctionsNetwork diagnosisThe network diagnostic information recorded in files by Sepam can also be transmitted over the communication link: bdisturbance-recording records in COMTRADE format btripping contexts bOut-of-sync context.Identification of SepamThe identification function enables the supervisor to clearly identify the device connected to the S-LAN, based on the following elements of information: bmanufacturer identification bSepam type. This function is available for all Sepam relays, whatever the protocol use]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[CommunicationAvailableSepamdata Description1RemotesettingSepamparameterandprotectionsettingsThe following remote-setting functions are available: bselection of the protection-setting group breading of general parameters breading of protection settings (remote reading) bwriting of protection settings (remote setting). The writing of protection settings may be inhibited by parameter setting.S-LAN and E-LAN networksThe availability of remote-setting functions over the S-LAN depends on the communication protocol used. All remote-setting functions are available over the E-LAN using the SFT2841 software.OtherdataaccessibleviaspecialfunctionsNetwork diagnosisThe network diagnostic information recorded in files by Sepam can also be transmitted over the communication link: bdisturbance-recording records in COMTRADE format btripping contexts bOut-of-sync context.Identification of SepamThe identification function enables the supervisor to clearly identify the device connected to the S-LAN, based on the following elements of information: bmanufacturer identification bSepam type. This function is available for all Sepam relays, whatever the protocol use]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="46">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="47">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures��� bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts���The CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochuresAAA bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contactsAAAThe CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="48">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Sepam��series��20�� and��Sepam��series��40Introduction7Sepam��series��20��-��Sepam��series��40����Selection��table��Sepam��series��20�� Selection��table��Sepam��series��40�� Sensor��inputs���� General��settings��Description Characteristics4848 49 50 51 5252 55Metering��and��diagnosis��Description Maincharacteristics Settingranges Description Description of predefined functions Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareProtection��5656 60 61 64 65 67Control��and��monitoring��64Characteristics��Presentation Dimensions Description Technical characteristics Environmental characteristics686868 71 72 74 75Base��unit��Connection��diagrams��Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Other phase current input connection schemes Other residual current input connection schemes Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40767676 77 78 79 81 82Base��unit����Voltage��inputs��81Sepamseries80 Additionalmodulesandaccessories Orderform85 139 217]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80SepamAAseriesAA20AA andAASepamAAseriesAA40Introduction7SepamAAseriesAA20AA-AASepamAAseriesAA40AAAASelectionAAtableAASepamAAseriesAA20AA SelectionAAtableAASepamAAseriesAA40AA SensorAAinputsAAAA GeneralAAsettingsAADescription Characteristics4848 49 50 51 5252 55MeteringAAandAAdiagnosisAADescription Maincharacteristics Settingranges Description Description of predefined functions Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareProtectionAA5656 60 61 64 65 67ControlAAandAAmonitoringAA64CharacteristicsAAPresentation Dimensions Description Technical characteristics Environmental characteristics686868 71 72 74 75BaseAAunitAAConnectionAAdiagramsAASepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Other phase current input connection schemes Other residual current input connection schemes Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40767676 77 78 79 81 82BaseAAunitAAAAVoltageAAinputsAA81Sepamseries80 Additionalmodulesandaccessories Orderform85 139 217]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="49">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Selectiontable Sepamseries20ProtectionPhase overcurrent Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Phase-to-phase undervoltage Phase-to-neutral undervoltage Phase-to-phase overvoltage Neutral voltage displacement Overfrequency Underfrequency Rate of change of frequency Recloser (4 cycles) Thermostat / Buchholz Temperature monitoring (8 RTDs)ANSI code50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS  48/51LR/14  27D/47 R  27S 9 9N H L R 9 26/63 38/49TSubstationS20 S23   TransformerT20 T23    MotorM20 BusbarB21 (3)B222                      vv v v v v b b v b b b b b v v b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b bMeteringPhase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0 Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, residual voltage V0 Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction Frequency Temperatureb bb bb bNetwork and machine diagnosisTripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time Number of starts before inhibitionb b bb b bb b b b b b bbbSwitchgeardiagnosisCumulative breaking current Trip circuit supervision Number of operations, operating time, charging timeb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b (2) bvvControlandmonitoringANSI code94/69   0 v b v bCircuit breaker / contactor control (1) Latching / acknowledgement Logic discrimination Switching of groups of settings AnnunciationbbAdditionalmodules8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module v v v 1 low level analog output - MSA141 module v v v v v Logic inputs/outputs v v v v v MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module Communication interface v v v v v ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP or ACE969FO bstandard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET148-2 input/output module options. (1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit. (2) Exclusive choice between logic discrimination and switching from one 2-relay group of settings to another 2-relay group. (3) Performs Sepam B20 functions.v v vv v]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Selectiontable Sepamseries20ProtectionPhase overcurrent Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Thermal overload Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Phase-to-phase undervoltage Phase-to-neutral undervoltage Phase-to-phase overvoltage Neutral voltage displacement Overfrequency Underfrequency Rate of change of frequency Recloser (4 cycles) Thermostat / Buchholz Temperature monitoring (8 RTDs)ANSI code50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF  49RMS  48/51LR/14  27D/47 R  27S 9 9N H L R 9 26/63 38/49TSubstationS20 S23   TransformerT20 T23    MotorM20 BusbarB21 (3)B222                      vv v v v v b b v b b b b b v v b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b bMeteringPhase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0 Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, residual voltage V0 Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction Frequency Temperatureb bb bb bNetwork and machine diagnosisTripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time Number of starts before inhibitionb b bb b bb b b b b b bbbSwitchgeardiagnosisCumulative breaking current Trip circuit supervision Number of operations, operating time, charging timeb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b(2) bb v v v b v b (2) bvvControlandmonitoringANSI code94/69   0 v b v bCircuit breaker / contactor control (1) Latching / acknowledgement Logic discrimination Switching of groups of settings AnnunciationbbAdditionalmodules8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module v v v 1 low level analog output - MSA141 module v v v v v Logic inputs/outputs v v v v v MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module Communication interface v v v v v ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP or ACE969FO bstandard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET148-2 input/output module options. (1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit. (2) Exclusive choice between logic discrimination and switching from one 2-relay group of settings to another 2-relay group. (3) Performs Sepam B20 functions.v v vv v]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="50">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Selectiontable Sepamseries40Phase overcurrentProtectionANSI code50/51 50V/51V 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF   67N/67NC P 32Q/40 49RMS  48/51LR/14  27D R 27/27S 9 9N  H L 9 38/49T 26/63SubstationS40   S41     S42      Transformer   T40T42     MotorM41                   vGeneratorG40    Voltage-restrained overcurrent Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Directional phase overcurrent Directional earth fault Directional active overpower Directional reactive overpower Thermal overload Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (3) Overvoltage(3) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Recloser (4 cycles) Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs) Thermostat / Buchholz Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0 Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, residual voltage V0 Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction Negative sequence voltage Vi Frequency Active, reactive and apparent power P, Q, S Peak demand power PM, QM, power factor Calculated active and reactive energy (��W.h, ��var.h) Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (��W.h, ��.varh) Temperature Tripping context Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii Phase displacement j0, j1, j2, j Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time, number of starts before inhibition  2      v      v      v      v v      v v b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b      vMeteringb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b v b b b v v v vb b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b bNetwork and machine diagnosisb b b b bb b b b bb b b b bCumulative breaking current Trip circuit supervision Number of operations, operating time, charging time CT / VT supervision Circuit breaker / contactor control (1) Latching / acknowledgement Logic discrimination Switching of groups of settings Annunciation Logic equation editorSwitchgeardiagnosisControlandmonitoringANSI code94/69   00FLb v v b b b v b b bb v v b b b v b b bb v v b b b v b b bb v v b b b v b b b v v v vb v v b b b v b b b v v v vb v v b b b v b b b v v v vAdditionalmodules8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module (2) 1 low level analog output - MSA141 module Logic inputs/outputs MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module Communication interface ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP, ACE969FO or ECI850v v vv v vv v vbstandard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET148-2 input/output module options. (1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit. (2) 2 modules possible. (3) Exclusive choice, phase-to-neutral voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for each of the 2 relays]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Selectiontable Sepamseries40Phase overcurrentProtectionANSI code50/51 50V/51V 50N/51N 50G/51G 0BF   67N/67NC P 32Q/40 49RMS  48/51LR/14  27D R 27/27S 9 9N  H L 9 38/49T 26/63SubstationS40   S41     S42      Transformer   T40T42     MotorM41                   vGeneratorG40    Voltage-restrained overcurrent Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault Breaker failure Negative sequence / unbalance Directional phase overcurrent Directional earth fault Directional active overpower Directional reactive overpower Thermal overload Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Positive sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (3) Overvoltage(3) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Recloser (4 cycles) Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs) Thermostat / Buchholz Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0 Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, residual voltage V0 Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction Negative sequence voltage Vi Frequency Active, reactive and apparent power P, Q, S Peak demand power PM, QM, power factor Calculated active and reactive energy (AAW.h, AAvar.h) Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (AAW.h, AA.varh) Temperature Tripping context Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii Phase displacement j0, j1, j2, j Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time, number of starts before inhibition  2      v      v      v      v v      v v b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b      vMeteringb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b v b b b v v v vb b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b bNetwork and machine diagnosisb b b b bb b b b bb b b b bCumulative breaking current Trip circuit supervision Number of operations, operating time, charging time CT / VT supervision Circuit breaker / contactor control (1) Latching / acknowledgement Logic discrimination Switching of groups of settings Annunciation Logic equation editorSwitchgeardiagnosisControlandmonitoringANSI code94/69   00FLb v v b b b v b b bb v v b b b v b b bb v v b b b v b b bb v v b b b v b b b v v v vb v v b b b v b b b v v v vb v v b b b v b b b v v v vAdditionalmodules8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module (2) 1 low level analog output - MSA141 module Logic inputs/outputs MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module Communication interface ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP, ACE969FO or ECI850v v vv v vv v vbstandard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET148-2 input/output module options. (1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit. (2) 2 modules possible. (3) Exclusive choice, phase-to-neutral voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for each of the 2 relays]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="51">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40SensorinputsEach Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors required for the application.DE51809Sepamseries20sensorinputsS20,S23Phase current inputs Residual current input Phase voltage inputs Residual voltage input Temperature inputs (on MET148-2 module)   0 0 0T20, T23, M20 B21,B22  0 0  0 0   02Sepam T20 sensor inputs.DE51810Sepamseries40sensorinputsS40,S41, S42Phase current inputs Residual current input Phase voltage inputs Residual voltage input Temperature inputs (on MET148-2 module)     0  0T40, T42, M41, G40    2x8 0Sepam M41 sensor inputs]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40SensorinputsEach Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors required for the application.DE51809Sepamseries20sensorinputsS20,S23Phase current inputs Residual current input Phase voltage inputs Residual voltage input Temperature inputs (on MET148-2 module)   0 0 0T20, T23, M20 B21,B22  0 0  0 0   02Sepam T20 sensor inputs.DE51810Sepamseries40sensorinputsS40,S41, S42Phase current inputs Residual current input Phase voltage inputs Residual voltage input Temperature inputs (on MET148-2 module)     0  0T40, T42, M41, G40    2x8 0Sepam M41 sensor inputs]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="52">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40GeneralsettingsThe general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software ���General Characteristics���, ���CT-VT Sensors��� and ���Particular characteristics��� tabs.GeneralsettingsIn Ib In0 Rated phase current (sensor primary current) Base current, according to rated power of equipment Rated residual currentSelection2 or 3 CT 1 A / 5 A 3 LPCTsSepamseries201 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 0.4 to 1.3 In See In rated phase current 2 A or 20 A rating 1 A to 6250 A According to current monitored and use of ACE990Sepamseries401 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 0.4 to 1.3 In See In rated phase current 2 A, 5 A or 20 A rating 1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In) 1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In/10) According to current monitored and use of ACE990Sum of 3 phase currents CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT Sensitivity x10 Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio 1/n must be such that 0 y n y 00)2Unp UnsRated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/3) Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage220 V to 250 kV 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 2 VTs: U21, U32 1 VT: V1 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V Uns/3 or Uns/3 50 Hz or 60 Hz 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn Increments active energy Increments reactive energy -220 V to 250 kV 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V Uns/3 or Uns/3 50 Hz or 60 Hz 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn 0.1 kW.h to 5 MW.h 0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.hUns0Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero sequence voltage Unp/3 Rated frequency Integration period (for demand current and peak demand current and power) Pulse-type accumulated energy meter(1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 315]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40GeneralsettingsThe general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software AAAGeneral CharacteristicsAAA, AAACT-VT SensorsAAA and AAAParticular characteristicsAAA tabs.GeneralsettingsIn Ib In0 Rated phase current (sensor primary current) Base current, according to rated power of equipment Rated residual currentSelection2 or 3 CT 1 A / 5 A 3 LPCTsSepamseries201 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 0.4 to 1.3 In See In rated phase current 2 A or 20 A rating 1 A to 6250 A According to current monitored and use of ACE990Sepamseries401 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 0.4 to 1.3 In See In rated phase current 2 A, 5 A or 20 A rating 1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In) 1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In/10) According to current monitored and use of ACE990Sum of 3 phase currents CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT Sensitivity x10 Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio 1/n must be such that 0 y n y 00)2Unp UnsRated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/3) Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage220 V to 250 kV 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 2 VTs: U21, U32 1 VT: V1 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V Uns/3 or Uns/3 50 Hz or 60 Hz 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn Increments active energy Increments reactive energy -220 V to 250 kV 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V 100, 110, 115, 120 V Uns/3 or Uns/3 50 Hz or 60 Hz 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn 0.1 kW.h to 5 MW.h 0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.hUns0Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero sequence voltage Unp/3 Rated frequency Integration period (for demand current and peak demand current and power) Pulse-type accumulated energy meter(1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 315]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="53">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMeteringSepam is a precision metering unit. All the metering and diagnosis data used for commissioning and required for the operation and maintenance of your equipment are available locally or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, etc.).Phasecurrent2RMS current for each phase, taking into account harmonics up to number 13. Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current: b1 A or 5 A current transformers bLPCT type current sensors.ResidualcurrentTwo residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and sensors connected to it: bresidual currents I0S, calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents bmeasured residual current I0. Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current: bCSH120 or CSH200 specific core balance CT bconventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer bany core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.DemandcurrentandpeakdemandcurrentsDemand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bdemand current is calculated over an adjustable period of 5 to 60 minutes bpeak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current drawn by peak loads. Peak demand currents may be cleared.Voltage and frequencyThe following measurements are available according to the voltage sensors connected: bphase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 bphase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13 bresidual voltage V0 bpositive sequence voltage Vd and negative sequence voltage Vi bfrequency f.PowerPowers are calculated according to the phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bactive power breactive power bapparent power bpower factor (cos j). Power calculations is based on the 2 wattmeter method. The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral is distributed.PeakdemandpowersThe greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same period as the demand current. The peak demand powers may be cleared.Energyb4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2 and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions b1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters for the acquisition of active or reactive energy pulses from external meters.TemperatureAccurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 modul]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMeteringSepam is a precision metering unit. All the metering and diagnosis data used for commissioning and required for the operation and maintenance of your equipment are available locally or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, etc.).Phasecurrent2RMS current for each phase, taking into account harmonics up to number 13. Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current: b1 A or 5 A current transformers bLPCT type current sensors.ResidualcurrentTwo residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and sensors connected to it: bresidual currents I0S, calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents bmeasured residual current I0. Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current: bCSH120 or CSH200 specific core balance CT bconventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer bany core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.DemandcurrentandpeakdemandcurrentsDemand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bdemand current is calculated over an adjustable period of 5 to 60 minutes bpeak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current drawn by peak loads. Peak demand currents may be cleared.Voltage and frequencyThe following measurements are available according to the voltage sensors connected: bphase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 bphase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13 bresidual voltage V0 bpositive sequence voltage Vd and negative sequence voltage Vi bfrequency f.PowerPowers are calculated according to the phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bactive power breactive power bapparent power bpower factor (cos j). Power calculations is based on the 2 wattmeter method. The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral is distributed.PeakdemandpowersThe greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same period as the demand current. The peak demand powers may be cleared.Energyb4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2 and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions b1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters for the acquisition of active or reactive energy pulses from external meters.TemperatureAccurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 modul]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="54">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMachine diagnosis assistanceNetwork diagnosis assistanceTrippingcontext TrippingcurrentSepam assists facility managers by providing: bdata on the operation of their machines bpredictive data to optimize process management buseful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation.Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes. Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V0, Vi, Vd, f, P and Q values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored. Storage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam trip order, to indicate fault current. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.ThermalcapacityusedEquivalent temperature buildup in the machine, calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.2Remainingoperatingtimebefore overloadtrippingNegative sequence / unbalance PhasedisplacementNegative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3, indicating the degree of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment. bphase displacement j1, j2, j3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1, V2, V3 respectively bphase displacement j0 between residual current and residual voltage.Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The time is used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time by deciding to: binterrupt according to procedures bcontinue operation with inhibition of thermal protection on overloaded machine.DisturbancerecordingWaitingtimeafteroverloadtrippingPredictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection by premature re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.Recording triggered by user-set events: ball sampled values of measured currents and voltages bstatus of all logic inputs and outputs blogic data: pick-up, ��� CharacteristicsNumber of recordings in COMTRADE format Total duration of a recordingSepamseries20  periods (1.72 s at 50 Hz, 1.43 s at 60 Hz)  Adjustable from 0 to 86 periods b currents or voltages b logic inputs b pick up b logic output O1.Sepamseries40Adjustable from 1 to 19 Adjustable from 1 to 10 s. The total of all the records plus one must not be more than 20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz  Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods b currents or voltages b logic inputs b pick up b logic outputs O1 to O4.Running hours counter / operating timeEquipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 Ib. Cumulative operating time is given in hours.Motor starting / overload current and timeA motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over 1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores: bmaximum current drawn by the motor bstarting / overload time. The values are stored until the following start / overload.Number of samples per period Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the event Recorded dataNumber of starts before inhibition/start inhibittimeIndicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection function and, if the number is zero, the waiting time before starting is allowed agai]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMachine diagnosis assistanceNetwork diagnosis assistanceTrippingcontext TrippingcurrentSepam assists facility managers by providing: bdata on the operation of their machines bpredictive data to optimize process management buseful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation.Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes. Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V0, Vi, Vd, f, P and Q values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored. Storage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam trip order, to indicate fault current. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.ThermalcapacityusedEquivalent temperature buildup in the machine, calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.2Remainingoperatingtimebefore overloadtrippingNegative sequence / unbalance PhasedisplacementNegative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3, indicating the degree of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment. bphase displacement j1, j2, j3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1, V2, V3 respectively bphase displacement j0 between residual current and residual voltage.Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The time is used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time by deciding to: binterrupt according to procedures bcontinue operation with inhibition of thermal protection on overloaded machine.DisturbancerecordingWaitingtimeafteroverloadtrippingPredictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection by premature re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.Recording triggered by user-set events: ball sampled values of measured currents and voltages bstatus of all logic inputs and outputs blogic data: pick-up, AAA CharacteristicsNumber of recordings in COMTRADE format Total duration of a recordingSepamseries20  periods (1.72 s at 50 Hz, 1.43 s at 60 Hz)  Adjustable from 0 to 86 periods b currents or voltages b logic inputs b pick up b logic output O1.Sepamseries40Adjustable from 1 to 19 Adjustable from 1 to 10 s. The total of all the records plus one must not be more than 20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz  Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods b currents or voltages b logic inputs b pick up b logic outputs O1 to O4.Running hours counter / operating timeEquipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 Ib. Cumulative operating time is given in hours.Motor starting / overload current and timeA motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over 1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores: bmaximum current drawn by the motor bstarting / overload time. The values are stored until the following start / overload.Number of samples per period Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the event Recorded dataNumber of starts before inhibition/start inhibittimeIndicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection function and, if the number is zero, the waiting time before starting is allowed agai]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="55">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis DescriptionSepamself-diagnosis2Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the self-tests is to: bdetect internal failures that may cause nuisance tripping or failed fault tripping bput Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted operation balert the facility manager of the need for maintenance operations.Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on: bmechanical condition of breaking device bSepam auxiliaries and assist them for preventive and curative switchgear maintenance actions. The data are to be compared to switchgear manufacturer data.SwitchgeardiagnosisassistanceANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervisionInternalfailureTwo categories of internal failures are monitored: bmajor failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe position). The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays are forced to drop out and the ���Watchdog��� output indicates Sepam shutdown bminor failures: downgraded Sepam operation. Sepam���s main functions are operational and equipment protection is ensured.Used to monitor the entire metering chain: bCT and VT sensors bconnection bSepam analog inputs. Monitoring includes: bconsistency checking of currents and voltages measured bacquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown contacts. In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping.ANSI 74 - Trip circuit supervisionDetectionofpluggedconnectors Configuration checkingThe system checks that the current or voltage sensors are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure. The system checks that the optional modules configured are present and working correctly. The absence or failure of a remote module is a minor failure, the absence or failure of a logic input/output module is a major failure.To detect trip circuit circuit failures, Sepam monitors: bshunt trip coil connection bmatching of breaking device open/closed position contacts bexecution of breaking device open and close orders. The trip circuit is only supervised when connected as shown below.DE51812Connection for shunt trip coil monitoring.DE51813Connection for undervoltage trip coil monitoring.CumulativebreakingcurrentSix cumulative currents are proposed to assess breaking device pole condition: btotal cumulative breaking current bcumulative breaking current between 0 and 2 In bcumulative breaking current between 2 In and 5 In bcumulative breaking current between 5 In and 10 In bcumulative breaking current between 10 In and 40 In bcumulative breaking current &amp;gt; 40 In. Each time the breaking device opens, the breaking current is added to the cumulative total and to the appropriate range of cumulative breaking current. Cumulative breaking current is given in (kA)��.Number of operationsCumulative number of opening operations performed by the breaking device.CircuitbreakeroperatingtimeandchargingtimeUsed to assess the condition of the breaking device operating mechanis]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis DescriptionSepamself-diagnosis2Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the self-tests is to: bdetect internal failures that may cause nuisance tripping or failed fault tripping bput Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted operation balert the facility manager of the need for maintenance operations.Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on: bmechanical condition of breaking device bSepam auxiliaries and assist them for preventive and curative switchgear maintenance actions. The data are to be compared to switchgear manufacturer data.SwitchgeardiagnosisassistanceANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervisionInternalfailureTwo categories of internal failures are monitored: bmajor failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe position). The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays are forced to drop out and the AAAWatchdogAAA output indicates Sepam shutdown bminor failures: downgraded Sepam operation. SepamAAAs main functions are operational and equipment protection is ensured.Used to monitor the entire metering chain: bCT and VT sensors bconnection bSepam analog inputs. Monitoring includes: bconsistency checking of currents and voltages measured bacquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown contacts. In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping.ANSI 74 - Trip circuit supervisionDetectionofpluggedconnectors Configuration checkingThe system checks that the current or voltage sensors are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure. The system checks that the optional modules configured are present and working correctly. The absence or failure of a remote module is a minor failure, the absence or failure of a logic input/output module is a major failure.To detect trip circuit circuit failures, Sepam monitors: bshunt trip coil connection bmatching of breaking device open/closed position contacts bexecution of breaking device open and close orders. The trip circuit is only supervised when connected as shown below.DE51812Connection for shunt trip coil monitoring.DE51813Connection for undervoltage trip coil monitoring.CumulativebreakingcurrentSix cumulative currents are proposed to assess breaking device pole condition: btotal cumulative breaking current bcumulative breaking current between 0 and 2 In bcumulative breaking current between 2 In and 5 In bcumulative breaking current between 5 In and 10 In bcumulative breaking current between 10 In and 40 In bcumulative breaking current &amp;gt; 40 In. Each time the breaking device opens, the breaking current is added to the cumulative total and to the appropriate range of cumulative breaking current. Cumulative breaking current is given in (kA)AA.Number of operationsCumulative number of opening operations performed by the breaking device.CircuitbreakeroperatingtimeandchargingtimeUsed to assess the condition of the breaking device operating mechanis]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="56">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis CharacteristicsFunctionsMeteringPhase current Residual current Demand current Peak demand current Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Sepam series 20 Frequency Sepam series 40 Active power Reactive power Apparent power Peak demand active power Peak demand reactive power Power factor Calculated active energy Calculated reactive energy Temperature Calculated MeasuredMeasurement range0.1 to 40 In (3) 0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 40 In 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vnp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.05 to 1,2 Vnp 50 ��5 Hz or 60 ��5 Hz 25 to 65 Hz 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MVA 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar -1 to +1 (CAP/IND) 0 to 2.1.10 MW.h 0 to 2.1.10 Mvar.h -30 to +200 ��C or -22 to +392 ��FAccuracy (1) Sepamseries20�� % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % ��0.05 Hz ��1 ��C from +20 to +140 ��CAccuracy (1) Sepamseries40��0.5 % �� % �� % ��0.5 % ��0.5 % ��0.5 % ��0.5 % �� % �� % �� % ��0.02 Hz �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % ��1 % ��1 digit ��1 % ��1 digit ��1 ��C from +20 to +140 ��C b b bSavingv b b2b b b b b v v v v b v v vNetwork diagnosis assistanceTripping context Phase tripping current Earth fault tripping current Negative sequence / unbalance Phase displacement j0 (between V0 and I0) Phase displacement j1, j2, j (between V and I) 0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 20 In0 10 to 500 % of Ib 0 to 359�� 0 to 359�� �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % ��2�� ��2��Machine operating assistanceThermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current Starting time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time Cooling time constant 0 to 00 % (100 % for I phase = Ib) 0 to 999 mn 0 to 999 mn 0 to  hours 1.2 Ib to 24 In 0 to 00 s 0 to 0 0 to 0 mn  to 00 mn �� % �� mn �� mn ��1 % or ��0.5 h �� % ��00 ms  �� mn �� % �� mn �� mn ��1 % or ��0.5 h �� % ��00 ms  �� mn �� mn ��0 %  �� ms ��0.5 s b vv v vSwitchgeardiagnosisassistanceCumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA�� ��0 % Number of operations 0 to 4.109  Operating time 0 to 00 ms �� ms Charging time  to 0 s ��0.5 s b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup. vsaved in the event of auxiliary supply outage. (1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at In or Unp, cosj &amp;gt; 0.8. (2) Sn: apparent power, = 3.Unp.In. (3) Measurement up to 0.02 In for information purpose. v v v]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Metering and diagnosis CharacteristicsFunctionsMeteringPhase current Residual current Demand current Peak demand current Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Sepam series 20 Frequency Sepam series 40 Active power Reactive power Apparent power Peak demand active power Peak demand reactive power Power factor Calculated active energy Calculated reactive energy Temperature Calculated MeasuredMeasurement range0.1 to 40 In (3) 0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 40 In 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vnp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.05 to 1,2 Vnp 50 AA5 Hz or 60 AA5 Hz 25 to 65 Hz 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MVA 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar -1 to +1 (CAP/IND) 0 to 2.1.10 MW.h 0 to 2.1.10 Mvar.h -30 to +200 AAC or -22 to +392 AAFAccuracy (1) Sepamseries20AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA0.05 Hz AA1 AAC from +20 to +140 AACAccuracy (1) Sepamseries40AA0.5 % AA % AA % AA0.5 % AA0.5 % AA0.5 % AA0.5 % AA % AA % AA % AA0.02 Hz AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA1 % AA1 digit AA1 % AA1 digit AA1 AAC from +20 to +140 AAC b b bSavingv b b2b b b b b v v v v b v v vNetwork diagnosis assistanceTripping context Phase tripping current Earth fault tripping current Negative sequence / unbalance Phase displacement j0 (between V0 and I0) Phase displacement j1, j2, j (between V and I) 0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 20 In0 10 to 500 % of Ib 0 to 359AA 0 to 359AA AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA2AA AA2AAMachine operating assistanceThermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current Starting time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time Cooling time constant 0 to 00 % (100 % for I phase = Ib) 0 to 999 mn 0 to 999 mn 0 to  hours 1.2 Ib to 24 In 0 to 00 s 0 to 0 0 to 0 mn  to 00 mn AA % AA mn AA mn AA1 % or AA0.5 h AA % AA00 ms  AA mn AA % AA mn AA mn AA1 % or AA0.5 h AA % AA00 ms  AA mn AA mn AA0 %  AA ms AA0.5 s b vv v vSwitchgeardiagnosisassistanceCumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kAAA AA0 % Number of operations 0 to 4.109  Operating time 0 to 00 ms AA ms Charging time  to 0 s AA0.5 s b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup. vsaved in the event of auxiliary supply outage. (1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at In or Unp, cosj &amp;gt; 0.8. (2) Sn: apparent power, = 3.Unp.In. (3) Measurement up to 0.02 In for information purpose. v v v]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="57">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionCurrentprotectionfunctionsANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, sensitive to the highest phase current measured. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith or without timer hold With Sepam series 40, tripping can be confirmed or unconfirmed, according to parameter setting: bunconfirmed tripping: standard btripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant 2phase short-circuits btripping confirmed by undervoltage protection (ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase shortcircuits in networks with low short-circuit power.ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance2Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative sequence current: bsensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines bprotection of equipment against temperature build-up, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current unbalance. Characteristics bSepam series 20: v1 definite time (DT) curve v1 specific Schneider IDMT curve. bSepam series 40: v1 definite time (DT) curve v7 IDMT curves: 3 IEC curves, 3 IEEE curves and 1 specific Schneider curve.ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overloadANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultEarth fault protection based on measured or calculated residual current values: bANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 phase current sensors bANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by a specific sensor. Characteristics b2 groups of settings bDefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith or without timer hold bsecond harmonic restraint to ensure stability during transformer energizing, activated by parameter setting.Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on machines (transformers, motors or generators). The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which takes into account: bcurrent RMS values bambient temperature bnegative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise. The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for process control assistance. The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when required by process control conditions. Characteristics b2 groups of settings b1 adjustable alarm set point b1 adjustable tripping set point badjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics to fit manufacturer���s thermal withstand curves bequipment heating and cooling time constants. With Sepam series 40, the cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement of the equipment temperature by a sensor.ANSI 50BF - Breaker failureIf a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order, as detected by the non-extinction of the fault current, this backup protection sends a tripping order to the upstream or adjacent breakers.RecloserANSI 79Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semipermanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the breaking device after the time delay required to restore the insulation has elapsed. Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter setting. Characteristics b1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable dead time badjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time until recloser ready time delays bcycle activation linked to instantaneous or time-delayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting binhibition/locking out of recloser by logic inpu]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionCurrentprotectionfunctionsANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, sensitive to the highest phase current measured. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith or without timer hold With Sepam series 40, tripping can be confirmed or unconfirmed, according to parameter setting: bunconfirmed tripping: standard btripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant 2phase short-circuits btripping confirmed by undervoltage protection (ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase shortcircuits in networks with low short-circuit power.ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance2Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative sequence current: bsensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines bprotection of equipment against temperature build-up, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current unbalance. Characteristics bSepam series 20: v1 definite time (DT) curve v1 specific Schneider IDMT curve. bSepam series 40: v1 definite time (DT) curve v7 IDMT curves: 3 IEC curves, 3 IEEE curves and 1 specific Schneider curve.ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overloadANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultEarth fault protection based on measured or calculated residual current values: bANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 phase current sensors bANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by a specific sensor. Characteristics b2 groups of settings bDefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith or without timer hold bsecond harmonic restraint to ensure stability during transformer energizing, activated by parameter setting.Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on machines (transformers, motors or generators). The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which takes into account: bcurrent RMS values bambient temperature bnegative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise. The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for process control assistance. The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when required by process control conditions. Characteristics b2 groups of settings b1 adjustable alarm set point b1 adjustable tripping set point badjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics to fit manufacturerAAAs thermal withstand curves bequipment heating and cooling time constants. With Sepam series 40, the cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement of the equipment temperature by a sensor.ANSI 50BF - Breaker failureIf a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order, as detected by the non-extinction of the fault current, this backup protection sends a tripping order to the upstream or adjacent breakers.RecloserANSI 79Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semipermanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the breaking device after the time delay required to restore the insulation has elapsed. Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter setting. Characteristics b1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable dead time badjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time until recloser ready time delays bcycle activation linked to instantaneous or time-delayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting binhibition/locking out of recloser by logic inpu]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="58">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionDirectionalcurrentprotectionANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. It comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bchoice of tripping direction bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization voltage at the time of the fault bwith or without timer hold.2ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth faultDE52062Earth fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. 3 types of operation: btype 1: the protection function uses the projection of the I0 vector btype 2: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude with half-plane tripping zone btype 3: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude with angular sector tripping zone ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 Directional earth fault protection for impedant, isolated or compensated neutral systems, based on the projection of measured residual current. Type1characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bcharacteristic projection angle bno timer hold bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in compensated neutral systems. ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly earthed systems, based on measured or calculated residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. Type2characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bchoice of tripping direction bwith or without timer hold.Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection (characteristic angle q0 ��� 0��).Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection (characteristic angle q0 ��� 0��).DE52063ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection (angular sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. This protectionfunction complies with the Enel DK5600 specification. Type3characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bno timer holdDE52064Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protectio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionDirectionalcurrentprotectionANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. It comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bchoice of tripping direction bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization voltage at the time of the fault bwith or without timer hold.2ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth faultDE52062Earth fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. 3 types of operation: btype 1: the protection function uses the projection of the I0 vector btype 2: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude with half-plane tripping zone btype 3: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude with angular sector tripping zone ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 Directional earth fault protection for impedant, isolated or compensated neutral systems, based on the projection of measured residual current. Type1characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bcharacteristic projection angle bno timer hold bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in compensated neutral systems. ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly earthed systems, based on measured or calculated residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. Type2characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bchoice of tripping direction bwith or without timer hold.Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection (characteristic angle q0 AAA 0AA).Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection (characteristic angle q0 AAA 0AA).DE52063ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection (angular sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. This protectionfunction complies with the Enel DK5600 specification. Type3characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bno timer holdDE52064Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protectio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="59">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionDirectionalpowerprotection Machine protection functions functionsANSI 32P - Directional active overpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated active power, for the following applications: bactive overpower protection to detect overloads and allow load shedding breverse active power protection: vagainst generators running like motors when the generators consume active power vagainst motors running like generators when the motors supply active power.ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent2Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection of motor no-load operation. It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input.ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Locked rotor / excessive starting timeANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated reactive power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: breactive overpower protection for motors which consume more reactive power with field loss breverse reactive overpower protection for generators which consume reactive power with field loss.Protection of motors against overheating caused by: bexcessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient supply voltage. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be considered as starting. blocked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher): vin normal operation, after a normal start vdirectly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by the underspeed function.ANSI 66 - Starts per hourProtection against motor overheating caused by: btoo frequent starts: motor energizing is inhibited when the maximum allowable number of starts is reached, after counting of: vstarts per hour (or adjustable period) vconsecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start) bstarts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only allowed after an adjustable waiting time.ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators. The current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator which cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current. Characteristics binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith or without timer hold.ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/BuchholzProtection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer.ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoringProtection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors: btransformer: protection of primary and secondary windings bmotor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings. Characteristics bSepam series 20: 8 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs bSepam series 40: 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs b2 adjustable independent set points for each RTD (alarm and trip]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionDirectionalpowerprotection Machine protection functions functionsANSI 32P - Directional active overpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated active power, for the following applications: bactive overpower protection to detect overloads and allow load shedding breverse active power protection: vagainst generators running like motors when the generators consume active power vagainst motors running like generators when the motors supply active power.ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent2Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection of motor no-load operation. It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input.ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Locked rotor / excessive starting timeANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated reactive power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: breactive overpower protection for motors which consume more reactive power with field loss breverse reactive overpower protection for generators which consume reactive power with field loss.Protection of motors against overheating caused by: bexcessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient supply voltage. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be considered as starting. blocked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher): vin normal operation, after a normal start vdirectly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by the underspeed function.ANSI 66 - Starts per hourProtection against motor overheating caused by: btoo frequent starts: motor energizing is inhibited when the maximum allowable number of starts is reached, after counting of: vstarts per hour (or adjustable period) vconsecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start) bstarts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only allowed after an adjustable waiting time.ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators. The current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator which cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current. Characteristics binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) bwith or without timer hold.ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/BuchholzProtection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer.ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoringProtection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors: btransformer: protection of primary and secondary windings bmotor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings. Characteristics bSepam series 20: 8 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs bSepam series 40: 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs b2 adjustable independent set points for each RTD (alarm and trip]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="60">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionVoltage protection functionsANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltageProtection of motors against faulty operation due to insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and detection of reverse rotation direction.FrequencyprotectionfunctionsANSI 81H - OverfrequencyDetection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality.ANSI 81L - UnderfrequencyANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltageProtection used to check that remanent voltage sustained by rotating machines has been cleared before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical transients.Detection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding. Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting.2ANSI 27 - UndervoltageANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequencyProtection of motors against voltage sags or detection of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic load shedding or source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase voltage (Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40) or phase-to-neutral voltage (Sepem series 40 only), each voltage being monitored separately.Protection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift protection function. Disconnection In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the ���rate of change of frequency��� protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to: bprotect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization bavoid supplying loads outside the installation. Load shedding The ���rate of change of frequency��� protection function is used for load shedding in combination with the underfrequency protection to: beither accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload bor inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that should not be solved by shedding.ANSI 59 - OvervoltageDetection of abnormally high network voltage or checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored separately.ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacementDetection of insulation faults by measuring residual voltage in isolated neutral systems.ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltageProtection against phase unbalance resulting from phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault, detected by the measurement of negative sequence voltage]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection DescriptionVoltage protection functionsANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltageProtection of motors against faulty operation due to insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and detection of reverse rotation direction.FrequencyprotectionfunctionsANSI 81H - OverfrequencyDetection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality.ANSI 81L - UnderfrequencyANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltageProtection used to check that remanent voltage sustained by rotating machines has been cleared before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical transients.Detection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding. Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting.2ANSI 27 - UndervoltageANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequencyProtection of motors against voltage sags or detection of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic load shedding or source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase voltage (Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40) or phase-to-neutral voltage (Sepem series 40 only), each voltage being monitored separately.Protection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift protection function. Disconnection In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the AAArate of change of frequencyAAA protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to: bprotect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization bavoid supplying loads outside the installation. Load shedding The AAArate of change of frequencyAAA protection function is used for load shedding in combination with the underfrequency protection to: beither accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload bor inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that should not be solved by shedding.ANSI 59 - OvervoltageDetection of abnormally high network voltage or checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored separately.ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacementDetection of insulation faults by measuring residual voltage in isolated neutral systems.ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltageProtection against phase unbalance resulting from phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault, detected by the measurement of negative sequence voltage]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="61">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Main characteristicsMultiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications: bIEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT) bIEEE curves (MI, VI, EI) busual curves (UIT, RI, IAC). The curve equations are given page 102.Current IDMT tripping curves2Setting of IDMT tripping curves,  time delay T or TMS factorThe time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves) may be set as follows: btime T, operating time at 10 x Is bTMS factor, factor shown as T/b (see curve equation page 102).DE50275TimerholdThe adjustable timer hold T1 is used for: bdetection of restriking faults (DT curve) bcoordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve). Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary.2groupsofsettingsPhase-to-phaseandphase-to-earthshort-circuitprotectionEach unit has 2 groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network configuration. The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the communication link. Example of use: normal / backup mode network bgroup A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the utility bgroup B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a backup generator.Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.ThermaloverloadformachinesEach unit has 2 groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating modes. Examplesofuse: btransformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to transformer ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or ONAF) bmotors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors.SummarytableCharacteristics2 groups of settings A and B 2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2 IEC IDMT curves IEEE IDMT curves Usual IDMT curves Timer holdProtectionfunctions50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC 49RMS Machine 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Main characteristicsMultiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications: bIEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT) bIEEE curves (MI, VI, EI) busual curves (UIT, RI, IAC). The curve equations are given page 102.Current IDMT tripping curves2Setting of IDMT tripping curves,  time delay T or TMS factorThe time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves) may be set as follows: btime T, operating time at 10 x Is bTMS factor, factor shown as T/b (see curve equation page 102).DE50275TimerholdThe adjustable timer hold T1 is used for: bdetection of restriking faults (DT curve) bcoordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve). Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary.2groupsofsettingsPhase-to-phaseandphase-to-earthshort-circuitprotectionEach unit has 2 groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network configuration. The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the communication link. Example of use: normal / backup mode network bgroup A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the utility bgroup B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a backup generator.Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.ThermaloverloadformachinesEach unit has 2 groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating modes. Examplesofuse: btransformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to transformer ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or ONAF) bmotors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors.SummarytableCharacteristics2 groups of settings A and B 2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2 IEC IDMT curves IEEE IDMT curves Usual IDMT curves Timer holdProtectionfunctions50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC 49RMS Machine 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="62">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Setting rangesFunctionsANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltageSettings to 00 % of UnpTimedelays0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage to 0 % of UnpANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage to 00 % of UnpANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage5 to 100 % of VnpANSI 32P - Directional active overpower1 to 120 % of Sn(3)2ANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpower5 to 120 % of Sn (3)ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent0.15 to 1 IbANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)Alarm and trip set points Definite time IDMT Tripping curve 0 to 180 ��C (or 32 to 356 ��F) 0.1 to 5 Ib 0.1 to 0.5 Ib (Schneider Electric) 0.1 to 1 Ib (CEI, IEEE) Schneider Electric CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C (2) IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) (2)  to 0 % of Unp 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 1 sANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalanceANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage0.05 s to 300 s ST starting time LT and LTS time delays 0.5 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 48/51LR/14 - Excessive starting time, locked rotor0.5 Ib to 5 IbANSI 49RMS - Thermal overloadAccounting for negative sequence component Time constant Heating Cooling Alarm and tripping set points Cold curve modification factor Switching of thermal settings conditions Maximum equipment temperatureRate1andRate20 - 2,25 - 4,5 - 9 Sepam serie 20 T1: 1 to 120 mn Sepam serie 40 T1: 1 to 600 mn Sepam serie 20 T2: 1 to 600 mn Sepam serie 40 T2: 5 to 600 mn 50 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity 0 to 00 % By logic input By Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib 60 to 200 ��C (140 ��F to 392 ��F) Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMTANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentTripping curve Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.1 to 24 In 0.1 to 2.4 In Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase-to-phase undervoltage 0.2 to 2 In 0.05 s to 300 sIs set point Timer hold Confirmation(2)Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 50BF - Breaker failurePresence of current Operating time (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is. (2) Sepam series 40 only. (3) Sn =3.In.Un]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Setting rangesFunctionsANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltageSettings to 00 % of UnpTimedelays0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage to 0 % of UnpANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage to 00 % of UnpANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage5 to 100 % of VnpANSI 32P - Directional active overpower1 to 120 % of Sn(3)2ANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpower5 to 120 % of Sn (3)ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent0.15 to 1 IbANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)Alarm and trip set points Definite time IDMT Tripping curve 0 to 180 AAC (or 32 to 356 AAF) 0.1 to 5 Ib 0.1 to 0.5 Ib (Schneider Electric) 0.1 to 1 Ib (CEI, IEEE) Schneider Electric CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C (2) IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) (2)  to 0 % of Unp 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 1 sANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalanceANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage0.05 s to 300 s ST starting time LT and LTS time delays 0.5 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 48/51LR/14 - Excessive starting time, locked rotor0.5 Ib to 5 IbANSI 49RMS - Thermal overloadAccounting for negative sequence component Time constant Heating Cooling Alarm and tripping set points Cold curve modification factor Switching of thermal settings conditions Maximum equipment temperatureRate1andRate20 - 2,25 - 4,5 - 9 Sepam serie 20 T1: 1 to 120 mn Sepam serie 40 T1: 1 to 600 mn Sepam serie 20 T2: 1 to 600 mn Sepam serie 40 T2: 5 to 600 mn 50 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity 0 to 00 % By logic input By Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib 60 to 200 AAC (140 AAF to 392 AAF) Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMTANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentTripping curve Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.1 to 24 In 0.1 to 2.4 In Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase-to-phase undervoltage 0.2 to 2 In 0.05 s to 300 sIs set point Timer hold Confirmation(2)Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 50BF - Breaker failurePresence of current Operating time (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is. (2) Sepam series 40 only. (3) Sn =3.In.Un]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="63">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Setting rangesFunctionsTripping curveANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault / Sensitive earth faultTrippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT(1) RI CEI: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.1 to 15 In0 0.1 to 1 In0 Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.5 to 24 In 0.5 to 2,4 In Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMTSettingsTimedelays2Is0 set point Timer holdInst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentTripping curve Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMTIs set point Timer holdInst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 59 - OvervoltagePhase-to-phase0 to 0 % of UnpPhase-to-neutral(2)50 to 150 % of VnpANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement to 0 % of UnpANSI 66 - Starts per hourStarts per period Consecutive starts  to 0  to 0 Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.1 to 24 In 0.1 to 2,4 In Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) 30��, 45��, 60�� Period Time between starts Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMT  to  hr 0 to 90 mnANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrentTripping curveIs set point Timer hold Characteristic angle (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is. (2) Sepam series 40 only.Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Setting rangesFunctionsTripping curveANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault / Sensitive earth faultTrippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT(1) RI CEI: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.1 to 15 In0 0.1 to 1 In0 Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.5 to 24 In 0.5 to 2,4 In Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMTSettingsTimedelays2Is0 set point Timer holdInst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentTripping curve Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMTIs set point Timer holdInst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 s 0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 59 - OvervoltagePhase-to-phase0 to 0 % of UnpPhase-to-neutral(2)50 to 150 % of VnpANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement to 0 % of UnpANSI 66 - Starts per hourStarts per period Consecutive starts  to 0  to 0 Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.1 to 24 In 0.1 to 2,4 In Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) 30AA, 45AA, 60AA Period Time between starts Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMT  to  hr 0 to 90 mnANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrentTripping curveIs set point Timer hold Characteristic angle (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is. (2) Sepam series 40 only.Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="64">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Setting rangesFunctionsANSI 67N/67NC type 1 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 projectionCharacteristic angle Is0 set point Vs0 set point Memory time -45��, 0��, 15��, 30��, 45��, 60��, 90�� 0.1 to 15 In0  to 0 % of Un T0mem time V0mem validity set point -45��, 0��, 15��, 30��, 45��, 60��, 90�� Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.5 to 15 In0 0.5 to 1 In0  to 0 % of Unp Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) Definite time 0 ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0 ; 2 to 80 % of UnpSettingsTimedelaysInst ; 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 67N/67NC type 2 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 magnitude with half-plan tripping zoneCharacteristic angle Tripping curve Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMT2Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sIs0 set point Vs0 set point Timer holdANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 magnitude with angular sector tripping zoneAngle at start of tripping zone 0�� to 359�� Angle at end of tripping zone 0�� to 359�� Is0 set point CSH core balance CT 0.1 A to 30 A (2 A rating) 1 A CT 0.05 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) (sensitive, In0 = 0.1 CT In) Core balance CT + ACE990 0.05 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) (range 1) Vs0 set point Calculated V0 (sum of 3 voltages) Measured V0 (external VT) Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Definite timeInst ; 0.05 to 300 s to 0 % of Unp 0.6 to 80 % of Unp 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s Inst ; 0.15 s to 300 sANSI 81H - Overfrequency ANSI 81L - Underfrequency50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz 45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz 0.1 to 10 Hz/sANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency(1) Tripping as of 1.2 I]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Protection Setting rangesFunctionsANSI 67N/67NC type 1 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 projectionCharacteristic angle Is0 set point Vs0 set point Memory time -45AA, 0AA, 15AA, 30AA, 45AA, 60AA, 90AA 0.1 to 15 In0  to 0 % of Un T0mem time V0mem validity set point -45AA, 0AA, 15AA, 30AA, 45AA, 60AA, 90AA Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI CEI: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI 0.5 to 15 In0 0.5 to 1 In0  to 0 % of Unp Definite time (DT ; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) Definite time 0 ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0 ; 2 to 80 % of UnpSettingsTimedelaysInst ; 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 67N/67NC type 2 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 magnitude with half-plan tripping zoneCharacteristic angle Tripping curve Timerhold DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT Definite time IDMT2Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sIs0 set point Vs0 set point Timer holdANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 magnitude with angular sector tripping zoneAngle at start of tripping zone 0AA to 359AA Angle at end of tripping zone 0AA to 359AA Is0 set point CSH core balance CT 0.1 A to 30 A (2 A rating) 1 A CT 0.05 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) (sensitive, In0 = 0.1 CT In) Core balance CT + ACE990 0.05 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) (range 1) Vs0 set point Calculated V0 (sum of 3 voltages) Measured V0 (external VT) Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Definite timeInst ; 0.05 to 300 s to 0 % of Unp 0.6 to 80 % of Unp 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s Inst ; 0.15 s to 300 sANSI 81H - Overfrequency ANSI 81L - Underfrequency50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz 45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz 0.1 to 10 Hz/sANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency(1) Tripping as of 1.2 I]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="65">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Description2Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation: bthe main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned. bthe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: vcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages vlogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions (Sepam series 40 only) vcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only). The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases: bacquisition of input data: vresults of protection function processing vexternal logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input / output module vremote control orders (TC) received via the Modbus communication link bactual processing of the control and monitoring function butilization of the processing results: vactivation of output relays to control a device vinformation sent to the facility manager: - by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software - by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link.OperatingprincipleDE52789Logic inputs and outputsThe number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used. The 4 outputs included in the Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) may be extended by adding one MES114 modules with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays. After selecting the MES114 type required by an application, the logic inputs must be assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation. A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent use]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Description2Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation: bthe main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned. bthe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: vcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages vlogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions (Sepam series 40 only) vcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only). The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases: bacquisition of input data: vresults of protection function processing vexternal logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input / output module vremote control orders (TC) received via the Modbus communication link bactual processing of the control and monitoring function butilization of the processing results: vactivation of output relays to control a device vinformation sent to the facility manager: - by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software - by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link.OperatingprincipleDE52789Logic inputs and outputsThe number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used. The 4 outputs included in the Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) may be extended by adding one MES114 modules with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays. After selecting the MES114 type required by an application, the logic inputs must be assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation. A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent use]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="66">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsEach Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions for the chosen application.ANSI 94/69 - Commande disjoncteur/contacteurControl of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils: bcircuit breakers with shunt or undervoltage trip coils blatching contactors with shunt trip coils The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based on: bprotection functions bbreaking device status data bremote control orders bspecific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser). The function also inhibits breaking device closing, according to the operating conditions. With Sepam series 20, it is necessary to use an MES114 module in order to have all the required logic inputs.2ANSI 86 - Latching / acknowledgementThe tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure. (The logic outputs cannot be latched.) All the latched data may be acknowledged: reset blocally, with the key bremotely via a logic input bor via the communication link. The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/ contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 ���Lockout relay��� function.ANSI 68 - Logic discriminationThis function provides: bperfect tripping discrimination with phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth shortcircuits, on all types of network bfaster tripping of the breakers closest to the source (solving the drawback of conventional time discrimination). Each Sepam is capable of: bsending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC) band receiving blocking inputs which inhibit protection tripping. A saving mechanism ensures continued operation of the protection in the event of a blocking link failure.OutputrelaytestingEach output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output connections and connected switchgear operatio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsEach Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions for the chosen application.ANSI 94/69 - Commande disjoncteur/contacteurControl of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils: bcircuit breakers with shunt or undervoltage trip coils blatching contactors with shunt trip coils The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based on: bprotection functions bbreaking device status data bremote control orders bspecific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser). The function also inhibits breaking device closing, according to the operating conditions. With Sepam series 20, it is necessary to use an MES114 module in order to have all the required logic inputs.2ANSI 86 - Latching / acknowledgementThe tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure. (The logic outputs cannot be latched.) All the latched data may be acknowledged: reset blocally, with the key bremotely via a logic input bor via the communication link. The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/ contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 AAALockout relayAAA function.ANSI 68 - Logic discriminationThis function provides: bperfect tripping discrimination with phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth shortcircuits, on all types of network bfaster tripping of the breakers closest to the source (solving the drawback of conventional time discrimination). Each Sepam is capable of: bsending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC) band receiving blocking inputs which inhibit protection tripping. A saving mechanism ensures continued operation of the protection in the event of a blocking link failure.OutputrelaytestingEach output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output connections and connected switchgear operatio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="67">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsANSI 30 - Local annunciationPE02Local indications on the Sepam front panel.LED indication on the Sepam front panel b2 LEDs indicate the unit operating status: vgreen LED ON: Sepam on vred ���key��� LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal failure) b9 yellow LEDs: vpre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels vthe SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels. Local annunciation on Sepam���s advanced UMI Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam���s advanced UMI by: bmessages on the display unit, available in 2 languages: venglish, factory-set messages, not modifiable vlocal language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen when Sepam is set up) bthe lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment, which is set using SFT2841. Alarmprocessing bwhen an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the related LED goes on. The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the SFT2841 ���Alarms��� screen. bto clear the message from the display, press the bafter the fault has disappeared, press the reset pressing theclear reset clearkeykey: the light goes off and Sepam is key) and may be cleared bybthe list of alarm messages remains accessible ( ke]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsANSI 30 - Local annunciationPE02Local indications on the Sepam front panel.LED indication on the Sepam front panel b2 LEDs indicate the unit operating status: vgreen LED ON: Sepam on vred AAAkeyAAA LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal failure) b9 yellow LEDs: vpre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels vthe SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels. Local annunciation on SepamAAAs advanced UMI Events and alarms may be indicated locally on SepamAAAs advanced UMI by: bmessages on the display unit, available in 2 languages: venglish, factory-set messages, not modifiable vlocal language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen when Sepam is set up) bthe lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment, which is set using SFT2841. Alarmprocessing bwhen an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the related LED goes on. The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the SFT2841 AAAAlarmsAAA screen. bto clear the message from the display, press the bafter the fault has disappeared, press the reset pressing theclear reset clearkeykey: the light goes off and Sepam is key) and may be cleared bybthe list of alarm messages remains accessible ( ke]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="68">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareThe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: bcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages blogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions (Sepam series 40 only) bcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only).ControlmatrixPE0The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from: bprotection functions bcontrol and monitoring functions blogic inputs blogic equations to the following output data: boutput relays b9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam bmessages for local annunciation btriggering of disturbance recording.2SFT2841: control matrix.Logic equation editor (Sepam series 40)The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to: bcomplete protection function processing: vadditional interlocking vconditional inhibition/validation of functions vetc. badapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control sequences, etc. A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from: bprotection functions blogic inputs bremote control orders using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as time delays, bistables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically. The result of an equation may then be: bassigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication butilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit breaking device closing bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.Personalized alarm and operating messages (Sepam series 40)The alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841 software tool. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned via the control matrix for display: bon the Sepam display bin the SFT2841 ���Alarms��� and ���Alarm History��� screen]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Controlandmonitoring Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareThe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: bcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages blogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions (Sepam series 40 only) bcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only).ControlmatrixPE0The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from: bprotection functions bcontrol and monitoring functions blogic inputs blogic equations to the following output data: boutput relays b9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam bmessages for local annunciation btriggering of disturbance recording.2SFT2841: control matrix.Logic equation editor (Sepam series 40)The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to: bcomplete protection function processing: vadditional interlocking vconditional inhibition/validation of functions vetc. badapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control sequences, etc. A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from: bprotection functions blogic inputs bremote control orders using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as time delays, bistables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically. The result of an equation may then be: bassigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication butilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit breaking device closing bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.Personalized alarm and operating messages (Sepam series 40)The alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841 software tool. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned via the control matrix for display: bon the Sepam display bin the SFT2841 AAAAlarmsAAA and AAAAlarm HistoryAAA screen]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="69">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Base units are defined according to the following characteristics: b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI) b working language b type of base unit connector b type of current sensor connector.Baseunit PresentationUser-Machine InterfaceTwo types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam base units (series 20 or series 40): badvanced UMI bbasic UMI. The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions. A Sepam (series 20 or series 40) with a remote advanced UMI is made up of : ba base unit with basic UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment ba remote advanced UMI (DSM303) vfor flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for the facility manager vfor connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord. The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on page 162.PE092Advanced UMIComprehensivedataforfacilitymanagers All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand: bdisplay of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/ or in bar graphs bdisplay of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam resetting bdisplay and setting of all the Sepam parameters bdisplay and setting of all the parameters of each protection function bdisplay of Sepam and remote module versions boutput testing and logic input status display bentry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings. Ergonomicdatapresentation bkeypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation bmenu-guided access to data. bgraphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol bexcellent display quality under all lighting conditions: automatic contrast setting and backlit screen (user activated).Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with integrated advanced UMI.PE09Basic UMIA Sepam with basic UMI offers an economical solution suited to installations that do not require local operation (managed by a remote monitoring and control system) or to replace electromechanical or analog electronic protections units with no additional operating needs. The basic UMI includes: b2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status: b9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps equipped with a standard label bresetbutton for clearing faults and resetting.Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with basic UMI.WorkinglanguagePE09All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI are available in 2 languages: benglish, the default working language band a second language, which may be vfrench vspanish vanother ���local��� language. Please contact us regarding local language customization.Customized Chinese advanced UMI.SettingandoperatingsoftwareSFT2841 setting and operating software can be used for easy setting of Sepam parameters and protection functions. A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the communication port on the front of the uni]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Base units are defined according to the following characteristics: b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI) b working language b type of base unit connector b type of current sensor connector.Baseunit PresentationUser-Machine InterfaceTwo types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam base units (series 20 or series 40): badvanced UMI bbasic UMI. The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions. A Sepam (series 20 or series 40) with a remote advanced UMI is made up of : ba base unit with basic UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment ba remote advanced UMI (DSM303) vfor flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for the facility manager vfor connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord. The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on page 162.PE092Advanced UMIComprehensivedataforfacilitymanagers All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand: bdisplay of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/ or in bar graphs bdisplay of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam resetting bdisplay and setting of all the Sepam parameters bdisplay and setting of all the parameters of each protection function bdisplay of Sepam and remote module versions boutput testing and logic input status display bentry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings. Ergonomicdatapresentation bkeypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation bmenu-guided access to data. bgraphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol bexcellent display quality under all lighting conditions: automatic contrast setting and backlit screen (user activated).Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with integrated advanced UMI.PE09Basic UMIA Sepam with basic UMI offers an economical solution suited to installations that do not require local operation (managed by a remote monitoring and control system) or to replace electromechanical or analog electronic protections units with no additional operating needs. The basic UMI includes: b2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status: b9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps equipped with a standard label bresetbutton for clearing faults and resetting.Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with basic UMI.WorkinglanguagePE09All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI are available in 2 languages: benglish, the default working language band a second language, which may be vfrench vspanish vanother AAAlocalAAA language. Please contact us regarding local language customization.Customized Chinese advanced UMI.SettingandoperatingsoftwareSFT2841 setting and operating software can be used for easy setting of Sepam parameters and protection functions. A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the communication port on the front of the uni]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="70">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit PresentationBaseunitWith basic UMISelectionguideWithintegrated advanced UMIPE0Withremoteadvanced UMIPE0PE02FunctionsLocal indication Metering and diagnosis data Alarms and operating messages Sepam parameter setting Protection setting Version of Sepam and remote modules Status of logic inputs Local control Alarm acknowledgement Sepam reset Output testing b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bCharacteristicsScreen Size Automatic contrast setting Backlit screen Keypad Number of keys LEDs Sepam operating status Indication LEDs 128 x 64 pixels b b  2 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicle 9 2 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicle 128 x 64 pixels b b 9 b base unit: 2 LEDs on front b remote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI b base unit with basic UMI, mounted at the back of the compartment using the AMT840 mounting plate b DSM303 remote advanced UMI module ,flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and connected to the base unit with the CCA77x prefabricated cordMountin]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit PresentationBaseunitWith basic UMISelectionguideWithintegrated advanced UMIPE0Withremoteadvanced UMIPE0PE02FunctionsLocal indication Metering and diagnosis data Alarms and operating messages Sepam parameter setting Protection setting Version of Sepam and remote modules Status of logic inputs Local control Alarm acknowledgement Sepam reset Output testing b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bCharacteristicsScreen Size Automatic contrast setting Backlit screen Keypad Number of keys LEDs Sepam operating status Indication LEDs 128 x 64 pixels b b  2 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicle 9 2 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicle 128 x 64 pixels b b 9 b base unit: 2 LEDs on front b remote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI b base unit with basic UMI, mounted at the back of the compartment using the AMT840 mounting plate b DSM303 remote advanced UMI module ,flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and connected to the base unit with the CCA77x prefabricated cordMountin]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="71">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit PresentationHardwarecharacteristicsAuxiliarypowersupplySepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 can be supplied by either of the following voltages: b24 to 250 V DC b110 to 240 V AC.2FourrelayoutputsThe 4 relay outputs O1 to O4 on the base unit must be connected to connector A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841 software. O1, O2 and O3 are 3 control outputs with one NO contact. O1 and O2 are used by default for the switchgear control function: bO1: switchgear tripping bO2: switchgear closing inhibition. O4 is an indication output with one NO contact and one NC contact. It is used by default for the watchdog function.Main connector A A choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors: bCCA620 screw-type connector bCCA622 ring lug connector.PhasecurrentinputconnectorCurrent sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to type of sensors used: bCCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers or bCCA670 connector for LPCT sensors. The presence of these connectors is monitored.Voltage input connectorSepamB21andB22 Voltage sensors connected to the removable, screw-lockable CCT640 connector. The presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored. Sepamseries40 Voltage sensors connected to the 6-pin connector E . A choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 6-pin connectors: bCCA626 screw-type connector or bCCA627 ring lug connector. The presence of the E connector is monitored.PE0Mounting accessoriesAMT840 mounting plateIt is used to mount a Sepam with basic UMI inside the compartment with access to connectors on the rear panel. Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module (DSM303).AMT852 lead sealing accessoryThe AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized modification of the settings of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with integrated advanced UMIs. The accessory includes: ba lead-sealable cover plate bthe screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI of the Sepam unit.Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with serial numbers higher than 0440000.Sepam unit with integrated advanced UMI and lead sealing accessory AMT852]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit PresentationHardwarecharacteristicsAuxiliarypowersupplySepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 can be supplied by either of the following voltages: b24 to 250 V DC b110 to 240 V AC.2FourrelayoutputsThe 4 relay outputs O1 to O4 on the base unit must be connected to connector A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841 software. O1, O2 and O3 are 3 control outputs with one NO contact. O1 and O2 are used by default for the switchgear control function: bO1: switchgear tripping bO2: switchgear closing inhibition. O4 is an indication output with one NO contact and one NC contact. It is used by default for the watchdog function.Main connector A A choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors: bCCA620 screw-type connector bCCA622 ring lug connector.PhasecurrentinputconnectorCurrent sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to type of sensors used: bCCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers or bCCA670 connector for LPCT sensors. The presence of these connectors is monitored.Voltage input connectorSepamB21andB22 Voltage sensors connected to the removable, screw-lockable CCT640 connector. The presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored. Sepamseries40 Voltage sensors connected to the 6-pin connector E . A choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 6-pin connectors: bCCA626 screw-type connector or bCCA627 ring lug connector. The presence of the E connector is monitored.PE0Mounting accessoriesAMT840 mounting plateIt is used to mount a Sepam with basic UMI inside the compartment with access to connectors on the rear panel. Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module (DSM303).AMT852 lead sealing accessoryThe AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized modification of the settings of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with integrated advanced UMIs. The accessory includes: ba lead-sealable cover plate bthe screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI of the Sepam unit.Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with serial numbers higher than 0440000.Sepam unit with integrated advanced UMI and lead sealing accessory AMT852]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="72">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit DimensionsDimensionsDE80030 DE52847 DE52756mm in8.82Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114, flush-mounted in front panel. (1) With basic UMI: 23 mm (0.91 in). Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114, flush-mounted in front panel. Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.6.92 Front view of Sepam.Cut-outCut-out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand. Formountingplatebetween1.5mm (0.059 in) and 3 mm (0.12 in) thickDE80028Formountingplate 3.17 mm (0.125 inch) thickDE80044HAZARDOFCUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury.CAUTIONmm inmm in7.95 2.91 0.477.956.386.380.08Assembly with AMT840 mounting plateDE52759Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel. Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI (DSM303).DE52756Sepam with basic UMI and MES114, mounted with AMT840 plate. Mounting plate thickness: 2 mm (0.079 in).AMT840 mounting plat]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit DimensionsDimensionsDE80030 DE52847 DE52756mm in8.82Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114, flush-mounted in front panel. (1) With basic UMI: 23 mm (0.91 in). Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114, flush-mounted in front panel. Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.6.92 Front view of Sepam.Cut-outCut-out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand. Formountingplatebetween1.5mm (0.059 in) and 3 mm (0.12 in) thickDE80028Formountingplate 3.17 mm (0.125 inch) thickDE80044HAZARDOFCUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury.CAUTIONmm inmm in7.95 2.91 0.477.956.386.380.08Assembly with AMT840 mounting plateDE52759Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel. Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI (DSM303).DE52756Sepam with basic UMI and MES114, mounted with AMT840 plate. Mounting plate thickness: 2 mm (0.079 in).AMT840 mounting plat]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="73">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Description21 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Label identifying the indication LEDs. Graphical LCD screen. Display of measurements. Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data. Display of alarm messages. Sepam reset (or confirm data entry). Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or move cursor up). LED test (or move cursor down). Access to protection settings. Access to Sepam parameter setting. Entry of 2 passwords. PC connection port. rFront panel with advanced UMIDE51817The ��� ���, r, keys (9, 10, 11) are used to browse through the menus and to scroll through and accept the values displayed.1 2 3 4 5 6Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Label identifying the indication LEDs. Acknowledgement / clearing of alarms and Sepam reset. PC connection port.Front panel with basic UMIDE518]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Description21 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Label identifying the indication LEDs. Graphical LCD screen. Display of measurements. Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data. Display of alarm messages. Sepam reset (or confirm data entry). Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or move cursor up). LED test (or move cursor down). Access to protection settings. Access to Sepam parameter setting. Entry of 2 passwords. PC connection port. rFront panel with advanced UMIDE51817The AAA AAA, r, keys (9, 10, 11) are used to browse through the menus and to scroll through and accept the values displayed.1 2 3 4 5 6Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Label identifying the indication LEDs. Acknowledgement / clearing of alarms and Sepam reset. PC connection port.Front panel with basic UMIDE518]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="74">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Description1 Base unit.A 20-pin connector for:Rearpanel-Sepamseries20DE51819bauxiliary power supply b4 relay outputs b1 residual current input (Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20 only). connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs and residual current b Sepam B21 and B22: connector for 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs and 1 residual voltage V0 input.B b Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20:2C Communication port. D Remote module connection port.2 Connector for MES114 input/output module. 3 2 mounting clips. 4 2 locating nibs in flush-mounted position.1 Base unit.A 20-pin connector for:Rearpanel-Sepamseries40DE51820bauxiliary poxer supply b4 relay outputs b1 residual current input. residual currentB Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs and C Communication port. D Remote module connection port . E 6-pin connector for 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3inputs.2 Connector for MES114 input/output module. 3 2 mounting clips. 4 2 locating nibs in flush-mounted positio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Description1 Base unit.A 20-pin connector for:Rearpanel-Sepamseries20DE51819bauxiliary power supply b4 relay outputs b1 residual current input (Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20 only). connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs and residual current b Sepam B21 and B22: connector for 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs and 1 residual voltage V0 input.B b Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20:2C Communication port. D Remote module connection port.2 Connector for MES114 input/output module. 3 2 mounting clips. 4 2 locating nibs in flush-mounted position.1 Base unit.A 20-pin connector for:Rearpanel-Sepamseries40DE51820bauxiliary poxer supply b4 relay outputs b1 residual current input. residual currentB Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs and C Communication port. D Remote module connection port . E 6-pin connector for 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3inputs.2 Connector for MES114 input/output module. 3 2 mounting clips. 4 2 locating nibs in flush-mounted positio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="75">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40WeightSepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Technical characteristicsAnaloginputsMinimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114) Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114) Minimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114) Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114) Input impedance Consumption Rated thermal withstand 1-second overload Input impedance Input voltage Rated thermal withstand 1-second overload Pt 00 None 4 mA 1 km (0.62 mi)1.2 kg (2.6 lb) 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) 1.4 kg (3.1 lb) 1.9 kg (4.2 lb) &amp;lt; 0.02 W &amp;lt; 0.02 VA at 1 A &amp;lt; 0.5 VA at 5 A 4 In 100 In &amp;gt; 100 kW 100 to 230/���3 V 240 V 480 V Ni 100 / 120 None 4 mA2Current transformer 1 A or 5 A CT (with CCA630 or CCA634) 1 A to 6250 A ratingsVoltage transformer 220 V to 250 kV ratingsTemperature sensor input (MET148-2 module)Type of sensor Isolation from earth Current injected in sensor Maximum distance between sensor and moduleLogic inputsMES114MES114E110 to 125 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 3 mA 82 V DC u 88 V DC y 75 V DC Enhanced 110 V AC 88 to 132 V AC 47 to 63 Hz 3 mA 58 V AC u 88 V AC y 22 V AC EnhancedMES114F220 to 250 V DC 176 to 275 V DC 3 mA 154 V DC u 176 V DC y 137 V DC Enhanced 220 to 240 V AC 176 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz 3 mA 120 V AC u 176 V AC y 48 V AC EnhancedVoltage Range Frequency Typical consumption Typical switching threshold Input limit voltageAt state 1 At state 0 Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groupsRelaysoutputs24 to 250 V DC 19.2 to 275 V DC 3 mA 14 V DC u 19 V DC y 6 V DC EnhancedControl relay outputs (O1, O2, O3, O11 contacts) (2)Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load L/R load &amp;lt; 20 ms L/R load &amp;lt; 40 ms Resistive load p.f. load &amp;gt; 0.3 24 / 48 V DC 8A 8 / 4A 6 / 2A 4 / 1A &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms Enhanced 24 / 48 V DC 2A 2 / 1A Enhanced 127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A 100 to 240 V AC 8A8A 5AMaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)Annunciation relay output (O4, O12, O13, O14 contacts)127 V DC 2A 0.5 A 220 V DC 2A 0.15 A 100 to 240 V AC 2A 1AL/R load &amp;lt; 20 ms p.f. load &amp;gt; 0.3 Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groupsPowersupplyVoltage Range Deactivated consumption (1) Maximum consumption (1) Inrush current Acceptable momentary outagesAnalog output (MSA141 module)Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20, serie 40 Sepam series 20 Sepam series 4024 / 250 V DC -20 % +10 % &amp;lt; 4.5 W &amp;lt;W &amp;lt;W &amp;lt;  W &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms, &amp;lt; 28 A for 100 ��s 0 ms 0 ms110 / 240 V AC -20 % +10 % (47.5 to 63 Hz) &amp;lt; 6 VA &amp;lt; 6 VA &amp;lt; 15 VA &amp;lt; 25 VA &amp;lt; 15 A for first half-period 0 ms 0 msCurrent 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA Load impedance &amp;lt; 00 W (wiring included) Accuracy 0.50 % (1) According to configuration. (2) Relay outputs comply with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40WeightSepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Technical characteristicsAnaloginputsMinimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114) Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114) Minimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114) Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114) Input impedance Consumption Rated thermal withstand 1-second overload Input impedance Input voltage Rated thermal withstand 1-second overload Pt 00 None 4 mA 1 km (0.62 mi)1.2 kg (2.6 lb) 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) 1.4 kg (3.1 lb) 1.9 kg (4.2 lb) &amp;lt; 0.02 W &amp;lt; 0.02 VA at 1 A &amp;lt; 0.5 VA at 5 A 4 In 100 In &amp;gt; 100 kW 100 to 230/AAA3 V 240 V 480 V Ni 100 / 120 None 4 mA2Current transformer 1 A or 5 A CT (with CCA630 or CCA634) 1 A to 6250 A ratingsVoltage transformer 220 V to 250 kV ratingsTemperature sensor input (MET148-2 module)Type of sensor Isolation from earth Current injected in sensor Maximum distance between sensor and moduleLogic inputsMES114MES114E110 to 125 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 3 mA 82 V DC u 88 V DC y 75 V DC Enhanced 110 V AC 88 to 132 V AC 47 to 63 Hz 3 mA 58 V AC u 88 V AC y 22 V AC EnhancedMES114F220 to 250 V DC 176 to 275 V DC 3 mA 154 V DC u 176 V DC y 137 V DC Enhanced 220 to 240 V AC 176 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz 3 mA 120 V AC u 176 V AC y 48 V AC EnhancedVoltage Range Frequency Typical consumption Typical switching threshold Input limit voltageAt state 1 At state 0 Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groupsRelaysoutputs24 to 250 V DC 19.2 to 275 V DC 3 mA 14 V DC u 19 V DC y 6 V DC EnhancedControl relay outputs (O1, O2, O3, O11 contacts) (2)Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load L/R load &amp;lt; 20 ms L/R load &amp;lt; 40 ms Resistive load p.f. load &amp;gt; 0.3 24 / 48 V DC 8A 8 / 4A 6 / 2A 4 / 1A &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms Enhanced 24 / 48 V DC 2A 2 / 1A Enhanced 127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A 100 to 240 V AC 8A8A 5AMaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)Annunciation relay output (O4, O12, O13, O14 contacts)127 V DC 2A 0.5 A 220 V DC 2A 0.15 A 100 to 240 V AC 2A 1AL/R load &amp;lt; 20 ms p.f. load &amp;gt; 0.3 Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groupsPowersupplyVoltage Range Deactivated consumption (1) Maximum consumption (1) Inrush current Acceptable momentary outagesAnalog output (MSA141 module)Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20, serie 40 Sepam series 20 Sepam series 4024 / 250 V DC -20 % +10 % &amp;lt; 4.5 W &amp;lt;W &amp;lt;W &amp;lt;  W &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms, &amp;lt; 28 A for 100 AAs 0 ms 0 ms110 / 240 V AC -20 % +10 % (47.5 to 63 Hz) &amp;lt; 6 VA &amp;lt; 6 VA &amp;lt; 15 VA &amp;lt; 25 VA &amp;lt; 15 A for first half-period 0 ms 0 msCurrent 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA Load impedance &amp;lt; 00 W (wiring included) Accuracy 0.50 % (1) According to configuration. (2) Relay outputs comply with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="76">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40ElectromagneticcompatibilityDisturbing field emission Conducted disturbance emissionBaseunit Environmental characteristicsEmissiontestsStandardIEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3 ANSI C37.90.2 (99) IEC 60255-22-2 ANSI C37.90.3 IEC 61000-4-8 IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-1 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-11Level / ClassA BValueImmunity to radiated fieldsImmunitytests���RadiateddisturbancesIIIElectrostatic discharge Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency Immunity to conducted RF disturbances Fast transient burstsImmunitytests���ConducteddisturbancesIV10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz 10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 2 GHz 35 V/m ; 25 MHz - 1 GHz 8 kV air ; 6 kV contact 8 kV air ; 4 kV contact 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (13 s) 10 V 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV ; 5 kHz 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD 2.5 kV MC and MD 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD 2 kV MC ; 1 kV MD Series 20: 100 %, 10 ms Series 40: 100 %, 20 ms2A or B IV III1 MHz damped oscillating wave 100 kHz damped oscillating wave Surges Voltage interruptionsIIIMechanical robustnessVibrationsInoperationStandardIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3Level / Class Fc  ValueShocks EarthquakesVibrations Shocks JoltsDe-energized1 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 2 Hz - 13.2 Hz ; a = ��1 mm 10 Gn / 11 ms 2 Gn (horizontal axes) 1 Gn (vertical axes) 2 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 30 Gn / 11 ms 20 Gn / 16 msClimaticwithstandInoperationIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-2Standard  Level / ClassSeries 20: Ab Series 40: Ad Series 20: Bb Series 40: Bd Ca Nb Kb/2 CValueExposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heat Temperature variation with specified variation rate Salt mist Influence of corrosion/gaz test 2 Influence of corrosion/gaz test 4IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-14 IEC 60068-2-52 IEC 60068-2-60 IEC 60068-2-60-25 ��C (-13 ��F) +70 ��C (+158 ��F) 10 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 ��C (104 ��F) ���25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) 5 ��C/min (41 ��F/min) 21 days ; 75 % RH ; 25 ��C (-13 ��F); 0.5 ppm HS ; 1 ppm SO 21 days ; 75 % RH ; 25 ��C ; 0.01 ppm HS ; 0.2 ppm SO ; 0.02 ppm NO2; ; 0.01 ppm Cl -25 ��C (-13 ��F) +70 ��C (+158 ��F) 56 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 ��C (104 ��F)Exposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heatInstorage(3)SafetyIEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-3Front panel tightness Fire withstandEnclosuresafetytestsStandardIEC 60529Ab Bb CaLevel / ClassIP52 Type 12 with gasket suppliedValue1.2/50 ��s impulse wave Power frequency dielectric withstand eElectricalsafetytestsNEMA IEC 60695-2-11 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 Harmonized standard: EN 0Other panels closed, except for rear panel IP20 650 ��C with glow wire (1562 ��F) 5 kV (1) 2 kV 1 mn (2)European directives: b 89/336/CEE Electromagnetic Comptability (EMC) Directive v 92/31/CEE Amendment v 93/68/CEE Amendment b 73/23/CEE Low Voltage Directive v 93/68/CEE Amendment UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 n�� 14-95 File E CSA CSA C22.2 n�� 14-95 / n�� 94-M91 / n�� 0.17-00 File 0 (1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode (2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms (3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing.Certificati]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40ElectromagneticcompatibilityDisturbing field emission Conducted disturbance emissionBaseunit Environmental characteristicsEmissiontestsStandardIEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3 ANSI C37.90.2 (99) IEC 60255-22-2 ANSI C37.90.3 IEC 61000-4-8 IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-1 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-11Level / ClassA BValueImmunity to radiated fieldsImmunitytestsAAARadiateddisturbancesIIIElectrostatic discharge Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency Immunity to conducted RF disturbances Fast transient burstsImmunitytestsAAAConducteddisturbancesIV10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz 10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 2 GHz 35 V/m ; 25 MHz - 1 GHz 8 kV air ; 6 kV contact 8 kV air ; 4 kV contact 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (13 s) 10 V 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV ; 5 kHz 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD 2.5 kV MC and MD 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD 2 kV MC ; 1 kV MD Series 20: 100 %, 10 ms Series 40: 100 %, 20 ms2A or B IV III1 MHz damped oscillating wave 100 kHz damped oscillating wave Surges Voltage interruptionsIIIMechanical robustnessVibrationsInoperationStandardIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3Level / Class Fc  ValueShocks EarthquakesVibrations Shocks JoltsDe-energized1 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 2 Hz - 13.2 Hz ; a = AA1 mm 10 Gn / 11 ms 2 Gn (horizontal axes) 1 Gn (vertical axes) 2 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 30 Gn / 11 ms 20 Gn / 16 msClimaticwithstandInoperationIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-2Standard  Level / ClassSeries 20: Ab Series 40: Ad Series 20: Bb Series 40: Bd Ca Nb Kb/2 CValueExposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heat Temperature variation with specified variation rate Salt mist Influence of corrosion/gaz test 2 Influence of corrosion/gaz test 4IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-14 IEC 60068-2-52 IEC 60068-2-60 IEC 60068-2-60-25 AAC (-13 AAF) +70 AAC (+158 AAF) 10 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 AAC (104 AAF) AAA25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) 5 AAC/min (41 AAF/min) 21 days ; 75 % RH ; 25 AAC (-13 AAF); 0.5 ppm HS ; 1 ppm SO 21 days ; 75 % RH ; 25 AAC ; 0.01 ppm HS ; 0.2 ppm SO ; 0.02 ppm NO2; ; 0.01 ppm Cl -25 AAC (-13 AAF) +70 AAC (+158 AAF) 56 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 AAC (104 AAF)Exposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heatInstorage(3)SafetyIEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-3Front panel tightness Fire withstandEnclosuresafetytestsStandardIEC 60529Ab Bb CaLevel / ClassIP52 Type 12 with gasket suppliedValue1.2/50 AAs impulse wave Power frequency dielectric withstand eElectricalsafetytestsNEMA IEC 60695-2-11 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 Harmonized standard: EN 0Other panels closed, except for rear panel IP20 650 AAC with glow wire (1562 AAF) 5 kV (1) 2 kV 1 mn (2)European directives: b 89/336/CEE Electromagnetic Comptability (EMC) Directive v 92/31/CEE Amendment v 93/68/CEE Amendment b 73/23/CEE Low Voltage Directive v 93/68/CEE Amendment UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 nAA 14-95 File E CSA CSA C22.2 nAA 14-95 / nAA 94-M91 / nAA 0.17-00 File 0 (1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode (2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms (3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing.Certificati]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="77">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40SepamS20,S23,T20,T23 and M20DE52168 DE51822Baseunit Sepam series 20SepamB21andB222(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage.ConnectionDangerousvoltagesmaybepresentontheterminalscrews,whetherthe terminalsareusedornot.Toavoidalldangerofelectricalshock,tightenall terminalscrewssothattheycannotbetouchedinadvertently.ConnectorATypeScrew typeReferenceCCA620Wiringb wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (u AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm b wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm�� wire - DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mm�� wire - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm�� wires v tube length: 8.2 mm v stripped length: 8 mm b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in) b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) b stripped length: 6 mm b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm bwire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10) b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 Ib-in) Integrated with LPCT sensor Same as wiring for the CCA620 CCA612 CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)6.35 mm ring lugsCCA622B For Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23 and M20 B For Sepam B and B C D4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plug Screw type Green RJ45 plug Black RJ45 plugCCA630, CCA634 for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA670, for connection of 3 LPCT sensors CCT6]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40SepamS20,S23,T20,T23 and M20DE52168 DE51822Baseunit Sepam series 20SepamB21andB222(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage.ConnectionDangerousvoltagesmaybepresentontheterminalscrews,whetherthe terminalsareusedornot.Toavoidalldangerofelectricalshock,tightenall terminalscrewssothattheycannotbetouchedinadvertently.ConnectorATypeScrew typeReferenceCCA620Wiringb wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (u AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm b wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mmAA wire - DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mmAA wire - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mmAA wires v tube length: 8.2 mm v stripped length: 8 mm b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in) b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) b stripped length: 6 mm b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm bwire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10) b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 Ib-in) Integrated with LPCT sensor Same as wiring for the CCA620 CCA612 CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)6.35 mm ring lugsCCA622B For Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23 and M20 B For Sepam B and B C D4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plug Screw type Green RJ45 plug Black RJ45 plugCCA630, CCA634 for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA670, for connection of 3 LPCT sensors CCT6]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="78">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Sepam series 40DE521692(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage. (2) Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 and CCA627 connector.ConnectionDangerousvoltagesmaybepresentontheterminalscrews,whetherthe terminalsareusedornot.Toavoidalldangerofelectricalshock,tightenall terminalscrewssothattheycannotbetouchedinadvertently.ConnectorATypeScrew typeReferenceCCA620Wiringb wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (u AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm b wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm�� wire - DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mm�� wire - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm�� wires v tube length: 8.2 mm v stripped length: 8 mm b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in) b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) b stripped length: 6 mm b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm bwire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10) b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 Ib-in) Integrated with LPCT sensor CCA612 CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft) Same as wiring for the CCA620 Same as wiring for the CCA6226.35 mm ring lugsCCA622B4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plugC D ECCA630, CCA634, for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA670, for connection of 3 LPCT sensorsGreen RJ45 plug Black RJ45 plug Screw type 6.35 mm ring lugs CCA626 CCA6]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Sepam series 40DE521692(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage. (2) Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 and CCA627 connector.ConnectionDangerousvoltagesmaybepresentontheterminalscrews,whetherthe terminalsareusedornot.Toavoidalldangerofelectricalshock,tightenall terminalscrewssothattheycannotbetouchedinadvertently.ConnectorATypeScrew typeReferenceCCA620Wiringb wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (u AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm b wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mmAA wire - DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mmAA wire - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mmAA wires v tube length: 8.2 mm v stripped length: 8 mm b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in) b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) b stripped length: 6 mm b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm bwire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10) b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 Ib-in) Integrated with LPCT sensor CCA612 CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft) Same as wiring for the CCA620 Same as wiring for the CCA6226.35 mm ring lugsCCA622B4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plugC D ECCA630, CCA634, for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA670, for connection of 3 LPCT sensorsGreen RJ45 plug Black RJ45 plug Screw type 6.35 mm ring lugs CCA626 CCA6]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="79">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Other phase current input connection schemesVariant 1: phase current measurements by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)DE80144CCA630/ CCA634Description Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector. The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I2, I3 1 A to 6250 A2Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTsDE80145CCA630/ CCA634Description Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector. The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the phase current-based protection functions. The phase current I2 is only assessed for metering functions, assuming that I0 = 0. This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I3 1 A to 6250 AVariant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensorsDescription Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA670 connector. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position. The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) LPCT I1, I2, I3 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000 or 3150 A Note: Parameter In must be set 2 twice: b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connectorDE518]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Other phase current input connection schemesVariant 1: phase current measurements by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)DE80144CCA630/ CCA634Description Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector. The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I2, I3 1 A to 6250 A2Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTsDE80145CCA630/ CCA634Description Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector. The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the phase current-based protection functions. The phase current I2 is only assessed for metering functions, assuming that I0 = 0. This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I3 1 A to 6250 AVariant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensorsDescription Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA670 connector. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position. The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) LPCT I1, I2, I3 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000 or 3150 A Note: Parameter In must be set 2 twice: b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connectorDE518]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="80">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Other residual current input connection schemesVariant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currentsDescription Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors. See current input connection diagrams. ParametersResidualcurrent Sum of 3 Is Ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.1 to 40 In0Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT  (standard connection)DE800612Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected. ParametersResidualcurrent 2 A rating CSH 5 A rating CSH (Sepam series 40) 20 A rating CSH Ratedresidualcurrent In0 = 2 A In0 = 5 A In0 = 20 A Measuring range 0.2 to 40 A 0.5 to 100 A 2 to 400 AVariant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634Description Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs. bTerminal 7: 1 A CT bTerminal 8: 5 A CT ParametersResidualcurrent 1 A CT 1 A CT sensitive 5 A CT 5 A CT sensitive Ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0DE52520 DE8004]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Other residual current input connection schemesVariant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currentsDescription Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors. See current input connection diagrams. ParametersResidualcurrent Sum of 3 Is Ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.1 to 40 In0Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT  (standard connection)DE800612Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected. ParametersResidualcurrent 2 A rating CSH 5 A rating CSH (Sepam series 40) 20 A rating CSH Ratedresidualcurrent In0 = 2 A In0 = 5 A In0 = 20 A Measuring range 0.2 to 40 A 0.5 to 100 A 2 to 400 AVariant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634Description Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs. bTerminal 7: 1 A CT bTerminal 8: 5 A CT ParametersResidualcurrent 1 A CT 1 A CT sensitive 5 A CT 5 A CT sensitive Ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0DE52520 DE8004]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="81">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Other residual current input connection schemesDescription The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current: bconnection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH primary bconnection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH primary. bfor Sepam series 40, the sensitivity can be mulitplied by 10 using the &amp;quot;sensitive&amp;quot; setting with In0 = In/10. ParametersVariant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CTDE801152turns turnsResidualcurrent 1 A CT 1 A CT sensitive 5 A CT 5 A CT sensitiveRatedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40)Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0DE80116turns turnsVariant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)Description The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 &amp;lt; n &amp;lt; 1500) and the Sepam residual current input. This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation. ParametersResidualcurrent Ratedresidualcurrent Measuring range ACE990 - range 1 0.1 to 20 In0 In0 = Ik.n() (0.00578 yk y0.04) ACE990 - range 2 0.1 to 20 In0 In0 = Ik.n() (0.0578 yk y0.26316) (1) n = number of core balance CT turns k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by SepamDE5183]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Baseunit Other residual current input connection schemesDescription The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current: bconnection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH primary bconnection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH primary. bfor Sepam series 40, the sensitivity can be mulitplied by 10 using the &amp;quot;sensitive&amp;quot; setting with In0 = In/10. ParametersVariant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CTDE801152turns turnsResidualcurrent 1 A CT 1 A CT sensitive 5 A CT 5 A CT sensitiveRatedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40)Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0DE80116turns turnsVariant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)Description The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 &amp;lt; n &amp;lt; 1500) and the Sepam residual current input. This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation. ParametersResidualcurrent Ratedresidualcurrent Measuring range ACE990 - range 1 0.1 to 20 In0 In0 = Ik.n() (0.00578 yk y0.04) ACE990 - range 2 0.1 to 20 In0 In0 = Ik.n() (0.0578 yk y0.26316) (1) n = number of core balance CT turns k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by SepamDE5183]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="82">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Voltage inputs Sepam series 20Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)ParametersDE51831The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector (item B ) on Sepam series 20 type B units. The CCT640 connector contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs and Sepam input circuits.Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltageV1, V2, V3 Sum of 3VsFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) V1, V2, V3 U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, f All All2Variant 2: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and residual voltageDE51832ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage V1, V2, V3 External VTFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) V1, V2, V3, V0 U21, U32, U13, Vd, f All AllVariant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltagesDE51833ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage U21, U32 NoneFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) V1, V2, V3 U13, Vd, f U21, U32, U13, Vd, f All except 59N, 27SVariant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltageDE51834ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage U External VTFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) U21, V0 f U21, V0, f All except 47, 27D, 27SVariant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltageDE51835ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage U NoneFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) U f U21, f All except 47, 27D, 59N, 2]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Voltage inputs Sepam series 20Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)ParametersDE51831The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector (item B ) on Sepam series 20 type B units. The CCT640 connector contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs and Sepam input circuits.Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltageV1, V2, V3 Sum of 3VsFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) V1, V2, V3 U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, f All All2Variant 2: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and residual voltageDE51832ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage V1, V2, V3 External VTFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) V1, V2, V3, V0 U21, U32, U13, Vd, f All AllVariant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltagesDE51833ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage U21, U32 NoneFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) V1, V2, V3 U13, Vd, f U21, U32, U13, Vd, f All except 59N, 27SVariant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltageDE51834ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage U External VTFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) U21, V0 f U21, V0, f All except 47, 27D, 27SVariant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltageDE51835ParametersVoltages measured by VTs Residual voltage U NoneFunctionsavailableVoltages measured Values calculated Measurements available Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) U f U21, f All except 47, 27D, 59N, 2]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="83">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Voltage inputs Sepam series 40Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam)DE51836The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected directly to the connector marked E . The 3 impedance matching and isolation transformers are integrated in the Sepam series 40 base unit.23V 3V sum V1, V2, V3 U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, Vi, f None NoneVariant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltagePhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U21, U32 External VT U21, U32, V0 U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd, Vi, f None NoneDE51837Variant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltagesPhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U21, U32 None U21, U32 U13, Vd, Vi, f V1, V2, V3, V0 67N/67NC, 59NDE51838Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltagePhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U External VT U21, V0 f U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd, Vi 67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 27SDE51839Variant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltagePhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U None U f U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vd, Vi 67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 67N/67NC, 59N, 27SDE518]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40Voltage inputs Sepam series 40Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam)DE51836The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected directly to the connector marked E . The 3 impedance matching and isolation transformers are integrated in the Sepam series 40 base unit.23V 3V sum V1, V2, V3 U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, Vi, f None NoneVariant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltagePhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U21, U32 External VT U21, U32, V0 U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd, Vi, f None NoneDE51837Variant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltagesPhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U21, U32 None U21, U32 U13, Vd, Vi, f V1, V2, V3, V0 67N/67NC, 59NDE51838Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltagePhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U External VT U21, V0 f U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd, Vi 67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 27SDE51839Variant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltagePhase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable (according to type of Sepam) U None U f U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vd, Vi 67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 67N/67NC, 59N, 27SDE518]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="84">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="85">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures��� bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts���Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner���s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochuresAAA bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contactsAAATraining allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginnerAAAs courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="86">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Sepam series 80Introduction Sepamseries20andSepamseries407 47Sepam series 80Selection table8686FunctionsSensor inputs General settingsDescription Characteristics8888 89 9090 95Metering and diagnosisDescription Trippingcurves Maincharacteristics Settingranges Description Description of predefined functions Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 software CustomizedfunctionsusingLogipamProtection96 102 104 10596Control and monitoring109109 110 114 116CharacteristicsPresentation Description Technicalcharacteristics Dimensions117117117 121 123 125Base unitConnection diagramsSepamseries80 Connection SepamB83 SepamC86 Phasecurrentinputs Residualcurrentinputs Mainchannels AdditionalchannelsforSepamB83 AdditionalchannelforSepamB80 Availablefunctions126126Base unit127127 128 129 130 131Phase voltage inputs - Residual voltage input133133 134 135 136 139 217Additionalmodulesandaccessories  Orderform0]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Sepam series 80Introduction Sepamseries20andSepamseries407 47Sepam series 80Selection table8686FunctionsSensor inputs General settingsDescription Characteristics8888 89 9090 95Metering and diagnosisDescription Trippingcurves Maincharacteristics Settingranges Description Description of predefined functions Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 software CustomizedfunctionsusingLogipamProtection96 102 104 10596Control and monitoring109109 110 114 116CharacteristicsPresentation Description Technicalcharacteristics Dimensions117117117 121 123 125Base unitConnection diagramsSepamseries80 Connection SepamB83 SepamC86 Phasecurrentinputs Residualcurrentinputs Mainchannels AdditionalchannelsforSepamB83 AdditionalchannelforSepamB80 Availablefunctions126126Base unit127127 128 129 130 131Phase voltage inputs - Residual voltage input133133 134 135 136 139 217Additionalmodulesandaccessories  Orderform0]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="87">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 80SelectiontableSubstationTransformer                        Motor              Generator              Busbar       Cap.   ProtectionANSI code S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86        Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) 50N/51N 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF Negative sequence / unbalance  Thermal overload for cables 49RMS Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS Capacitor bank unbalance 51C Restricted earth fault Two-winding transformer differential Machine differential Directional phase overcurrent Directional earth fault (1)(1)                     v v      v v      v v                                   REF T 87M  67N/67NC P 32Q P  48/51LR  0 78PS   50V/51V B 50/27 27TN/64G2 G  27D R  9 9N  H L R 9 26/63 38/49T          v         v         v          v3Directional active overpower Directional reactive overpower Directional active underpower Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Field loss (underimpedance) Pole slip Overspeed (2 set points) (2) Underspeed ( set points) (2) Voltage-restrained overcurrent Underimpedance Inadvertent energization Third harmonic undervoltage / 00 % stator earth fault Overfluxing (V / Hz) Positive sequence undercurrent Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Rate of change of frequency Recloser (4 cycles) (2) Thermostat / Buchholz (2) Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (3) Synchro-check (4)  v v               v v               v v                                                                             v v v v v v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv vvv vv v vv v v v b b v b b b b vv v v v v b b v b b b b v v b b b b v v b b b b v v v v v v vvv v v v Circuit breaker / contactor control 94/69 v v v Automatic transfer (AT) (2) v Load shedding / automatic restart De-excitation Genset shutdown Capacitor step control (2) v v v Logic discrimination (2)  v b b b b Latching / acknowledgement  b b b b Annunciation 0 b b b b Switching of groups of settings b b b b Adaptation using logic equations v v v Logipam programming (Ladder language) v The figures indicate the number of relays available for each protection function. b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.Controlandmonitoringv bv bv bv v b bvv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv v b b b b]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 80SelectiontableSubstationTransformer                        Motor              Generator              Busbar       Cap.   ProtectionANSI code S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86        Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) 50N/51N 50G/51G Breaker failure 0BF Negative sequence / unbalance  Thermal overload for cables 49RMS Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS Capacitor bank unbalance 51C Restricted earth fault Two-winding transformer differential Machine differential Directional phase overcurrent Directional earth fault (1)(1)                     v v      v v      v v                                   REF T 87M  67N/67NC P 32Q P  48/51LR  0 78PS   50V/51V B 50/27 27TN/64G2 G  27D R  9 9N  H L R 9 26/63 38/49T          v         v         v          v3Directional active overpower Directional reactive overpower Directional active underpower Phase undercurrent Excessive starting time, locked rotor Starts per hour Field loss (underimpedance) Pole slip Overspeed (2 set points) (2) Underspeed ( set points) (2) Voltage-restrained overcurrent Underimpedance Inadvertent energization Third harmonic undervoltage / 00 % stator earth fault Overfluxing (V / Hz) Positive sequence undercurrent Remanent undervoltage Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Neutral voltage displacement Negative sequence overvoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Rate of change of frequency Recloser (4 cycles) (2) Thermostat / Buchholz (2) Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (3) Synchro-check (4)  v v               v v               v v                                                                             v v v v v v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv vvv vv v vv v v v b b v b b b b vv v v v v b b v b b b b v v b b b b v v b b b b v v v v v v vvv v v v Circuit breaker / contactor control 94/69 v v v Automatic transfer (AT) (2) v Load shedding / automatic restart De-excitation Genset shutdown Capacitor step control (2) v v v Logic discrimination (2)  v b b b b Latching / acknowledgement  b b b b Annunciation 0 b b b b Switching of groups of settings b b b b Adaptation using logic equations v v v Logipam programming (Ladder language) v The figures indicate the number of relays available for each protection function. b standard, v options. (1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.Controlandmonitoringv bv bv bv v b bvv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv b b b b vv v b b b b]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="88">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepam series 80SelectiontableMeteringPhase current I1, I2, I3 RMS Measured residual current I0, calculated I0�� Demand current I1, I2, I3 Peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 Measured residual current I���0 Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3 Residual voltage V0 Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction Negative sequence voltage Vi Frequency Active power P, P1, P2, P3 Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 Peak demand power PM, QM Power factor Calculated active and reactive energy (��Wh, ��VARh) Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (2) (�� Wh, �� VARh) Phase current I���1, I���2, I���3 RMS Calculated residual current I���0�� Voltage U���21, V���1 and frequency Voltage U���21, U���32, U���13, V���1, V���2, V���3, V���d, V���i and frequency Residual voltage V���0 Temperature (16 RTDs) (3) Rotation speed (2) Neutral point voltage VntSubstationb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b vS80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b v v v v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b vTransformerMotorGeneratorBusbarCap.3Network and machine diagnosisTripping context Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3 Phase fault and earth fault trip counters Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii Harmonic distortion (THD), current and voltage Ithd, Uthd Phase displacement ��0, �����0, ��0�� Phase displacement ��1, ��2, ��3 Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time Number of starts before inhibition Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current I���i Differential current Idiff1, Idiff2, Idiff3 Through current It1, It2, It3 Current phase displacement �� Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 Third harmonic voltage, neutral point or residual Difference in amplitude, frequency and phase of voltages compared for synchro-check (4) Capacitor unbalance current and capacitanceb b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b v vb b vb b vb b vb b vb b b b b b vb bb b b vb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b vb b vb b vb bb b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b vSwitchgeardiagnosisANSI codeCT / VT supervision 60/60FL Trip circuit supervision (2)  Auxiliary power supply monitoring Cumulative breaking current Number of operations, operating time, charging time, number of racking out operations (2)v v v v v v v Measurement readout (4) v v v v v v v Remote indication and time tagging of events (4) v v v v v v v Remote control orders (4) v v v v v v v Remote protection setting (4) v v v v v v v Transfer of disturbance recording data (4) b standard, v options. (2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module. (5) With ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP, ACE969FO or ECI850 communication interface.Modbus communication, IEC 60 870-5-103, DNP3 or CEI 850v v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepam series 80SelectiontableMeteringPhase current I1, I2, I3 RMS Measured residual current I0, calculated I0AA Demand current I1, I2, I3 Peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 Measured residual current IAAA0 Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3 Residual voltage V0 Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction Negative sequence voltage Vi Frequency Active power P, P1, P2, P3 Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 Peak demand power PM, QM Power factor Calculated active and reactive energy (AAWh, AAVARh) Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (2) (AA Wh, AA VARh) Phase current IAAA1, IAAA2, IAAA3 RMS Calculated residual current IAAA0AA Voltage UAAA21, VAAA1 and frequency Voltage UAAA21, UAAA32, UAAA13, VAAA1, VAAA2, VAAA3, VAAAd, VAAAi and frequency Residual voltage VAAA0 Temperature (16 RTDs) (3) Rotation speed (2) Neutral point voltage VntSubstationb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b vS80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b v v v v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b v v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b vTransformerMotorGeneratorBusbarCap.3Network and machine diagnosisTripping context Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3 Phase fault and earth fault trip counters Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii Harmonic distortion (THD), current and voltage Ithd, Uthd Phase displacement AA0, AAAAA0, AA0AA Phase displacement AA1, AA2, AA3 Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time Number of starts before inhibition Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current IAAAi Differential current Idiff1, Idiff2, Idiff3 Through current It1, It2, It3 Current phase displacement AA Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 Third harmonic voltage, neutral point or residual Difference in amplitude, frequency and phase of voltages compared for synchro-check (4) Capacitor unbalance current and capacitanceb b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b bb b v vb b vb b vb b vb b vb b b b b b vb bb b b vb b b b b b b vb b b b b b b vb b vb b vb bb b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b v b v b b vSwitchgeardiagnosisANSI codeCT / VT supervision 60/60FL Trip circuit supervision (2)  Auxiliary power supply monitoring Cumulative breaking current Number of operations, operating time, charging time, number of racking out operations (2)v v v v v v v Measurement readout (4) v v v v v v v Remote indication and time tagging of events (4) v v v v v v v Remote control orders (4) v v v v v v v Remote protection setting (4) v v v v v v v Transfer of disturbance recording data (4) b standard, v options. (2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules. (3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules. (4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module. (5) With ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP, ACE969FO or ECI850 communication interface.Modbus communication, IEC 60 870-5-103, DNP3 or CEI 850v v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v vv v v v]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="89">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80SensorinputsSepam series 80 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors required for applications: bmain analog inputs, available on all types of Sepam series 80: v3 phase current inputs l1, l2, l3 v residual current input l0 v3 phase voltage inputs V1, V2, V3 v1 residual voltage input V0 badditional analog inputs, dependent on the type of Sepam: v3 additional phase current inputs l���1, l���2, l���3 v1 additional residual current input l���0 v3 additional phase voltage inputs V���1, V���2, V���3 v1 additional residual voltage input V���0 The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of Sepam series 80.3DE50583Sepam G88 sensor inputs.S80, S81, S82,S84Phase current inputs Residual current inputs Unbalance current inputs for capacitor steps Phase voltage inputs Main channel Additional channels Main channel Additional channels l1, l2, l3 l0 l���0T81,T82, T87, M81, M87, G82 M88,l1, l2, l3 l0 l���0 l1, l2, l3 l���1, l���2, l���3 l0 l���0B80l1, l2, l3 l0 l���0B83l1, l2, l3 l0C86l1, l2, l3 l0 l���1, l���2, l���3, l���0Main channel Additional channelsV1, V2, V3 or U21, U32V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 V���1 or U���21V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 V���1, V���2, V���3 or U���21, U���32 V0 V���0V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32Residual voltage inputsMain channel Additional channelV0V0V0V0 ()V0 T to TT to T T to T Temperature inputs (on MET148-2 module) Note: by extension, an additional measurement (current or voltage) is a value measured via an additional analog channel. (1) Available with phase voltage U21, U3]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80SensorinputsSepam series 80 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors required for applications: bmain analog inputs, available on all types of Sepam series 80: v3 phase current inputs l1, l2, l3 v residual current input l0 v3 phase voltage inputs V1, V2, V3 v1 residual voltage input V0 badditional analog inputs, dependent on the type of Sepam: v3 additional phase current inputs lAAA1, lAAA2, lAAA3 v1 additional residual current input lAAA0 v3 additional phase voltage inputs VAAA1, VAAA2, VAAA3 v1 additional residual voltage input VAAA0 The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of Sepam series 80.3DE50583Sepam G88 sensor inputs.S80, S81, S82,S84Phase current inputs Residual current inputs Unbalance current inputs for capacitor steps Phase voltage inputs Main channel Additional channels Main channel Additional channels l1, l2, l3 l0 lAAA0T81,T82, T87, M81, M87, G82 M88,l1, l2, l3 l0 lAAA0 l1, l2, l3 lAAA1, lAAA2, lAAA3 l0 lAAA0B80l1, l2, l3 l0 lAAA0B83l1, l2, l3 l0C86l1, l2, l3 l0 lAAA1, lAAA2, lAAA3, lAAA0Main channel Additional channelsV1, V2, V3 or U21, U32V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 VAAA1 or UAAA21V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 VAAA1, VAAA2, VAAA3 or UAAA21, UAAA32 V0 VAAA0V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32Residual voltage inputsMain channel Additional channelV0V0V0V0 ()V0 T to TT to T T to T Temperature inputs (on MET148-2 module) Note: by extension, an additional measurement (current or voltage) is a value measured via an additional analog channel. (1) Available with phase voltage U21, U3]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="90">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80GeneralsettingsThe general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software ���General Characteristics���, ���CT-VT Sensors��� and ���Particular characteristics��� tabs.2 or 3 1 A / 5 A CTs 3 LPCTs I���n Unbalance current sensor rating (capacitor application) CT 1 A / 2 A / 5 A Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment I���b Base current on additional channels Applications with transformer (not adjustable) Other applications In0, I���n0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio 1/n must be such that 50 y n y 00) Unp, Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated U���np primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/3) Uns, Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 U���ns 2 VTs: U21, U32 1 VT: U21 1 VT: V1 Uns0, Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero U���nso sequence voltage Unp/3 Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage (generator application) Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage (generator application) fn Rated frequency Phase rotation direction Integration period (for demand current and peak demand current and power) Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy Increments reactive energy P Rated transformer power Un Rated winding 1 voltage (main channels: I) Un Rated winding 2 voltage (additional channels: I���) In1 Rated winding 1 current (not adjustable) In2 Rated winding 2 current (not adjustable) Transformer vector shift Rated speed (motor, generator) ��n R Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition) Zero speed set point Number of capacitor steps Connection of capacitor steps Capacitor step ratio Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 (1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.In, I���nGeneralsettingsRated phase current (sensor primary current)SelectionValue1 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 1 A to 30 A 0.2 to 1.3 In I���b = Ib x Un1/Un2 I���b = Ib See In(I���n) rated phase current 2 A or 20 A rating 1 A to 6250 A According to current monitored and use of ACE990 220 V to 250 kV 90 to 230 V 90 to 120 V 90 to 120 V 90 to 230 V Uns/3 or Uns/3 220 V to 250 kV 57.7 V to 133 V 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1-2-3 oru 1-3-2 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min 0.1 kWh to 5 MWh 0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh 100 kVA to 999 MVA 220 V to 220 kV 220 V to 400 kV In1 = P/(3 Un) In2 = P/(3 Un) 0 to  00 to 00 rpm 1 to 1800 (��n x R/60 y 00) 5 to 20 % of ��n  to  Star / Delta  1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80GeneralsettingsThe general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software AAAGeneral CharacteristicsAAA, AAACT-VT SensorsAAA and AAAParticular characteristicsAAA tabs.2 or 3 1 A / 5 A CTs 3 LPCTs IAAAn Unbalance current sensor rating (capacitor application) CT 1 A / 2 A / 5 A Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment IAAAb Base current on additional channels Applications with transformer (not adjustable) Other applications In0, IAAAn0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio 1/n must be such that 50 y n y 00) Unp, Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated UAAAnp primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/3) Uns, Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 UAAAns 2 VTs: U21, U32 1 VT: U21 1 VT: V1 Uns0, Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero UAAAnso sequence voltage Unp/3 Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage (generator application) Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage (generator application) fn Rated frequency Phase rotation direction Integration period (for demand current and peak demand current and power) Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy Increments reactive energy P Rated transformer power Un Rated winding 1 voltage (main channels: I) Un Rated winding 2 voltage (additional channels: IAAA) In1 Rated winding 1 current (not adjustable) In2 Rated winding 2 current (not adjustable) Transformer vector shift Rated speed (motor, generator) AAn R Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition) Zero speed set point Number of capacitor steps Connection of capacitor steps Capacitor step ratio Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 (1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.In, IAAAnGeneralsettingsRated phase current (sensor primary current)SelectionValue1 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 1 A to 30 A 0.2 to 1.3 In IAAAb = Ib x Un1/Un2 IAAAb = Ib See In(IAAAn) rated phase current 2 A or 20 A rating 1 A to 6250 A According to current monitored and use of ACE990 220 V to 250 kV 90 to 230 V 90 to 120 V 90 to 120 V 90 to 230 V Uns/3 or Uns/3 220 V to 250 kV 57.7 V to 133 V 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1-2-3 oru 1-3-2 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min 0.1 kWh to 5 MWh 0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh 100 kVA to 999 MVA 220 V to 220 kV 220 V to 400 kV In1 = P/(3 Un) In2 = P/(3 Un) 0 to  00 to 00 rpm 1 to 1800 (AAn x R/60 y 00) 5 to 20 % of AAn  to  Star / Delta  1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="91">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMeteringSepam is a precision metering unit. All the metering and diagnosis data used for commissioning and required for the operation and maintenance of your equipment are available locally or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, etc.). Peakdemandpowers EnergyThe greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same period as the demand current. The peak demand powers may be cleared. b4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2 and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions b1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters for the acquisition of active or reactive energy pulses from external meters.Phasecurrent3RMS current for each phase, taking into account harmonics up to number 13. Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current: b1 A or 5 A current transformers bLPCT type current sensors. Four types of residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and sensors connected to it: b2 residual currents I0�� and I���0��, calculated by the vector sum of the  phase currents b2 measured residual currents I0 and I���0. Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current: bCSH120 or CSH200 specific core balance CT bconventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer with CSH30 interposing ring CT bany core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.TemperatureAccurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 module.RotationspeedResidualcurrentCalculated by the counting of pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor at each passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft. Acquisition of pulses on a logic input.PhasordiagramA phasor diagram is displayed by SFT2841 software and the mimic-based UMI to check cabling and assist in the setting and commissioning of directional and differential protection functions. According to the connected sensors, all current and voltage information can be selected for display in vector form.Demand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bdemand current is calculated over an adjustable period of  to 0 minutes bpeak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current drawn by peak loads. Peak demand currents may be cleared.Demandcurrentandpeakdemand currentsVoltage and frequencyThe following measurements are available according to the voltage sensors connected: bphase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 and V���1, V���2, V���3 bphase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13 and U���21, U���32, U���13 bresidual voltage V0, V���0 or neutral point voltage Vnt bpositive sequence voltage Vd, V���d and negative sequence voltage Vi, V���i bfrequency measured on the main and additional voltage channels.PowerPowers are calculated according to the phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bactive power breactive power bapparent power bpower factor (cos ��). According to the sensors used, power calculations may be based on the 2 or 3 wattmeter method. The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral is distributed. The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation of 3-phase and phase by phase powers in all cases, regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMeteringSepam is a precision metering unit. All the metering and diagnosis data used for commissioning and required for the operation and maintenance of your equipment are available locally or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, etc.). Peakdemandpowers EnergyThe greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same period as the demand current. The peak demand powers may be cleared. b4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2 and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions b1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters for the acquisition of active or reactive energy pulses from external meters.Phasecurrent3RMS current for each phase, taking into account harmonics up to number 13. Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current: b1 A or 5 A current transformers bLPCT type current sensors. Four types of residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and sensors connected to it: b2 residual currents I0AA and IAAA0AA, calculated by the vector sum of the  phase currents b2 measured residual currents I0 and IAAA0. Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current: bCSH120 or CSH200 specific core balance CT bconventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer with CSH30 interposing ring CT bany core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.TemperatureAccurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 module.RotationspeedResidualcurrentCalculated by the counting of pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor at each passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft. Acquisition of pulses on a logic input.PhasordiagramA phasor diagram is displayed by SFT2841 software and the mimic-based UMI to check cabling and assist in the setting and commissioning of directional and differential protection functions. According to the connected sensors, all current and voltage information can be selected for display in vector form.Demand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bdemand current is calculated over an adjustable period of  to 0 minutes bpeak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current drawn by peak loads. Peak demand currents may be cleared.Demandcurrentandpeakdemand currentsVoltage and frequencyThe following measurements are available according to the voltage sensors connected: bphase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 and VAAA1, VAAA2, VAAA3 bphase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13 and UAAA21, UAAA32, UAAA13 bresidual voltage V0, VAAA0 or neutral point voltage Vnt bpositive sequence voltage Vd, VAAAd and negative sequence voltage Vi, VAAAi bfrequency measured on the main and additional voltage channels.PowerPowers are calculated according to the phase currents I1, I2 and I3: bactive power breactive power bapparent power bpower factor (cos AA). According to the sensors used, power calculations may be based on the 2 or 3 wattmeter method. The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral is distributed. The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation of 3-phase and phase by phase powers in all cases, regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="92">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionNetwork diagnosis assistanceTrippingcontextSepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes. Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vi, Vd, F, P, Q, Idiff, It and Vnt values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored.TrippingcurrentStorage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam trip order, to indicate fault current. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.Number of trips2 trip counters: bnumber of phase fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50/51, 50V/51V and 67 protection functions bnumber of earth fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50N/51 and 67N/67NC protection functions.3Negative sequence / unbalance TotalharmonicdistortionNegative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3 (and I���1, I���2 and I���3), indicating the degree of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment. Two THD values calculated to assess network power quality, taking into account harmonics up to number 13: bcurrent THD, calculated according to I1 bvoltage THD, calculated according to V1 or U21.Phasedisplacementbphase displacement ��1, ��2, ��3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1, V2, V3 respectively bphase displacement ��0 between residual current and residual voltage.DisturbancerecordingRecording triggered by user-set events: ball sampled values of measured currents and voltages bstatus of all logic inputs and outputs logic data: pick-up, ��� RecordingcharacteristicsNumber of recordings in COMTRADE format Total duration of a recording Number of samples per period Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the eventAdjustable from 1 to 19 Adjustable from 1 to 11 s  or  Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods 36 samples perperiod s sMaximum recording capabilityNetwork frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz12samples perperiod  s  sVoltage comparison for synchro-check Out-of-synccontextFor the synchro-check function, the MCS025 module continuously measures the amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to be checked. Storage of amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages measured by the MCS025 module when a closing order is inhibited by the synchrocheck function]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionNetwork diagnosis assistanceTrippingcontextSepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes. Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vi, Vd, F, P, Q, Idiff, It and Vnt values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored.TrippingcurrentStorage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam trip order, to indicate fault current. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.Number of trips2 trip counters: bnumber of phase fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50/51, 50V/51V and 67 protection functions bnumber of earth fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50N/51 and 67N/67NC protection functions.3Negative sequence / unbalance TotalharmonicdistortionNegative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3 (and IAAA1, IAAA2 and IAAA3), indicating the degree of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment. Two THD values calculated to assess network power quality, taking into account harmonics up to number 13: bcurrent THD, calculated according to I1 bvoltage THD, calculated according to V1 or U21.Phasedisplacementbphase displacement AA1, AA2, AA3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1, V2, V3 respectively bphase displacement AA0 between residual current and residual voltage.DisturbancerecordingRecording triggered by user-set events: ball sampled values of measured currents and voltages bstatus of all logic inputs and outputs logic data: pick-up, AAA RecordingcharacteristicsNumber of recordings in COMTRADE format Total duration of a recording Number of samples per period Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the eventAdjustable from 1 to 19 Adjustable from 1 to 11 s  or  Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods 36 samples perperiod s sMaximum recording capabilityNetwork frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz12samples perperiod  s  sVoltage comparison for synchro-check Out-of-synccontextFor the synchro-check function, the MCS025 module continuously measures the amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to be checked. Storage of amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages measured by the MCS025 module when a closing order is inhibited by the synchrocheck function]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="93">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMachine diagnosis assistanceSepam assists facility managers by providing: bdata on the operation of their machines bpredictive data to optimize process management buseful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation.ThermalcapacityusedEquivalent temperature buildup in the machine, calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.Remainingoperatingtimebeforeoverloadtripping3Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The time is used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time by deciding to: binterrupt according to procedures bcontinue operation with inhibition of thermal protection on overloaded machine.WaitingtimeafteroverloadtrippingPredictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection by premature re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.Running hours counter / operating timeEquipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 Ib. Cumulative operating time is given in hours.Motor starting / overload current and timeA motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over 1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores: bmaximum current drawn by the motor bstarting / overload time. The values are stored until the following start / overload.Number of starts before inhibition/start inhibit time Differentialandthroughcurrent CurrentphasedisplacementIndicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection function and, if the number is zero, the waiting time before starting is allowed again. Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of ANSI 87T and 87M differential protection functions. Phase shift between the main phase currents and additional phase currents to facilitate implementation of ANSI 87T differential protection function.ApparentpositivesequenceimpedanceZdValue calculated to facilitate the implementation of the underimpedance field loss protection (ANSI 40).Apparentphase-to-phaseimpedancesZ21,Z32,Z13 Thirdharmonicneutralpointorresidualvoltage CapacitanceValues calculated to facilitate the implementation of the backup underimpedance protection function (ANSI 21B). Values measured to facilitate the implementation of the third harmonic undervoltage / 100 % stator earth fault protection function (ANSI 27TN/64G2). Measurement, for each phase, of the total capacitance of the connected capacitor bank steps. This measurement is used to monitor the condition of the capacitors.CapacitorunbalancecurrentMeasurement of the unbalance current for each capacitor bank step. This measurement is possible when the steps are connected in a double star arrangement]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionMachine diagnosis assistanceSepam assists facility managers by providing: bdata on the operation of their machines bpredictive data to optimize process management buseful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation.ThermalcapacityusedEquivalent temperature buildup in the machine, calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.Remainingoperatingtimebeforeoverloadtripping3Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The time is used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time by deciding to: binterrupt according to procedures bcontinue operation with inhibition of thermal protection on overloaded machine.WaitingtimeafteroverloadtrippingPredictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function. Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection by premature re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.Running hours counter / operating timeEquipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 Ib. Cumulative operating time is given in hours.Motor starting / overload current and timeA motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over 1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores: bmaximum current drawn by the motor bstarting / overload time. The values are stored until the following start / overload.Number of starts before inhibition/start inhibit time Differentialandthroughcurrent CurrentphasedisplacementIndicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection function and, if the number is zero, the waiting time before starting is allowed again. Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of ANSI 87T and 87M differential protection functions. Phase shift between the main phase currents and additional phase currents to facilitate implementation of ANSI 87T differential protection function.ApparentpositivesequenceimpedanceZdValue calculated to facilitate the implementation of the underimpedance field loss protection (ANSI 40).Apparentphase-to-phaseimpedancesZ21,Z32,Z13 Thirdharmonicneutralpointorresidualvoltage CapacitanceValues calculated to facilitate the implementation of the backup underimpedance protection function (ANSI 21B). Values measured to facilitate the implementation of the third harmonic undervoltage / 100 % stator earth fault protection function (ANSI 27TN/64G2). Measurement, for each phase, of the total capacitance of the connected capacitor bank steps. This measurement is used to monitor the condition of the capacitors.CapacitorunbalancecurrentMeasurement of the unbalance current for each capacitor bank step. This measurement is possible when the steps are connected in a double star arrangement]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="94">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionSwitchgeardiagnosis assistanceSwitchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on: bmechanical condition of breaking device bSepam auxiliaries and assist them for preventive and curative switchgear maintenance actions. The data are to be compared to switchgear manufacturer data. Used to monitor the entire metering chain: bCT and VT sensors bconnection bSepam analog inputs. Monitoring includes: bconsistency checking of currents and voltages measured bacquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown contacts. In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping.DE51773ANSI 74 - Trip/closing circuit supervisionTo detect trip circuit and closing circuit failures, Sepam monitors: bshunt trip coil connection bclosing coil connection bmatching of breaking device open/closed position contacts bexecution of breaking device open and close orders. The trip and closing circuits are only supervised when connected as shown below.ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervision3Connection for shunt trip coil monitoring. Connection for undervoltage trip coil monitoring. Connection for closing circuit supervisionAuxiliarypowersupplymonitoringThe voltage rating of Sepam���s auxiliary supply should be set between 24 V DC and 250 V DC. If the auxiliary supply drifts, 2 alarms may be triggered: bhigh set point alarm, adjustable from 105 % to 150 % of rated supply (maximum 275 V) blow set point alarm, adjustable from 60 % to 95 % of rated supply (minimum 20 V).CumulativebreakingcurrentmonitoringSix cumulative currents are proposed to assess breaking device pole condition: btotal cumulative breaking current bcumulative breaking current between 0 and 2 In bcumulative breaking current between 2 In and 5 In bcumulative breaking current between 5 In and 10 In bcumulative breaking current between 10 In and 40 In bcumulative breaking current &amp;gt; 40 In. Each time the breaking device opens, the breaking current is added to the cumulative total and to the appropriate range of cumulative breaking current. Cumulative breaking current is given in (kA)��. An alarm can be generated when the total cumulative breaking current exceeds a set point.Number of operationsCumulative number of opening operations performed by the breaking device.Circuitbreakeroperatingtimeandchargingtime Number of rackoutsUsed to assess the condition of the breaking device operating mechanism]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionSwitchgeardiagnosis assistanceSwitchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on: bmechanical condition of breaking device bSepam auxiliaries and assist them for preventive and curative switchgear maintenance actions. The data are to be compared to switchgear manufacturer data. Used to monitor the entire metering chain: bCT and VT sensors bconnection bSepam analog inputs. Monitoring includes: bconsistency checking of currents and voltages measured bacquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown contacts. In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping.DE51773ANSI 74 - Trip/closing circuit supervisionTo detect trip circuit and closing circuit failures, Sepam monitors: bshunt trip coil connection bclosing coil connection bmatching of breaking device open/closed position contacts bexecution of breaking device open and close orders. The trip and closing circuits are only supervised when connected as shown below.ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervision3Connection for shunt trip coil monitoring. Connection for undervoltage trip coil monitoring. Connection for closing circuit supervisionAuxiliarypowersupplymonitoringThe voltage rating of SepamAAAs auxiliary supply should be set between 24 V DC and 250 V DC. If the auxiliary supply drifts, 2 alarms may be triggered: bhigh set point alarm, adjustable from 105 % to 150 % of rated supply (maximum 275 V) blow set point alarm, adjustable from 60 % to 95 % of rated supply (minimum 20 V).CumulativebreakingcurrentmonitoringSix cumulative currents are proposed to assess breaking device pole condition: btotal cumulative breaking current bcumulative breaking current between 0 and 2 In bcumulative breaking current between 2 In and 5 In bcumulative breaking current between 5 In and 10 In bcumulative breaking current between 10 In and 40 In bcumulative breaking current &amp;gt; 40 In. Each time the breaking device opens, the breaking current is added to the cumulative total and to the appropriate range of cumulative breaking current. Cumulative breaking current is given in (kA)AA. An alarm can be generated when the total cumulative breaking current exceeds a set point.Number of operationsCumulative number of opening operations performed by the breaking device.Circuitbreakeroperatingtimeandchargingtime Number of rackoutsUsed to assess the condition of the breaking device operating mechanism]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="95">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionSepamself-diagnosisSepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the self-tests is to: bdetect internal failures that may cause nuisance tripping or failed fault tripping bput Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted operation balert the facility manager of the need for maintenance operations.InternalfailureTwo categories of internal failures are monitored: bmajor failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe position). The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays are forced to drop out and the ���Watchdog��� output indicates Sepam shutdown bminor failures: downgraded Sepam operation. Sepam���s main functions are operational and equipment protection is ensured.3BatterymonitoringMonitoring of battery voltage to guarantee data is saved in the event of an outage. A battery fault generates an alarm.Detectionofpluggedconnectors Configuration checkingThe system checks that the current or voltage sensors are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure. The system checks that the optional modules configured are present and working correctly. The absence or failure of a remote module is a minor failure, the absence or failure of a logic input/output module is a major failure]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis DescriptionSepamself-diagnosisSepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the self-tests is to: bdetect internal failures that may cause nuisance tripping or failed fault tripping bput Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted operation balert the facility manager of the need for maintenance operations.InternalfailureTwo categories of internal failures are monitored: bmajor failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe position). The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays are forced to drop out and the AAAWatchdogAAA output indicates Sepam shutdown bminor failures: downgraded Sepam operation. SepamAAAs main functions are operational and equipment protection is ensured.3BatterymonitoringMonitoring of battery voltage to guarantee data is saved in the event of an outage. A battery fault generates an alarm.Detectionofpluggedconnectors Configuration checkingThe system checks that the current or voltage sensors are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure. The system checks that the optional modules configured are present and working correctly. The absence or failure of a remote module is a minor failure, the absence or failure of a logic input/output module is a major failure]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="96">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis CharacteristicsFunctionsMeteringPhase current Residual current Demand current Peak demand current Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage Residual voltage Neutral point voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Calculated MeasuredMeasurement range0.02 to 40 In 0.005 to 40 In 0.005 to 20 In0 0.02 to 40 In 0.02 to 40 In 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vntp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 25 to 65 Hz 45 to 55 Hz (fn = 50 Hz) 55 to 65 Hz (fn = 60 Hz) 0.008 Sn to 999 MW 0.008 Sn to 999 MVAR 0.008 Sn to 999 MVA 0.008 Sn to 999 MW 0.008 Sn to 999 MVAR -1 to + 1 (CAP/IND) 0 to 2.1 x 10 MWh 0 to 2.1 x 10 MVARh -30 ��C to +200 ��C or -22 ��F to +392 ��F 0 to 00 rpmAccuracy (1)��0.5 % �� % �� % ��0.5 % ��0.5 % ��0.5 % �� % ��0.5 % �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % ��0.01 Hz ��0.05 Hz �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % ��0.01 ��1 % ��1 digit ��1 % ��1 digit ��1 ��C from +20 to +140 ��C ��1,8 ��F from +68 to +384 ��F �� rpmMSA141 Savingb b b v b bMain channels (U) Additional channels (U���) Main channels (V) Additional channels (V���)Main channels (f) Additional channels (f���)bActive power (total or per phase) Reactive power (total or per phase) Apparent power (total or per phase) Peak demand active power Peak demand reactive power Power factor Calculated active energy Calculated reactive energy Temperature Rotation speedb b b v v b vv vv b3Network diagnosis assistanceTripping context Tripping current Number of trips Negative sequence / unbalance Total harmonic distortion, current Total harmonic distortion, voltage Phase displacement ��0 (between V0 and I0) Phase displacement ��1, ��2, ��3 (between V and I) Disturbance recording Amplitude difference Frequency difference Phase difference Out-of-sync context0.02 to 40 In 0 to  1 to 500 % of Ib 0 to 00 % 0 to 00 % 0 to 359�� 0 to 359�� 0 to 1.2 Usync1 0 to 10 Hz 0 to 359���� % �� % �� % �� % ��2�� ��2�� �� % ��0.5 Hz ��2��v v vvvv b vvMachine operating assistanceThermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current Starting time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time Differential current Through current Phase displacement ��1, ��2, ��3 (between I and I���) Apparent impedance Zd, Z21, Z32, Z13 Third harmonic neutral point voltage Third harmonic residual voltage Capacitance Capacitor unbalance currentSwitchgeardiagnosisassistance0 to 00 % (100 % for phase I = Ib) 0 to 999 min 0 to 999 min 0 to  hours 1.2 Ib to 40 In 0 to 00 s 0 to 0 0 to 0 min 0.015 to 40 In 0.015 to 40 In 0 to 359�� 0 to 200 k�� 0.2 to 30 % of Vnp 0.2 to 90 % of Vnp 0 to 0 F 0.02 to 40 I���n�� % �� min �� min ��1 % or ��0.5 h �� % ��00 ms �� min �� % �� % ��2�� �� % �� % �� % �� % �� % ��0 % ��4 V or ��10 % �� ms ��0.5 s -vv v vCumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA�� Auxiliary supply 24 V DC to 250 V DC Number of operations 0 to 4 x 109 Operating time 0 to 00 s Charging time  to 0 s Number of rackouts 0 to  b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup vsaved in the event of auxiliary supply outage, even without battery vsaved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage. (1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at In or Unp, cos�� &amp;gt; 0.8.vv vv vv vv vv v]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Metering and diagnosis CharacteristicsFunctionsMeteringPhase current Residual current Demand current Peak demand current Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage Residual voltage Neutral point voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Calculated MeasuredMeasurement range0.02 to 40 In 0.005 to 40 In 0.005 to 20 In0 0.02 to 40 In 0.02 to 40 In 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vntp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 25 to 65 Hz 45 to 55 Hz (fn = 50 Hz) 55 to 65 Hz (fn = 60 Hz) 0.008 Sn to 999 MW 0.008 Sn to 999 MVAR 0.008 Sn to 999 MVA 0.008 Sn to 999 MW 0.008 Sn to 999 MVAR -1 to + 1 (CAP/IND) 0 to 2.1 x 10 MWh 0 to 2.1 x 10 MVARh -30 AAC to +200 AAC or -22 AAF to +392 AAF 0 to 00 rpmAccuracy (1)AA0.5 % AA % AA % AA0.5 % AA0.5 % AA0.5 % AA % AA0.5 % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA0.01 Hz AA0.05 Hz AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA0.01 AA1 % AA1 digit AA1 % AA1 digit AA1 AAC from +20 to +140 AAC AA1,8 AAF from +68 to +384 AAF AA rpmMSA141 Savingb b b v b bMain channels (U) Additional channels (UAAA) Main channels (V) Additional channels (VAAA)Main channels (f) Additional channels (fAAA)bActive power (total or per phase) Reactive power (total or per phase) Apparent power (total or per phase) Peak demand active power Peak demand reactive power Power factor Calculated active energy Calculated reactive energy Temperature Rotation speedb b b v v b vv vv b3Network diagnosis assistanceTripping context Tripping current Number of trips Negative sequence / unbalance Total harmonic distortion, current Total harmonic distortion, voltage Phase displacement AA0 (between V0 and I0) Phase displacement AA1, AA2, AA3 (between V and I) Disturbance recording Amplitude difference Frequency difference Phase difference Out-of-sync context0.02 to 40 In 0 to  1 to 500 % of Ib 0 to 00 % 0 to 00 % 0 to 359AA 0 to 359AA 0 to 1.2 Usync1 0 to 10 Hz 0 to 359AAAA % AA % AA % AA % AA2AA AA2AA AA % AA0.5 Hz AA2AAv v vvvv b vvMachine operating assistanceThermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter / operating time Starting current Starting time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time Differential current Through current Phase displacement AA1, AA2, AA3 (between I and IAAA) Apparent impedance Zd, Z21, Z32, Z13 Third harmonic neutral point voltage Third harmonic residual voltage Capacitance Capacitor unbalance currentSwitchgeardiagnosisassistance0 to 00 % (100 % for phase I = Ib) 0 to 999 min 0 to 999 min 0 to  hours 1.2 Ib to 40 In 0 to 00 s 0 to 0 0 to 0 min 0.015 to 40 In 0.015 to 40 In 0 to 359AA 0 to 200 kAA 0.2 to 30 % of Vnp 0.2 to 90 % of Vnp 0 to 0 F 0.02 to 40 IAAAnAA % AA min AA min AA1 % or AA0.5 h AA % AA00 ms AA min AA % AA % AA2AA AA % AA % AA % AA % AA % AA0 % AA4 V or AA10 % AA ms AA0.5 s -vv v vCumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kAAA Auxiliary supply 24 V DC to 250 V DC Number of operations 0 to 4 x 109 Operating time 0 to 00 s Charging time  to 0 s Number of rackouts 0 to  b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup vsaved in the event of auxiliary supply outage, even without battery vsaved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage. (1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at In or Unp, cosAA &amp;gt; 0.8.vv vv vv vv vv v]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="97">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionCurrentprotectionfunctionsANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection. 2 modes: bovercurrent protection sensitive to the highest phase current measured bmachine differential protection sensitive to the highest differential phase currents obtained in selfbalancing schemes. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith or without timer hold btripping confirmed or unconfirmed, according to parameter setting: vunconfirmed tripping: standard vtripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant 2-phase short-circuits vtripping confirmed by undervoltage protection (ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase shortcircuits in networks with low short-circuit power. Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on bmachines (transformers, motors or generators) bcables bcapacitors The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which takes into account: bcurrent RMS values bambient temperature bnegative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise. The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for process control assistance. The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when required by process control conditions. Thermaloverloadformachines-Characteristics b2 groups of settings b1 adjustable alarm set point b1 adjustable tripping set point badjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics to fit manufacturer���s thermal withstand curves bequipment heating and cooling time constants. The cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement of the equipment temperature by a sensor. Thermaloverloadforcables-Characteristics b1 group of settings bcable current carrying capacity, which determines alarm and trip set points bcable heating and cooling time constants. Thermaloverloadforcapacitors-Characteristics b1 group of settings balarm current, which determines the alarm set point boverload current, which determines the tripping set point bhot tripping time and current setting, which determine a point on the tripping curve.ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload3ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultEarth fault protection based on measured or calculated residual current values: bANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 phase current sensors bANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by a specific sensor. Characteristics b2 groups of settings bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 17 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith or without timer hold bsecond harmonic restraint to ensure stability during transformer energizing, activated by parameter setting.ANSI 51C - Capacitor bank unbalanceDetection of capacitor step internal faults by measuring the unbalance current flowing between the two neutral points of a step connected in a double star arrangement. Four unbalance currents can be measured to protect up to 4 steps. Characteristics b set points per step bdefinite time (DT) curve.ANSI 50BF - Breaker failureIf a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order, as detected by the non-extinction of the fault current, this backup protection sends a tripping order to the upstream or adjacent breakers.ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalanceProtection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative sequence current. bsensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines bprotection of equipment against temperature buildup, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current unbalance. Characteristics b1 definite time (DT) curve b9 IDMT curves: 4 IEC curves and 3 IEEE curves, 1 ANSI curve in RI�� and 1 specific Schneider curv]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionCurrentprotectionfunctionsANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection. 2 modes: bovercurrent protection sensitive to the highest phase current measured bmachine differential protection sensitive to the highest differential phase currents obtained in selfbalancing schemes. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith or without timer hold btripping confirmed or unconfirmed, according to parameter setting: vunconfirmed tripping: standard vtripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant 2-phase short-circuits vtripping confirmed by undervoltage protection (ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase shortcircuits in networks with low short-circuit power. Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on bmachines (transformers, motors or generators) bcables bcapacitors The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which takes into account: bcurrent RMS values bambient temperature bnegative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise. The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for process control assistance. The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when required by process control conditions. Thermaloverloadformachines-Characteristics b2 groups of settings b1 adjustable alarm set point b1 adjustable tripping set point badjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics to fit manufacturerAAAs thermal withstand curves bequipment heating and cooling time constants. The cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement of the equipment temperature by a sensor. Thermaloverloadforcables-Characteristics b1 group of settings bcable current carrying capacity, which determines alarm and trip set points bcable heating and cooling time constants. Thermaloverloadforcapacitors-Characteristics b1 group of settings balarm current, which determines the alarm set point boverload current, which determines the tripping set point bhot tripping time and current setting, which determine a point on the tripping curve.ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload3ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultEarth fault protection based on measured or calculated residual current values: bANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 phase current sensors bANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by a specific sensor. Characteristics b2 groups of settings bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 17 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith or without timer hold bsecond harmonic restraint to ensure stability during transformer energizing, activated by parameter setting.ANSI 51C - Capacitor bank unbalanceDetection of capacitor step internal faults by measuring the unbalance current flowing between the two neutral points of a step connected in a double star arrangement. Four unbalance currents can be measured to protect up to 4 steps. Characteristics b set points per step bdefinite time (DT) curve.ANSI 50BF - Breaker failureIf a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order, as detected by the non-extinction of the fault current, this backup protection sends a tripping order to the upstream or adjacent breakers.ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalanceProtection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative sequence current. bsensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines bprotection of equipment against temperature buildup, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current unbalance. Characteristics b1 definite time (DT) curve b9 IDMT curves: 4 IEC curves and 3 IEEE curves, 1 ANSI curve in RIAA and 1 specific Schneider curv]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="98">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionRecloserANSI 79Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semi-permanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the breaking device after the time delay required to restore the insulation has elapsed. Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter setting. Characteristics b1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable dead time badjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time until recloser ready time delays bcycle activation linked to instantaneous or timedelayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting binhibition/locking out of recloser by logic input.DifferentialprotectionfunctionsANSI 64REF - Restricted earth fault differentialDetection of phase-to-earth faults on 3-phase windings with earthed neutral, by comparison of residual current calculated from the  phase currents and residual current measured at the neutral point.DE51774Synchro-checkANSI 25This function checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker and allows closing when the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase are within authorized limits. Characteristics badjustable and independent set points for differences in voltage, frequency and phase badjustable lead time to take into account the circuitbreaker closing time b5 possible operating modes to take no-voltage conditions into account.Characteristics binstantaneous tripping bpercentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point bmore sensitive than transformer or machine differential protection.3ANSI 87T - Transformer and transformer-machine unit differential (2 windings)Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection of two-winding transformers or transformermachine units. Protection based on phase by phase comparison of the primary and secondary currents with: bamplitude and phase correction of the currents in each winding according to the transformer vector shift and the voltage values set bclearance of zero sequence current from the primary and secondary windings (suitable for all earthing systems). Characteristics binstantaneous tripping badjustable high set point for fast tripping for violent faults, with no restraint bpercentage-based characteristic with two adjustable slopes and adjustable low set point brestraint based on percentage of harmonics. These restraints prevent nuisance tripping during transformer energizing, during faults outside the zone that provoke saturation of the current transformers and during operation of a transformer supplied with excessive voltage (overfluxing). vself-adapting neural network restraint: this restraint analyzes the percentage of harmonics 2 and 5 as well as differential and through currents vrestraint based on the percentage of harmonic 2 per phase or total vrestraint based on the percentage of harmonic 5 per phase or total. Self-adapting restraint is exclusive with respect to restraints on the percentage of harmonic 2 or on the percentage of harmonic 5. brestraint on energization. This restraint, based on the magnetizing current of the transformer or on a logic equation or Logipam, ensures stability of transformers that have low harmonic percentages on energization bfast restraint upon loss of sensor.ANSI 87M - Machine differentialPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, based on phase by phase comparison of the currents on motor and generator windings. Characteristics binstantaneous tripping bfixed high set point for fast tripping for violent faults, with no restraint bpercentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point btripping restraint according to percentage characteristic activated by detection of: vexternal fault or machine starting vsensor saturation or disconnection vtransformer energizing (harmonic 2 restraint]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionRecloserANSI 79Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semi-permanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the breaking device after the time delay required to restore the insulation has elapsed. Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter setting. Characteristics b1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable dead time badjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time until recloser ready time delays bcycle activation linked to instantaneous or timedelayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting binhibition/locking out of recloser by logic input.DifferentialprotectionfunctionsANSI 64REF - Restricted earth fault differentialDetection of phase-to-earth faults on 3-phase windings with earthed neutral, by comparison of residual current calculated from the  phase currents and residual current measured at the neutral point.DE51774Synchro-checkANSI 25This function checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker and allows closing when the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase are within authorized limits. Characteristics badjustable and independent set points for differences in voltage, frequency and phase badjustable lead time to take into account the circuitbreaker closing time b5 possible operating modes to take no-voltage conditions into account.Characteristics binstantaneous tripping bpercentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point bmore sensitive than transformer or machine differential protection.3ANSI 87T - Transformer and transformer-machine unit differential (2 windings)Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection of two-winding transformers or transformermachine units. Protection based on phase by phase comparison of the primary and secondary currents with: bamplitude and phase correction of the currents in each winding according to the transformer vector shift and the voltage values set bclearance of zero sequence current from the primary and secondary windings (suitable for all earthing systems). Characteristics binstantaneous tripping badjustable high set point for fast tripping for violent faults, with no restraint bpercentage-based characteristic with two adjustable slopes and adjustable low set point brestraint based on percentage of harmonics. These restraints prevent nuisance tripping during transformer energizing, during faults outside the zone that provoke saturation of the current transformers and during operation of a transformer supplied with excessive voltage (overfluxing). vself-adapting neural network restraint: this restraint analyzes the percentage of harmonics 2 and 5 as well as differential and through currents vrestraint based on the percentage of harmonic 2 per phase or total vrestraint based on the percentage of harmonic 5 per phase or total. Self-adapting restraint is exclusive with respect to restraints on the percentage of harmonic 2 or on the percentage of harmonic 5. brestraint on energization. This restraint, based on the magnetizing current of the transformer or on a logic equation or Logipam, ensures stability of transformers that have low harmonic percentages on energization bfast restraint upon loss of sensor.ANSI 87M - Machine differentialPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, based on phase by phase comparison of the currents on motor and generator windings. Characteristics binstantaneous tripping bfixed high set point for fast tripping for violent faults, with no restraint bpercentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point btripping restraint according to percentage characteristic activated by detection of: vexternal fault or machine starting vsensor saturation or disconnection vtransformer energizing (harmonic 2 restraint]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="99">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionDirectionalcurrentprotectionANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. It comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bchoice of tripping direction bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization voltage at the time of the fault bwith or without timer hold.DE518413ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth faultEarth fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. 2 types of operation: btype 1, projection btype 2, according to the magnitude of the residual current phasor. ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 Directional earth fault protection for impedant, isolated or compensated neutral systems, based on the projection of measured residual current. Type1characteristics b 2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bcharacteristic projection angle bno timer hold bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in compensated neutral systems. ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly earthed systems, based on measured or calculated residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. Type2characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bchoice of tripping direction bwith or without timer hold.Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection (characteristic angle q0 �� 0��).DE51842Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection (characteristic angle q0 �� 0��).ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection (angular sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. This protectionfunction complies with the Enel DK5600 specification. Type3characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bno timer holdDE52064Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionDirectionalcurrentprotectionANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrentPhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. It comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases. Characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bchoice of tripping direction bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization voltage at the time of the fault bwith or without timer hold.DE518413ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth faultEarth fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction. 2 types of operation: btype 1, projection btype 2, according to the magnitude of the residual current phasor. ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 Directional earth fault protection for impedant, isolated or compensated neutral systems, based on the projection of measured residual current. Type1characteristics b 2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bcharacteristic projection angle bno timer hold bwith voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in compensated neutral systems. ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly earthed systems, based on measured or calculated residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. Type2characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bchoice of tripping direction bwith or without timer hold.Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection (characteristic angle q0 AA 0AA).DE51842Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection (characteristic angle q0 AA 0AA).ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured residual current. It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection (angular sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated. This protectionfunction complies with the Enel DK5600 specification. Type3characteristics b2 groups of settings binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT) curve bchoice of tripping direction bno timer holdDE52064Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="100">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionDirectionalpowerprotection Machine protection functions functionsTwo-way protection based on calculated active power, for the following applications: bactive overpower protection to detect overloads and allow load shedding breverse active power protection: vagainst generators running like motors when the generators consume active power vagainst motors running like generators when the motors supply active power.ANSI 32P - Directional active overpowerANSI 37 - Phase undercurrentProtection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection of motor no-load operation. It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input. Protection of motors against overheating caused by: bexcessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient supply voltage. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be considered as starting. blocked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher): vin normal operation, after a normal start vdirectly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by the underspeed function. Protection against motor overheating caused by: btoo frequent starts: motor energizing is inhibited when the maximum allowable number of starts is reached, after counting of: vstarts per hour (or adjustable period) vconsecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start) bstarts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only allowed after an adjustable waiting time.ANSI 48/51LR - Locked rotor / excessive starting timeANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated reactive power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: breactive overpower protection for motors which consume more reactive power with field loss breverse reactive overpower protection for generators which consume reactive power with field loss.3ANSI 66 - Starts per hourANSI 37P - Directional active underpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated active power Checking of active power flows: bto adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the network load power demand bto create an isolated system in an installation with its own generating unit.ANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)Protection of synchronous machines against field loss, based on the calculation of positive sequence impedance on the machine terminals or transformer terminals in the case of transformer-machine units. Characteristics b2 circular characteristics defined by reactances Xa, Xb and XcDE518432 circular tripping characteristics of ANSI 40 protection.btripping when the machine���s positive sequence impedance enters one of the circular characteristics. bdefinite (DT) time delay for each circular characteristic bsetting assistance function included in SFT2841 software to calculate the values of Xa, Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine (and transformer, when applicable).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionDirectionalpowerprotection Machine protection functions functionsTwo-way protection based on calculated active power, for the following applications: bactive overpower protection to detect overloads and allow load shedding breverse active power protection: vagainst generators running like motors when the generators consume active power vagainst motors running like generators when the motors supply active power.ANSI 32P - Directional active overpowerANSI 37 - Phase undercurrentProtection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection of motor no-load operation. It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input. Protection of motors against overheating caused by: bexcessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient supply voltage. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be considered as starting. blocked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher): vin normal operation, after a normal start vdirectly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by the underspeed function. Protection against motor overheating caused by: btoo frequent starts: motor energizing is inhibited when the maximum allowable number of starts is reached, after counting of: vstarts per hour (or adjustable period) vconsecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start) bstarts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only allowed after an adjustable waiting time.ANSI 48/51LR - Locked rotor / excessive starting timeANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated reactive power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: breactive overpower protection for motors which consume more reactive power with field loss breverse reactive overpower protection for generators which consume reactive power with field loss.3ANSI 66 - Starts per hourANSI 37P - Directional active underpowerTwo-way protection based on calculated active power Checking of active power flows: bto adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the network load power demand bto create an isolated system in an installation with its own generating unit.ANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)Protection of synchronous machines against field loss, based on the calculation of positive sequence impedance on the machine terminals or transformer terminals in the case of transformer-machine units. Characteristics b2 circular characteristics defined by reactances Xa, Xb and XcDE518432 circular tripping characteristics of ANSI 40 protection.btripping when the machineAAAs positive sequence impedance enters one of the circular characteristics. bdefinite (DT) time delay for each circular characteristic bsetting assistance function included in SFT2841 software to calculate the values of Xa, Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine (and transformer, when applicable).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="101">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionANSI 78PS - Pole slipProtection against loss of synchronism on synchronous machines, based on calculated active power. 2 types of operation: btripping according to the equal-area criterion, time-delayed btripping according to power swing (number of active power swings): vsuitable for generators capable of withstanding high electrical and mechanical constraints vto be set as a number of rotations. The 2 types of operation may be used independently or at the same time.Characteristics bcircular characteristic centered at origin defined by adjustable set point ZsDE51844ANSI 12 - Overspeed3Detection of machine overspeed, based on the speed calculated by pulse-counting, to detect synchronous generator racing due to loss of synchronism, or for process monitoring, for example.Circular tripping characteristic of ANSI 21B protection.ANSI 14 - UnderspeedMachine speed monitoring based on the speed calculated by pulse-counting: bdetection of machine underspeed after starting, for process monitoring, for example bzero speed data for detection of locked rotor upon starting.btime-delayed definite time (DT) tripping when one of the three apparent impedances enters the circular tripping characteristic.ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energizationANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentChecking of generator starting sequence to detect inadvertent energization of generators that are shut down (a generator which is energized when shut down runs like a motor). Consists of an instantaneous phase overcurrent protection confirmed by a timedelayed undervoltage protection function.Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators. The current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator which cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current. Characteristics binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith or without timer hold.ANSI 64G - 100 % stator earth faultProtection of generators with earthed neutral against phase-to-earth insulation faults in stator windings. This function may be used to protect generators connected to step-up transformers 100 % stator earth fault is a combination of two protection functions: bANSI 59N/64G1: neutral voltage displacement, protection of 85 % to 90 % of the stator winding, terminal end. bANSI 27TN/64G2: thrid harmonic undervoltage, protection of 10 % to 20 % of the stator winding, neutral point end.DE50099ANSI 21B - UnderimpedancePhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators, based on the calculation of apparent phase-to-phase impedance.U21 Z 21 = ---------- - - - -I2 ��� I1Stator winding of a generator protected 100 % by the combination of ANSI 59N and ANSI 27TN protection functions.apparent impedance between phases 1 and 2.ANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third harmonic undervoltageProtection of generators with earthed neutral against phase-to-earth insulation faults, by the detection of a reduction of third harmonic residual voltage. Protects the 10 to 20 % of the stator winding, neutral point end, not protected by the ANSI 59N/64G1 function, neutral voltage displacement. Characteristics bchoice of 2 tripping principles, according to the sensors used: vfixed third harmonic undervoltage set point vadaptive neutral and terminal third harmonic voltage comparator set point btime-delayed definite time (DT) tripping.ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/BuchholzProtection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer. Protection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors: btransformer: protection of primary and secondary windings bmotor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings. Characteristics b16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs b2 adjustable independent set points for each RTD (alarm and trip).ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionANSI 78PS - Pole slipProtection against loss of synchronism on synchronous machines, based on calculated active power. 2 types of operation: btripping according to the equal-area criterion, time-delayed btripping according to power swing (number of active power swings): vsuitable for generators capable of withstanding high electrical and mechanical constraints vto be set as a number of rotations. The 2 types of operation may be used independently or at the same time.Characteristics bcircular characteristic centered at origin defined by adjustable set point ZsDE51844ANSI 12 - Overspeed3Detection of machine overspeed, based on the speed calculated by pulse-counting, to detect synchronous generator racing due to loss of synchronism, or for process monitoring, for example.Circular tripping characteristic of ANSI 21B protection.ANSI 14 - UnderspeedMachine speed monitoring based on the speed calculated by pulse-counting: bdetection of machine underspeed after starting, for process monitoring, for example bzero speed data for detection of locked rotor upon starting.btime-delayed definite time (DT) tripping when one of the three apparent impedances enters the circular tripping characteristic.ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energizationANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentChecking of generator starting sequence to detect inadvertent energization of generators that are shut down (a generator which is energized when shut down runs like a motor). Consists of an instantaneous phase overcurrent protection confirmed by a timedelayed undervoltage protection function.Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators. The current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator which cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current. Characteristics binstantaneous or time-delayed tripping bdefinite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized curve bwith or without timer hold.ANSI 64G - 100 % stator earth faultProtection of generators with earthed neutral against phase-to-earth insulation faults in stator windings. This function may be used to protect generators connected to step-up transformers 100 % stator earth fault is a combination of two protection functions: bANSI 59N/64G1: neutral voltage displacement, protection of 85 % to 90 % of the stator winding, terminal end. bANSI 27TN/64G2: thrid harmonic undervoltage, protection of 10 % to 20 % of the stator winding, neutral point end.DE50099ANSI 21B - UnderimpedancePhase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators, based on the calculation of apparent phase-to-phase impedance.U21 Z 21 = ---------- - - - -I2 AAA I1Stator winding of a generator protected 100 % by the combination of ANSI 59N and ANSI 27TN protection functions.apparent impedance between phases 1 and 2.ANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third harmonic undervoltageProtection of generators with earthed neutral against phase-to-earth insulation faults, by the detection of a reduction of third harmonic residual voltage. Protects the 10 to 20 % of the stator winding, neutral point end, not protected by the ANSI 59N/64G1 function, neutral voltage displacement. Characteristics bchoice of 2 tripping principles, according to the sensors used: vfixed third harmonic undervoltage set point vadaptive neutral and terminal third harmonic voltage comparator set point btime-delayed definite time (DT) tripping.ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/BuchholzProtection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer. Protection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors: btransformer: protection of primary and secondary windings bmotor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings. Characteristics b16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs b2 adjustable independent set points for each RTD (alarm and trip).ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="102">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionVoltage protection functionsANSI 24 - Overfluxing (V/Hz)Protection which detects overfluxing of transformer or generator magnetic circuits by calculating the ratio between the greatest phase-to-neutral or phase-tophase voltage divided by the frequency. Characteristics bmachine coupling to be set up bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT time delays (choice of 3 curves).FrequencyprotectionfunctionsANSI 81H - OverfrequencyDetection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality.ANSI 81L - UnderfrequencyANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltageDetection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding. Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting.Protection of motors against faulty operation due to insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and detection of reverse rotation direction.ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequencyANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltageProtection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift protection function. Disconnection In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the &amp;quot;rate of change of frequency&amp;quot; protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to: bprotect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization bavoid supplying loads outside the installation. Load shedding The &amp;quot;rate of change of frequency&amp;quot; protection function is used for load shedding in combination with the underfrequency protection to: beither accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload bor inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that should not be solved by shedding.3Protection used to check that remanent voltage sustained by rotating machines has been cleared before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical transients.ANSI 27 - UndervoltageProtection of motors against voltage sags or detection of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic load shedding or source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. Characteristics bdefinite time (DT) curve bIDMT curve.ANSI 59 - OvervoltageDetection of abnormally high network voltage or checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. Detection of insulation faults by measuring residual voltage bANSI 59N: in isolated neutral systems bANSI 59N/64G1: in stator windings of generators with earthed neutral. Protects the 85 % to 90 % of the winding, terminal end, not protected by the ANSI 27TN/64G2 function, third harmonic undervoltage. Characteristics bdefinite time (DT) curve bIDMT curve.ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacementANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltageProtection against phase unbalance resulting from phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault, detected by the measurement of negative sequence voltage]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection DescriptionVoltage protection functionsANSI 24 - Overfluxing (V/Hz)Protection which detects overfluxing of transformer or generator magnetic circuits by calculating the ratio between the greatest phase-to-neutral or phase-tophase voltage divided by the frequency. Characteristics bmachine coupling to be set up bdefinite time (DT) or IDMT time delays (choice of 3 curves).FrequencyprotectionfunctionsANSI 81H - OverfrequencyDetection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality.ANSI 81L - UnderfrequencyANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltageDetection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor power supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding. Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting.Protection of motors against faulty operation due to insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and detection of reverse rotation direction.ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequencyANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltageProtection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift protection function. Disconnection In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the &amp;quot;rate of change of frequency&amp;quot; protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to: bprotect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization bavoid supplying loads outside the installation. Load shedding The &amp;quot;rate of change of frequency&amp;quot; protection function is used for load shedding in combination with the underfrequency protection to: beither accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload bor inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that should not be solved by shedding.3Protection used to check that remanent voltage sustained by rotating machines has been cleared before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical transients.ANSI 27 - UndervoltageProtection of motors against voltage sags or detection of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic load shedding or source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. Characteristics bdefinite time (DT) curve bIDMT curve.ANSI 59 - OvervoltageDetection of abnormally high network voltage or checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer. Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. Detection of insulation faults by measuring residual voltage bANSI 59N: in isolated neutral systems bANSI 59N/64G1: in stator windings of generators with earthed neutral. Protects the 85 % to 90 % of the winding, terminal end, not protected by the ANSI 27TN/64G2 function, third harmonic undervoltage. Characteristics bdefinite time (DT) curve bIDMT curve.ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacementANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltageProtection against phase unbalance resulting from phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault, detected by the measurement of negative sequence voltage]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="103">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection Tripping curvesPE0CustomizedtrippingcurveDefined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool, this curve may be used to solve all special cases involving protection coordination or revamping.IDMT tripping curvesMultiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications: bIEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT) bIEEE curves (MI, VI, EI) busual curves (UIT, RI, IAC).Current IDM T tripping curves3Customized tripping curve set using SFT2841 software.EquationIECcurvesCurvetypeStandard inverse / ACoefficient valuesk 0.14 13.5 0 0 315.2 a 0.02    2.5 b 2.97 1.50 13.33 0.808 t d( I) = --------------------- �� --I-- a ��� --- ��� ��� 1 b ��� Is ���kTVery inverse / B Long time inverse / B Extremely inverse / C Ultra inverse RIcurve Equation:T - - - - - - - - 1- - - - - - - - -----------td ( I ) = -------------------------------------- �� - - - - - - I-- ���1 3 ,1706 0 ,339 ��� 0,236��� --- ��� ��� Is ���IEEEcurvesEquation��� ��� ��� ��� T A td ( I ) = ���---------------- + B ��� �� --------������ I ���p ��� b -������ - - ��� ��� 1 ��� IsCurvetypeModerately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverseCoefficient valuesA 0.010 3.922 5.64 B 0.023 0.098 0.0243 p 0.02   b 0.241 0.138 0.081IEEEcurvesEquation��� ��� ��� ��� T B D E td ( I ) = ���A + ------------- + --------------- + --------------- ��� x - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- --2 3 I I I ��� ���- - ��� C ��� ���- - ��� C��� ���- - ��� C ��� ��� b -----��� ���Is ��� ���Is ��� ���Is ������CurvetypeInverse Very inverse Extremely inverseCoefficient valuesA 0.208 0.090 0.004 B 0.863 0.795 0.638 C 0.800 0.100 0.620 D -0.418 -1.288 1.787 E 0.195 7.958 0.246 b 0.297 0.165 0.09]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection Tripping curvesPE0CustomizedtrippingcurveDefined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool, this curve may be used to solve all special cases involving protection coordination or revamping.IDMT tripping curvesMultiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications: bIEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT) bIEEE curves (MI, VI, EI) busual curves (UIT, RI, IAC).Current IDM T tripping curves3Customized tripping curve set using SFT2841 software.EquationIECcurvesCurvetypeStandard inverse / ACoefficient valuesk 0.14 13.5 0 0 315.2 a 0.02    2.5 b 2.97 1.50 13.33 0.808 t d( I) = --------------------- AA --I-- a AAA --- AAA AAA 1 b AAA Is AAAkTVery inverse / B Long time inverse / B Extremely inverse / C Ultra inverse RIcurve Equation:T - - - - - - - - 1- - - - - - - - -----------td ( I ) = -------------------------------------- AA - - - - - - I-- AAA1 3 ,1706 0 ,339 AAA 0,236AAA --- AAA AAA Is AAAIEEEcurvesEquationAAA AAA AAA AAA T A td ( I ) = AAA---------------- + B AAA AA --------AAAAAA I AAAp AAA b -AAAAAA - - AAA AAA 1 AAA IsCurvetypeModerately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverseCoefficient valuesA 0.010 3.922 5.64 B 0.023 0.098 0.0243 p 0.02   b 0.241 0.138 0.081IEEEcurvesEquationAAA AAA AAA AAA T B D E td ( I ) = AAAA + ------------- + --------------- + --------------- AAA x - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- --2 3 I I I AAA AAA- - AAA C AAA AAA- - AAA CAAA AAA- - AAA C AAA AAA b -----AAA AAAIs AAA AAAIs AAA AAAIs AAAAAACurvetypeInverse Very inverse Extremely inverseCoefficient valuesA 0.208 0.090 0.004 B 0.863 0.795 0.638 C 0.800 0.100 0.620 D -0.418 -1.288 1.787 E 0.195 7.958 0.246 b 0.297 0.165 0.09]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="104">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection Tripping curvesDB52590EquationforEPATRB,EPATRCEPATRB For 0,6 A y I0 y 6,4 Atd ( I0 ) = 85, - - - - x ----------386 - - - - ------ T I0 0, 975 0, 8For 6,4 A y Io y 200,0 Atd ( I0 ) = 140--------- x ---------- ,- 213 - - - - - - - -- T 0, 8 I0 0, 975For I0 &amp;gt; 200,0 A td (I0) = TEPATR-C Standard curve (logarithmic scale).DB52591EPATRC For 0,6 A y I0 y 200,0 AT td ( I0 ) = 72 �� I0 ��� 2 /3 x - - - ------2 ,103For I0 &amp;gt; 200,0 A td (I0) = TEPATR-B Standard curve (logarithmic scale).Voltage IDMT tripping curvesEquation for ANSI 27 - undervoltageT td ( I ) = - - - - - - - --------------V ---1 ��� ���- - - ��� ���Vs ���Equation for ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacementT td ( I ) = ----------------------V ��� ---- ��� ��� 1 - -��� Vs ���Voltage/frequency ratio IDMT tripping curvesEquation for ANSI 27 - undervoltageWith G = V/f or U/f1 td ( G ) = - - - - - - - - -- x T ----------------��� - G- ��� 1 ��� p ----��� Gs ���CurvetypeA B CP 0.5 ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection Tripping curvesDB52590EquationforEPATRB,EPATRCEPATRB For 0,6 A y I0 y 6,4 Atd ( I0 ) = 85, - - - - x ----------386 - - - - ------ T I0 0, 975 0, 8For 6,4 A y Io y 200,0 Atd ( I0 ) = 140--------- x ---------- ,- 213 - - - - - - - -- T 0, 8 I0 0, 975For I0 &amp;gt; 200,0 A td (I0) = TEPATR-C Standard curve (logarithmic scale).DB52591EPATRC For 0,6 A y I0 y 200,0 AT td ( I0 ) = 72 AA I0 AAA 2 /3 x - - - ------2 ,103For I0 &amp;gt; 200,0 A td (I0) = TEPATR-B Standard curve (logarithmic scale).Voltage IDMT tripping curvesEquation for ANSI 27 - undervoltageT td ( I ) = - - - - - - - --------------V ---1 AAA AAA- - - AAA AAAVs AAAEquation for ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacementT td ( I ) = ----------------------V AAA ---- AAA AAA 1 - -AAA Vs AAAVoltage/frequency ratio IDMT tripping curvesEquation for ANSI 27 - undervoltageWith G = V/f or U/f1 td ( G ) = - - - - - - - - -- x T ----------------AAA - G- AAA 1 AAA p ----AAA Gs AAACurvetypeA B CP 0.5 ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="105">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection Main characteristicstime delay T or TMS factor The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves) may be set as follows: btime T, operating time at 10 x Is bTMS factor, factor shown as T/b in the equations on the left.Setting of IDMT tripping curves,The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for: bdetection of restriking faults (DT curve) bcoordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve). Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary.DE50275Timerhold32groupsofsettingsPhase-to-phaseandphase-to-earthshort-circuitprotectionEach unit has 2 groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network configuration. The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the communication link. Example of use: normal / backup mode network bgroup A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the utility bgroup B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a backup generator.Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.ThermaloverloadformachinesEach unit has 2 groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating modes. Examplesofuse: btransformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to transformer ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or ONAF) bmotors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors.DE51775Measurement originThe measurement origin needs to be indicated for each unit of the protection functions that may use measurements of different origins. The setting links a measurement to a protection unit and allows the protection units to be distributed optimally among the measurements available according to the sensors connected to the analog inputs. Example:distribution of ANSI 50N/51N function units for transformer earth fault protection: b2 units linked to measured I0 for transformer primary protection b2 units linked to measured I'0 for transformer secondary protection b2 units linked to I0S for protection upstream of the transformer b2 units linked to I'0S for protection downstream of the transformer.SummarytableMeasurement origin: example. 2 groups of settings A et B 2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2 IEC IDMT curves IEEE IDMT curves Usual IDMT curves EPATR curves Voltage IDMT curves Customized curve Timer holdCharacteristics50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC 49RMS Machine 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2 50N/51N 27, 59N, 24 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2Protectionfunction]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Protection Main characteristicstime delay T or TMS factor The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves) may be set as follows: btime T, operating time at 10 x Is bTMS factor, factor shown as T/b in the equations on the left.Setting of IDMT tripping curves,The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for: bdetection of restriking faults (DT curve) bcoordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve). Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary.DE50275Timerhold32groupsofsettingsPhase-to-phaseandphase-to-earthshort-circuitprotectionEach unit has 2 groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network configuration. The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the communication link. Example of use: normal / backup mode network bgroup A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the utility bgroup B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a backup generator.Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.ThermaloverloadformachinesEach unit has 2 groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating modes. Examplesofuse: btransformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to transformer ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or ONAF) bmotors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors.DE51775Measurement originThe measurement origin needs to be indicated for each unit of the protection functions that may use measurements of different origins. The setting links a measurement to a protection unit and allows the protection units to be distributed optimally among the measurements available according to the sensors connected to the analog inputs. Example:distribution of ANSI 50N/51N function units for transformer earth fault protection: b2 units linked to measured I0 for transformer primary protection b2 units linked to measured I'0 for transformer secondary protection b2 units linked to I0S for protection upstream of the transformer b2 units linked to I'0S for protection downstream of the transformer.SummarytableMeasurement origin: example. 2 groups of settings A et B 2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2 IEC IDMT curves IEEE IDMT curves Usual IDMT curves EPATR curves Voltage IDMT curves Customized curve Timer holdCharacteristics50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC 49RMS Machine 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2, 46 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2 50N/51N 27, 59N, 24 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2Protectionfunction]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="106">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsANSI 12 - Overspeed ANSI 14 - UnderspeedSettings00 to 0 % of Wn 0 to 00 % of WnTimedelays to 00 s  to 00 sANSI 21B - UnderimpedanceImpedance Zs 0.05 to 2.00 Vn/Ib Definite time IDMT type A, B or C 1.03 to 2 puANSI 24 - Overfluxing (V/Hz)Tripping curve Gs set pointDefinite time IDMT Phase-to-neutral 220 V to 250 kV 220 V to 250 kV 90 V to 230 V 90 V to 230 V 3 % to 30 % of Vnp sync1 0,05 to 0,5 Hz 5 to 80�� 70 % to 110 % Vnp sync1 10 % to 70 % Vnp sync1 0 to 0.5 s Dead1 AND Live2 Live1 AND Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead20.1 to 20000 s 0.1 to 1250 sANSI 25 - Synchro-checkMeasured voltages Phase-to-phase Ratedprimaryphase-to-phasevoltage Unp sync1 (Vnp sync1 = Unp sync1/3) 220 V to 250 kV Unp sync2 (Vnp sync2 = Unp sync2/3) 220 V to 250 kV Ratedsecondaryphase-to-phasevoltage Uns sync1 90 V to 120 V Uns sync2 90 V to 120 V Synchro-checksetpoints dUs set point 3 % to 30 % of Unp sync1 dfs set point 0.05 to 0.5 Hz dPhi set point 5 to 80�� Us high set point 70 % to 110 % Unp sync1 Us low set point 10 % to 70 % Unp sync1 Othersettings Lead time 0 to 0.5 s Operating modes: no-voltage conditions Dead1 AND Live2 for which coupling is allowed Live1 AND Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead23ANSI 27 - Undervoltage (L-L) or (L-N)Tripping curve Set point Measurement origin Set point and time delay Origine de la mesure Set point and time delay Measurement origin Vs set point (fixed) K set point (adaptive) Positive sequence undervoltage Minimum apparent power Definite time IDMT  to 00 % of Unp Main channels (U) or additional channels (U���)  to 0 % of Unp Main channels (U) or additional channels (U���)  to 00 % of Unp Main channels (U) or additional channels (U���) 0.2 to 20 % of Vntp 0.1 to 0.2 0 to 00 % of Unp 1 to 90 % of Sb (Sb = 3.Un.Ib) 1 to 120 % of Sn (1)0.05 to 300 sANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltage0.05 to 300 sANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage0.05 to 300 sANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third harmonic undervoltage0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 sANSI 32P - Directional active overpower0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 sANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpower5 to 120 % of Sn (1)ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent0.05 to 1 IbANSI 37P - Directional active underpower5 to 100 % of Sn (1)ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoringAlarm set point TS1 Trip set point TS2 Common point: Xa Circle 1: Xb Circle 2: Xc 0 ��C to 180 ��C or 32 ��F to 356 ��F 0 ��C to 180 ��C or 32 ��F to 356 ��F 0.02 Vn/Ib to 0.2 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kW 0.2 Vn/Ib to 1.4 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kW 0.6 Vn/Ib to 3 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kWANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)0.05 to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s(1) Sn = 3.In.Unp]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsANSI 12 - Overspeed ANSI 14 - UnderspeedSettings00 to 0 % of Wn 0 to 00 % of WnTimedelays to 00 s  to 00 sANSI 21B - UnderimpedanceImpedance Zs 0.05 to 2.00 Vn/Ib Definite time IDMT type A, B or C 1.03 to 2 puANSI 24 - Overfluxing (V/Hz)Tripping curve Gs set pointDefinite time IDMT Phase-to-neutral 220 V to 250 kV 220 V to 250 kV 90 V to 230 V 90 V to 230 V 3 % to 30 % of Vnp sync1 0,05 to 0,5 Hz 5 to 80AA 70 % to 110 % Vnp sync1 10 % to 70 % Vnp sync1 0 to 0.5 s Dead1 AND Live2 Live1 AND Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead20.1 to 20000 s 0.1 to 1250 sANSI 25 - Synchro-checkMeasured voltages Phase-to-phase Ratedprimaryphase-to-phasevoltage Unp sync1 (Vnp sync1 = Unp sync1/3) 220 V to 250 kV Unp sync2 (Vnp sync2 = Unp sync2/3) 220 V to 250 kV Ratedsecondaryphase-to-phasevoltage Uns sync1 90 V to 120 V Uns sync2 90 V to 120 V Synchro-checksetpoints dUs set point 3 % to 30 % of Unp sync1 dfs set point 0.05 to 0.5 Hz dPhi set point 5 to 80AA Us high set point 70 % to 110 % Unp sync1 Us low set point 10 % to 70 % Unp sync1 Othersettings Lead time 0 to 0.5 s Operating modes: no-voltage conditions Dead1 AND Live2 for which coupling is allowed Live1 AND Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead23ANSI 27 - Undervoltage (L-L) or (L-N)Tripping curve Set point Measurement origin Set point and time delay Origine de la mesure Set point and time delay Measurement origin Vs set point (fixed) K set point (adaptive) Positive sequence undervoltage Minimum apparent power Definite time IDMT  to 00 % of Unp Main channels (U) or additional channels (UAAA)  to 0 % of Unp Main channels (U) or additional channels (UAAA)  to 00 % of Unp Main channels (U) or additional channels (UAAA) 0.2 to 20 % of Vntp 0.1 to 0.2 0 to 00 % of Unp 1 to 90 % of Sb (Sb = 3.Un.Ib) 1 to 120 % of Sn (1)0.05 to 300 sANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltage0.05 to 300 sANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage0.05 to 300 sANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third harmonic undervoltage0.05 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 sANSI 32P - Directional active overpower0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s 0.05 to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 sANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpower5 to 120 % of Sn (1)ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent0.05 to 1 IbANSI 37P - Directional active underpower5 to 100 % of Sn (1)ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoringAlarm set point TS1 Trip set point TS2 Common point: Xa Circle 1: Xb Circle 2: Xc 0 AAC to 180 AAC or 32 AAF to 356 AAF 0 AAC to 180 AAC or 32 AAF to 356 AAF 0.02 Vn/Ib to 0.2 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kW 0.2 Vn/Ib to 1.4 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kW 0.6 Vn/Ib to 3 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kWANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)0.05 to 300 s 0.1 s to 300 s(1) Sn = 3.In.Unp]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="107">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsTripping curveANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalanceSettingsTimedelaysIs set pointMeasurement origin Set point and time delay Measurement origin Is set pointDefinite time Schneider Electric IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) RI�� (setting constant from 1 to 100) 0.1 to 5 Ib Definite time 0.1 to 5 Ib (Schneider Electric) IDMT 0.1 to 1 Ib (IEC, IEEE) 0.03 to 0.2 Ib (RI��) Main channels (I) or additional channels (I���)  to 0 % of Unp Main channels (I) or additional channels (I���) 0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time LT and LTS time delays0.1 to 300 s 0.1 to 1sANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage0.05 to 300 s3ANSI 48/51LR -Locked rotor / excessive starting time0.5 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 sANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for cablesAdmissible current Time constant T Alarm current Trip current Positioning of the hot tripping curve 1 to 1.73 Ib  to 00 mn 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib 1.02 x trip current to 2 Ib 1 to 2000 minutes (variable range depending on the trip current and current setting) Mode 1 Mode 2 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9 T1: 1 to 600 mn T2: 5 to 600 mn T1: 1 to 600 mn T2: 5 to 600 mnANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for capacitorsCurrent setting Time settingANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for machinesAccounting for negative sequence component Time constant Heating Cooling Alarm and tripping set points (Es1 and Es2) Initial thermal capacity used (Es0) Switching of thermal settings condition Maximum equipment temperature Measurement origin0 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity 0 to 00 % by logic input by Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib 60 to 200 ��C (140 ��F to 392 ��F) Main channels (I) or additional channels (I���) 0.2 to 2 In 0.05 s to 3 s 0.05 to 4 In 0 to 00 % UnpANSI 50BF - Breaker failurePresence of current Operating time Is set point Vs set pointANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energizationT1: 0 to 10 s T2: 0 to 10 sANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentTripping curve Trippingtimedelay Timerhold Definite time DT DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI DT IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IA : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT Customized DT 0.05 to 24 In Definite time 0.05 to 2.4 In IDMT Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) Main channels (I) or additional channels (I���) None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase-to-phase undervoltageIs set point Timer hold Measurement origin ConfirmationInst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 s(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsTripping curveANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalanceSettingsTimedelaysIs set pointMeasurement origin Set point and time delay Measurement origin Is set pointDefinite time Schneider Electric IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) RIAA (setting constant from 1 to 100) 0.1 to 5 Ib Definite time 0.1 to 5 Ib (Schneider Electric) IDMT 0.1 to 1 Ib (IEC, IEEE) 0.03 to 0.2 Ib (RIAA) Main channels (I) or additional channels (IAAA)  to 0 % of Unp Main channels (I) or additional channels (IAAA) 0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time LT and LTS time delays0.1 to 300 s 0.1 to 1sANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage0.05 to 300 s3ANSI 48/51LR -Locked rotor / excessive starting time0.5 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 sANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for cablesAdmissible current Time constant T Alarm current Trip current Positioning of the hot tripping curve 1 to 1.73 Ib  to 00 mn 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib 1.02 x trip current to 2 Ib 1 to 2000 minutes (variable range depending on the trip current and current setting) Mode 1 Mode 2 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9 T1: 1 to 600 mn T2: 5 to 600 mn T1: 1 to 600 mn T2: 5 to 600 mnANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for capacitorsCurrent setting Time settingANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for machinesAccounting for negative sequence component Time constant Heating Cooling Alarm and tripping set points (Es1 and Es2) Initial thermal capacity used (Es0) Switching of thermal settings condition Maximum equipment temperature Measurement origin0 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity 0 to 00 % by logic input by Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib 60 to 200 AAC (140 AAF to 392 AAF) Main channels (I) or additional channels (IAAA) 0.2 to 2 In 0.05 s to 3 s 0.05 to 4 In 0 to 00 % UnpANSI 50BF - Breaker failurePresence of current Operating time Is set point Vs set pointANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energizationT1: 0 to 10 s T2: 0 to 10 sANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrentTripping curve Trippingtimedelay Timerhold Definite time DT DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI DT IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IA : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT Customized DT 0.05 to 24 In Definite time 0.05 to 2.4 In IDMT Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) Main channels (I) or additional channels (IAAA) None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase-to-phase undervoltageIs set point Timer hold Measurement origin ConfirmationInst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 s(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="108">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsTripping curveANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultSettingsTimedelaysIs0 set point Timer hold Measurement originTrippingtimedelay Timerhold Definite time DT DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI DT IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT EPATR-B, EPATR-C DT Customized DT 0.6 to 5 A EPATR-B 0.6 to 5 A EPATR-C 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time 0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) I0 input, I���0 input, sum of phase currents I0S or sum of phase currents I���0S Trippingtimedelay Timerhold Definite time DT DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI DT CEI : SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE : MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IAC : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT Customized DT 0.5 to 24 In Definite time 0.5 to 2.4 In IDMT Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) Main channels (I) or additional channels (I���) 0.05 A to 2 I���n Definite time0.5 to 1 s 0.1 to 3 s Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentTripping curve3Is set point Timer hold Measurement origin Is set point Set point and time delay Measurement origin Tripping curve Set point Measurement origin Is0 set point Measurement originInst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 51C - Capacitor bank unbalance0.1 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 sANSI 59 - Overvoltage (L-L) or (L-N)50 to 150 % of Unp or Vnp Main channels (U) or additional channels (U���) Definite time IDMT  to 0 % of Unp Definite time IDMT  to 0 % of Unp Main channels (U), additional channels (U���) or neutral-point voltage Vnt 0.05 to 0.8 In (In u 20 A) 0.1 to 0.8 In (In &amp;lt; 20 A) Main channels (I, I0) or additional channels (I���, I���0)  to 0  to 0 Period T time delay stop/start  to  h 0 to 90 mnANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement0.05 to 300 s 0.1 to 100 sANSI 64REF - Restricted earth fault differentialANSI 66 - Starts per hourTotal number of starts Number of consecutive starts (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is. Characteristic angle Tripping curveANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent30��, 45��, 60�� Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT(1) RI IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI Customized 0.1 to 24 In 0.1 to 2.4 In Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) Timerholddelay DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT Definite time IDMTIs set point Timer hold (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsTripping curveANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultSettingsTimedelaysIs0 set point Timer hold Measurement originTrippingtimedelay Timerhold Definite time DT DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI DT IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT EPATR-B, EPATR-C DT Customized DT 0.6 to 5 A EPATR-B 0.6 to 5 A EPATR-C 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time 0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) I0 input, IAAA0 input, sum of phase currents I0S or sum of phase currents IAAA0S Trippingtimedelay Timerhold Definite time DT DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) RI DT CEI : SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE : MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IAC : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT Customized DT 0.5 to 24 In Definite time 0.5 to 2.4 In IDMT Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) Main channels (I) or additional channels (IAAA) 0.05 A to 2 IAAAn Definite time0.5 to 1 s 0.1 to 3 s Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrentTripping curve3Is set point Timer hold Measurement origin Is set point Set point and time delay Measurement origin Tripping curve Set point Measurement origin Is0 set point Measurement originInst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 51C - Capacitor bank unbalance0.1 to 300 s 0.05 to 300 sANSI 59 - Overvoltage (L-L) or (L-N)50 to 150 % of Unp or Vnp Main channels (U) or additional channels (UAAA) Definite time IDMT  to 0 % of Unp Definite time IDMT  to 0 % of Unp Main channels (U), additional channels (UAAA) or neutral-point voltage Vnt 0.05 to 0.8 In (In u 20 A) 0.1 to 0.8 In (In &amp;lt; 20 A) Main channels (I, I0) or additional channels (IAAA, IAAA0)  to 0  to 0 Period T time delay stop/start  to  h 0 to 90 mnANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement0.05 to 300 s 0.1 to 100 sANSI 64REF - Restricted earth fault differentialANSI 66 - Starts per hourTotal number of starts Number of consecutive starts (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is. Characteristic angle Tripping curveANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent30AA, 45AA, 60AA Trippingtimedelay Definite time SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT(1) RI IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) IAC: I, VI, EI Customized 0.1 to 24 In 0.1 to 2.4 In Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) Timerholddelay DT DT DT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT or IDMT DT Definite time IDMTIs set point Timer hold (1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="109">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsCharacteristic angle Is0 set point Vs0 set point Memory time Measurement origin Characteristic angleANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, projection (type 1)SettingsTimeDefinite time 0; 0.05 s to 300 s 0; 2 to 80 % of Unp Inst; 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude (type 2)-45��, 0��, 15��, 30��, 45��, 60��, 90�� Trippingtimedelay Timerholddelay Definite time DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT RI DT IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT Customized DT 0.1 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time 0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT  to 0 % of Unp Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) I0 input, I���0 input or sum of phase currents I0S 0�� to 359�� 0�� to 359�� 0.1 A to 30 A 0.005 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Calculated V0 (sum of 3 voltages) Measured V0 (external VT) I0 input or I���0 input 0.1 to 300 s  to 0  to 00 s 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz Main channels (U) or additional channels (U���) 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz Main channels (U) or additional channels (U���) 0.1 to 10 Hz/s 0.05 to 0.5 In (In u 20 A) 0.1 to 0.5 In (In &amp;lt; 20 A) 3 to 18 In1 30 to 100 % In1  to 0 % without, 50 to 100 % 1 to 18 In1  to 0 % 0 to 00 s On / Off Classic Classic On off, 5 to 40 % per phase / total off, 5 to 40 % per phase / total 0.1 to 300 s-45��, 0��, 15��, 30��, 45��, 60��, 90�� 0.01 to 15 In0 (mini. 0,1 A)  to 0 % of Unp T0mem time V0mem validity set point I0 input, I���0 inputCourbe de d��clenchement3Is0 set point Vs0 set point Timer hold Measurement originInst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude directionalized on a tripping sectorDefinite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 sTripping sector start angle Tripping sector end angle Is0 set point CSH core balance CT (2 A rating) 1 A CT Core balance CT + ACE990 (range 1) Vs0 set point Measurement origin to 0 % of Unp 0.6 to 80 % of UnpTime delay of the equal-area criterion Maximum number of power swings Time between 2 power swings Set point and time delay Measurement origin Set point and time delay Measurement originANSI 78PS - Pole slipANSI 81H - Overfrequency ANSI 81L - Underfrequency ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency ANSI 87M - Machine diff��rential ANSI 87T - Transformer differential0.1 to 300 s0.15 to 300 sIds set pointHigh set point Percentage-basedcurve Ids set point Slope Id/It Slope Id/It2 Slope change point Restraintonenergization Current threshold Delay RestraintonCTloss Activity Retenuessurtauxd'harmoniques Choice of restraint High set point Harmonic 2 percentage set point Harmonic  restraint Harmonic 5 percentage set point Harmonic  restraintSelf-adapting Self-adapting On / Of]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80ProtectionSetting rangesFunctionsCharacteristic angle Is0 set point Vs0 set point Memory time Measurement origin Characteristic angleANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, projection (type 1)SettingsTimeDefinite time 0; 0.05 s to 300 s 0; 2 to 80 % of Unp Inst; 0.05 s to 300 sANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude (type 2)-45AA, 0AA, 15AA, 30AA, 45AA, 60AA, 90AA Trippingtimedelay Timerholddelay Definite time DT SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT RI DT IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT Customized DT 0.1 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time 0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT  to 0 % of Unp Definite time (DT; timer hold) IDMT (IDMT; reset time) I0 input, IAAA0 input or sum of phase currents I0S 0AA to 359AA 0AA to 359AA 0.1 A to 30 A 0.005 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Calculated V0 (sum of 3 voltages) Measured V0 (external VT) I0 input or IAAA0 input 0.1 to 300 s  to 0  to 00 s 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz Main channels (U) or additional channels (UAAA) 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz Main channels (U) or additional channels (UAAA) 0.1 to 10 Hz/s 0.05 to 0.5 In (In u 20 A) 0.1 to 0.5 In (In &amp;lt; 20 A) 3 to 18 In1 30 to 100 % In1  to 0 % without, 50 to 100 % 1 to 18 In1  to 0 % 0 to 00 s On / Off Classic Classic On off, 5 to 40 % per phase / total off, 5 to 40 % per phase / total 0.1 to 300 s-45AA, 0AA, 15AA, 30AA, 45AA, 60AA, 90AA 0.01 to 15 In0 (mini. 0,1 A)  to 0 % of Unp T0mem time V0mem validity set point I0 input, IAAA0 inputCourbe de dAAclenchement3Is0 set point Vs0 set point Timer hold Measurement originInst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0 Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s 0.5 s to 20 sANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude directionalized on a tripping sectorDefinite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 sTripping sector start angle Tripping sector end angle Is0 set point CSH core balance CT (2 A rating) 1 A CT Core balance CT + ACE990 (range 1) Vs0 set point Measurement origin to 0 % of Unp 0.6 to 80 % of UnpTime delay of the equal-area criterion Maximum number of power swings Time between 2 power swings Set point and time delay Measurement origin Set point and time delay Measurement originANSI 78PS - Pole slipANSI 81H - Overfrequency ANSI 81L - Underfrequency ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency ANSI 87M - Machine diffAArential ANSI 87T - Transformer differential0.1 to 300 s0.15 to 300 sIds set pointHigh set point Percentage-basedcurve Ids set point Slope Id/It Slope Id/It2 Slope change point Restraintonenergization Current threshold Delay RestraintonCTloss Activity Retenuessurtauxd'harmoniques Choice of restraint High set point Harmonic 2 percentage set point Harmonic  restraint Harmonic 5 percentage set point Harmonic  restraintSelf-adapting Self-adapting On / Of]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="110">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring DescriptionSepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation: bthe main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned. bthe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: vlogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions vcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation vcreation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices vcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages bwith the Logipam option, Sepam can provide the most varied control and monitoring functions, programmed using the SFT2885 programming software that implements the Logipam ladder language. The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases: bacquisition of input data: vresults of protection function processing vexternal logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input / output module vlocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI vremote control orders (TC) received via the Modbus communication link bactual processing of the control and monitoring function butilization of the processing results: vactivation o sent to the facility manager: - by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software - by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link - by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram.PE09Operatingprinciple3Logic inputs and outputsThe number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used. The 5 outputs included in the Sepam series 80 base unit may be extended by adding 1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays. After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set, the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation. A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses.Maximum Sepam series 80 configuration with 3 MES120 modules: 42 inputs and 23 outputs.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring DescriptionSepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation: bthe main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned. bthe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: vlogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions vcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation vcreation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices vcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages bwith the Logipam option, Sepam can provide the most varied control and monitoring functions, programmed using the SFT2885 programming software that implements the Logipam ladder language. The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases: bacquisition of input data: vresults of protection function processing vexternal logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input / output module vlocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI vremote control orders (TC) received via the Modbus communication link bactual processing of the control and monitoring function butilization of the processing results: vactivation o sent to the facility manager: - by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software - by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link - by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram.PE09Operatingprinciple3Logic inputs and outputsThe number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used. The 5 outputs included in the Sepam series 80 base unit may be extended by adding 1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays. After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set, the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation. A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses.Maximum Sepam series 80 configuration with 3 MES120 modules: 42 inputs and 23 outputs.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="111">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsEach Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions for the chosen application. Control of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils: bcircuit breakers with shunt or undervoltage trip coils blatching contactors with shunt trip coils bcontactors with latched orders. The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based on: bprotection functions bbreaking device status data bremote control orders bspecific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser, synchro-check). The function also inhibits breaking device closing, according to the operating conditions.ANSI 94/69 - Circuit breaker/contactor control3DE51889Automatic transfer (AT)This function transfers busbar supply from one source to another. It concerns substations with two incomers, with or without coupling. The function carries out: bautomatic transfer with a break if there is a loss of voltage or a fault bmanual transfer and return to normal operation without a break, with or without synchro-check bcontrol of the coupling circuit breaker (optional) bselection of the normal operating mode bthe necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence, only 1 circuit breaker out of 2 or 2 out of 3 are closed. The function is distributed between the two Sepam units protecting the two incomers. The synchro-check function (ANSI 25) is carried out by the optional MCS025 module, in conjunction with one of the two Sepam units. Load shedding - Automatic restart Automatic load regulation on electrical networks by load shedding followed by automatic restarting of motors connected to the networkLoad sheddingAutomatic transfer with synchro-check controlled by Sepam series 80.The breaking device opens to stop motors in case of: detection of a network voltage sag by the positive sequence undervoltage protection function ANSI 27D receipt of a load shedding order on a logic input. Automaticrestart The motors disconnected as a result of the network voltage sag are automatically restarted: bafter the return of network voltage is detected by the positive sequence undervoltage protection function ANSI 27D band a time delay has run out, so as to stagger motor restarts. Interruption of a synchronous generator���s excitation supply and tripping of the generator breaking device in case of: bdetection of an internal generator fault bdetection of an excitation system fault breceipt of a de-excitation order on a logic input or via the communication link.De-excitatio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsEach Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions for the chosen application. Control of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils: bcircuit breakers with shunt or undervoltage trip coils blatching contactors with shunt trip coils bcontactors with latched orders. The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based on: bprotection functions bbreaking device status data bremote control orders bspecific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser, synchro-check). The function also inhibits breaking device closing, according to the operating conditions.ANSI 94/69 - Circuit breaker/contactor control3DE51889Automatic transfer (AT)This function transfers busbar supply from one source to another. It concerns substations with two incomers, with or without coupling. The function carries out: bautomatic transfer with a break if there is a loss of voltage or a fault bmanual transfer and return to normal operation without a break, with or without synchro-check bcontrol of the coupling circuit breaker (optional) bselection of the normal operating mode bthe necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence, only 1 circuit breaker out of 2 or 2 out of 3 are closed. The function is distributed between the two Sepam units protecting the two incomers. The synchro-check function (ANSI 25) is carried out by the optional MCS025 module, in conjunction with one of the two Sepam units. Load shedding - Automatic restart Automatic load regulation on electrical networks by load shedding followed by automatic restarting of motors connected to the networkLoad sheddingAutomatic transfer with synchro-check controlled by Sepam series 80.The breaking device opens to stop motors in case of: detection of a network voltage sag by the positive sequence undervoltage protection function ANSI 27D receipt of a load shedding order on a logic input. Automaticrestart The motors disconnected as a result of the network voltage sag are automatically restarted: bafter the return of network voltage is detected by the positive sequence undervoltage protection function ANSI 27D band a time delay has run out, so as to stagger motor restarts. Interruption of a synchronous generatorAAAs excitation supply and tripping of the generator breaking device in case of: bdetection of an internal generator fault bdetection of an excitation system fault breceipt of a de-excitation order on a logic input or via the communication link.De-excitatio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="112">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsShutdown of the driving machine, tripping of the breaking device and interruption of the generator excitation supply in case of: bdetection of an internal generator fault breceipt of a genset shutdown order on a logic input or via the communication link.GensetshutdownControlofcapacitorbanksThis function controls 1 to 4 switches for capacitor steps, taking into account all the closing and tripping conditions determined by the ANSI 94/69 function for control of the switchgear. Manual or automatic control, controlled by an external reactive-energy regulator.ANSI 68 - Logic discriminationThis function provides: bperfect tripping discrimination with phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth shortcircuits, on all types of network bfaster tripping of the breakers closest to the source (solving the drawback of conventional time discrimination). Each Sepam is capable of: bsending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC) band receiving blocking inputs which inhibit protection tripping. A saving mechanism ensures continued operation of the protection in the event of a blocking link failure.3ANSI 86 - Latching / acknowledgementThe tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure. (The logic outputs cannot be latched.) All the latched data may be acknowledged: blocally, with the key reset bremotely via a logic input bor via the communication link. The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/ contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 &amp;quot;Lockout relay&amp;quot; function.OutputrelaytestingEach output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output connections and connected switchgear operatio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsShutdown of the driving machine, tripping of the breaking device and interruption of the generator excitation supply in case of: bdetection of an internal generator fault breceipt of a genset shutdown order on a logic input or via the communication link.GensetshutdownControlofcapacitorbanksThis function controls 1 to 4 switches for capacitor steps, taking into account all the closing and tripping conditions determined by the ANSI 94/69 function for control of the switchgear. Manual or automatic control, controlled by an external reactive-energy regulator.ANSI 68 - Logic discriminationThis function provides: bperfect tripping discrimination with phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth shortcircuits, on all types of network bfaster tripping of the breakers closest to the source (solving the drawback of conventional time discrimination). Each Sepam is capable of: bsending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC) band receiving blocking inputs which inhibit protection tripping. A saving mechanism ensures continued operation of the protection in the event of a blocking link failure.3ANSI 86 - Latching / acknowledgementThe tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure. (The logic outputs cannot be latched.) All the latched data may be acknowledged: blocally, with the key reset bremotely via a logic input bor via the communication link. The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/ contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 &amp;quot;Lockout relay&amp;quot; function.OutputrelaytestingEach output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output connections and connected switchgear operatio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="113">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsPE0ANSI 30 - Local annunciationLED indication b2 LEDs, on the front and back of Sepam, indicate the unit operating status, and are visible when a Sepam without a UMI is mounted inside the LV compartment, with access to connectors: vgreen LED ON: Sepam on vred &amp;quot;key&amp;quot; LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal failure) b9 yellow LEDs on the Sepam front panel: vpre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels vthe SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels. Local annunciation on Sepam display Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam���s advanced UMI or on the mimic-based UMI by: bmessages on the display unit, available in 2 languages: vEnglish, factory-set messages, not modifiable vlocal language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen when Sepam is set up) bthe lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment, which is set using SFT2841. Alarmprocessing bwhen an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the related LED goes on. The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the SFT2841 &amp;quot;Alarms&amp;quot; screen. bto clear the message from the display, press the key bafter the fault has disappeared, press the key: the light goes off and Sepam is resetSFT2841: alarm history.Local indications on the Sepam front panel.PE03bthe list of alarm messages remains accessible ( pressing the clear key.key) and may be cleared ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Description of predefined functionsPE0ANSI 30 - Local annunciationLED indication b2 LEDs, on the front and back of Sepam, indicate the unit operating status, and are visible when a Sepam without a UMI is mounted inside the LV compartment, with access to connectors: vgreen LED ON: Sepam on vred &amp;quot;key&amp;quot; LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal failure) b9 yellow LEDs on the Sepam front panel: vpre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels vthe SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels. Local annunciation on Sepam display Events and alarms may be indicated locally on SepamAAAs advanced UMI or on the mimic-based UMI by: bmessages on the display unit, available in 2 languages: vEnglish, factory-set messages, not modifiable vlocal language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen when Sepam is set up) bthe lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment, which is set using SFT2841. Alarmprocessing bwhen an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the related LED goes on. The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the SFT2841 &amp;quot;Alarms&amp;quot; screen. bto clear the message from the display, press the key bafter the fault has disappeared, press the key: the light goes off and Sepam is resetSFT2841: alarm history.Local indications on the Sepam front panel.PE03bthe list of alarm messages remains accessible ( pressing the clear key.key) and may be cleared ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="114">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Control and monitoring Description of predefined functionsPE50486Local control using the mimic-based UMISepam control mode A key-switch on the mimic-based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode. Three modes are available : Remote, Local or Test. In Remote mode: b remote control orders are taken into account b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open order. In Local mode: b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open order b local control orders are enabled. Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventivemaintenance operations: b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode b no remote indications (TS) are sent via the communication link.Local control using the mimic-based UMI.The Logipam programming software can be used to customize control-mode processing. View device status on the animated mimic diagram For safe local control of devices, all information required by operators can be displayed simultaneously on the mimic-based UMI: b single-line diagram of the equipment controlled by Sepam, with an animated, graphic indication of device status in real time b the desired current, voltage and power measurements. The local-control mimic diagram can be customized by adapting one of the supplied, predefined diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch. Local control of devices All the devices for which opening and closing are controlled by Sepam can be controlled locally using the mimic-based UMI. The most common interlock conditions can be defined be logic equations or by Logipam. The sure and simple operating procedure is the following: b select the device to be controlled by moving the selection window using the keys or . Sepam checks whether local control of the selected device is authorized and informs the operator (selection window with a solid line) b selection confirmation for the device to be controlled by pressing the key (the selection window flashes) b device control by pressing: v key : open order v or key : close order.31]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Control and monitoring Description of predefined functionsPE50486Local control using the mimic-based UMISepam control mode A key-switch on the mimic-based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode. Three modes are available : Remote, Local or Test. In Remote mode: b remote control orders are taken into account b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open order. In Local mode: b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open order b local control orders are enabled. Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventivemaintenance operations: b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode b no remote indications (TS) are sent via the communication link.Local control using the mimic-based UMI.The Logipam programming software can be used to customize control-mode processing. View device status on the animated mimic diagram For safe local control of devices, all information required by operators can be displayed simultaneously on the mimic-based UMI: b single-line diagram of the equipment controlled by Sepam, with an animated, graphic indication of device status in real time b the desired current, voltage and power measurements. The local-control mimic diagram can be customized by adapting one of the supplied, predefined diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch. Local control of devices All the devices for which opening and closing are controlled by Sepam can be controlled locally using the mimic-based UMI. The most common interlock conditions can be defined be logic equations or by Logipam. The sure and simple operating procedure is the following: b select the device to be controlled by moving the selection window using the keys or . Sepam checks whether local control of the selected device is authorized and informs the operator (selection window with a solid line) b selection confirmation for the device to be controlled by pressing the key (the selection window flashes) b device control by pressing: v key : open order v or key : close order.31]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="115">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareThe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: blogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions bcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation bcreation of custom mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices bcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages.OperatingprincipleDE518903PE09The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to: bcomplete protection function processing: vadditional interlocking vconditional inhibition/validation of functions vetc. badapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control sequences, etc. Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the Logipam programming software. A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from: bprotection functions blogic inputs blocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI bremote control orders using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as time delays, bistables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically. The result of an equation may then be: bassigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication butilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit breaking device closing bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.Logic equation editorSFT2841: logic equation edito]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareThe predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options: blogic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring functions bcreation of personalized messages for local annunciation bcreation of custom mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices bcustomization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays, LEDs and annunciation messages.OperatingprincipleDE518903PE09The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to: bcomplete protection function processing: vadditional interlocking vconditional inhibition/validation of functions vetc. badapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control sequences, etc. Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the Logipam programming software. A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from: bprotection functions blogic inputs blocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI bremote control orders using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as time delays, bistables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically. The result of an equation may then be: bassigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication butilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit breaking device closing bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.Logic equation editorSFT2841: logic equation edito]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="116">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareThe alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841 software tool. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned via the control matrix for display: bon the Sepam display bin the SFT2841 &amp;quot;Alarms&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Alarm History&amp;quot; screens.PersonalizedalarmandoperatingmessagesPE09Local-control mimic diagramThe mimic-diagram editor in the SFT2841 software can be used to create a singleline diagram corresponding exactly to the equipment controlled by Sepam. Two procedures are available: brework a diagram taken from the library of standard diagrams in the SFT2841 software bcreation of an original diagram : graphic creation of the single-line diagram, positioning of symbols for the animated devices, insertion of measurements, text, etc. Creation of a customized mimic diagram is made easy: blibrary of predefined symbols: circuit breakers, earthing switch, etc. bcreation of personalized symbols.SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.3PE090The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from: bprotection functions bcontrol and monitoring functions blogic inputs blogic equations or Logipam program to the following output data: boutput relays b9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam bmessages for local annunciation btriggering of disturbance recording.ControlmatrixSFT2841: control matri]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 softwareThe alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841 software tool. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned via the control matrix for display: bon the Sepam display bin the SFT2841 &amp;quot;Alarms&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Alarm History&amp;quot; screens.PersonalizedalarmandoperatingmessagesPE09Local-control mimic diagramThe mimic-diagram editor in the SFT2841 software can be used to create a singleline diagram corresponding exactly to the equipment controlled by Sepam. Two procedures are available: brework a diagram taken from the library of standard diagrams in the SFT2841 software bcreation of an original diagram : graphic creation of the single-line diagram, positioning of symbols for the animated devices, insertion of measurements, text, etc. Creation of a customized mimic diagram is made easy: blibrary of predefined symbols: circuit breakers, earthing switch, etc. bcreation of personalized symbols.SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.3PE090The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from: bprotection functions bcontrol and monitoring functions blogic inputs blogic equations or Logipam program to the following output data: boutput relays b9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam bmessages for local annunciation btriggering of disturbance recording.ControlmatrixSFT2841: control matri]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="117">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Customized functions using LogipamThe SFT2885 programming software (Logipam) can be used to enhance Sepam by programming specific control and monitoring functions. Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080 option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by Logipam.OperatingprincipleDE518913PE0The Logipam SFT2885 programming software can be used to: badapt predefined control and monitoring functions bprogram specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required by the application. It is made up of: ba ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program complex control functions ba simulator for complete program debugging ba code generator to run the program on Sepam. The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete file can be printed. Offering more possibilities than the logic-equation editor, Logipam can be used to create the following functions : bspecific automatic transfer functions bmotor starting sequences. It is not possible to combine the functions programmed by Logipam with functions adapted by the logic-equation editor in a given Sepam. The Logipam program uses the input data from: bprotection functions blogic inputs bremote control orders blocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI. The result of Logipam processing may then be: bassigned to a logic output, directly or via the control matrix bassigned to a LED or message via the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication bused by the predefined control and monitoring functions bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.Logipam programming softwareSFT2885: Logipam programming softwar]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions Sepam series 80Controlandmonitoring Customized functions using LogipamThe SFT2885 programming software (Logipam) can be used to enhance Sepam by programming specific control and monitoring functions. Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080 option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by Logipam.OperatingprincipleDE518913PE0The Logipam SFT2885 programming software can be used to: badapt predefined control and monitoring functions bprogram specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required by the application. It is made up of: ba ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program complex control functions ba simulator for complete program debugging ba code generator to run the program on Sepam. The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete file can be printed. Offering more possibilities than the logic-equation editor, Logipam can be used to create the following functions : bspecific automatic transfer functions bmotor starting sequences. It is not possible to combine the functions programmed by Logipam with functions adapted by the logic-equation editor in a given Sepam. The Logipam program uses the input data from: bprotection functions blogic inputs bremote control orders blocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI. The result of Logipam processing may then be: bassigned to a logic output, directly or via the control matrix bassigned to a LED or message via the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication bused by the predefined control and monitoring functions bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.Logipam programming softwareSFT2885: Logipam programming softwar]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="118">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationBase units are defined according to the following characteristics: b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI) b working language b type of base unit connector b type of current sensor connector b type of voltage sensor connector.Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam series 80 base units: bmimic-based UMI badvanced UMI. The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions. A Sepam series 80 with a remote advanced UMI is made up of: ba bare base unit without any UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment ba remote advanced UMI (DSM303) vfor flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for the facility manager vfor connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord. The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on page 162.User-Machine InterfacePE0All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand: bdisplay of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/or in bar graphs bdisplay of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam resetting bdisplay of the list of activated protection functions and the main settings of major protection functions badaptation of activated protection function set points or time delays in response to new operating constraints bdisplay of Sepam and remote module versions boutput testing and logic input status display bdisplay of Logipam data: status of variables, timers bentry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings.Sepam series 80 base unit with integrated advanced UMI.Comprehensivedataforfacilitymanagers3PE0The mimic-based UMI provides the same functions as the advanced UMI as well as local control of devices: bselection of the Sepam control mode bview device status on the animated mimic diagram blocal opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam. bkeypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation bmenu-guided access to data bgraphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol bexcellent display quality under all lighting conditions : automatic contrast setting and backlit screen (user activated).Local control of devices using the mimic-based UMIErgonomicdatapresentationSepam series 80 base unit with mimic-based UMI.PE0All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI or on the mimic-based UMI are available in 2 languages: bEnglish, the default working language band a second language, which may be vFrench vSpanish vanother &amp;quot;local&amp;quot; language. Please contact us regarding local language customization.WorkinglanguageConnectionofSepamtotheparametersettingtoolCustomized Chinese advanced UMI.The SFT2841 parameter setting tool is required for Sepam protection and parameter setting. A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the RS 232 communication port on the front of the uni]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationBase units are defined according to the following characteristics: b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI) b working language b type of base unit connector b type of current sensor connector b type of voltage sensor connector.Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam series 80 base units: bmimic-based UMI badvanced UMI. The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions. A Sepam series 80 with a remote advanced UMI is made up of: ba bare base unit without any UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment ba remote advanced UMI (DSM303) vfor flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for the facility manager vfor connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord. The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on page 162.User-Machine InterfacePE0All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand: bdisplay of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/or in bar graphs bdisplay of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam resetting bdisplay of the list of activated protection functions and the main settings of major protection functions badaptation of activated protection function set points or time delays in response to new operating constraints bdisplay of Sepam and remote module versions boutput testing and logic input status display bdisplay of Logipam data: status of variables, timers bentry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings.Sepam series 80 base unit with integrated advanced UMI.Comprehensivedataforfacilitymanagers3PE0The mimic-based UMI provides the same functions as the advanced UMI as well as local control of devices: bselection of the Sepam control mode bview device status on the animated mimic diagram blocal opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam. bkeypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation bmenu-guided access to data bgraphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol bexcellent display quality under all lighting conditions : automatic contrast setting and backlit screen (user activated).Local control of devices using the mimic-based UMIErgonomicdatapresentationSepam series 80 base unit with mimic-based UMI.PE0All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI or on the mimic-based UMI are available in 2 languages: bEnglish, the default working language band a second language, which may be vFrench vSpanish vanother &amp;quot;local&amp;quot; language. Please contact us regarding local language customization.WorkinglanguageConnectionofSepamtotheparametersettingtoolCustomized Chinese advanced UMI.The SFT2841 parameter setting tool is required for Sepam protection and parameter setting. A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the RS 232 communication port on the front of the uni]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="119">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationBaseunitPE00Withremote advanced UMISelectionguidePE0Withintegrated advanced UMIPE0Withmimic-based UMI3FunctionsLocal indication Metering and diagnosis data Alarms and operating messages List of activated protection functions Main protection settings Version of Sepam and remote modules Status of logic inputs Logipam data Switchgear status on the animated mimic diagram Phasor diagram of currents or voltages Local control Alarm acknowledgement Sepam reset Output testing Selection of Sepam control mode Device open/close order b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bCharacteristicsScreen Size Automatic contrast setting Backlit screen Keypad Number of keys Control-mode switch LEDs Sepam operating status bbase unit: 2 LEDs visible on back bremote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs visible on front 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI bbare base unit, mounted at the back of the compartment using the AMT880 mounting plate bDSM303 remote advanced UMI module , flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and connected to the base unit with the CCA77x prefabricated cord 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 9 9  Remote / Local / Test 128 x 64 pixels b b 128 x 64 pixels b b 128 x 240 pixels b bIndication LEDs9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicle9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicleMounti]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationBaseunitPE00Withremote advanced UMISelectionguidePE0Withintegrated advanced UMIPE0Withmimic-based UMI3FunctionsLocal indication Metering and diagnosis data Alarms and operating messages List of activated protection functions Main protection settings Version of Sepam and remote modules Status of logic inputs Logipam data Switchgear status on the animated mimic diagram Phasor diagram of currents or voltages Local control Alarm acknowledgement Sepam reset Output testing Selection of Sepam control mode Device open/close order b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bCharacteristicsScreen Size Automatic contrast setting Backlit screen Keypad Number of keys Control-mode switch LEDs Sepam operating status bbase unit: 2 LEDs visible on back bremote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs visible on front 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI bbare base unit, mounted at the back of the compartment using the AMT880 mounting plate bDSM303 remote advanced UMI module , flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and connected to the base unit with the CCA77x prefabricated cord 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 9 9  Remote / Local / Test 128 x 64 pixels b b 128 x 64 pixels b b 128 x 240 pixels b bIndication LEDs9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicle9 LEDs on front Flush mounted on front of cubicleMounti]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="120">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationPE0HardwarecharacteristicsThe cartridge contains all the Sepam characteristics: ball Sepam protection and parameter settings ball the metering and protection functions required for the application bpredefined control functions bfunctions customized by control matrix or logic equations bfunctions programmed by Logipam (optional) bpersonalized local-control mimic diagram baccumulated energies and switchgear diagnosis values bworking languages, customized and otherwise. It may be made tamper-proof by lead sealing. It is removable and easy to access on the front panel of Sepam to reduce maintenance time. If a base unit fails, simply: bswitch off Sepam and unplug connectors bretrieve original cartridge breplace the faulty base unit by a spare base unit (without cartridge) bload the original cartridge into the new base unit bplug in the connectors and switch Sepam on again: Sepam is operational, with all its standard and customized functions, without requiring any reloading of protection and parameter settings. Standard lithium battery, 1/2 AA format, 3.6 Volts. It allows the following data to be stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage: btime-tagged event tables bdisturbance recording data bpeak demands, tripping context, etc bdate and time. The battery presence and charge are monitored by Sepam. The main data (e.g. protection and parameter settings) are saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage, regardless of the state of the battery.RemovablememorycartridgeSepam series 80 memory cartridge and backup battery.3BackupbatteryAuxiliarypowersupply FiverelayoutputsDC power supply voltage from 24 to 250 V DC. The 5 relay outputs O1 to O5 on the base unit must be connected to connector A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841 software. O1 to O4 are 4 control outputs with one NO contact, used by default for the switchgear control function: bO1: switchgear tripping bO2: switchgear closing inhibition bO3: switchgear closing bO4: available. O5 is an indication output used by default for the watchdog function and has two contacts, one NC and one NO]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationPE0HardwarecharacteristicsThe cartridge contains all the Sepam characteristics: ball Sepam protection and parameter settings ball the metering and protection functions required for the application bpredefined control functions bfunctions customized by control matrix or logic equations bfunctions programmed by Logipam (optional) bpersonalized local-control mimic diagram baccumulated energies and switchgear diagnosis values bworking languages, customized and otherwise. It may be made tamper-proof by lead sealing. It is removable and easy to access on the front panel of Sepam to reduce maintenance time. If a base unit fails, simply: bswitch off Sepam and unplug connectors bretrieve original cartridge breplace the faulty base unit by a spare base unit (without cartridge) bload the original cartridge into the new base unit bplug in the connectors and switch Sepam on again: Sepam is operational, with all its standard and customized functions, without requiring any reloading of protection and parameter settings. Standard lithium battery, 1/2 AA format, 3.6 Volts. It allows the following data to be stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage: btime-tagged event tables bdisturbance recording data bpeak demands, tripping context, etc bdate and time. The battery presence and charge are monitored by Sepam. The main data (e.g. protection and parameter settings) are saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage, regardless of the state of the battery.RemovablememorycartridgeSepam series 80 memory cartridge and backup battery.3BackupbatteryAuxiliarypowersupply FiverelayoutputsDC power supply voltage from 24 to 250 V DC. The 5 relay outputs O1 to O5 on the base unit must be connected to connector A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841 software. O1 to O4 are 4 control outputs with one NO contact, used by default for the switchgear control function: bO1: switchgear tripping bO2: switchgear closing inhibition bO3: switchgear closing bO4: available. O5 is an indication output used by default for the watchdog function and has two contacts, one NC and one NO]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="121">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationMain connector and voltage and residual current input connectorA choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors: bCCA620 screw-type connectors bor CCA622 ring lug connectors. The presence of the connector is monitored. CCT640 connector, removable and screw-lockable. The presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored.PE0Connector for additional voltage inputs (Sepam B83) Phasecurrentinputconnectors3Current sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to type of sensors used: bCCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers bor CCA671 connector for LPCT sensors. The presence of these connectors is monitored.Mounting accessoriesSpringclips8 spring clips are supplied with the base unit to flush-mount Sepam in mounting plates 1.5 to 6 mm thick. Simple, tool-free installation.AMT880 mounting plateIt is used to mount a Sepam without UMI inside the compartment with access to connectors on the rear panel. Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module (DSM303).AMT820 blanking plateIt fills in the space left when a standard model Sepam 2000 is replaced by a Sepam series 80.SparebaseunitsThe following spares are available to replace faulty base units: bbase units with or without UMI, without cartridge or connectors ball types of standard cartridges, with or without the Logipam option.AMT852 lead sealing accessoryThe AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized modification of the settings of Sepam series 80 units with integrated advanced UMIs. The accessory includes: ba lead-sealable cover plate bthe screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI of the Sepam unit.Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of Sepam series 80 units Contact us to determine the serial number of the device on wich you can fit the lead sealing accessory]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit PresentationMain connector and voltage and residual current input connectorA choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors: bCCA620 screw-type connectors bor CCA622 ring lug connectors. The presence of the connector is monitored. CCT640 connector, removable and screw-lockable. The presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored.PE0Connector for additional voltage inputs (Sepam B83) Phasecurrentinputconnectors3Current sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to type of sensors used: bCCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers bor CCA671 connector for LPCT sensors. The presence of these connectors is monitored.Mounting accessoriesSpringclips8 spring clips are supplied with the base unit to flush-mount Sepam in mounting plates 1.5 to 6 mm thick. Simple, tool-free installation.AMT880 mounting plateIt is used to mount a Sepam without UMI inside the compartment with access to connectors on the rear panel. Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module (DSM303).AMT820 blanking plateIt fills in the space left when a standard model Sepam 2000 is replaced by a Sepam series 80.SparebaseunitsThe following spares are available to replace faulty base units: bbase units with or without UMI, without cartridge or connectors ball types of standard cartridges, with or without the Logipam option.AMT852 lead sealing accessoryThe AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized modification of the settings of Sepam series 80 units with integrated advanced UMIs. The accessory includes: ba lead-sealable cover plate bthe screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI of the Sepam unit.Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of Sepam series 80 units Contact us to determine the serial number of the device on wich you can fit the lead sealing accessory]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="122">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit DescriptionFront panel with advanced UMI1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Label identifying the indication LEDs. Graphical LCD screen. Display of measurements. Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data. Display of alarm messages. Sepam reset (or confirm data entry). Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or move cursor up). LED test (or move cursor down). Display and adaptation of activated protection settings. Display of Sepam and Logipam data. Entry of 2 passwords. RS 232 PC connection port.DE52687316 Backup battery. 17 Memory cartridge. 18 Door.Front panel with mimic-based UMI1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Graphical LCD screen. Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. Local close order. Local open order. Label identifying the indication LEDs. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Move cursor up. Confirm data entry. Move cursor down. RS 232 PC connection port. Transparent door. Entry of 2 passwords. Mimic-based UMI display. Sepam reset. Display of alarm messages. Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms. Display of switchgear and network diagnosis data (or LED test). Display and adaptation of activated protection settings. Display of measurements. Display of Sepam and Logipam data. Three-position key switch to select Sepam control mode.DE5268823 Backup battery. 24 Memory cartridge. 25 Doo]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit DescriptionFront panel with advanced UMI1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Label identifying the indication LEDs. Graphical LCD screen. Display of measurements. Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data. Display of alarm messages. Sepam reset (or confirm data entry). Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or move cursor up). LED test (or move cursor down). Display and adaptation of activated protection settings. Display of Sepam and Logipam data. Entry of 2 passwords. RS 232 PC connection port.DE52687316 Backup battery. 17 Memory cartridge. 18 Door.Front panel with mimic-based UMI1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Graphical LCD screen. Green LED: Sepam on. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. Local close order. Local open order. Label identifying the indication LEDs. 9 yellow indication LEDs. Move cursor up. Confirm data entry. Move cursor down. RS 232 PC connection port. Transparent door. Entry of 2 passwords. Mimic-based UMI display. Sepam reset. Display of alarm messages. Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms. Display of switchgear and network diagnosis data (or LED test). Display and adaptation of activated protection settings. Display of measurements. Display of Sepam and Logipam data. Three-position key switch to select Sepam control mode.DE5268823 Backup battery. 24 Memory cartridge. 25 Doo]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="123">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit DescriptionRearpanel1 2 3 4 5 Base unit. 8 fixing points for 4 spring clips. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. Green LED: Sepam on. Gasket. b 24 V DC to 250 V DC auxiliary supply b 5 relay outputs.DE51781A 20-pin connector for:B Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs. B b Sepam T87, M87, M88, G87, G88:3connector for 3 phase current I'1, I'2, I'3 inputs b Sepam B83: connector for v 3 phase voltage V'1, V'2, V'3 inputs v 1 residual voltage V���0 input. b Sepam C86: connector for capacitor unbalance current inputs.C1 Modbus communication port 1. C2 Modbus communication port 2. D1 Remote module connection port 1. D2 Remote module connection port 2. E 20-pin connector for:b phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs b 1 residual voltage V0 input. b 2 residual current I0, I'0 inputs.F Spare port. H Connector for 1st MES120 input/output module. H Connector for 2nd MES120 input/output module. H Connector for 3rd MES120 input/output module. t Functional eart]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit DescriptionRearpanel1 2 3 4 5 Base unit. 8 fixing points for 4 spring clips. Red LED: Sepam unavailable. Green LED: Sepam on. Gasket. b 24 V DC to 250 V DC auxiliary supply b 5 relay outputs.DE51781A 20-pin connector for:B Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs. B b Sepam T87, M87, M88, G87, G88:3connector for 3 phase current I'1, I'2, I'3 inputs b Sepam B83: connector for v 3 phase voltage V'1, V'2, V'3 inputs v 1 residual voltage VAAA0 input. b Sepam C86: connector for capacitor unbalance current inputs.C1 Modbus communication port 1. C2 Modbus communication port 2. D1 Remote module connection port 1. D2 Remote module connection port 2. E 20-pin connector for:b phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs b 1 residual voltage V0 input. b 2 residual current I0, I'0 inputs.F Spare port. H Connector for 1st MES120 input/output module. H Connector for 2nd MES120 input/output module. H Connector for 3rd MES120 input/output module. t Functional eart]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="124">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit Technical characteristicsWeightMinimum weight (base unit without MES120) Maximum weight (base unit with 3 MES120)Base unit with advanced UMI2.4 kg (5.29 lb) 4.0 kg (8.82 lb)Base unit with mimic-based UMI3.0 kg (6.61 lb) 4.6 kg (10.1 lb)SensorinputsInput impedance ConsumptionPhasecurrentinputsContinuous thermal withstand  second overload Input impedance Consommation Continuous thermal withstand 1-second overload Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groupsVoltage inputs&amp;lt; 0.02 W &amp;lt; 0.02 VA (1 A CT) &amp;lt; 0.5 VA (5 A CT) 4 In 100 In1Aor5ACTPhase&amp;gt; 100 k W &amp;lt; 0.015 VA (100 V VT) 240 V 480 V EnhancedResidual&amp;gt; 100 k W &amp;lt; 0.015 VA (100 V VT) 240 V 480 V EnhancedRelayoutputs3100 to 240 V AC 8AVoltageControl relay outputs O1 to O4 and 0 x 0.1 (1)DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Resistive load Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.324/48 V DC 8A 8A/ 4A 6A/ 2A 4A/ 1A127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 AContinuous current Breaking capacity8A 5A &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms EnhancedMaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups VoltageAnnunciationrelayoutputO5DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.324/48 V DC 2A 2A/ 1A Enhanced127 V DC 2A 0.5 A220 V DC 2A 0.15 A 100 to 240 V AC 2A 1AContinuous current Breaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Voltage Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable ripple content Acceptable momentary outages Format Service lifePowersupply1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V 10 years Sepam energized 8 years Sepam not energized (1) Relay outputs comptying with clause 6.7 of standard C 97.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations)Battery24 to 250 V DC &amp;lt;  W &amp;lt; 10 A 10 ms  % 00 ms-20 % / +10]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit Technical characteristicsWeightMinimum weight (base unit without MES120) Maximum weight (base unit with 3 MES120)Base unit with advanced UMI2.4 kg (5.29 lb) 4.0 kg (8.82 lb)Base unit with mimic-based UMI3.0 kg (6.61 lb) 4.6 kg (10.1 lb)SensorinputsInput impedance ConsumptionPhasecurrentinputsContinuous thermal withstand  second overload Input impedance Consommation Continuous thermal withstand 1-second overload Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groupsVoltage inputs&amp;lt; 0.02 W &amp;lt; 0.02 VA (1 A CT) &amp;lt; 0.5 VA (5 A CT) 4 In 100 In1Aor5ACTPhase&amp;gt; 100 k W &amp;lt; 0.015 VA (100 V VT) 240 V 480 V EnhancedResidual&amp;gt; 100 k W &amp;lt; 0.015 VA (100 V VT) 240 V 480 V EnhancedRelayoutputs3100 to 240 V AC 8AVoltageControl relay outputs O1 to O4 and 0 x 0.1 (1)DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Resistive load Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.324/48 V DC 8A 8A/ 4A 6A/ 2A 4A/ 1A127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 AContinuous current Breaking capacity8A 5A &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms EnhancedMaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups VoltageAnnunciationrelayoutputO5DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.324/48 V DC 2A 2A/ 1A Enhanced127 V DC 2A 0.5 A220 V DC 2A 0.15 A 100 to 240 V AC 2A 1AContinuous current Breaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Voltage Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable ripple content Acceptable momentary outages Format Service lifePowersupply1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V 10 years Sepam energized 8 years Sepam not energized (1) Relay outputs comptying with clause 6.7 of standard C 97.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations)Battery24 to 250 V DC &amp;lt;  W &amp;lt; 10 A 10 ms  % 00 ms-20 % / +10]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="125">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit Environmental characteristicsElectromagneticcompatibilityDisturbing field emission Conducted disturbance emissionEmissiontestsStandardIEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3 ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 60255-22-2 ANSI C37.90.3 IEC 61000-4-8 IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-1 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-11Level / ClassA AValueImmunity to radiated fieldsImmunitytests���RadiateddisturbancesIIIElectrostatic discharge Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency Immunity to conducted RF disturbances Fast transient burstsImmunitytests���Conducteddisturbances III A and B IV10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz 35 V/m; 25 MHz - 1 GHz 8 kV air; 6 kV contact 8 kV air; 4 kV contact 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s) (4) 10 V 4 kV; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV; 5 kHz 4 kV; 2.5 kHz 4 kV; 2.5 kHz 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM 2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM 2 kV CM; 1 kV DM 100 % during 100 ms31 MHz damped oscillating wave 100 MHz damped oscillating wave Surges Voltage interruptionsIIIMechanical robustnessInoperationStandardLevel / Class Fc  ValueVibrationsShocks EarthquakesIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3Vibrations Shocks JoltsDe-energized1 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 2 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = ��1 mm 10 Gn / 11 ms 2 Gn (horizontal axes) 1 Gn (vertical axes) 2 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 27 Gn / 11 ms 20 Gn / 16 msClimaticwithstandInoperationIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-2Standard  Level / ClassAd Bd Cab Kb/2ValueExposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heat Salt mist Influence of corrosion/Gas test 2 Influence of corrosion/Gas test 4IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-52 IEC 60068-2-60 IEC 60068-2-60Temperature variation with specified variation rate Exposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heatInstorage (3)-25 ��C +70 ��C 10 days; 93 % RH ; 40 ��C 6 days 21 days; 75 % RH; 25 ��C; 0.5 ppm HS; 1 ppm SO 21 days; 75 % HR; 25 ��C; 0.01 ppm HS; 0.2 ppm SO; 0.2 ppm NO; 0.01 ppm Cl -25 ��C at +70 ��C; 5 ��C/min -25 ��C +70 ��C 56 days; 93 % RH; 40 ��C 6 days; 95 % RH; 55 ��CSafetyFront panel tightness Fire withstandEnclosuresafetytestsStandardIEC 60068-2-14 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-30Nb Ab Bb Cab DbLevel / ClassIP52 Type 12Value1.2/50 ��s impulse wave P ower frequency dielectric withstandElectricalsafetytestsIEC 60529 NEMA IEC 60695-2-11 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 ANSI C37.90Other panels IP20 650 ��C with glow wire 5 kV (1) 2 kV 1mn (2) 1 kV 1 mn (indication output) 1.5 kV 1 mn (control output)eEuropeandirectives: b 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive v 92/31/EEC Amendment v 93/68/EEC Amendment b 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive v 93/68/EEC Amendment UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 n�� 14-95 File E CSA CSA C22.2 n�� 14-95 / n�� 94-M91 / n�� 0.17-00 File 0 (1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode. (2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms. (3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing. (4) Iso &amp;gt; 0.1 Ino for the 50n/51n and 67n protection functions, with I0 calculated as the sum of the phase currents. EN 50263 harmonized standardCertificati]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit Environmental characteristicsElectromagneticcompatibilityDisturbing field emission Conducted disturbance emissionEmissiontestsStandardIEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-25 EN 0 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3 ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 60255-22-2 ANSI C37.90.3 IEC 61000-4-8 IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-1 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-11Level / ClassA AValueImmunity to radiated fieldsImmunitytestsAAARadiateddisturbancesIIIElectrostatic discharge Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency Immunity to conducted RF disturbances Fast transient burstsImmunitytestsAAAConducteddisturbances III A and B IV10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz 35 V/m; 25 MHz - 1 GHz 8 kV air; 6 kV contact 8 kV air; 4 kV contact 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s) (4) 10 V 4 kV; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV; 5 kHz 4 kV; 2.5 kHz 4 kV; 2.5 kHz 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM 2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM 2 kV CM; 1 kV DM 100 % during 100 ms31 MHz damped oscillating wave 100 MHz damped oscillating wave Surges Voltage interruptionsIIIMechanical robustnessInoperationStandardLevel / Class Fc  ValueVibrationsShocks EarthquakesIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3Vibrations Shocks JoltsDe-energized1 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 2 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = AA1 mm 10 Gn / 11 ms 2 Gn (horizontal axes) 1 Gn (vertical axes) 2 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 27 Gn / 11 ms 20 Gn / 16 msClimaticwithstandInoperationIEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-2Standard  Level / ClassAd Bd Cab Kb/2ValueExposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heat Salt mist Influence of corrosion/Gas test 2 Influence of corrosion/Gas test 4IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-52 IEC 60068-2-60 IEC 60068-2-60Temperature variation with specified variation rate Exposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heatInstorage (3)-25 AAC +70 AAC 10 days; 93 % RH ; 40 AAC 6 days 21 days; 75 % RH; 25 AAC; 0.5 ppm HS; 1 ppm SO 21 days; 75 % HR; 25 AAC; 0.01 ppm HS; 0.2 ppm SO; 0.2 ppm NO; 0.01 ppm Cl -25 AAC at +70 AAC; 5 AAC/min -25 AAC +70 AAC 56 days; 93 % RH; 40 AAC 6 days; 95 % RH; 55 AACSafetyFront panel tightness Fire withstandEnclosuresafetytestsStandardIEC 60068-2-14 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-30Nb Ab Bb Cab DbLevel / ClassIP52 Type 12Value1.2/50 AAs impulse wave P ower frequency dielectric withstandElectricalsafetytestsIEC 60529 NEMA IEC 60695-2-11 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 ANSI C37.90Other panels IP20 650 AAC with glow wire 5 kV (1) 2 kV 1mn (2) 1 kV 1 mn (indication output) 1.5 kV 1 mn (control output)eEuropeandirectives: b 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive v 92/31/EEC Amendment v 93/68/EEC Amendment b 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive v 93/68/EEC Amendment UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 nAA 14-95 File E CSA CSA C22.2 nAA 14-95 / nAA 94-M91 / nAA 0.17-00 File 0 (1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode. (2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms. (3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing. (4) Iso &amp;gt; 0.1 Ino for the 50n/51n and 67n protection functions, with I0 calculated as the sum of the phase currents. EN 50263 harmonized standardCertificati]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="126">
		<raw><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit DimensionsDimensionsDE80070 DE52760mm in8.7410.4Front view of Sepam.3Side view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips. Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 In) to 6 mm (0.23 In) thick. Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.DE52761DE52762Cut-out.Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips. Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 In) to 6 mm (0.23 In) thick.HAZARDOFCUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury.CAUTIONAssembly with AMT880 mounting plateDE52763 DE80075mm in8.43 5.55Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips. Mounting plate: 3 mm (0.11 In) thick. AMT880 mounting plat]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Characteristics Sepam series 80Baseunit DimensionsDimensionsDE80070 DE52760mm in8.7410.4Front view of Sepam.3Side view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips. Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 In) to 6 mm (0.23 In) thick. Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.DE52761DE52762Cut-out.Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips. Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 In) to 6 mm (0.23 In) thick.HAZARDOFCUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury.CAUTIONAssembly with AMT880 mounting plateDE52763 DE80075mm in8.43 5.55Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips. Mounting plate: 3 mm (0.11 In) thick. AMT880 mounting plat]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="127">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Sepam series 803DE528]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Sepam series 803DE528]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="128">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit ConnectionConnectioncharacteristicsConnectorA , ETypeScrew typeReferenceCCA620Wiringb wiring with no fittings : v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (u AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm b wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm�� wire (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mm�� wire (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm�� wires (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in) b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4���) b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) b stripped length: 6 mm b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal b tightening torque: 1.2 (13.27 lb-in) CCA612 CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774: L = 4 m (13.1 ft) CCA785 for MCS025 module: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding: b flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mm�� b maximum length: 300 mm (11.8 in) b wire cross-section 1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10) b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 lb-in) Integrated with LPCT sensor6.35 mm ring lugsCCA6223C1 , C2 D1 , D2Green RJ45 plug Black RJ45 plugDE51845Ring lug Functional earth B , B 4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plug CCA630, CCA634 for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA671, for connection of 3 LPCT sensorsLOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF  NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are no longer active and all the Sepam output relays are dropped out. Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your installation. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncanresultin equipmentdamageandunwantedshutdown oftheelectricalinstallation.CAUTIONHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANGER]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit ConnectionConnectioncharacteristicsConnectorA , ETypeScrew typeReferenceCCA620Wiringb wiring with no fittings : v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (u AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm b wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mmAA wire (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mmAA wire (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mmAA wires (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in) b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4AAA) b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) b stripped length: 6 mm b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal b tightening torque: 1.2 (13.27 lb-in) CCA612 CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774: L = 4 m (13.1 ft) CCA785 for MCS025 module: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding: b flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mmAA b maximum length: 300 mm (11.8 in) b wire cross-section 1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10) b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 lb-in) Integrated with LPCT sensor6.35 mm ring lugsCCA6223C1 , C2 D1 , D2Green RJ45 plug Black RJ45 plugDE51845Ring lug Functional earth B , B 4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plug CCA630, CCA634 for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA671, for connection of 3 LPCT sensorsLOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF  NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are no longer active and all the Sepam output relays are dropped out. Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your installation. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncanresultin equipmentdamageandunwantedshutdown oftheelectricalinstallation.CAUTIONHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANGER]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="129">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Sepam B833DE52814ConnectioncharacteristicsConnectorB BType4 mm ring lugs Screw typeReferenceCCA630, for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCT640 : see Page 127.Wiring1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10) VT wiring: same as wiring for the CCA620 Earthing connection: by 4 mm ring lugFor connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 ,LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF  NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are no longer active and all the Sepam output relays are dropped out. Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your installation. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncanresultin equipmentdamageandunwantedshutdown oftheelectricalinstallation.CAUTIONHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANGER]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Sepam B833DE52814ConnectioncharacteristicsConnectorB BType4 mm ring lugs Screw typeReferenceCCA630, for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCT640 : see Page 127.Wiring1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10) VT wiring: same as wiring for the CCA620 Earthing connection: by 4 mm ring lugFor connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 ,LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF  NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are no longer active and all the Sepam output relays are dropped out. Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your installation. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncanresultin equipmentdamageandunwantedshutdown oftheelectricalinstallation.CAUTIONHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANGER]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="130">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Sepam C86DE528143ConnectorBType4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plugReferenceCCA630, for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA671, for connection of 3 LPCT sensors CCA630, for connection of 1 A, 2A or 5 A CTsWiring1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10) Integrated with LPCT sensor 1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10) Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding: b flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mm�� b maximum length: 300 mmBDE518454 mm ring lugs Ring lugsFunctional earthFor connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 ,: see Page 127]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Sepam C86DE528143ConnectorBType4 mm ring lugs RJ45 plugReferenceCCA630, for connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs CCA671, for connection of 3 LPCT sensors CCA630, for connection of 1 A, 2A or 5 A CTsWiring1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10) Integrated with LPCT sensor 1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10) Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding: b flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mmAA b maximum length: 300 mmBDE518454 mm ring lugs Ring lugsFunctional earthFor connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 ,: see Page 127]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="131">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Phase current inputsVariant 1: phase current measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)DE80089CCA630/ CCA634Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector. The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I2, I3 1 A to 6250 ADE527733Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTsConnection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector. Measurement of phase 1 and 3 currents is sufficient for all protection functions based on phase current. This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current, nor use of ANSI 87T and 87M differential protection functions on the Sepam T87, M87, M88, G87 and G88. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I3 1 A to 6250 AVariant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensorsDE51790Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA671 connector. It is necessary to connect 3 sensors; if only one or two sensors are connected, Sepam goes into fail-safe position. Measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. The In parameter, primary rated current measured by an LPCT, is to be chosen from the following values, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150. Parameter to be set using the SFT2841 software tool, to be completed by hardware setting of the microswitches on the CCA671 connector. It is not possible to use LPCT sensors for the following measurements: bphase-current measurements for Sepam T87, M88 and G88 with ANSI 87T transformer differential protection (connectors B and B ) bphase-current measurements for Sepam B83 (connector B ) bunbalance-current measurements for Sepam C86 (connector B ). ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) LPCT I1, I2, I3 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000 or 3150 A Note: Parameter In must be set twice: b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA671 connecto]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Phase current inputsVariant 1: phase current measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)DE80089CCA630/ CCA634Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector. The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I2, I3 1 A to 6250 ADE527733Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTsConnection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector. Measurement of phase 1 and 3 currents is sufficient for all protection functions based on phase current. This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current, nor use of ANSI 87T and 87M differential protection functions on the Sepam T87, M87, M88, G87 and G88. ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) 5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I3 1 A to 6250 AVariant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensorsDE51790Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA671 connector. It is necessary to connect 3 sensors; if only one or two sensors are connected, Sepam goes into fail-safe position. Measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current. The In parameter, primary rated current measured by an LPCT, is to be chosen from the following values, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150. Parameter to be set using the SFT2841 software tool, to be completed by hardware setting of the microswitches on the CCA671 connector. It is not possible to use LPCT sensors for the following measurements: bphase-current measurements for Sepam T87, M88 and G88 with ANSI 87T transformer differential protection (connectors B and B ) bphase-current measurements for Sepam B83 (connector B ) bunbalance-current measurements for Sepam C86 (connector B ). ParametersSensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In) LPCT I1, I2, I3 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000 or 3150 A Note: Parameter In must be set twice: b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA671 connecto]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="132">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Residual current inputsVariant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currentsDescription Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors. See current input connection diagrams. ParametersResidualcurrent Sum of 3 Is ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.01 to 40 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT (standard connection)DE80083Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected. ParametersResidualcurrent 2 A rating CSH 20 A rating CSH ratedresidualcurrent In0 = 2 A In0 = 20 A Measuring range 0.1 to 40 A 0.2 to 400 A3Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634Description Residual current measurment by 1 A or 5 A CTs bTerminal 7: 1 A CT bTerminal 8: 5 A CT ParametersResidualcurrent 1 A CT 5 A CT ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)DE80086 DE800]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Residual current inputsVariant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currentsDescription Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors. See current input connection diagrams. ParametersResidualcurrent Sum of 3 Is ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.01 to 40 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT (standard connection)DE80083Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected. ParametersResidualcurrent 2 A rating CSH 20 A rating CSH ratedresidualcurrent In0 = 2 A In0 = 20 A Measuring range 0.1 to 40 A 0.2 to 400 A3Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634Description Residual current measurment by 1 A or 5 A CTs bTerminal 7: 1 A CT bTerminal 8: 5 A CT ParametersResidualcurrent 1 A CT 5 A CT ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)DE80086 DE800]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="133">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Residual current inputsVariant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CTDescription The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current: bCSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH primary bCSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH primary. ParametersResidualcurrent 1 A CT 5 A CT ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)DE52848 DE528493Variant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)Description The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input. This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation. ParametersResidualcurrent ratedresidualcurrent Measuring range In0 = Ik.n (1) ACE990 - range 1 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) (0.00578 y k y 0.04) In0 = Ik.n (1) ACE990 - range 2 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) (0.00578 y k y 0.26316) (1) n = number of core balance CT turns k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by SepamDE801]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Baseunit Residual current inputsVariant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CTDescription The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current: bCSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH primary bCSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH primary. ParametersResidualcurrent 1 A CT 5 A CT ratedresidualcurrent In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In, CT primary current Measuring range 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)DE52848 DE528493Variant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)Description The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input. This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation. ParametersResidualcurrent ratedresidualcurrent Measuring range In0 = Ik.n (1) ACE990 - range 1 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) (0.00578 y k y 0.04) In0 = Ik.n (1) ACE990 - range 2 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A) (0.00578 y k y 0.26316) (1) n = number of core balance CT turns k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by SepamDE801]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="134">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Residualvoltageinput Main channelsPhasevoltageinputconnectionvariantsVariant 1: measurement of  3phase-to-neutralvoltages (3 V, standard connection)DE51795 DE51796Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U)3Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows the calculation of residual voltage, V0��. This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.Variant 3: measurement of  1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U)DE51797 DE51798Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V)This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.Variant 5: measurement of  residual voltage V0DE51799 DE51800ResidualvoltageinputconnectionvariantsVariant 6: measurement of residual voltage Vnt  ingeneratorneutralpoi]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Residualvoltageinput Main channelsPhasevoltageinputconnectionvariantsVariant 1: measurement of  3phase-to-neutralvoltages (3 V, standard connection)DE51795 DE51796Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U)3Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows the calculation of residual voltage, V0AA. This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.Variant 3: measurement of  1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U)DE51797 DE51798Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V)This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.Variant 5: measurement of  residual voltage V0DE51799 DE51800ResidualvoltageinputconnectionvariantsVariant 6: measurement of residual voltage Vnt  ingeneratorneutralpoi]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="135">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Residualvoltageinput Additional channels for Sepam B83Additionalphasevoltageinputconnection variantsVariant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U���)Variant 1: measurement of  3phase-to-neutralvoltages (3 V���, standard connection)DE51801 DE518023Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows the calculation of residual voltage, V���0��. This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.Variant 3: measurement of  1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U���)DE51803 DE51804Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V���)This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.AdditionalresidualvoltageinputconnectionVariant 5: measurement of residual voltage V���0DE518]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Residualvoltageinput Additional channels for Sepam B83Additionalphasevoltageinputconnection variantsVariant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 UAAA)Variant 1: measurement of  3phase-to-neutralvoltages (3 VAAA, standard connection)DE51801 DE518023Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows the calculation of residual voltage, VAAA0AA. This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.Variant 3: measurement of  1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 UAAA)DE51803 DE51804Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 VAAA)This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.AdditionalresidualvoltageinputconnectionVariant 5: measurement of residual voltage VAAA0DE518]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="136">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Additional channel for Sepam B80Connectiontomeasureoneadditional voltageDE518993This connection should be used to measure: bthree phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 on busbars no. 1 bone additional phase-to-neutral voltage V���1 (or one additional phase-to-phase voltage U���21) on busbars no. 2.DE51898This connection should be used to measure: btwo phase-to-phase voltages U21, U32 and one residual voltage V0 on busbars no. 1 bone additional phase-to-phase voltage U���21 (or one additional phase-to-neutral voltage V���1) on busbars no. ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Additional channel for Sepam B80Connectiontomeasureoneadditional voltageDE518993This connection should be used to measure: bthree phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 on busbars no. 1 bone additional phase-to-neutral voltage VAAA1 (or one additional phase-to-phase voltage UAAA21) on busbars no. 2.DE51898This connection should be used to measure: btwo phase-to-phase voltages U21, U32 and one residual voltage V0 on busbars no. 1 bone additional phase-to-phase voltage UAAA21 (or one additional phase-to-neutral voltage VAAA1) on busbars no. ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="137">
		<raw><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Residualvoltageinput Available functionsThe availability of certain protection and metering functions depend on the phase and residual voltages measured by Sepam. The table below gives the voltage input connection variants for which for each protection and metering function dependent on measured voltages is available. Example: The directional overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N/67NC) uses residual voltage V0 as a polarization value. It is therefore operational in the following cases: bmeasurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and calculation of V0�� (3 V + V0��, variant 1) bmeasurement of residual voltage V0 (variant 5). The protection and metering functions which do not appear in the table below are available regardless of the voltages measured.3Phasevoltagesmeasured (connection variant) Residualvoltagemeasured (connection variant)Protectionfunctionsdependentonvoltagesmeasured Directional phase overcurrent  Directional earth fault 67N/67NC Directional active overpower P Directional reactive active overpower 32Q Directional active underpower P Field loss (underimpedance) 0 Pole slip, phase shift 78PS Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V Underimpedance B Inadvertent energization 50/27 00 % stator earth fault 64G2/27TN Overfluxing (V/Hz)  Positive sequence undervoltage 27D Remanent undervoltage R Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)  Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9 Neutral voltage displacement 9N Negative sequence overvoltage  Overfrequency H Underfrequency L Rate of change of frequency R Measurements dependent on voltages measured Phase-to-phase voltage U21, U32, U13 or U���21, U���32, U���13 Phase-to-neutral voltage V1, V2, V3 or V���1, V���2, V���33 V + V0S (var. 1) ��� V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)b b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv bv bv bv bv b bv bv b b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv bv bv bv bv b bv bv b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b���b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv b bv bv b bv2U (var. 2) V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)b b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv bv bv bv bv b bv b b���1U (var. 3) V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)b���1 V (var. 4) V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bvb bvU bvU bvUb bv bv bv bv bv bvb b b b b b bb bvU bvU bvUb bv bv bv bv bv bv bvb b b b b b bbvU bvUbvU bvUU21, U���21UU V1, V���1 b b V1, V���1 bv V1b bv bv bv Residual voltage V0 or V���0 b b Neutral point voltage Vnt b b Third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage b bv bv b bv bv Positive sequence voltage Vd or V���d / negative sequence voltage Vi or V���i bv bv bv bv bv bv bvU Frequency b b b b b b b Active / reactive / apparent power: P, Q, S b b b b b b b Peak demand power PM, QM Active / reactive / apparent power per phase : b (1) b (1) b (1) b (1) P1/P2/P3, Q1/Q2/Q3, S1/S2/S3 b b b b b b b Power factor b b b b b b b Calculated active and reactive energy (��Wh, ��VARh) b b b b b b b Total harmonic distortion, voltage Uthd b b b b Phase displacement ��0, �����0 b b b b b b Phase displacement ��1, ��2, ��3 b b b b b b Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b Function available on main voltage channels. v Function available on Sepam B83 additional voltage channels. U Function available on Sepam B80 additional voltage channel, according to the type of the additional voltage measured. (1) If all three phase currents are measured.bvb bbv b bbv b bbvUbvbvb b b bb b bP1/ P1/ P1/ Q1/S1 Q1/S1 Q1/S]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Connection diagrams Sepam series 80Phasevoltageinputs Residualvoltageinput Available functionsThe availability of certain protection and metering functions depend on the phase and residual voltages measured by Sepam. The table below gives the voltage input connection variants for which for each protection and metering function dependent on measured voltages is available. Example: The directional overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N/67NC) uses residual voltage V0 as a polarization value. It is therefore operational in the following cases: bmeasurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and calculation of V0AA (3 V + V0AA, variant 1) bmeasurement of residual voltage V0 (variant 5). The protection and metering functions which do not appear in the table below are available regardless of the voltages measured.3Phasevoltagesmeasured (connection variant) Residualvoltagemeasured (connection variant)Protectionfunctionsdependentonvoltagesmeasured Directional phase overcurrent  Directional earth fault 67N/67NC Directional active overpower P Directional reactive active overpower 32Q Directional active underpower P Field loss (underimpedance) 0 Pole slip, phase shift 78PS Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V Underimpedance B Inadvertent energization 50/27 00 % stator earth fault 64G2/27TN Overfluxing (V/Hz)  Positive sequence undervoltage 27D Remanent undervoltage R Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)  Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 9 Neutral voltage displacement 9N Negative sequence overvoltage  Overfrequency H Underfrequency L Rate of change of frequency R Measurements dependent on voltages measured Phase-to-phase voltage U21, U32, U13 or UAAA21, UAAA32, UAAA13 Phase-to-neutral voltage V1, V2, V3 or VAAA1, VAAA2, VAAA33 V + V0S (var. 1) AAA V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)b b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv bv bv bv bv b bv bv b b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv bv bv bv bv b bv bv b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bAAAb b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv b bv bv b bv2U (var. 2) V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)b b b b b b b b b b b bv bv bv bv bv bv bv bv b bv b bAAA1U (var. 3) V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)bAAA1 V (var. 4) V0 Vnt (v. 5) (v. 6)bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bvb bvU bvU bvUb bv bv bv bv bv bvb b b b b b bb bvU bvU bvUb bv bv bv bv bv bv bvb b b b b b bbvU bvUbvU bvUU21, UAAA21UU V1, VAAA1 b b V1, VAAA1 bv V1b bv bv bv Residual voltage V0 or VAAA0 b b Neutral point voltage Vnt b b Third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage b bv bv b bv bv Positive sequence voltage Vd or VAAAd / negative sequence voltage Vi or VAAAi bv bv bv bv bv bv bvU Frequency b b b b b b b Active / reactive / apparent power: P, Q, S b b b b b b b Peak demand power PM, QM Active / reactive / apparent power per phase : b (1) b (1) b (1) b (1) P1/P2/P3, Q1/Q2/Q3, S1/S2/S3 b b b b b b b Power factor b b b b b b b Calculated active and reactive energy (AAWh, AAVARh) b b b b b b b Total harmonic distortion, voltage Uthd b b b b Phase displacement AA0, AAAAA0 b b b b b b Phase displacement AA1, AA2, AA3 b b b b b b Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b Function available on main voltage channels. v Function available on Sepam B83 additional voltage channels. U Function available on Sepam B80 additional voltage channel, according to the type of the additional voltage measured. (1) If all three phase currents are measured.bvb bbv b bbv b bbvUbvbvb b b bb b bP1/ P1/ P1/ Q1/S1 Q1/S1 Q1/S]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="138">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="139">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures��� bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts���According to IEC 60364 This guide, part of the Guiding System, is the essential tool to ���guide��� you any time in your business: bdesign office, consultant bcontractor, panelbuilder bteacher, trainer. Comprehensive and concrete information on: ball the new technical solutions ball the components of an installation from a global point of view ball the IEC standards modifications ball the fundamental electrotechnical knowledge ball the design stages, from medium to low voltage.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochuresAAA bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contactsAAAAccording to IEC 60364 This guide, part of the Guiding System, is the essential tool to AAAguideAAA you any time in your business: bdesign office, consultant bcontractor, panelbuilder bteacher, trainer. Comprehensive and concrete information on: ball the new technical solutions ball the components of an installation from a global point of view ball the IEC standards modifications ball the fundamental electrotechnical knowledge ball the design stages, from medium to low voltage.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="140">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Additional modules and accessories0Introduction Sepamseries20andSepamseries40 Sepamseries807 47 85SoftwareSepam softwareFunction SFT2841 connection to Sepam Adaptation of the predefined functions141141 142142 144 145SFT2841 setting and operating softwareSFT2826 disturbance recording data display software SFT850 configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol SFT2885 programming software - Logipam146 147 148Logic input / output modulesMES114 modules Logic input / output assignment of Sepam series 20 Logic input / output assignment of Sepam series 40Presentation Installation Logic input / output assignment150150 152 153 154154 155 156MES120, MES120G, MES120H14 input / 6 output moduleRemote modulesSelection guide and connection MET148-2 Temperature sensor module MSA141 Analog output module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module MCS025Synchro-check module158158 159 161 162 164Other modulesPresentation High impedance differential protection Sensors and surge limiters Description and connection Characteristics and dimensions Presentation Block and connection diagrams Characteristics and dimensions168168168 169 170 171 173 174 175 178Sepam 100 LDSepam 100 MI1741]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Additional modules and accessories0Introduction Sepamseries20andSepamseries40 Sepamseries807 47 85SoftwareSepam softwareFunction SFT2841 connection to Sepam Adaptation of the predefined functions141141 142142 144 145SFT2841 setting and operating softwareSFT2826 disturbance recording data display software SFT850 configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol SFT2885 programming software - Logipam146 147 148Logic input / output modulesMES114 modules Logic input / output assignment of Sepam series 20 Logic input / output assignment of Sepam series 40Presentation Installation Logic input / output assignment150150 152 153 154154 155 156MES120, MES120G, MES120H14 input / 6 output moduleRemote modulesSelection guide and connection MET148-2 Temperature sensor module MSA141 Analog output module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module MCS025Synchro-check module158158 159 161 162 164Other modulesPresentation High impedance differential protection Sensors and surge limiters Description and connection Characteristics and dimensions Presentation Block and connection diagrams Characteristics and dimensions168168168 169 170 171 173 174 175 178Sepam 100 LDSepam 100 MI1741]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="141">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Additional modules and accessories0Communication accessoriesSelection guide179179Communication interfacesCommunication interface connection ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface ACE9594-wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 Fiber optic interfaceDescription Connection180180 181 182 183 184186 187ACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfaces networkConvertersACE909-2RS 232 / RS 485 converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 converters Sepam ECI850 server for IEC 61850 Ethernet EGX100 gateway Ethernet EGX400 server WPG software tool HTML page generator189189 191 193 197 198 201SensorsSelection guide Voltage transformers 1 A / 5 A current transformersTest accessories202202 203 204 207 210 212 213217 208LPCT type current sensorsCSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs CSH30 Interposing ring CT ACE990 Core balance CT interfaceOrderform1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Additional modules and accessories0Communication accessoriesSelection guide179179Communication interfacesCommunication interface connection ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface ACE9594-wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 Fiber optic interfaceDescription Connection180180 181 182 183 184186 187ACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfaces networkConvertersACE909-2RS 232 / RS 485 converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 converters Sepam ECI850 server for IEC 61850 Ethernet EGX100 gateway Ethernet EGX400 server WPG software tool HTML page generator189189 191 193 197 198 201SensorsSelection guide Voltage transformers 1 A / 5 A current transformersTest accessories202202 203 204 207 210 212 213217 208LPCT type current sensorsCSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs CSH30 Interposing ring CT ACE990 Core balance CT interfaceOrderform1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="142">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSepamsoftwareThree types of Sepam PC software are available: bSFT2841 setting and operating software bSFT2826 disturbance recording data display software bSFT2885 programming software for the Sepam series 80 (Logipam) bSFT850 advanced-configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol.PresentationSFT2841 and SFT2826 software PCconnectioncordSFT2841 and SFT2826 software is provided on the same CD-ROM as the Sepam documentation in PDF format. The CCA783 PC connection cord, to be ordered separately, is designed to connect a PC to the RS 232 port on the front panel of a Sepam unit in order to use the SFT2841 software in point-to-point connected mode. The USB/RS232 TSXCUSB232 converter may be used with the CCA783 connection cord for connection to a USB port.SFT2885software SFT850softwareSFT2885 is available on a separate CD-ROM. SFT850 is available on a separate CD-ROM.Minimum configuration requiredSFT2841 and SFT2826 softwareOperating systems RAM Space on disk Microsoft 2000/XP 128 MB (32 MB for Windows 98) 120 MB4SFT2885Operating systems RAM Space on disk Microsoft 2000/XP 64 MB 20 MBOperating systems RAM Space on diskSFT850Microsoft 2000/XP 64 MB 40 ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSepamsoftwareThree types of Sepam PC software are available: bSFT2841 setting and operating software bSFT2826 disturbance recording data display software bSFT2885 programming software for the Sepam series 80 (Logipam) bSFT850 advanced-configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol.PresentationSFT2841 and SFT2826 software PCconnectioncordSFT2841 and SFT2826 software is provided on the same CD-ROM as the Sepam documentation in PDF format. The CCA783 PC connection cord, to be ordered separately, is designed to connect a PC to the RS 232 port on the front panel of a Sepam unit in order to use the SFT2841 software in point-to-point connected mode. The USB/RS232 TSXCUSB232 converter may be used with the CCA783 connection cord for connection to a USB port.SFT2885software SFT850softwareSFT2885 is available on a separate CD-ROM. SFT850 is available on a separate CD-ROM.Minimum configuration requiredSFT2841 and SFT2826 softwareOperating systems RAM Space on disk Microsoft 2000/XP 128 MB (32 MB for Windows 98) 120 MB4SFT2885Operating systems RAM Space on disk Microsoft 2000/XP 64 MB 20 MBOperating systems RAM Space on diskSFT850Microsoft 2000/XP 64 MB 40 ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="143">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software FunctionThe SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80. It may be used: bprior to commissioning and without connection to Sepam, to prepare Sepam protection and parameter settings bduring commissioning, on a PC connected point-to-point to the front panel Sepam: vto load, unload and modify Sepam protection and parameter settings vto obtain all measurements and useful information during commissioning bduring operation, on a PC connected to a set of Sepam relays via an E-LAN multipoint communication network: vto manage the protection system vto monitor the status of the electrical network vto run diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electrical network.PE00PreparationofSepamparameterandprotectionsettingsin unconnectedmodebconfiguration of Sepam and optional modules, and entry of general settings benabling/disabling of functions and entry of protection settings badaptation of predefined control and monitoring functions bcreation of personalized mimic diagrams for local display.4SFT2841: Sepam series 80 hardware configuration.PE00Sepamcommissioningviaapoint-to-pointconnectiontothe frontpanelbaccess to all functions available in unconnected mode, after entering the protection-setting or parameter-setting password btransfer of Sepam parameter and protection setting file, prepared in unconnected mode (downloading function), protected by the parameter-setting password bdisplay of all measurements and useful information during commissioning bdisplay of logic input, logic output and LED status btest of logic outputs bdisplay of Logipam variables bsetting of Logipam parameters (configuration bits, timers, etc.) bmodification of passwords.Management of protection functions and network diagnostics with an E-LAN multipoint network connectionbreading of all Sepam protection and parameter settings, modifications following entry of the protection-setting or parameter-setting password bdisplay of all the Sepam measurement data bdisplay of Sepam, switchgear and network diagnosis data bdisplay of time-tagged alarm messages bretrieval of disturbance recording data.SFT2841: output testing.Efficient, easy-to-use softwarebmenus and icons for fast, direct access to the data required bguided navigation to go through all the data input screens in the natural order ball data on the same function together in the same screen btrilingual software: English, French, Spanish bon-line help, with all the technical information needed to use and implement Sepam bfamiliar file management in Microsoft Windows environment: vall file management services included: copy / paste, save, etc. vprinting of parameter and protection settings in standard layout.PE0SFT2841: alarm histor]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software FunctionThe SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80. It may be used: bprior to commissioning and without connection to Sepam, to prepare Sepam protection and parameter settings bduring commissioning, on a PC connected point-to-point to the front panel Sepam: vto load, unload and modify Sepam protection and parameter settings vto obtain all measurements and useful information during commissioning bduring operation, on a PC connected to a set of Sepam relays via an E-LAN multipoint communication network: vto manage the protection system vto monitor the status of the electrical network vto run diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electrical network.PE00PreparationofSepamparameterandprotectionsettingsin unconnectedmodebconfiguration of Sepam and optional modules, and entry of general settings benabling/disabling of functions and entry of protection settings badaptation of predefined control and monitoring functions bcreation of personalized mimic diagrams for local display.4SFT2841: Sepam series 80 hardware configuration.PE00Sepamcommissioningviaapoint-to-pointconnectiontothe frontpanelbaccess to all functions available in unconnected mode, after entering the protection-setting or parameter-setting password btransfer of Sepam parameter and protection setting file, prepared in unconnected mode (downloading function), protected by the parameter-setting password bdisplay of all measurements and useful information during commissioning bdisplay of logic input, logic output and LED status btest of logic outputs bdisplay of Logipam variables bsetting of Logipam parameters (configuration bits, timers, etc.) bmodification of passwords.Management of protection functions and network diagnostics with an E-LAN multipoint network connectionbreading of all Sepam protection and parameter settings, modifications following entry of the protection-setting or parameter-setting password bdisplay of all the Sepam measurement data bdisplay of Sepam, switchgear and network diagnosis data bdisplay of time-tagged alarm messages bretrieval of disturbance recording data.SFT2841: output testing.Efficient, easy-to-use softwarebmenus and icons for fast, direct access to the data required bguided navigation to go through all the data input screens in the natural order ball data on the same function together in the same screen btrilingual software: English, French, Spanish bon-line help, with all the technical information needed to use and implement Sepam bfamiliar file management in Microsoft Windows environment: vall file management services included: copy / paste, save, etc. vprinting of parameter and protection settings in standard layout.PE0SFT2841: alarm histor]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="144">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software FunctionThe table below gives the SFT2841 functions available for each of the 3 Sepam series: Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80. NC: function available in unconnected mode. S: function available with SFT2841 connected via Sepam front panel. E: function available with SFT2841 connected to Sepam via E-LAN communication network.PE00FunctionsManagementOn-line help Management of parameter and protection setting files: creation, saving, downloading and uploading Downloading and uploading of parameter and protection setting files Exporting of parameter and protection settings in a text file Printing of parameter and protection settings Modification of passwords, one for parameter setting and one for protection settingSeries20 Series40 Series80b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b bb b b b bb b b bb(1)bbSFT2841: Sepam series 80 sensor parameter setting.b bbbbSepamparametersettingDisplay of parameter settings Hardware configuration and parameter entry protected by parameter setting password Graphical parameter setting assistance Standard configuration for IEC 61850 networkPE0b bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb b bb b bb b bb b bb b bb b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bProtectionsettingDisplay of protection settings Entry of protection settings, protected by protection setting password Definition of customized tripping curve4Adaptation of the predefined functionsDisplay and modification of the control matrix Logic equation editing Number of instructions Number of dedicated remote indications Display of logic equations Load the Logipam program Setting of Logipam parameters Assignment of LEDs on front Editing of user messages Number of user messages Editing of personalized mimic diagram Display of all the Sepam measurement data Display of switchgear diagnosis assistance data Display of machine operating assistance data Display of time-tagged alarm messages Tripping context Retrieval of disturbance recording files SFT2841: protection settings. Display of Logipam variables Display of logic input/output status Output testingPE0bbbb 00 0b bb bb b 00 0SFT2841: Sepam series 80 application, with protection function measurement origin.bb bb b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b bPE0bbbb 0b bb bb00 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bAssistanceincommissioningandoperatingtheinstallationb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bSepam diagnosis(1) Except for logic equations and personalized messages.SFT2841: Sepam diagnosi]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software FunctionThe table below gives the SFT2841 functions available for each of the 3 Sepam series: Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80. NC: function available in unconnected mode. S: function available with SFT2841 connected via Sepam front panel. E: function available with SFT2841 connected to Sepam via E-LAN communication network.PE00FunctionsManagementOn-line help Management of parameter and protection setting files: creation, saving, downloading and uploading Downloading and uploading of parameter and protection setting files Exporting of parameter and protection settings in a text file Printing of parameter and protection settings Modification of passwords, one for parameter setting and one for protection settingSeries20 Series40 Series80b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b bb b b b bb b b bb(1)bbSFT2841: Sepam series 80 sensor parameter setting.b bbbbSepamparametersettingDisplay of parameter settings Hardware configuration and parameter entry protected by parameter setting password Graphical parameter setting assistance Standard configuration for IEC 61850 networkPE0b bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb b bb b bb b bb b bb b bb b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bProtectionsettingDisplay of protection settings Entry of protection settings, protected by protection setting password Definition of customized tripping curve4Adaptation of the predefined functionsDisplay and modification of the control matrix Logic equation editing Number of instructions Number of dedicated remote indications Display of logic equations Load the Logipam program Setting of Logipam parameters Assignment of LEDs on front Editing of user messages Number of user messages Editing of personalized mimic diagram Display of all the Sepam measurement data Display of switchgear diagnosis assistance data Display of machine operating assistance data Display of time-tagged alarm messages Tripping context Retrieval of disturbance recording files SFT2841: protection settings. Display of Logipam variables Display of logic input/output status Output testingPE0bbbb 00 0b bb bb b 00 0SFT2841: Sepam series 80 application, with protection function measurement origin.bb bb b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b bPE0bbbb 0b bb bb00 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bAssistanceincommissioningandoperatingtheinstallationb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bSepam diagnosis(1) Except for logic equations and personalized messages.SFT2841: Sepam diagnosi]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="145">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software SFT2841 connection to SepamSFT2841connectiontothefrontpanelofaSepamConnection of the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 using the CCA783 cord or the USB/RS232 (TSXCUSB232) converter + CCA783.DE52069SFT2841connectiontoasetofSepamrelaysThe SFT2841 can be connected to a set of Sepam relays, themselves connected to a E-LAN communication network in one of the three architectures presented below. These connections do not require any further software development work. Ethernetconnection bconnection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 network bEthernet RS 485 link via the EGX100 or EGX400 gateway or the ECI850 server bconnection of the PC via its Ethernet port. RS485serialconnection bconnection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 network bconnection of the PC via its RS 232 port, using the ACE909-2 interface. Telephone-lineconnection bconnection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 network bRS 485-RTC link via an RS 485 modem (Wertermo TD-34 for example) bconnection of the PC via its modem port.4DE53108DE53109DE53110DE531]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software SFT2841 connection to SepamSFT2841connectiontothefrontpanelofaSepamConnection of the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 using the CCA783 cord or the USB/RS232 (TSXCUSB232) converter + CCA783.DE52069SFT2841connectiontoasetofSepamrelaysThe SFT2841 can be connected to a set of Sepam relays, themselves connected to a E-LAN communication network in one of the three architectures presented below. These connections do not require any further software development work. Ethernetconnection bconnection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 network bEthernet RS 485 link via the EGX100 or EGX400 gateway or the ECI850 server bconnection of the PC via its Ethernet port. RS485serialconnection bconnection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 network bconnection of the PC via its RS 232 port, using the ACE909-2 interface. Telephone-lineconnection bconnection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 network bRS 485-RTC link via an RS 485 modem (Wertermo TD-34 for example) bconnection of the PC via its modem port.4DE53108DE53109DE53110DE531]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="146">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software Adaptation of the predefined functionsLogic equation editor (Sepam series 40 and series 80)The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to: bcomplete protection function processing: vadditional interlocking vconditional inhibition/validation of functions vetc. badapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control sequences, etc. Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the Logipam programming software. A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from: bprotection functions blogic inputs blocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI bremote control orders using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as time delays, bistables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically. The result of an equation may then be: bassigned to a logic output, LED or message from the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication butilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit breaking device closing bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.PE0SFT2841: logic equation editor.4Alarmsandoperatingmessages(Sepamseries40and series 80)New alarm and operating messages may be created using the SFT2841 software. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned via the control matrix for display: bon Sepam���s advanced UMI bin the SFT2841 ���Alarms��� and ���Alarm History��� screens.Local-control mimic diagram (Sepam series 80)PE0The local-control mimic diagram displayed on the UMI can be personalized by adapting one of the supplied, predefined mimic diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch. The mimic-diagram editor can be used to: bcreate a fixed, bitmap background (128 x 240 pixels) using a standard drawing tool bcreate animated symbols or use predefined animated symbols to represent the electrotechnical devices or other objects bassign the logic inputs or internal status conditions that modify the animated symbols. For example, the logic inputs for the circuit-breaker position must be linked to the circuit-breaker symbol to enable the display of the open and closed conditions bassign the logic outputs or internal status conditions that are activated when an opening or closing order are issued for the symbol bdisplay the current, voltage and power measurements on the mimic diagram.SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.PE00ControlmatrixThe control matrix is used for simple assignment of data from: bprotection functions bcontrol and monitoring functions blogic inputs blogic equations or the Logipam program to the following output data: blogic outputs b9 LEDs on the front of Sepam bmessages for local display btriggering of disturbance recording.SFT2841: control matri]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2841settingandoperating software Adaptation of the predefined functionsLogic equation editor (Sepam series 40 and series 80)The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to: bcomplete protection function processing: vadditional interlocking vconditional inhibition/validation of functions vetc. badapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control sequences, etc. Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the Logipam programming software. A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from: bprotection functions blogic inputs blocal control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI bremote control orders using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as time delays, bistables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically. The result of an equation may then be: bassigned to a logic output, LED or message from the control matrix btransmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication butilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit breaking device closing bused to inhibit or reset a protection function.PE0SFT2841: logic equation editor.4Alarmsandoperatingmessages(Sepamseries40and series 80)New alarm and operating messages may be created using the SFT2841 software. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned via the control matrix for display: bon SepamAAAs advanced UMI bin the SFT2841 AAAAlarmsAAA and AAAAlarm HistoryAAA screens.Local-control mimic diagram (Sepam series 80)PE0The local-control mimic diagram displayed on the UMI can be personalized by adapting one of the supplied, predefined mimic diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch. The mimic-diagram editor can be used to: bcreate a fixed, bitmap background (128 x 240 pixels) using a standard drawing tool bcreate animated symbols or use predefined animated symbols to represent the electrotechnical devices or other objects bassign the logic inputs or internal status conditions that modify the animated symbols. For example, the logic inputs for the circuit-breaker position must be linked to the circuit-breaker symbol to enable the display of the open and closed conditions bassign the logic outputs or internal status conditions that are activated when an opening or closing order are issued for the symbol bdisplay the current, voltage and power measurements on the mimic diagram.SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.PE00ControlmatrixThe control matrix is used for simple assignment of data from: bprotection functions bcontrol and monitoring functions blogic inputs blogic equations or the Logipam program to the following output data: blogic outputs b9 LEDs on the front of Sepam bmessages for local display btriggering of disturbance recording.SFT2841: control matri]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="147">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2826 disturbance recording datadisplaysoftwareFunctionMt10623The SFT2826 software is used to display, analyze and print disturbance data recorded by Sepam. It uses COMTRADE (IEEE standard: Common format for transient data exchange for power systems) files.TransferofdisturbancerecordingdataBefore they are analyzed by SFT2826, the disturbance recording data must be transferred from Sepam to the PC: bby the SFT2841 software bor by the Modbus communication link.AnalysisofdisturbancerecordingdataSFT2826: analysis of a disturbance data record.bselection of analog signals and logic data for display bzoom and measurement of time between events bdisplay of all numerical values recorded bexporting of data in file format bprinting of curves and/or numerical values recorded.4CharacteristicsThe SFT2826 software comes with the SFT2841 software: b4 languages: English, French, Spanish, Italian bon-line help with description of software function]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2826 disturbance recording datadisplaysoftwareFunctionMt10623The SFT2826 software is used to display, analyze and print disturbance data recorded by Sepam. It uses COMTRADE (IEEE standard: Common format for transient data exchange for power systems) files.TransferofdisturbancerecordingdataBefore they are analyzed by SFT2826, the disturbance recording data must be transferred from Sepam to the PC: bby the SFT2841 software bor by the Modbus communication link.AnalysisofdisturbancerecordingdataSFT2826: analysis of a disturbance data record.bselection of analog signals and logic data for display bzoom and measurement of time between events bdisplay of all numerical values recorded bexporting of data in file format bprinting of curves and/or numerical values recorded.4CharacteristicsThe SFT2826 software comes with the SFT2841 software: b4 languages: English, French, Spanish, Italian bon-line help with description of software function]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="148">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT850 configuration software for IEC 61850 protocolFunctionThe SFT850 software is used to easily create, modify and consult the SCL (Substation Configuration Language) configuration files for the IEC 61850 communication protocol: bCID (Configured IED description) file for configuration of a device connected to an IEC 61850 network bSCD (Substation Configuration Description) file for IEC 61850 configuration of substation equipment. The SFT850 software supplements the standard IEC 61850 configuration created with the SFT2841 software in cases where the configuration must be precisely adapted to system requirements. Addingordeletingequipment The SFT850 software can be used to add or delete connected equipment in the IEC 61850 configuration. If a Sepam unit is added, the software uses the supplied ICD (IED capability description) file to start configuration. Equipmentconnection The SFT850 software describes the data for equipment connection to the network. Editing the equipment configuration The configuration of a given device described in a CID or SCD file can be modified: badd, modify or delete datasets. A dataset is used to group data and optimise communication badd, modify or delete RCBs (Report Control Block). A Report Control Block defines dataset transmission conditions badd, modify or delete GCBs (Goose Control Block). A Goose Control Block defines how data is exchanged between Sepam units bmodify dead measurement bands. This parameter is used to optimise communication in that measurements are transmitted only if they have changed significantly. Generating CID files The SFT850 software can generate the CID file for each device on the basis of an SCD file]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT850 configuration software for IEC 61850 protocolFunctionThe SFT850 software is used to easily create, modify and consult the SCL (Substation Configuration Language) configuration files for the IEC 61850 communication protocol: bCID (Configured IED description) file for configuration of a device connected to an IEC 61850 network bSCD (Substation Configuration Description) file for IEC 61850 configuration of substation equipment. The SFT850 software supplements the standard IEC 61850 configuration created with the SFT2841 software in cases where the configuration must be precisely adapted to system requirements. Addingordeletingequipment The SFT850 software can be used to add or delete connected equipment in the IEC 61850 configuration. If a Sepam unit is added, the software uses the supplied ICD (IED capability description) file to start configuration. Equipmentconnection The SFT850 software describes the data for equipment connection to the network. Editing the equipment configuration The configuration of a given device described in a CID or SCD file can be modified: badd, modify or delete datasets. A dataset is used to group data and optimise communication badd, modify or delete RCBs (Report Control Block). A Report Control Block defines dataset transmission conditions badd, modify or delete GCBs (Goose Control Block). A Goose Control Block defines how data is exchanged between Sepam units bmodify dead measurement bands. This parameter is used to optimise communication in that measurements are transmitted only if they have changed significantly. Generating CID files The SFT850 software can generate the CID file for each device on the basis of an SCD file]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="149">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2885programmingsoftware - LogipamFunctionThe SFT2885 programming software (called Logipam) is intended exclusively for the Sepam series 80 and can be used to: badapt predefined control and monitoring functions bprogram specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required by the application. It is made up of: ba ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program complex control functions ba simulator for complete program debugging ba code generator to run the program on Sepam. The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete file can be printed. Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080 optioncanrunthecontrolandmonitoringfunctionsprogrammedbythe Logipam SFT2885 software. The complete Logipam software is made up of the executable program run by Sepam and the source program that can be modified by the Logipam SFT2885 programming software.4The SFT2841 setting and operating software, required for implementation of the Logipam program, offers the following functions: bassociation of the complete Logipam program with the Sepam parameter and protection settings bloading and unloading of Logipam program, parameters and settings in the Sepam cartridge brunning of the functions programmed with Logipam: vdisplay of the status of Logipam internal bits vsetting of Logipam parameters: configuration bits, timers, etc.OperatingprincipleDE520]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2885programmingsoftware - LogipamFunctionThe SFT2885 programming software (called Logipam) is intended exclusively for the Sepam series 80 and can be used to: badapt predefined control and monitoring functions bprogram specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required by the application. It is made up of: ba ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program complex control functions ba simulator for complete program debugging ba code generator to run the program on Sepam. The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete file can be printed. Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080 optioncanrunthecontrolandmonitoringfunctionsprogrammedbythe Logipam SFT2885 software. The complete Logipam software is made up of the executable program run by Sepam and the source program that can be modified by the Logipam SFT2885 programming software.4The SFT2841 setting and operating software, required for implementation of the Logipam program, offers the following functions: bassociation of the complete Logipam program with the Sepam parameter and protection settings bloading and unloading of Logipam program, parameters and settings in the Sepam cartridge brunning of the functions programmed with Logipam: vdisplay of the status of Logipam internal bits vsetting of Logipam parameters: configuration bits, timers, etc.OperatingprincipleDE520]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="150">
		<raw><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2885programmingsoftware - LogipamCharacteristicsProgramstructurePE0A ladder-language program is made up of a series of rungs executed sequentially: bmaximum 1000 lines with 9 contacts and 1 coil maximum per line bwith a maximum total number of 5000 contacts and coils. Comments may be made for each line. Sections The program can be broken down into sections and subsections to clarify the structure and facilitate reading. It is possible to set up three levels of sections. Comments may be added for each section. Execution of each section can be subjected to conditions. Variable editor Each variable is defined by an invariable identifier and can be linked to a name or a comment. The programmer can decide to work directly with the identifiers or with the linked names. The list of the variables used and the cross references may be consulted during programming.SFT2885: ladder-language program, structured in sections.PE0GraphicelementsintheladderlanguageThe graphic elements are the instructions in the ladder language: bNO and NC contacts brising and falling-edge detection contacts bdirect or negated coils bset and reset coils bcoils and contacts linked to timers, counters and clocks.4AvailableresourcesSepamvariables All the data used by Sepam functions can be addressed by Logipam: ball logic inputs and outputs ball remote-control orders and remote indications (the remote-control orders and remote indication used in the Logipam program are no longer used by the predefined functions) ball protection-function inputs and outputs ball inputs and outputs for the predefined control and monitoring functions ball inputs and outputs for symbols in the mimic-based UMI ball system data. Logipam internal variables b64 configuration bits to parameter program processing, settable via the SFT2841 software and the display b128 bits used by the control matrix to control LEDs, messages and logic outputs b internal bits that are saved b512 internal bits that are not saved. Logipam functions b60 timers that can be set for a rising edge (TON) or a falling edge (TOF) b24 incremental counters with adjustable thresholds b4 clocks for a given week.PE0SFT2885: variable editor.DebuggingtoolsThe Logipam software offers a complete set of tools for program debugging: bstep-by-step or continuous program execution to simulate the programmed functions bcolor animation of the rungs and all program variables bgrouping in a table of all program variables requiring monitoring.The application file can be printed in part or in whole. The application file can be personalized : front page, title block, general description of the program, etc.DocumentationSFT2885: program debugging]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SoftwareSFT2885programmingsoftware - LogipamCharacteristicsProgramstructurePE0A ladder-language program is made up of a series of rungs executed sequentially: bmaximum 1000 lines with 9 contacts and 1 coil maximum per line bwith a maximum total number of 5000 contacts and coils. Comments may be made for each line. Sections The program can be broken down into sections and subsections to clarify the structure and facilitate reading. It is possible to set up three levels of sections. Comments may be added for each section. Execution of each section can be subjected to conditions. Variable editor Each variable is defined by an invariable identifier and can be linked to a name or a comment. The programmer can decide to work directly with the identifiers or with the linked names. The list of the variables used and the cross references may be consulted during programming.SFT2885: ladder-language program, structured in sections.PE0GraphicelementsintheladderlanguageThe graphic elements are the instructions in the ladder language: bNO and NC contacts brising and falling-edge detection contacts bdirect or negated coils bset and reset coils bcoils and contacts linked to timers, counters and clocks.4AvailableresourcesSepamvariables All the data used by Sepam functions can be addressed by Logipam: ball logic inputs and outputs ball remote-control orders and remote indications (the remote-control orders and remote indication used in the Logipam program are no longer used by the predefined functions) ball protection-function inputs and outputs ball inputs and outputs for the predefined control and monitoring functions ball inputs and outputs for symbols in the mimic-based UMI ball system data. Logipam internal variables b64 configuration bits to parameter program processing, settable via the SFT2841 software and the display b128 bits used by the control matrix to control LEDs, messages and logic outputs b internal bits that are saved b512 internal bits that are not saved. Logipam functions b60 timers that can be set for a rising edge (TON) or a falling edge (TOF) b24 incremental counters with adjustable thresholds b4 clocks for a given week.PE0SFT2885: variable editor.DebuggingtoolsThe Logipam software offers a complete set of tools for program debugging: bstep-by-step or continuous program execution to simulate the programmed functions bcolor animation of the rungs and all program variables bgrouping in a table of all program variables requiring monitoring.The application file can be printed in part or in whole. The application file can be personalized : front page, title block, general description of the program, etc.DocumentationSFT2885: program debugging]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="151">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES114 modulesFunctionThe 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 may be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs, available in 3 versions: bMES114: 10 DC inputs voltage from from 24 V DC to 250 V DC bMES114E: 10 inputs, voltage 110-125 V AC or V DC bMES114F: 10 inputs, voltage 220-250 V AC or V DC.PE0CharacteristicsMES114 moduleWeight Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Voltage Range 0.28 kg (0.617 lb) -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��Fto +158 ��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base unitsLogical inputs MES114 MES114E to 250 V DC 19.2 to 275 V DC / 3 mA 14 V DC 0 to 125 V DC  to 150 VV DC / 3 mA 82 V DC u 88 V DC y 75 V DC Enhanced Enhanced 110 V ACMES114F410 input/4 output MES114 module.Frequency Typical consumption Typical switching threshold Input limit At state 0 u 19 V DC voltage At state 1 y 6 V DC Isolation of inputs from Enhanced other isolated groups Isolation between inputs Voltage Enhanced0 to 240 V AC  to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz 3 mA 120 V AC u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced0 to 250 V DC  to  to 132 V AC 275 V DC 47 to 63 Hz / 3 mA 3 mA 58 V AC 154 V DCO11controlrelayoutputDC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Load cos j &amp;gt; 0.3 Enhanced 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 8A 8 / 4A 6 / 2A 4 / 1A 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A 250 V CC 00 to 240 V AC 8A 0.2 A 8A 8A 5AContinuous current Breaking capacityMaking capacity Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups Isolation between outputs Voltage&amp;lt; 15 A for 200 msEnhancedO12toO14indicationrelayoutputDC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 2A 0.3 A 0.15 A 250 V DC 00 to 240 V AC 2A 0.2 A 2A 1AContinuous current Breaking capacityMaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Isolation between outputs2A 2A Resistive 2 / 1A 0.6 A load Load 2 / 1A 0.5 A L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load cos j &amp;gt; 0.3 &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms Enhanced Enhance]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES114 modulesFunctionThe 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 may be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs, available in 3 versions: bMES114: 10 DC inputs voltage from from 24 V DC to 250 V DC bMES114E: 10 inputs, voltage 110-125 V AC or V DC bMES114F: 10 inputs, voltage 220-250 V AC or V DC.PE0CharacteristicsMES114 moduleWeight Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Voltage Range 0.28 kg (0.617 lb) -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAFto +158 AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base unitsLogical inputs MES114 MES114E to 250 V DC 19.2 to 275 V DC / 3 mA 14 V DC 0 to 125 V DC  to 150 VV DC / 3 mA 82 V DC u 88 V DC y 75 V DC Enhanced Enhanced 110 V ACMES114F410 input/4 output MES114 module.Frequency Typical consumption Typical switching threshold Input limit At state 0 u 19 V DC voltage At state 1 y 6 V DC Isolation of inputs from Enhanced other isolated groups Isolation between inputs Voltage Enhanced0 to 240 V AC  to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz 3 mA 120 V AC u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced0 to 250 V DC  to  to 132 V AC 275 V DC 47 to 63 Hz / 3 mA 3 mA 58 V AC 154 V DCO11controlrelayoutputDC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Load cos j &amp;gt; 0.3 Enhanced 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 8A 8 / 4A 6 / 2A 4 / 1A 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A 250 V CC 00 to 240 V AC 8A 0.2 A 8A 8A 5AContinuous current Breaking capacityMaking capacity Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups Isolation between outputs Voltage&amp;lt; 15 A for 200 msEnhancedO12toO14indicationrelayoutputDC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 2A 0.3 A 0.15 A 250 V DC 00 to 240 V AC 2A 0.2 A 2A 1AContinuous current Breaking capacityMaking capacity Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Isolation between outputs2A 2A Resistive 2 / 1A 0.6 A load Load 2 / 1A 0.5 A L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load cos j &amp;gt; 0.3 &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms Enhanced Enhance]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="152">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES114 modulesDE52153DescriptionbO11: 1 control relay output bO12 to O14: 3 annunciation relay outputs M : connectors for 4 independent logic inputs I11 to I14 K : connectors for 6 logic inputs: bI21: 1 independent logic input bI22 to I26: 5 common point logic inputs.L , M and K : 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors L : connectors for 4 relay outputs:1 25-pin sub-D connector to connect the module to the base unit. 2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs, to be set to: bV DC for 10 DC voltage inputs (default setting) bV AC for 10 AC voltage inputs. 3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages. The parameter setting status can be accessed in the ���Sepam Diagnosis��� screen of the SFT2841 software tool. Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage (V AC setting) inhibits the ���operating time measurement��� function.DE51683Assembly1. Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit. 2. Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2. 3. Tighten the mounting screw 3.4ConnectionDE51685The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external. HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Wiring of connectors L , M and K : bWiring with no fittings: v1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12) vor 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18) vstripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.315 to 0.39 in) bWiring with fittings: vterminal 5, recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18) vtube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) vstripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).! DANGER1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES114 modulesDE52153DescriptionbO11: 1 control relay output bO12 to O14: 3 annunciation relay outputs M : connectors for 4 independent logic inputs I11 to I14 K : connectors for 6 logic inputs: bI21: 1 independent logic input bI22 to I26: 5 common point logic inputs.L , M and K : 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors L : connectors for 4 relay outputs:1 25-pin sub-D connector to connect the module to the base unit. 2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs, to be set to: bV DC for 10 DC voltage inputs (default setting) bV AC for 10 AC voltage inputs. 3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages. The parameter setting status can be accessed in the AAASepam DiagnosisAAA screen of the SFT2841 software tool. Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage (V AC setting) inhibits the AAAoperating time measurementAAA function.DE51683Assembly1. Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit. 2. Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2. 3. Tighten the mounting screw 3.4ConnectionDE51685The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external. HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Wiring of connectors L , M and K : bWiring with no fittings: v1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12) vor 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18) vstripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.315 to 0.39 in) bWiring with fittings: vterminal 5, recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18) vtube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) vstripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).! DANGER1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="153">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesLogic input / output assignment ofSepamseries20The use of the preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter setting and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type of Sepam. The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set the control and monitoring function parameters. Since an input may only be assigned to a single function, not all the functions are available at the same time. Example: if the logic discrimination function is used, the switching of groups of settings function may not be used.FunctionsLogic inputs Open position Closed position Logic discrimination, receive blocking input Switching of groups of settings A/B External reset External tripping 4 (1) External tripping 1 (1) External network synchronizationTable of input/output assignment by applicationS20 S23 T20 T23 M20 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) b b (3) b (4) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) b b (3) b (4) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bB21-B22AssignmentI11 I12 I134External tripping 2 (1) Motor re-acceleration External tripping 3 (1) Buchholz alarm (1) (Buchholz alarm message) Rotor rotation detection Thermistor tripping (1) Inhibit earth fault protection End of charging position Thermostat alarm (1) (thermostat alarm message) Thermistor alarm (1) External tripping 5 and 50BF activation (1) Inhibit remote control, excluding TC1 (1) Inhibit remote control, including TC1 (1) SF6-1 SF6-2 Change of thermal settings Inhibit thermal overload Inhibit recloser Logic outputs Tripping Inhibit closing Watchdog Close orderb b b b b bI14 I21 I22 I23bb bI24b b b bb b b b bI25I26b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bO1 O2 O4 O11Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications. (1) These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix ���NEG��� for undervoltage type operation. (2) Buchholz/Gas trip message. (3) Thermostat trip message. (4) Pressure trip messag]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesLogic input / output assignment ofSepamseries20The use of the preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter setting and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type of Sepam. The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set the control and monitoring function parameters. Since an input may only be assigned to a single function, not all the functions are available at the same time. Example: if the logic discrimination function is used, the switching of groups of settings function may not be used.FunctionsLogic inputs Open position Closed position Logic discrimination, receive blocking input Switching of groups of settings A/B External reset External tripping 4 (1) External tripping 1 (1) External network synchronizationTable of input/output assignment by applicationS20 S23 T20 T23 M20 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) b b (3) b (4) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) b b (3) b (4) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bB21-B22AssignmentI11 I12 I134External tripping 2 (1) Motor re-acceleration External tripping 3 (1) Buchholz alarm (1) (Buchholz alarm message) Rotor rotation detection Thermistor tripping (1) Inhibit earth fault protection End of charging position Thermostat alarm (1) (thermostat alarm message) Thermistor alarm (1) External tripping 5 and 50BF activation (1) Inhibit remote control, excluding TC1 (1) Inhibit remote control, including TC1 (1) SF6-1 SF6-2 Change of thermal settings Inhibit thermal overload Inhibit recloser Logic outputs Tripping Inhibit closing Watchdog Close orderb b b b b bI14 I21 I22 I23bb bI24b b b bb b b b bI25I26b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bO1 O2 O4 O11Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications. (1) These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix AAANEGAAA for undervoltage type operation. (2) Buchholz/Gas trip message. (3) Thermostat trip message. (4) Pressure trip messag]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="154">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesLogic input / output assignment ofSepamseries40Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below. ball the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs: vin the control matrix, to link inputs to output relays, LED indications or display messages vin the logic equation editor, as logic equation variables bthe control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.FunctionsLogic inputsOpen position Closed position Logic discrimination, receive blocking input 1 Logic discrimination, receive blocking input 2 Switching of groups of settings A/B External reset External tripping 1 External tripping 2 External tripping 3 Buchholz/gas tripping Thermostat tripping Pressure tripping Thermistor tripping Buchholz/gas alarm Thermostat alarm Pressure alarm Thermistor alarm End of charging position Inhibit remote control SF6 Inhibit recloser External synchronization Inhibit thermal overload Switching of thermal settings Motor re-acceleration Rotor rotation detection Inhibit undercurrent Inhibit closing Open order Close order Phase voltage transformer fuse melting Residual voltage transformer fuse melting External positive active energy counter External negative active energy counter External positive reactive energy counter External negative reactive energy counterS40,S41b b b b b b b bAssignmenttableoflogicinputsbyapplication S42 T40,T42 M41 G40 Assignmentb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bI11 I12 Free Free I13 Free Free Free Free Free Free Freeb b b b bbbFree Free Free Free4b b b b bb b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b bFree Free Free Free Free I21 Free Free Free Free Freeb b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bFree Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free O1 O2 O4 O11Logic outputsTripping Inhibit closing Watchdog Close orderNote: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined application]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesLogic input / output assignment ofSepamseries40Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below. ball the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs: vin the control matrix, to link inputs to output relays, LED indications or display messages vin the logic equation editor, as logic equation variables bthe control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.FunctionsLogic inputsOpen position Closed position Logic discrimination, receive blocking input 1 Logic discrimination, receive blocking input 2 Switching of groups of settings A/B External reset External tripping 1 External tripping 2 External tripping 3 Buchholz/gas tripping Thermostat tripping Pressure tripping Thermistor tripping Buchholz/gas alarm Thermostat alarm Pressure alarm Thermistor alarm End of charging position Inhibit remote control SF6 Inhibit recloser External synchronization Inhibit thermal overload Switching of thermal settings Motor re-acceleration Rotor rotation detection Inhibit undercurrent Inhibit closing Open order Close order Phase voltage transformer fuse melting Residual voltage transformer fuse melting External positive active energy counter External negative active energy counter External positive reactive energy counter External negative reactive energy counterS40,S41b b b b b b b bAssignmenttableoflogicinputsbyapplication S42 T40,T42 M41 G40 Assignmentb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bI11 I12 Free Free I13 Free Free Free Free Free Free Freeb b b b bbbFree Free Free Free4b b b b bb b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b bFree Free Free Free Free I21 Free Free Free Free Freeb b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bFree Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free O1 O2 O4 O11Logic outputsTripping Inhibit closing Watchdog Close orderNote: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined application]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="155">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H 14 input / 6 output module PresentationFunctionPE000The 5 output relays included on the Sepam series 80 base unit may be extended by adding 1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 DC logic inputs and 6 outputs relays, 1 control relay output and 5 indication relay outputs. Two modules are available for the different input supply voltage ranges and offer different switching thresholds: bMES120, 14 inputs 24 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 14 V DC bMES120G, 14 inputs 220 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 155 V DC bMES120H, 14 inputs 110 V DC to 125 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 82 V DC.CharacteristicsMES120 14 input / 6 output module. Weight Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Voltage Range Typical consumption Typical switching threshold Input limit voltageMES120 / MES120G / MES120H modules Logic inputs40,38 kg (0,83 lb) -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base unitsMES120At state 0 At state 1 Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups VoltageControlrelayoutputOx0124 �� 250 V DC 19.2 �� 275 V DC 3 mA 14 V DC &amp;lt; 6 V DC &amp;gt; 19 V DC Enhanced 24/48 V DC 8A 8 / 4A 6 / 2A 4 / 1A &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms Enhanced 24/48 V DC 2A 2 / 1A EnhancedMES120G220 to 250 V DC 170 to 275 V DC 3 mA 155 V DC &amp;lt; 144 V DC &amp;gt; 170 V DC Enhanced 127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A -110 to 125 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 3 mA 82 V DC &amp;lt; 75 V DC &amp;gt; 88 V DC Enhanced 250 V DC 8A 0.2 A -MES120HContinuous current Breaking capacityDC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Load p.f &amp;gt; 0.3Making capacity Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups Tension100 �� 240 V AC 8A 8A 5AAnnunciation relay input Ox02 to Ox06Continue Alternative (47.5 �� 63 Hz)Continuous current Breaking capacityLoad L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load p.f &amp;gt; 0.3 Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups127 V DC 2A 0.5 A -220 V DC 2A 0.15 A -250 V DC 2A 0.2 A -100 to 240 V AC 2A 1ADescription3removable,lockablescrew-typeconnectors. 1 20-pin connector for 9 logic inputs: b Ix01toIx04:4independentlogicinputs b Ix05 to Ix09: 5 common point logic inputs. 27-pinconnectorfor5commonpointlogicinputsIx10��Ix14. 3 17-pin connector for 6 relay outputs: b Ox01:1controlrelayoutput b Ox02 to Ox06 : 5 indication relay outputs. Addressing of MES120 module inputs / outputs: b x = 1 for the module connected to H1 b x = 2 for the module connected to H2 b x = 3 for the module connected to H3. 4 MES120G, MES120H identification label (MES120 modules have no labels).Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base unit connector H]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H 14 input / 6 output module PresentationFunctionPE000The 5 output relays included on the Sepam series 80 base unit may be extended by adding 1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 DC logic inputs and 6 outputs relays, 1 control relay output and 5 indication relay outputs. Two modules are available for the different input supply voltage ranges and offer different switching thresholds: bMES120, 14 inputs 24 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 14 V DC bMES120G, 14 inputs 220 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 155 V DC bMES120H, 14 inputs 110 V DC to 125 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 82 V DC.CharacteristicsMES120 14 input / 6 output module. Weight Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Voltage Range Typical consumption Typical switching threshold Input limit voltageMES120 / MES120G / MES120H modules Logic inputs40,38 kg (0,83 lb) -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base unitsMES120At state 0 At state 1 Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups VoltageControlrelayoutputOx0124 AA 250 V DC 19.2 AA 275 V DC 3 mA 14 V DC &amp;lt; 6 V DC &amp;gt; 19 V DC Enhanced 24/48 V DC 8A 8 / 4A 6 / 2A 4 / 1A &amp;lt; 15 A for 200 ms Enhanced 24/48 V DC 2A 2 / 1A EnhancedMES120G220 to 250 V DC 170 to 275 V DC 3 mA 155 V DC &amp;lt; 144 V DC &amp;gt; 170 V DC Enhanced 127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A -110 to 125 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 3 mA 82 V DC &amp;lt; 75 V DC &amp;gt; 88 V DC Enhanced 250 V DC 8A 0.2 A -MES120HContinuous current Breaking capacityDC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Load p.f &amp;gt; 0.3Making capacity Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups Tension100 AA 240 V AC 8A 8A 5AAnnunciation relay input Ox02 to Ox06Continue Alternative (47.5 AA 63 Hz)Continuous current Breaking capacityLoad L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load p.f &amp;gt; 0.3 Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups127 V DC 2A 0.5 A -220 V DC 2A 0.15 A -250 V DC 2A 0.2 A -100 to 240 V AC 2A 1ADescription3removable,lockablescrew-typeconnectors. 1 20-pin connector for 9 logic inputs: b Ix01toIx04:4independentlogicinputs b Ix05 to Ix09: 5 common point logic inputs. 27-pinconnectorfor5commonpointlogicinputsIx10AAIx14. 3 17-pin connector for 6 relay outputs: b Ox01:1controlrelayoutput b Ox02 to Ox06 : 5 indication relay outputs. Addressing of MES120 module inputs / outputs: b x = 1 for the module connected to H1 b x = 2 for the module connected to H2 b x = 3 for the module connected to H3. 4 MES120G, MES120H identification label (MES120 modules have no labels).Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base unit connector H]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="156">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H  14 input / 6 output module InstallationAssemblyInstallation of an MES120 module on the base unit binsert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit bpush the module flat up against the base unit to plug it into the connector H2 bpartially tighten the two mounting screws 2 before locking them. MES120 modules must be mounted in the following order: bif only one module is required, connect it to connector H1 bif 2 modules are required, connect them to connectors H1 and H2 bif 3 modules are required (maximum configuration), the 3 connectors H1,H2 and H3 are used.PE00Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base unit connector H2.ConnectionThe inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external. HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be b performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the b technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power b off. is b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Wiringofconnectors bwiring without fittings: v1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (u AWG 24-12) vor 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (u AWG 24-16) vstripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in) bwiring with fittings: vrecommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for one 1.5 mm�� wire (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for one 2.5 mm�� wire (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for two 1 mm�� wires (AWG 18) vtube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) vstripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).DE51645! DANGE]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H  14 input / 6 output module InstallationAssemblyInstallation of an MES120 module on the base unit binsert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit bpush the module flat up against the base unit to plug it into the connector H2 bpartially tighten the two mounting screws 2 before locking them. MES120 modules must be mounted in the following order: bif only one module is required, connect it to connector H1 bif 2 modules are required, connect them to connectors H1 and H2 bif 3 modules are required (maximum configuration), the 3 connectors H1,H2 and H3 are used.PE00Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base unit connector H2.ConnectionThe inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external. HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be b performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the b technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power b off. is b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Wiringofconnectors bwiring without fittings: v1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (u AWG 24-12) vor 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (u AWG 24-16) vstripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in) bwiring with fittings: vrecommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for one 1.5 mmAA wire (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for one 2.5 mmAA wire (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for two 1 mmAA wires (AWG 18) vtube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) vstripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).DE51645! DANGE]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="157">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H  14 input / 6 output module Logic input / output assignmentInputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below. The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation. All the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for the customization functions according to specific application needs: bin the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display bin the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables bin Logipam (SFT2885 software) as input variables for the program in ladder language.FunctionsTripping / contactor control Inhibit closing Closing Watchdog Logic discrimination, blocking send 1 Logic discrimination, blocking send 2 Genset shutdownLogic output assignment table S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment T87 M88 G88b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Note: The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned. b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b O1 O2 by default O3 by default O5 O102 by default O103 by default Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free4De-excitation Load shedding AT, closing of NO circuit breaker AT, closing of coupling AT, opening of coupling Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4) Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4)FunctionsClosed circuit breaker Open circuit breaker Synchronization of Sepam internal clock via external pulse Switching of groups of settings A/B External reset Earthing switch closed Earthing switch open External trip 1 External trip 2 External trip 3 End of charging position Inhibit remote control (Local) SF6 pressure default Inhibit closing Open order Close order Phase VT fuse blown V0 VT fuse blown External positive active energy meter External negative active energy meter External positive reactive energy meter External negative reactive energy meter Racked out circuit breaker Switch A closed Switch A open Switch B closed Switch B open Closing-coil monitoringAssignmenttableforlogicinputscommontoallapplications S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment T87 M88 G88b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b I101 I102 I103 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Fr]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H  14 input / 6 output module Logic input / output assignmentInputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below. The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation. All the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for the customization functions according to specific application needs: bin the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display bin the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables bin Logipam (SFT2885 software) as input variables for the program in ladder language.FunctionsTripping / contactor control Inhibit closing Closing Watchdog Logic discrimination, blocking send 1 Logic discrimination, blocking send 2 Genset shutdownLogic output assignment table S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment T87 M88 G88b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Note: The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned. b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b O1 O2 by default O3 by default O5 O102 by default O103 by default Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free4De-excitation Load shedding AT, closing of NO circuit breaker AT, closing of coupling AT, opening of coupling Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4) Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4)FunctionsClosed circuit breaker Open circuit breaker Synchronization of Sepam internal clock via external pulse Switching of groups of settings A/B External reset Earthing switch closed Earthing switch open External trip 1 External trip 2 External trip 3 End of charging position Inhibit remote control (Local) SF6 pressure default Inhibit closing Open order Close order Phase VT fuse blown V0 VT fuse blown External positive active energy meter External negative active energy meter External positive reactive energy meter External negative reactive energy meter Racked out circuit breaker Switch A closed Switch A open Switch B closed Switch B open Closing-coil monitoringAssignmenttableforlogicinputscommontoallapplications S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment T87 M88 G88b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b I101 I102 I103 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Fr]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="158">
		<raw><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H  14 input / 6 output module Logic input / output assignmentAssignmenttableoflogicinputsbyapplication S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment T87 M88 G88b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free I104 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free FreeFunctionsInhibit recloser Inhibit thermal overload Switching of thermal settings Blocking reception 1 Blocking reception 2 Buchholz trip Thermostat trip Pressure trip Thermistor trip Buchholz alarm Thermostat alarm Pressure alarm Thermistor alarm Rotor speed measurement Rotor rotation detection Motor re-acceleration Load shedding request Inhibit undercurrent Priority genset shutdown De-excitation Close enable (ANSI 25) Inhibit opposite-side remote control (local) Inhibit remote-control coupling (local) Coupling open Coupling closed Opposite side open Opposite side closed Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43) Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43) Selector set to Circuit breaker (ANSI 10) Selector set to Coupling (ANSI 10) Opposite-side circuit breaker disconnected Coupling circuit breaker disconnected Coupling close order Opposite-side voltage OK Inhibit closing of coupling Automatic closing order External closing order 1 External closing order 2 Additional phase voltage transformer fuse blown Additional V0 voltage transformer fuse blown Capacitor step 1 open Capacitor step 1 closed Capacitor step 2 open Capacitor step 2 closed Capacitor step 3 open Capacitor step 3 closed Capacitor step 4 open Capacitor step 4 closed Step 1 opening order Step 2 opening order Step 3 opening order Step 4 opening order Step 1 closing order Step 2 closing order Step 3 closing order Step 4 closing order Step 1 external trip Step 2 external trip Step 3 external trip Step 4 external trip Capacitor step 1 VAR control Capacitor step 2 VAR control Capacitor step 3 VAR control Capacitor step 4 VAR control External capacitor step control inhibit Manual capacitor step control Automatic capacitor step controlbbb b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bbb bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Logic input / output modulesMES120, MES120G, MES120H  14 input / 6 output module Logic input / output assignmentAssignmenttableoflogicinputsbyapplication S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment T87 M88 G88b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free I104 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free FreeFunctionsInhibit recloser Inhibit thermal overload Switching of thermal settings Blocking reception 1 Blocking reception 2 Buchholz trip Thermostat trip Pressure trip Thermistor trip Buchholz alarm Thermostat alarm Pressure alarm Thermistor alarm Rotor speed measurement Rotor rotation detection Motor re-acceleration Load shedding request Inhibit undercurrent Priority genset shutdown De-excitation Close enable (ANSI 25) Inhibit opposite-side remote control (local) Inhibit remote-control coupling (local) Coupling open Coupling closed Opposite side open Opposite side closed Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43) Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43) Selector set to Circuit breaker (ANSI 10) Selector set to Coupling (ANSI 10) Opposite-side circuit breaker disconnected Coupling circuit breaker disconnected Coupling close order Opposite-side voltage OK Inhibit closing of coupling Automatic closing order External closing order 1 External closing order 2 Additional phase voltage transformer fuse blown Additional V0 voltage transformer fuse blown Capacitor step 1 open Capacitor step 1 closed Capacitor step 2 open Capacitor step 2 closed Capacitor step 3 open Capacitor step 3 closed Capacitor step 4 open Capacitor step 4 closed Step 1 opening order Step 2 opening order Step 3 opening order Step 4 opening order Step 1 closing order Step 2 closing order Step 3 closing order Step 4 closing order Step 1 external trip Step 2 external trip Step 3 external trip Step 4 external trip Capacitor step 1 VAR control Capacitor step 2 VAR control Capacitor step 3 VAR control Capacitor step 4 VAR control External capacitor step control inhibit Manual capacitor step control Automatic capacitor step controlbbb b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b bbb bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bb b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="159">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesSelectionguideandconnectionSelectionguide4 remote modules are proposed as options to enhance the Sepam base unit functions: bthe number and type of remote modules compatible with the base unit depend on the Sepam application bthe DSM303 remote advanced UMI module is only compatible with base units that do not have integrated advanced UMIs.Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80S2x,B2xMET148-2 Temperature sensor module See page 159 MSA141 Analog output module See page 161 DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module See page 162 MCS025 Synchro-check module See page 164 Number of sets of interlinked modules / maximum number  ofremotemodulesT2x, M2xS4xT4x, M4x, G4x S8x,B8xT8x,G8xM8x, C8x0      0 0 1 set of 3 interlinked modules0      0 0 1 set of 3 interlinked modules0           0 5 modules split between 2 sets of interlinked modulesATTENTIONConnectionConnectioncordsDifferent combinations of modules may be connected using cords fitted with 2 black RJ45 connectors, which come in 3 lengths: bCCA770: length = 0.6 m (2 ft) bCCA772: length = 2 m (6.6 ft) bCCA774: length = 4 m (13.1 ft).4DE51646HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be connected with the special CCA785 cord, supplied with the module and equipped with an orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause equipmentdamage.The modules are linked by cords which provide the power supply and act as functional links with the Sepam unit (connector D to connector Da , Dd to Da , ���).Rulesoninter-modulelinkingblinking of 3 modules maximum bDSM303 and MCS025 modules may only be connected at the end of the link.Maximum advisable configurationsBaseDE51770Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40: just 1 set of interlinked modulesCord Module 1 Cord Module 2 Cord Module 3Series 20 Series 40 Series 40 Series 40CCA772 CCA772 CCA772 CCA772MSA141 MSA141 MSA141 MET148-2CCA770 CCA770 CCA770 CCA770MET148-2 MET148-2 MET148-2 MET148-2CCA774 CCA774 CCA772 CCA774DSM303 DSM303 MET148-2 DSM303Sepamseries80:2setsofinterlinkedmodules Sepam series 80 has 2 connection ports for remote modules, D1 and D2 . Modules may be connected to either port.Base Set 1 D1DE51647Cord CCA772Module 1 MET148-2Cord CCA770Module 2 MET148-2Cord CCA774Module 3 DSM303Example of inter-module linking on Sepam series 20. Set 2 D2 CCA772 MSA141 CCA785 MCS025 -]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesSelectionguideandconnectionSelectionguide4 remote modules are proposed as options to enhance the Sepam base unit functions: bthe number and type of remote modules compatible with the base unit depend on the Sepam application bthe DSM303 remote advanced UMI module is only compatible with base units that do not have integrated advanced UMIs.Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80S2x,B2xMET148-2 Temperature sensor module See page 159 MSA141 Analog output module See page 161 DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module See page 162 MCS025 Synchro-check module See page 164 Number of sets of interlinked modules / maximum number  ofremotemodulesT2x, M2xS4xT4x, M4x, G4x S8x,B8xT8x,G8xM8x, C8x0      0 0 1 set of 3 interlinked modules0      0 0 1 set of 3 interlinked modules0           0 5 modules split between 2 sets of interlinked modulesATTENTIONConnectionConnectioncordsDifferent combinations of modules may be connected using cords fitted with 2 black RJ45 connectors, which come in 3 lengths: bCCA770: length = 0.6 m (2 ft) bCCA772: length = 2 m (6.6 ft) bCCA774: length = 4 m (13.1 ft).4DE51646HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be connected with the special CCA785 cord, supplied with the module and equipped with an orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause equipmentdamage.The modules are linked by cords which provide the power supply and act as functional links with the Sepam unit (connector D to connector Da , Dd to Da , AAA).Rulesoninter-modulelinkingblinking of 3 modules maximum bDSM303 and MCS025 modules may only be connected at the end of the link.Maximum advisable configurationsBaseDE51770Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40: just 1 set of interlinked modulesCord Module 1 Cord Module 2 Cord Module 3Series 20 Series 40 Series 40 Series 40CCA772 CCA772 CCA772 CCA772MSA141 MSA141 MSA141 MET148-2CCA770 CCA770 CCA770 CCA770MET148-2 MET148-2 MET148-2 MET148-2CCA774 CCA774 CCA772 CCA774DSM303 DSM303 MET148-2 DSM303Sepamseries80:2setsofinterlinkedmodules Sepam series 80 has 2 connection ports for remote modules, D1 and D2 . Modules may be connected to either port.Base Set 1 D1DE51647Cord CCA772Module 1 MET148-2Cord CCA770Module 2 MET148-2Cord CCA774Module 3 DSM303Example of inter-module linking on Sepam series 20. Set 2 D2 CCA772 MSA141 CCA785 MCS025 -]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="160">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMET148-2 Temperature sensor moduleMET148-2 Temperature sensor module.The MET148-2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs) of the same type: bPt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting b3-wire temperature sensors bA single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords b2 modules for each Sepam series 40 or series 80 base unit, to be connected by CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is utilized by the following protection functions: bThermal overload (to take ambient temperature into account) bTemperature monitoring.FunctionPE00CharacteristicsMET148-2 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Isolation from earth Current injected in RTD 0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base unitsTemperaturesensorsPt100None 4 mANi100 / Ni120None 4 mA4DE80031Descriptionanddimensionsmm inA Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4. B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8. Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord3.46Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord (according to application). t Grounding/earthing terminal.1.815.67(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to: b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position) b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module. 2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to: bMET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8 (default position) bMET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16 (for Sepam series 40 and series 80 only)]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMET148-2 Temperature sensor moduleMET148-2 Temperature sensor module.The MET148-2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs) of the same type: bPt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting b3-wire temperature sensors bA single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords b2 modules for each Sepam series 40 or series 80 base unit, to be connected by CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is utilized by the following protection functions: bThermal overload (to take ambient temperature into account) bTemperature monitoring.FunctionPE00CharacteristicsMET148-2 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Isolation from earth Current injected in RTD 0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base unitsTemperaturesensorsPt100None 4 mANi100 / Ni120None 4 mA4DE80031Descriptionanddimensionsmm inA Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4. B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8. Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord3.46Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord (according to application). t Grounding/earthing terminal.1.815.67(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to: b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position) b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module. 2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to: bMET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8 (default position) bMET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16 (for Sepam series 40 and series 80 only)]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="161">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMET148-2 Temperature sensor moduleConnectionHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bCheck that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Connectionoftheearthingterminal By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm�� (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). ConnectionofRTDstoscrew-typeconnectors b1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (AWG 24-12) bor 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (AWG 24-18). Recommended cross-sections according to distance: bUp to 00 m (0 ft) u 1 mm�� (AWG 18) bUp to 00 m (990 ft) u 1.5 mm�� (AWG 16) bUp to 1 km (0.62 mi) u 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) Maximum distance between sensor and module: 1 km (0.62 mi). Wiringprecautions bIt is preferable to use shielded cables. The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance bOnly connect the shielding at the MET148-2 end, in the shortest manner possible, to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B bDo not connect the shielding at the RTD end. Accuracyderatingaccordingtowiring The error Dt is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross-section:L ------- ----( km ) ���t ( ��C ) = 2 �� - - - - - ----S ( m m2 )DANGER4DE51649b��2.1��C/km for 0.93 mm�� cross-section (AWG 18) b��1��C/km for 1.92 mm�� cross-section (AWG 14)]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMET148-2 Temperature sensor moduleConnectionHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bCheck that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Connectionoftheearthingterminal By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mmAA (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). ConnectionofRTDstoscrew-typeconnectors b1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (AWG 24-12) bor 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (AWG 24-18). Recommended cross-sections according to distance: bUp to 00 m (0 ft) u 1 mmAA (AWG 18) bUp to 00 m (990 ft) u 1.5 mmAA (AWG 16) bUp to 1 km (0.62 mi) u 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) Maximum distance between sensor and module: 1 km (0.62 mi). Wiringprecautions bIt is preferable to use shielded cables. The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance bOnly connect the shielding at the MET148-2 end, in the shortest manner possible, to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B bDo not connect the shielding at the RTD end. Accuracyderatingaccordingtowiring The error Dt is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross-section:L ------- ----( km ) AAAt ( AAC ) = 2 AA - - - - - ----S ( m m2 )DANGER4DE51649bAA2.1AAC/km for 0.93 mmAA cross-section (AWG 18) bAA1AAC/km for 1.92 mmAA cross-section (AWG 14)]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="162">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMSA141  AnalogoutputmoduleMSA141 analog output module.The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal: bselection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting b0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting bscaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement. Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is: vminimum value = 0 vmaximum value = 3000 ba single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (0.6m or 2 ft), CCA772 (2m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4m or 13.1 ft) cords. The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network.FunctionMt11009CharacteristicsMSA141 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA Minimum value Maximum value &amp;lt; 00 W (including wiring) 0.5 %AnalogoutputCurrent Scaling (no data input checking) Load impedance Accuracy4b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bPhase and residual currents Phase-to-neutral and phase-tophase voltages Frequency Thermal capacity used Temperatures Active power Reactive power Apparent power Power factor Remote setting via communication linkMeasurements availableUnit0.1 A 1VSeries20 Series40 Series80b b b b b0.01 Hz % 1 ��C 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar 0.1 kVA 0.01bDE80032mm inDescriptionanddimensionsA Terminal block for analog output. Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.3.46Dd RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord t Earthing terminal.(according to application).1Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to: bRc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position) b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.1.815.67ConnectionConnectionoftheearthingterminal By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm�� (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), equipped with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). Connectionofanalogoutputtoscrew-typeconnector b1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (AWG 24-12) bor 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (AWG 24-18). Wiringprecautions bIt is preferable to use shielded cables bUse tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end. (1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.DE521]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMSA141  AnalogoutputmoduleMSA141 analog output module.The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal: bselection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting b0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting bscaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement. Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is: vminimum value = 0 vmaximum value = 3000 ba single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (0.6m or 2 ft), CCA772 (2m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4m or 13.1 ft) cords. The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network.FunctionMt11009CharacteristicsMSA141 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base units 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA Minimum value Maximum value &amp;lt; 00 W (including wiring) 0.5 %AnalogoutputCurrent Scaling (no data input checking) Load impedance Accuracy4b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b bPhase and residual currents Phase-to-neutral and phase-tophase voltages Frequency Thermal capacity used Temperatures Active power Reactive power Apparent power Power factor Remote setting via communication linkMeasurements availableUnit0.1 A 1VSeries20 Series40 Series80b b b b b0.01 Hz % 1 AAC 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar 0.1 kVA 0.01bDE80032mm inDescriptionanddimensionsA Terminal block for analog output. Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.3.46Dd RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord t Earthing terminal.(according to application).1Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to: bRc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position) b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.1.815.67ConnectionConnectionoftheearthingterminal By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mmAA (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), equipped with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). Connectionofanalogoutputtoscrew-typeconnector b1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (AWG 24-12) bor 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (AWG 24-18). Wiringprecautions bIt is preferable to use shielded cables bUse tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end. (1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.DE521]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="163">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesDSM303 Remote advanced UMI moduleFunctionPE50127When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI. It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location: b reduced depth &amp;lt; 30 mm (1.2 in) b a single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords. The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.CharacteristicsDSM303 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0.3 kg (0.661 lb) Flush-mounted -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) Same characteristics as for Sepam base unitsDSM303 remote advanced UMI module.41]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesDSM303 Remote advanced UMI moduleFunctionPE50127When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI. It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location: b reduced depth &amp;lt; 30 mm (1.2 in) b a single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords. The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.CharacteristicsDSM303 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0.3 kg (0.661 lb) Flush-mounted -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) Same characteristics as for Sepam base unitsDSM303 remote advanced UMI module.41]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="164">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesDSM303  Remote advanced UMI moduleDescriptionanddimensionsFrontviewDE80033The module is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional screw-type fastening is required. SideviewDE80034mm inmm in16174.63.780.985.990.61 Green LED: Sepam on. 2 Red LED: - steadily on: module unavailable - flashing: Sepam link unavailable. 3 9 yellow LEDs. 4 Label identifying the LEDs. 5 Graphic LCD screen. 6 Display of measurements. 7 Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data. 8 Display of alarm messages. 9 Sepam reset (or confirm data entry). 10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing (or move cursor up). 11 LED test (or move cursor down). 12 Access to protection settings. 13 Access to Sepam parameters. 14 Entry of 2 passwords. 15 PC connection port. 16 Mounting clip. 17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness (gasket supplied with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary).Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with4a CCA77x cord.CAUTIONFailuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury.DE80060Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate thickness &amp;lt; 3 mm or 0.12 in)mm inHAZARDOFCUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.98.5 0,53.885.67ConnectionDE53033Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesDSM303  Remote advanced UMI moduleDescriptionanddimensionsFrontviewDE80033The module is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional screw-type fastening is required. SideviewDE80034mm inmm in16174.63.780.985.990.61 Green LED: Sepam on. 2 Red LED: - steadily on: module unavailable - flashing: Sepam link unavailable. 3 9 yellow LEDs. 4 Label identifying the LEDs. 5 Graphic LCD screen. 6 Display of measurements. 7 Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data. 8 Display of alarm messages. 9 Sepam reset (or confirm data entry). 10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing (or move cursor up). 11 LED test (or move cursor down). 12 Access to protection settings. 13 Access to Sepam parameters. 14 Entry of 2 passwords. 15 PC connection port. 16 Mounting clip. 17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness (gasket supplied with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary).Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with4a CCA77x cord.CAUTIONFailuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury.DE80060Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate thickness &amp;lt; 3 mm or 0.12 in)mm inHAZARDOFCUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.98.5 0,53.885.67ConnectionDE53033Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="165">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmodulePE0FunctionThe MCS025 module checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker to ensure safe closing (ANSI 25). It checks the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase between the two measured voltages, taking into account dead line/busbar conditions. Three relay outputs may be used to send the close enable to several Sepam series 80 units. The circuit-breaker control function of each Sepam series 80 unit will take this close enable into account. The settings for the synchro-check function and the measurements carried out by the module may be accessed by the SFT2841 setting and operating software, similar to the other settings and measurements for the Sepam series 80. The MCS025 module is supplied ready for operation with: bthe CCA620 connector for connection of the relay outputs and the power supply bthe CCT640 connector for voltage connection bthe CCA785 cord for connection between the module and the Sepam series 80 base unit.4MCS025 synchro-check module.MCS025 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristicsCharacteristics1.35 kg (2.98 lb) With the AMT840 accessory -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units &amp;gt; 100 kW &amp;lt; 0.015 VA (VT 100 V) 240 V 480 VVoltage inputsImp��dance d���entr��e Consommation Tenue thermique permanente Surcharge 1 secondeRelayoutputsRelayoutputsO1andO2Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Resistive load Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.3 24/48 V DC 8A 8A/ 4A 6A/ 2A 4A/ 1A 127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A 100 �� 240 V AC 8A8A 5A &amp;lt;  ms for 00 ms EnhancedMaking capacity Isolation of outputs from other other isolated groupsRelay outputs O3 and O4 (O4 not used)Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity Isolation of outputs from other other isolated groups DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.3 24/48 V DC 2A 2A/ 1A Enhanced 127 V DC 2A 0.5 A 220 V DC 2A 0.15 A 100 to 240 V AC 2A 5APowersupplyVoltage Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable momentary outages24 to 250 V DC, -20 % / +10 % W &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms 0 ms110 to 240 V AC, -20 % / + 0 % 47.5 to 63 Hz 9 VA &amp;lt; 15 A for one half period 0 ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmodulePE0FunctionThe MCS025 module checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker to ensure safe closing (ANSI 25). It checks the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase between the two measured voltages, taking into account dead line/busbar conditions. Three relay outputs may be used to send the close enable to several Sepam series 80 units. The circuit-breaker control function of each Sepam series 80 unit will take this close enable into account. The settings for the synchro-check function and the measurements carried out by the module may be accessed by the SFT2841 setting and operating software, similar to the other settings and measurements for the Sepam series 80. The MCS025 module is supplied ready for operation with: bthe CCA620 connector for connection of the relay outputs and the power supply bthe CCT640 connector for voltage connection bthe CCA785 cord for connection between the module and the Sepam series 80 base unit.4MCS025 synchro-check module.MCS025 moduleWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristicsCharacteristics1.35 kg (2.98 lb) With the AMT840 accessory -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base units &amp;gt; 100 kW &amp;lt; 0.015 VA (VT 100 V) 240 V 480 VVoltage inputsImpAAdance dAAAentrAAe Consommation Tenue thermique permanente Surcharge 1 secondeRelayoutputsRelayoutputsO1andO2Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Resistive load Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load L/R &amp;lt; 40 ms Resistive load Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.3 24/48 V DC 8A 8A/ 4A 6A/ 2A 4A/ 1A 127 V DC 8A 0.7 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 220 V DC 8A 0.3 A 0.2 A 0.1 A 100 AA 240 V AC 8A8A 5A &amp;lt;  ms for 00 ms EnhancedMaking capacity Isolation of outputs from other other isolated groupsRelay outputs O3 and O4 (O4 not used)Voltage Continuous current Breaking capacity Isolation of outputs from other other isolated groups DC AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) Load L/R &amp;lt; 20 ms Load p.f. &amp;gt; 0.3 24/48 V DC 2A 2A/ 1A Enhanced 127 V DC 2A 0.5 A 220 V DC 2A 0.15 A 100 to 240 V AC 2A 5APowersupplyVoltage Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable momentary outages24 to 250 V DC, -20 % / +10 % W &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms 0 ms110 to 240 V AC, -20 % / + 0 % 47.5 to 63 Hz 9 VA &amp;lt; 15 A for one half period 0 ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="166">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmodule1    MCS025 module bauxiliary power supply b4 relay outputs: vO1, O2, O3: close enable. vO4: not usedDE51654DescriptionA CCA620 20-pin connector for:B CCT640 connector (phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase) for the two input voltages to be synchronizedC RJ45 connector, not used D RJ connector for module connection to theSepam series 80 base unit, either directly or via another remote module. Two mounting clips Two holding pins for the flush-mount position CCA785 connection cord2 3 ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmodule1    MCS025 module bauxiliary power supply b4 relay outputs: vO1, O2, O3: close enable. vO4: not usedDE51654DescriptionA CCA620 20-pin connector for:B CCT640 connector (phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase) for the two input voltages to be synchronizedC RJ45 connector, not used D RJ connector for module connection to theSepam series 80 base unit, either directly or via another remote module. Two mounting clips Two holding pins for the flush-mount position CCA785 connection cord2 3 ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="167">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmoduleDimensionsDE52816mm inDE800798.746.93MCS025.DE52759Assembly with AMT840 mounting plateDE800814The MCS025 module should be mounted at the back of the compartment using the AMT840 mounting plate.mm in4.84AMT840 mounting plate.Caract��ristiques de raccordementTypeScrew-typeConnectorAReferenceCCA620Wiringb Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm�� (&amp;gt; AWG 2412) or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm�� (&amp;gt;AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 �� 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm�� wires (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in) VT wiring: same as wiring of the CCA620 Earthing connection: by 4 mm (0.15 in) ring lug CCA785, special prefabricated cord supplied with the MCS025 module: b orange RJ45 connector for connection to port D on the MCS025 module b black RJ45 connector for connection to the Sepam series 80 base unit, either directly or via another remote module.B DScrew-type Orange RJ45 connectorCCT6]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmoduleDimensionsDE52816mm inDE800798.746.93MCS025.DE52759Assembly with AMT840 mounting plateDE800814The MCS025 module should be mounted at the back of the compartment using the AMT840 mounting plate.mm in4.84AMT840 mounting plate.CaractAAristiques de raccordementTypeScrew-typeConnectorAReferenceCCA620Wiringb Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA (&amp;gt; AWG 2412) or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA (&amp;gt;AWG 24-16) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 AA 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mmAA wires (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in) VT wiring: same as wiring of the CCA620 Earthing connection: by 4 mm (0.15 in) ring lug CCA785, special prefabricated cord supplied with the MCS025 module: b orange RJ45 connector for connection to port D on the MCS025 module b black RJ45 connector for connection to the Sepam series 80 base unit, either directly or via another remote module.B DScrew-type Orange RJ45 connectorCCT6]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="168">
		<raw><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmoduleDE520754(1) Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral connection.HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be connected with the special CCA785 cord, supplied with the module and equipped with an orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause equipmentdamage.ATTENTIONHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. bConsider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANG]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Remote modulesMCS025 Synchro-checkmoduleDE520754(1) Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral connection.HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be connected with the special CCA785 cord, supplied with the module and equipped with an orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause equipmentdamage.ATTENTIONHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. bConsider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANG]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="169">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Presentation0009Sepam 100 LD is a high impedance differential relay. It provides restricted earth fault, busbar and machine protection.Advantagesbstability with respect to external faults bsensitivity to internal faults bspeed (typical response time: 15 ms to 5 Is) boutputs with or without latching blocal and remote acknowledgment bhigh level of immunity to electromagnetic interference.DescriptionSepam 100 LD.4ontrip30 3540 50 25 20 60 15 70 10 5 80 % Inresetsepam 100 S01 LDSepam 100 LD: front panel.Sepam 100 LD is available in 4 versions: bsingle-phase for restricted earth protection bthree-phase for busbar and machine protection b50 or 60 Hz 50 Hz single-phase: 100 LD X 51 50 Hz three-phase: 100 LD X 53 60 Hz single-phase: 100 LD X 61 60 Hz three-phase: 100 LD X 63. The front of Sepam 100 LD includes: b2 signal lamps: vpower ���on��� indicator vlatching ���trip��� indicator indicating output relay tripping bprotection setting dial b���reset��� button for acknowledging output relays and the ���trip��� indicator. When the button is activated, the ���trip��� indicator undergoes a lamp test. The back of Sepam 100 LD includes: binput/output connectors: van 8-pin connector for toroid inputs and remote acknowledgment van 8-pin connector for ���tripping��� outputs and power supply va 4-pin connector for ���tripping��� outputs ba microswitch used to configure the relay ���with��� or ���without��� latching. Sepam 100 LD has: b1 or 3 current inputs with a common point according to whether it is a single-phase or three-phase version ba logic input (isolated) for remote acknowledgment b���tripping��� output relay with 5 contacts (3 normally open contacts and 2 normally closed contacts). Sepam 100 LD operates in 5 voltage ranges (please specify when ordering): b24-30 V DC b48-125 V DC b220-250 V DC b100-127 V AC b220-240 V AC. Sepam 100 LD is associated with a stabilization plate (or 3 plates) with variable resistance, enabling operation with 1 A or 5 A transformers.DE10413Operationcurvet (ms) 100ParametersettingMicroswitch SW1, accessible on the back of Sepam 100 LD, is used to choose ���with��� or ���without��� latching.Withoutlatching: SW1E90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 l/lsWithlatching: S]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Presentation0009Sepam 100 LD is a high impedance differential relay. It provides restricted earth fault, busbar and machine protection.Advantagesbstability with respect to external faults bsensitivity to internal faults bspeed (typical response time: 15 ms to 5 Is) boutputs with or without latching blocal and remote acknowledgment bhigh level of immunity to electromagnetic interference.DescriptionSepam 100 LD.4ontrip30 3540 50 25 20 60 15 70 10 5 80 % Inresetsepam 100 S01 LDSepam 100 LD: front panel.Sepam 100 LD is available in 4 versions: bsingle-phase for restricted earth protection bthree-phase for busbar and machine protection b50 or 60 Hz 50 Hz single-phase: 100 LD X 51 50 Hz three-phase: 100 LD X 53 60 Hz single-phase: 100 LD X 61 60 Hz three-phase: 100 LD X 63. The front of Sepam 100 LD includes: b2 signal lamps: vpower AAAonAAA indicator vlatching AAAtripAAA indicator indicating output relay tripping bprotection setting dial bAAAresetAAA button for acknowledging output relays and the AAAtripAAA indicator. When the button is activated, the AAAtripAAA indicator undergoes a lamp test. The back of Sepam 100 LD includes: binput/output connectors: van 8-pin connector for toroid inputs and remote acknowledgment van 8-pin connector for AAAtrippingAAA outputs and power supply va 4-pin connector for AAAtrippingAAA outputs ba microswitch used to configure the relay AAAwithAAA or AAAwithoutAAA latching. Sepam 100 LD has: b1 or 3 current inputs with a common point according to whether it is a single-phase or three-phase version ba logic input (isolated) for remote acknowledgment bAAAtrippingAAA output relay with 5 contacts (3 normally open contacts and 2 normally closed contacts). Sepam 100 LD operates in 5 voltage ranges (please specify when ordering): b24-30 V DC b48-125 V DC b220-250 V DC b100-127 V AC b220-240 V AC. Sepam 100 LD is associated with a stabilization plate (or 3 plates) with variable resistance, enabling operation with 1 A or 5 A transformers.DE10413Operationcurvet (ms) 100ParametersettingMicroswitch SW1, accessible on the back of Sepam 100 LD, is used to choose AAAwithAAA or AAAwithoutAAA latching.Withoutlatching: SW1E90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 l/lsWithlatching: S]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="170">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD High impedance differential protectionSettingsSettingsSetting current IsSettingvalues5 to 40 % In by steps of 5 % In 40 to 80 % In by steps of 10 % In The dial on the front of the device is used for settingStabilizing resistor plateRs = 0 W to  W Rs = 0 W to 0 W Rs = 0 W to 0 W Rs = 0 W to 0 W Rs = 0 W to 0 WP = 280 W P = 280 W P = 280 W P = 180 W P = 180 WAccuracy / performanceSetting Pickup (%) Response time �� % 9 % �� % y 10 ms for I u 10 Is y 16 ms for I u 5 Is y 25 ms for I u 2 Is Memory time y 0 ms]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD High impedance differential protectionSettingsSettingsSetting current IsSettingvalues5 to 40 % In by steps of 5 % In 40 to 80 % In by steps of 10 % In The dial on the front of the device is used for settingStabilizing resistor plateRs = 0 W to  W Rs = 0 W to 0 W Rs = 0 W to 0 W Rs = 0 W to 0 W Rs = 0 W to 0 WP = 280 W P = 280 W P = 280 W P = 180 W P = 180 WAccuracy / performanceSetting Pickup (%) Response time AA % 9 % AA % y 10 ms for I u 10 Is y 16 ms for I u 5 Is y 25 ms for I u 2 Is Memory time y 0 ms]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="171">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Sensors and surge limitersTC1DE10404TC2 zone prot��g��eSpecifyingthesensorsCurrenttransformersTo ensure the stability and sensitivity of Sepam 100 LD, the stabilization resistor and characteristics of the current transformers (CTs) are calculated as follows.R1 Rf1 Rf2R2Choiceofcurrenttransformers ball the CTs must have the same transformation ratio n bthe knee-point voltages are chosen so that: Vk &amp;gt; 2 x (R + Rf) x iccR +Rf Vk ----------------- �� icc &amp;lt; R s ��� -------------is 2 �� isRIRsChoiceofstabilizingresistor100 LDSurgelimiter The approximate voltage developed by a CT in the event of an internal fault is: If the value exceeds 3 kV, it is necessary to add an Rl surge limiter in parallel with the relay and stabilizing resistor in order to protect the CTs (see: surge limiter). Protectionsensitivity The CTs consume magnetizing current and the surge limiter, when installed, creates fault current. The minimum residual primary current detected by the protection is therefore: Id = n x (im1+���imp + if + is) with b im1, ���imp are read on the CT magnetization curves at V = Rs x is b if is the total earth leakage current of the surge limiter for Vs = Rs x is, i.e. the sum of the earth leakage currents of the N limiter units installed in parallel: if = N x ib (see: surge limiter).n: p: Rf1,Rf2: R1,���Rp: Rs: Rl: icc: is: if: im1,imp: Vk1, Vkp:CT transformation ratio Number of CTs Wiring resistance on either side of Rs Rf = max (Rf1, Rf2) CT secondary resistances R = max (R1, ���Rp) Stabilizing resistor Surge limiter Maximum external short-circuit current in CT secondary winding Protection setting (A) Current in Rl CT magnetizing currents CT knee-point voltages Vk = min (Vk1,���Vkp)4SurgelimiterChoiceIf the calculations have shown that it is necessary to install a surge limiter in parallel with the relay and Rs to protect the CTs, it is determined as follows. Standardreferences bthe surge limiters on offer consist of limiter blocks which are independent of each other. Each block accepts a maximum current of 40 A RMS for 1 s. By installing the blocks in parallel, it is possible to obtain the appropriate limiter for the application. bthere are two standard references: va single module, comprising one block va triple module, comprising three independent blocks which are aligned. Calculationofthenumberofblocksperphase According to i, max. RMS short-circuit current in the secondary winding of a CT, the number of blocks required per phase is calculated: bfor a three-phase relay, N triple modules should be ordered bfor a single-phase relay, N blocks, made up of triple and single modules.Earthleakagecurrent1000A limiter block accepts a max. steady state voltage of 325 V RMS and presents an earth fault current lb:U (V ms)100 0.0010.01 Ib (A RMS)0.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Sensors and surge limitersTC1DE10404TC2 zone protAAgAAeSpecifyingthesensorsCurrenttransformersTo ensure the stability and sensitivity of Sepam 100 LD, the stabilization resistor and characteristics of the current transformers (CTs) are calculated as follows.R1 Rf1 Rf2R2Choiceofcurrenttransformers ball the CTs must have the same transformation ratio n bthe knee-point voltages are chosen so that: Vk &amp;gt; 2 x (R + Rf) x iccR +Rf Vk ----------------- AA icc &amp;lt; R s AAA -------------is 2 AA isRIRsChoiceofstabilizingresistor100 LDSurgelimiter The approximate voltage developed by a CT in the event of an internal fault is: If the value exceeds 3 kV, it is necessary to add an Rl surge limiter in parallel with the relay and stabilizing resistor in order to protect the CTs (see: surge limiter). Protectionsensitivity The CTs consume magnetizing current and the surge limiter, when installed, creates fault current. The minimum residual primary current detected by the protection is therefore: Id = n x (im1+AAAimp + if + is) with b im1, AAAimp are read on the CT magnetization curves at V = Rs x is b if is the total earth leakage current of the surge limiter for Vs = Rs x is, i.e. the sum of the earth leakage currents of the N limiter units installed in parallel: if = N x ib (see: surge limiter).n: p: Rf1,Rf2: R1,AAARp: Rs: Rl: icc: is: if: im1,imp: Vk1, Vkp:CT transformation ratio Number of CTs Wiring resistance on either side of Rs Rf = max (Rf1, Rf2) CT secondary resistances R = max (R1, AAARp) Stabilizing resistor Surge limiter Maximum external short-circuit current in CT secondary winding Protection setting (A) Current in Rl CT magnetizing currents CT knee-point voltages Vk = min (Vk1,AAAVkp)4SurgelimiterChoiceIf the calculations have shown that it is necessary to install a surge limiter in parallel with the relay and Rs to protect the CTs, it is determined as follows. Standardreferences bthe surge limiters on offer consist of limiter blocks which are independent of each other. Each block accepts a maximum current of 40 A RMS for 1 s. By installing the blocks in parallel, it is possible to obtain the appropriate limiter for the application. bthere are two standard references: va single module, comprising one block va triple module, comprising three independent blocks which are aligned. Calculationofthenumberofblocksperphase According to i, max. RMS short-circuit current in the secondary winding of a CT, the number of blocks required per phase is calculated: bfor a three-phase relay, N triple modules should be ordered bfor a single-phase relay, N blocks, made up of triple and single modules.Earthleakagecurrent1000A limiter block accepts a max. steady state voltage of 325 V RMS and presents an earth fault current lb:U (V ms)100 0.0010.01 Ib (A RMS)0.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="172">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Description and connectionRearpanel1EFunctionalandconnectiondiagram0DE10416A 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1AS 1~ 3~LD1A8 tripping 7 output 6 5 45% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0A F0 F0 F080 % 1B3 4 3 2 1annunciation outputsphase 1 SW1 phase 2 phase 3 A 8 7 6 remote reset PB resetSW1 without with latching S R ���1 trip���1etB 4 3 2 15 4 3 2 14auxiliary power supply1 1A + -2onNote: only 0A1 and 0A2 terminals are available in the single-phase version.DE104170A : 8-pin CCA608 connector (toroid and remote reloading inputs); screw terminal wiring with 0.6 to 2.5 mm�� wires, each terminal being capable of receiving two 1.5 mm�� wires. 1A : 8-pin CCA608 connector (power supply and ���annunciation and tripping��� outputs); screw terminal wiring with 0.6 to 2.5 mm�� wires, each terminal being capable of receiving two 1.5 mm�� wires. B : CCA604 connector (���annunciation��� outputs); screw terminal wiring with 0.6 to 2.5 mm�� wires, each terminal being capable of receiving two 1.5 mm�� wires.Terminal identification Each terminal is identified by 3 characters.1 A 4Board slot number (0 to 1) Connector identification letter (A or B) Connector terminal number : ground terminalDE10418ConnectionofthetabilizationplateConnection of CTs and surge limiters: b5 A rating: between terminals 1-2 and 3-4 b1 A rating: between terminals 1-2 and 5-6 bitems 1 to 6: clamp screw connections for 6 mm2 wire bitems 1, 2: secondary of CSH30 core balance CT, connected to 0A . Wire to be used: bsheathed, shielded wire bmin. cross-section 0.93 mm2 (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mm��) bresistance load per unit length &amp;lt; 100 mW/m bmin. dielectric strength: 1000 V bmax. length: 2 m. Connect the wire shielding in the shortest way possible to 0A . The shielding is grounded in Sepam 100 LD. Do not ground the wire by any other means. Press the wire against the metal frame of the cubicle to improve immunity to radiated interferenc]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Description and connectionRearpanel1EFunctionalandconnectiondiagram0DE10416A 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1AS 1~ 3~LD1A8 tripping 7 output 6 5 45% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0A F0 F0 F080 % 1B3 4 3 2 1annunciation outputsphase 1 SW1 phase 2 phase 3 A 8 7 6 remote reset PB resetSW1 without with latching S R AAA1 tripAAA1etB 4 3 2 15 4 3 2 14auxiliary power supply1 1A + -2onNote: only 0A1 and 0A2 terminals are available in the single-phase version.DE104170A : 8-pin CCA608 connector (toroid and remote reloading inputs); screw terminal wiring with 0.6 to 2.5 mmAA wires, each terminal being capable of receiving two 1.5 mmAA wires. 1A : 8-pin CCA608 connector (power supply and AAAannunciation and trippingAAA outputs); screw terminal wiring with 0.6 to 2.5 mmAA wires, each terminal being capable of receiving two 1.5 mmAA wires. B : CCA604 connector (AAAannunciationAAA outputs); screw terminal wiring with 0.6 to 2.5 mmAA wires, each terminal being capable of receiving two 1.5 mmAA wires.Terminal identification Each terminal is identified by 3 characters.1 A 4Board slot number (0 to 1) Connector identification letter (A or B) Connector terminal number : ground terminalDE10418ConnectionofthetabilizationplateConnection of CTs and surge limiters: b5 A rating: between terminals 1-2 and 3-4 b1 A rating: between terminals 1-2 and 5-6 bitems 1 to 6: clamp screw connections for 6 mm2 wire bitems 1, 2: secondary of CSH30 core balance CT, connected to 0A . Wire to be used: bsheathed, shielded wire bmin. cross-section 0.93 mm2 (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mmAA) bresistance load per unit length &amp;lt; 100 mW/m bmin. dielectric strength: 1000 V bmax. length: 2 m. Connect the wire shielding in the shortest way possible to 0A . The shielding is grounded in Sepam 100 LD. Do not ground the wire by any other means. Press the wire against the metal frame of the cubicle to improve immunity to radiated interferenc]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="173">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Description and connectionbExample1 (N = 2 blocks per phase): 2 triple modules for a three-phase relay.bsingle unit = outputs with screw M10 btriple unit = outputs with holes �� 10.4 (see ���installation���).ConnectionofthesurgelimiterRs1Rs2Rs3100 LDbExample2 (N = 2 blocks per phase): 2 single modules for a single-phase relay.DE10408 DE10409bExample3 (N = 4 blocks per phase 1 triple module + 1 single module for a single-phase relay.Rs 100 LDRs 100 LDRestricted earth protection (single-phase) 1ACT4DE104191 2 3 4 5 62 1 plate2 1 0A Sepam 100 LDBusbar protection (three-phase)  5ACT-withsurgelimiters1 2 2 3 4 1 5 6 plate 1DE10420protected zone1 2 2 3 4 1 5 6 plate 2 1 2 2 3 4 1 5 6 plate 36 5 4 3 2 1 0A Sepam 100 LDNote:= correspondence between primary and secondary connections (e.g. P1, S1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Description and connectionbExample1 (N = 2 blocks per phase): 2 triple modules for a three-phase relay.bsingle unit = outputs with screw M10 btriple unit = outputs with holes AA 10.4 (see AAAinstallationAAA).ConnectionofthesurgelimiterRs1Rs2Rs3100 LDbExample2 (N = 2 blocks per phase): 2 single modules for a single-phase relay.DE10408 DE10409bExample3 (N = 4 blocks per phase 1 triple module + 1 single module for a single-phase relay.Rs 100 LDRs 100 LDRestricted earth protection (single-phase) 1ACT4DE104191 2 3 4 5 62 1 plate2 1 0A Sepam 100 LDBusbar protection (three-phase)  5ACT-withsurgelimiters1 2 2 3 4 1 5 6 plate 1DE10420protected zone1 2 2 3 4 1 5 6 plate 2 1 2 2 3 4 1 5 6 plate 36 5 4 3 2 1 0A Sepam 100 LDNote:= correspondence between primary and secondary connections (e.g. P1, S1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="174">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Characteristics and dimensionsElectricalcharacteristicsConstant current 3 sec. current VoltageAnalog inputs (with plate)10 In 500 In 24/250 V DC 3.5 W 8A 24/30 V DC 48 V DC 4A 2A 127 V DC/V AC 0.7 A 8A 3.4 A 0.3 A 4A Consumptionwheninactive 2.5 W W W 6 VA 12 VA 47.5 �� 63 Hz Max. consumption W W W 10 VA 16 VA Inrushcurrent &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 15 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 15 A for 10 ms 220 V DC/V AC 0.3 A 8A 0.15 A 4A 127/240 V AC 3.7 VAEntr��e logique (r��armement �� distance)Maximum power consumption Constant current Voltage Breaking capacity (contact 0) Breaking capacity (contacts 0 to 0) Resistive dc load Resistive ac load Resistive dc load Resistive ac load Range ��0 % ��0 % -20 % +10 % -20 % +10 % -20 % +10 %Logic outputs7APowersupply24/30 V DC 48/125 V DC 220/250 V DC 100/127 V AC 220/240 V AC Operating frequencyEnvironmentalcharacteristicsOperation Storage Damp heat Influence of corrosion Degree of protection Vibrations Shocks and bumps Earthquakes Fire Power frequencyClimatic4IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60654-4 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 IEC 60695-2-1 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-2 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-4 Class III Class IV Class X Class III Class I IP 41 Class I Class I Class I-5 ��C to 55 ��C -25 ��C to 70 ��C 95 % to 40 ��CMechanicalOn frontGlow wire 2 kV - 1 mn 5 kV 30 V/mElectricalinsulation1.2/ 50 ms impulse wave Immunity to radiationElectromagneticcompatibilityElectrostatic sicharges Single-direction transients Damped 1 MHz wave  ns fast transientsNote: ���e��� marking on our product guarantees their conformity to European directives.DimensionsRelayDE53252CutoutDE53253Platinedestabilisation������ ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ������3.39 max.���������������������Weight: 1.9 kgWeight: 1.7 k]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 LD Characteristics and dimensionsElectricalcharacteristicsConstant current 3 sec. current VoltageAnalog inputs (with plate)10 In 500 In 24/250 V DC 3.5 W 8A 24/30 V DC 48 V DC 4A 2A 127 V DC/V AC 0.7 A 8A 3.4 A 0.3 A 4A Consumptionwheninactive 2.5 W W W 6 VA 12 VA 47.5 AA 63 Hz Max. consumption W W W 10 VA 16 VA Inrushcurrent &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 10 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 15 A for 10 ms &amp;lt; 15 A for 10 ms 220 V DC/V AC 0.3 A 8A 0.15 A 4A 127/240 V AC 3.7 VAEntrAAe logique (rAAarmement AA distance)Maximum power consumption Constant current Voltage Breaking capacity (contact 0) Breaking capacity (contacts 0 to 0) Resistive dc load Resistive ac load Resistive dc load Resistive ac load Range AA0 % AA0 % -20 % +10 % -20 % +10 % -20 % +10 %Logic outputs7APowersupply24/30 V DC 48/125 V DC 220/250 V DC 100/127 V AC 220/240 V AC Operating frequencyEnvironmentalcharacteristicsOperation Storage Damp heat Influence of corrosion Degree of protection Vibrations Shocks and bumps Earthquakes Fire Power frequencyClimatic4IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60654-4 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 IEC 60695-2-1 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-2 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-4 Class III Class IV Class X Class III Class I IP 41 Class I Class I Class I-5 AAC to 55 AAC -25 AAC to 70 AAC 95 % to 40 AACMechanicalOn frontGlow wire 2 kV - 1 mn 5 kV 30 V/mElectricalinsulation1.2/ 50 ms impulse wave Immunity to radiationElectromagneticcompatibilityElectrostatic sicharges Single-direction transients Damped 1 MHz wave  ns fast transientsNote: AAAeAAA marking on our product guarantees their conformity to European directives.DimensionsRelayDE53252CutoutDE53253PlatinedestabilisationAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAA3.39 max.AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAWeight: 1.9 kgWeight: 1.7 k]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="175">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI PresentationDE50026The Sepam 100MI range includes 14 indication and local control modules: bdesigned for control cubicles or cabinets bwhich may be used individually or together with Sepam 2000 and Sepam series 20/40/80 units. Each module is suited to a particular indication and local control application. The right unit is chosen from the 14 types of Sepam 100MI according to: bcubicle single-line diagram bdevices whose positions are to be indicated brequired local control functions. The 14 types of Sepam 100MI are presented in detail in the pages which follow.Functionbincludes all the animated mimic elements for viewing breaking and disconnection device status bcompact size and easy installation breduced cabling bstandardization and consistency with Sepam range.Advantages4DE50000The front of Sepam 100MI includes the following, according to type: ba mimic diagram showing the cubicle single-line diagram, with devices symbolized bred and green signal lamp blocks to indicate the position of each device: vred vertical bar showing device closed vgreen horizontal bar showing device open blocal or remote control selector switch with lock bcircuit breaker open control pushbutton (KD2), active in local or remote mode bcircuit breaker close control pushbutton (KD1), active in local mode only b2 circuit breaker connect (KS1) and disconnect (KS2) control pushbuttons, active in local or remote mode. There is a 21-pin connector on the back of Sepam 100MI for the connection of: bsupply voltage bdevice position indication inputs bcircuit breaker control (open/close and disconnect) outputs. Sepam 100MI operates with 2 power supply ranges (to be indicated in order): b24/30 V AC/DC b48/127 V AC/DC.Note: In the Sepam 100MI mimics on the pages which follow, the position indicators of each device are identified as follows: b LVi: green indicator showing device number &amp;quot;i &amp;quot; in open position. b LRI: red indicator showing device number &amp;quot;i&amp;quot; in closed position. These markings do no appear on the front of the device.DescriptionFront of Sepam 100MI-X03.DE50001Device closed.DE50002Device open.DE50003Disconnector.DE50004Circuit breake]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI PresentationDE50026The Sepam 100MI range includes 14 indication and local control modules: bdesigned for control cubicles or cabinets bwhich may be used individually or together with Sepam 2000 and Sepam series 20/40/80 units. Each module is suited to a particular indication and local control application. The right unit is chosen from the 14 types of Sepam 100MI according to: bcubicle single-line diagram bdevices whose positions are to be indicated brequired local control functions. The 14 types of Sepam 100MI are presented in detail in the pages which follow.Functionbincludes all the animated mimic elements for viewing breaking and disconnection device status bcompact size and easy installation breduced cabling bstandardization and consistency with Sepam range.Advantages4DE50000The front of Sepam 100MI includes the following, according to type: ba mimic diagram showing the cubicle single-line diagram, with devices symbolized bred and green signal lamp blocks to indicate the position of each device: vred vertical bar showing device closed vgreen horizontal bar showing device open blocal or remote control selector switch with lock bcircuit breaker open control pushbutton (KD2), active in local or remote mode bcircuit breaker close control pushbutton (KD1), active in local mode only b2 circuit breaker connect (KS1) and disconnect (KS2) control pushbuttons, active in local or remote mode. There is a 21-pin connector on the back of Sepam 100MI for the connection of: bsupply voltage bdevice position indication inputs bcircuit breaker control (open/close and disconnect) outputs. Sepam 100MI operates with 2 power supply ranges (to be indicated in order): b24/30 V AC/DC b48/127 V AC/DC.Note: In the Sepam 100MI mimics on the pages which follow, the position indicators of each device are identified as follows: b LVi: green indicator showing device number &amp;quot;i &amp;quot; in open position. b LRI: red indicator showing device number &amp;quot;i&amp;quot; in closed position. These markings do no appear on the front of the device.DescriptionFront of Sepam 100MI-X03.DE50001Device closed.DE50002Device open.DE50003Disconnector.DE50004Circuit breake]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="176">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Block and connection diagramsSepam 100MI-X00 and Sepam 100MI-X17Sepam 100MI-X00 mimicdiagramDE50005Sepam 100MI-X17 mimicdiagramConnectionDE50006DE53258Sepam 100MI-X01 and Sepam 100MI-X13Sepam 100MI-X01 mimicdiagramDE50008Sepam 100MI-X13 mimicdiagramConnection4DE50009Sepam 100MI-X02DE50011Sepam 100MI-X02 mimic diagramDE53260DE53259Connecti]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Block and connection diagramsSepam 100MI-X00 and Sepam 100MI-X17Sepam 100MI-X00 mimicdiagramDE50005Sepam 100MI-X17 mimicdiagramConnectionDE50006DE53258Sepam 100MI-X01 and Sepam 100MI-X13Sepam 100MI-X01 mimicdiagramDE50008Sepam 100MI-X13 mimicdiagramConnection4DE50009Sepam 100MI-X02DE50011Sepam 100MI-X02 mimic diagramDE53260DE53259Connecti]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="177">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Block and connection diagramsSepam 100MI-X16 and Sepam 100MI-X18Sepam 100MI-X16 mimicdiagramDE50013Sepam 100MI-X18 mimicdiagramConnection4DE50000Sepam 100MI-X03Sepam 100MI-X03 mimic diagramDE5326214DE50006DE53261ConnectionSepam 100MI-X22DE50018Sepam 100MI-X22 mimic diagramDE53263Connecti]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Block and connection diagramsSepam 100MI-X16 and Sepam 100MI-X18Sepam 100MI-X16 mimicdiagramDE50013Sepam 100MI-X18 mimicdiagramConnection4DE50000Sepam 100MI-X03Sepam 100MI-X03 mimic diagramDE5326214DE50006DE53261ConnectionSepam 100MI-X22DE50018Sepam 100MI-X22 mimic diagramDE53263Connecti]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="178">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Block and connection diagramsSepam 100MI-X14DE50025Sepam 100MI-X14 mimic diagramDE53264ConnectionSepam 100MI-X15DE50027Sepam 100MI-X15 mimic diagramDE53265Connection4Sepam 100MI-X10, Sepam 100MI-X11 and Sepam 100MI-X12Sepam 100MI-X10 mimicdiagramDE50020Sepam 100MI-X11 mimicdiagramSepam 100MI-X12 mimicdiagramConnectionDE50021DE50023DE532]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Block and connection diagramsSepam 100MI-X14DE50025Sepam 100MI-X14 mimic diagramDE53264ConnectionSepam 100MI-X15DE50027Sepam 100MI-X15 mimic diagramDE53265Connection4Sepam 100MI-X10, Sepam 100MI-X11 and Sepam 100MI-X12Sepam 100MI-X10 mimicdiagramDE50020Sepam 100MI-X11 mimicdiagramSepam 100MI-X12 mimicdiagramConnectionDE50021DE50023DE532]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="179">
		<raw><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Characteristics and dimensionsElectricalcharacteristicsVoltageLogic inputs24/30 V 35 mA 24/30 V 8A 4A 8A 0000 24 to 30 V, -20 % +10 % 48 to 127 V, -20 % +10 %48/127 V 34 mA 48/127 V 0,3 A 8A 0000Max. consumption per input VoltageLogic outputs (relays)Permissible rated current Breaking capacity DC resistive load AC resistive load Number of on-load operations Auxiliary power source DC or AC current (50 or 60 Hz) ConsumptionPowersupply24 to 30 V: 7.7 VA max. (at 33 V) 48 V: 4 VA 110 V: 18 VAEnvironmentalcharacteristicsOperation StorageClimaticIEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 NFC 20455 IEC 60255-4 (1) IEC 60255-4 (1) IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-2 IEC 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-4 Class X Class III Class III Class IV IP51 Class I Class I Class I-10 ��C to +70 ��C -25 ��C to +70 ��C 95 % to 40 ��C Front plate4Damp heat Degree of protection Vibrations Shocks Seismic tests Fire Power frequency 1.2/50 ms impulse wave RadiationMechanicalGlow wire 650 ��C 2 kV - 1 mn 5 kV 30 V/mDielectricElectromagneticElectrostatic discharge Damped 1 MHz wave  ns fast transients(1) Published in 1978 and amended in 1979. The &amp;quot;e&amp;quot; marking on our products guarantees their conformity to European directives.Dimensions������ ������DE53254 DE53256Cutout������ ������������������������������������������������������������������������������Mounting close-upDE53257DE53255��������������������������������������������������������� ������������Weight: 0.850 kg]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Other modulesSepam 100 MI Characteristics and dimensionsElectricalcharacteristicsVoltageLogic inputs24/30 V 35 mA 24/30 V 8A 4A 8A 0000 24 to 30 V, -20 % +10 % 48 to 127 V, -20 % +10 %48/127 V 34 mA 48/127 V 0,3 A 8A 0000Max. consumption per input VoltageLogic outputs (relays)Permissible rated current Breaking capacity DC resistive load AC resistive load Number of on-load operations Auxiliary power source DC or AC current (50 or 60 Hz) ConsumptionPowersupply24 to 30 V: 7.7 VA max. (at 33 V) 48 V: 4 VA 110 V: 18 VAEnvironmentalcharacteristicsOperation StorageClimaticIEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 NFC 20455 IEC 60255-4 (1) IEC 60255-4 (1) IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-2 IEC 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-4 Class X Class III Class III Class IV IP51 Class I Class I Class I-10 AAC to +70 AAC -25 AAC to +70 AAC 95 % to 40 AAC Front plate4Damp heat Degree of protection Vibrations Shocks Seismic tests Fire Power frequency 1.2/50 ms impulse wave RadiationMechanicalGlow wire 650 AAC 2 kV - 1 mn 5 kV 30 V/mDielectricElectromagneticElectrostatic discharge Damped 1 MHz wave  ns fast transients(1) Published in 1978 and amended in 1979. The &amp;quot;e&amp;quot; marking on our products guarantees their conformity to European directives.DimensionsAAAAAA AAAAAADE53254 DE53256CutoutAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAMounting close-upDE53257DE53255AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAWeight: 0.850 kg]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="180">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication accessoriesSelectionguideThere are 2 types of Sepam communication accessories: bcommunication interfaces, which are essential for connecting Sepam to the communication network bconverters and oth er accessories, as options, which are used for complete implementation of the communication network.Communication-interfaceselectionguideTypeofnetwork ProtocolModbus RTU DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 Modbus TCP/IP IEC 61850ACE949-2S-LAN or E-LAN (1) bACE959S-LAN or E-LAN (1) bACE937S-LAN or E-LAN (1) bACE969TP ACE969FO ACE850TP(4) ACE850FO(4)S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN and E-LAN b S-LAN and E-LANb(3) b(3) b(3)bb(3) b(3) b(3)bbb(3) b(3) 2-wire 4-wire Star Ring  port  port b b b b b(2) b b b bb(3) b(3)PhysicalinterfaceRS 485 Fiber optic ST 10/100 base T 100 base FX CC CAb Fournie par Sepam Fournie par Sepam Fournie par Sepam 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V4Powersupply Seedetailsonpage182183184185189(1) Only one connection possible, S-LAN or E-LAN. (2) Except with the Modbus protocol. (3) Not simultaneously (1 protocol per application). (4) Soon available for Sepam series 40 and series 80.ConverterselectionguideConverterPhysical interfaceACE909-21 port RS 232ACE919CA port RS 485 port 2-wire b(1) b(1) b(1)ACE919CC port RS 485 port 2-wire b(1) b(1) b(1)EGX100 Ethernet port 10/100 base TEGX400 Ethernet ports 10/100 base T 00 base FECI850 Ethernet port 10/100 base TModbus RTU CEI 60870-5-103 DNP3 Modbus TCP/IP CEI 61850b(1) b(1) b(1)bb bToSepamPhysical interface  port RS 485 2-wire b b(1) b(1) b(1)  port RS 485 2-wire b b(1) b(1) b(1)  port RS 485 2-wire b b(1) b(1) b(1) 24 to 48 V 110 to 220 V AC 11to �� 220 V AC 24 V 24 V 100 to 240 V AC (with adapter) 24 V b b b  port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire  ports RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire  port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wireDistributed power supply RS 485 Modbus RTU CEI 60870-5-103 DNP3AlimentationDC ACSeedetailsonpage190192192198199(1) The supervisor protocol is the same as the Sepam protocol. Note: All these interfaces accept the E-LAN protocol]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication accessoriesSelectionguideThere are 2 types of Sepam communication accessories: bcommunication interfaces, which are essential for connecting Sepam to the communication network bconverters and oth er accessories, as options, which are used for complete implementation of the communication network.Communication-interfaceselectionguideTypeofnetwork ProtocolModbus RTU DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 Modbus TCP/IP IEC 61850ACE949-2S-LAN or E-LAN (1) bACE959S-LAN or E-LAN (1) bACE937S-LAN or E-LAN (1) bACE969TP ACE969FO ACE850TP(4) ACE850FO(4)S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN and E-LAN b S-LAN and E-LANb(3) b(3) b(3)bb(3) b(3) b(3)bbb(3) b(3) 2-wire 4-wire Star Ring  port  port b b b b b(2) b b b bb(3) b(3)PhysicalinterfaceRS 485 Fiber optic ST 10/100 base T 100 base FX CC CAb Fournie par Sepam Fournie par Sepam Fournie par Sepam 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V 24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V4Powersupply Seedetailsonpage182183184185189(1) Only one connection possible, S-LAN or E-LAN. (2) Except with the Modbus protocol. (3) Not simultaneously (1 protocol per application). (4) Soon available for Sepam series 40 and series 80.ConverterselectionguideConverterPhysical interfaceACE909-21 port RS 232ACE919CA port RS 485 port 2-wire b(1) b(1) b(1)ACE919CC port RS 485 port 2-wire b(1) b(1) b(1)EGX100 Ethernet port 10/100 base TEGX400 Ethernet ports 10/100 base T 00 base FECI850 Ethernet port 10/100 base TModbus RTU CEI 60870-5-103 DNP3 Modbus TCP/IP CEI 61850b(1) b(1) b(1)bb bToSepamPhysical interface  port RS 485 2-wire b b(1) b(1) b(1)  port RS 485 2-wire b b(1) b(1) b(1)  port RS 485 2-wire b b(1) b(1) b(1) 24 to 48 V 110 to 220 V AC 11to AA 220 V AC 24 V 24 V 100 to 240 V AC (with adapter) 24 V b b b  port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire  ports RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire  port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wireDistributed power supply RS 485 Modbus RTU CEI 60870-5-103 DNP3AlimentationDC ACSeedetailsonpage190192192198199(1) The supervisor protocol is the same as the Sepam protocol. Note: All these interfaces accept the E-LAN protocol]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="181">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesCommunicationinterface connectionCCA612 connection cordPluggingintoSepamCord used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit: bLength = 3 m (9.8 ft) bFitted with 2 green RJ45 plugs.Sepamseries20andSepamseries40DE51659 DE51660Sepamseries804Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40: 1 communication port. Sepam series 80: 2 communication ports.ConnectiontothecommunicationnetworkRS485networkcable 2-wire 4-wireRS 485 medium Distributed power supply Shielding Characteristic impedance Gauge Resistance per unit length Capacitance between conductors Capacitance between conductor and shielding Maximum length 1 shielded twisted pair 2 shielded twisted pairs 1 shielded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair Tinned copper braid, coverage &amp;gt; 65% 0 W AWG 24 &amp;lt; 00 W/km (62.1 W/mi) &amp;lt; 60 pF/m (18.3 pF/ft) &amp;lt; 100 pF/m (30.5 pF/ft) 00 m (0 ft)FiberopticFiber type Wavelength Type of connector Graded-index multimode silica 820 nm (invisible infra-red) ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)Fiberoptic diameter (��m)50/125 62.5/125 100/140 200 (HCS)Numerical aperture (NA)0.2 0.275 0.3 0.37Maximum Minimum optical attenuation poweravailable (dBm/km) (dBm)2.7 3.2   5.6 9.4 14.9 19.2Maximum fiber length00 m (00 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (00 ft]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesCommunicationinterface connectionCCA612 connection cordPluggingintoSepamCord used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit: bLength = 3 m (9.8 ft) bFitted with 2 green RJ45 plugs.Sepamseries20andSepamseries40DE51659 DE51660Sepamseries804Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40: 1 communication port. Sepam series 80: 2 communication ports.ConnectiontothecommunicationnetworkRS485networkcable 2-wire 4-wireRS 485 medium Distributed power supply Shielding Characteristic impedance Gauge Resistance per unit length Capacitance between conductors Capacitance between conductor and shielding Maximum length 1 shielded twisted pair 2 shielded twisted pairs 1 shielded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair Tinned copper braid, coverage &amp;gt; 65% 0 W AWG 24 &amp;lt; 00 W/km (62.1 W/mi) &amp;lt; 60 pF/m (18.3 pF/ft) &amp;lt; 100 pF/m (30.5 pF/ft) 00 m (0 ft)FiberopticFiber type Wavelength Type of connector Graded-index multimode silica 820 nm (invisible infra-red) ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)Fiberoptic diameter (AAm)50/125 62.5/125 100/140 200 (HCS)Numerical aperture (NA)0.2 0.275 0.3 0.37Maximum Minimum optical attenuation poweravailable (dBm/km) (dBm)2.7 3.2   5.6 9.4 14.9 19.2Maximum fiber length00 m (00 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (00 ft]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="182">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE949-2  2-wireRS485networkinterfaceFunctionPE009The ACE949-2 interface performs 2 functions: bElectrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS 485 communication network bMain network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord.CharacteristicsACE949-2 moduleACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption 0.1 kg (0.22 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25��C to +70��C (-13��F to +158��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ��10% 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode2-wireRS485electricalinterfaceDE80035mm inMaximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network withstandardcableNumber of Sepamunits Maximum length with  12 V DC power supply0 m (000 ft) 0 m (90 ft) 0 m (0 ft)  m (0 ft)  0 0 Maximum length with  24 V DC power supply3.46000 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft)  m (00 ft)4DescriptionanddimensionsA and B Terminal blocks for network cable1.81 2.83(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord t Grounding/earthing terminalDE801272-wire networksPower supply or1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress). 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to: b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position) bRc, if the module is at one end of the network. 3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).ConnectionbConnection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B bConnection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm�� (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). bThe interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: vthe network cable must be stripped vthe cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp bThe interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings) bThe interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.2-wirenetworksPower supply ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE949-2  2-wireRS485networkinterfaceFunctionPE009The ACE949-2 interface performs 2 functions: bElectrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS 485 communication network bMain network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord.CharacteristicsACE949-2 moduleACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption 0.1 kg (0.22 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25AAC to +70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base units EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC AA10% 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode2-wireRS485electricalinterfaceDE80035mm inMaximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network withstandardcableNumber of Sepamunits Maximum length with  12 V DC power supply0 m (000 ft) 0 m (90 ft) 0 m (0 ft)  m (0 ft)  0 0 Maximum length with  24 V DC power supply3.46000 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft)  m (00 ft)4DescriptionanddimensionsA and B Terminal blocks for network cable1.81 2.83(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord t Grounding/earthing terminalDE801272-wire networksPower supply or1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress). 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to: b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position) bRc, if the module is at one end of the network. 3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).ConnectionbConnection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B bConnection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mmAA (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). bThe interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: vthe network cable must be stripped vthe cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp bThe interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings) bThe interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.2-wirenetworksPower supply ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="183">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE959  4-wireRS485networkinterfaceFunctionPE00The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions: bElectrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS 485 communication network bMain network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord.CharacteristicsACE959 moduleWeight ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption 0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25��C to +70��C (-13��F to +158��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units EIA 4-wire RS 485 differential External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ��10% 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode4-wireRS485electricalinterfacemm inDE800363.4641.81 5.67(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.Maximum length of 4-wire RS 485 network withstandardcableNumber of Sepamunits Maximum length with  12 V DC power supply0 m (000 ft) 0 m (90 ft) 0 m (0 ft)  m (0 ft)  0 0 Maximum length with  24 V DC power supply000 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft)  m (00 ft)DescriptionanddimensionsA and B Terminal blocks for network cable C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC) t Grounding/earthing terminal-wire networksPower supply or1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress). 2 Jumper for 4-wire RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to: b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position) bRc, if the module is at one end of the network. 3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).Power supply orDE80129Connectionnetworks -wirePower supply or(1) Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in the shielded cable (3 pairs). (2) Terminal block for connection of the distributed power supply module.bConnection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B bConnection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm�� (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). bThe interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: vthe network cable must be stripped vthe cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp bThe interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings) bThe interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC bThe ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not included in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed power supply modul]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE959  4-wireRS485networkinterfaceFunctionPE00The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions: bElectrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS 485 communication network bMain network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord.CharacteristicsACE959 moduleWeight ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption 0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25AAC to +70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base units EIA 4-wire RS 485 differential External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC AA10% 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode4-wireRS485electricalinterfacemm inDE800363.4641.81 5.67(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.Maximum length of 4-wire RS 485 network withstandardcableNumber of Sepamunits Maximum length with  12 V DC power supply0 m (000 ft) 0 m (90 ft) 0 m (0 ft)  m (0 ft)  0 0 Maximum length with  24 V DC power supply000 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft)  m (00 ft)DescriptionanddimensionsA and B Terminal blocks for network cable C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC) t Grounding/earthing terminal-wire networksPower supply or1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress). 2 Jumper for 4-wire RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to: b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position) bRc, if the module is at one end of the network. 3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).Power supply orDE80129Connectionnetworks -wirePower supply or(1) Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in the shielded cable (3 pairs). (2) Terminal block for connection of the distributed power supply module.bConnection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B bConnection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mmAA (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). bThe interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: vthe network cable must be stripped vthe cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp bThe interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings) bThe interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC bThe ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not included in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed power supply modul]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="184">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE937  FiberopticinterfaceFunctionPE00The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system. This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord.CharacteristicsACE937 moduleWeight Assembly Power supply ACE937 fiber optic connection interface. Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Fiber type Wavelength Type of connector 0.1 kg (0.22 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail Supplied by Sepam -25��C to +70��C (-13��F to +158��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units Graded-index multimode silica 820 nm (invisible infra-red) ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)FiberopticinterfaceHAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury. CAUTIONFiberoptic diameter (��m)50/125 62.5/125 100/140 200 (HCS)Numerical aperture (NA)0.2 0.275 0.3 0.37Maximum Minimum optical ttenuation poweravailable (dBm/km) (dBm)2.7 3.2   5.6 9.4 14.9 19.2Maximum fiber length00 m (00 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (00 ft)4Maximum length calculated with: bMinimum optical power available bMaximum fiber attenuation bLosses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm bOptical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard). Example for a 62.5/125 ��m fiber Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi)DescriptionanddimensionsDE80037mm inC RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.3.461 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress). 2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving). 3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).1.812.83(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.DE51666ConnectionbThe sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors bFiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors. The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE937  FiberopticinterfaceFunctionPE00The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system. This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord.CharacteristicsACE937 moduleWeight Assembly Power supply ACE937 fiber optic connection interface. Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Fiber type Wavelength Type of connector 0.1 kg (0.22 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail Supplied by Sepam -25AAC to +70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base units Graded-index multimode silica 820 nm (invisible infra-red) ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)FiberopticinterfaceHAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause serious injury. CAUTIONFiberoptic diameter (AAm)50/125 62.5/125 100/140 200 (HCS)Numerical aperture (NA)0.2 0.275 0.3 0.37Maximum Minimum optical ttenuation poweravailable (dBm/km) (dBm)2.7 3.2   5.6 9.4 14.9 19.2Maximum fiber length00 m (00 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (00 ft)4Maximum length calculated with: bMinimum optical power available bMaximum fiber attenuation bLosses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm bOptical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard). Example for a 62.5/125 AAm fiber Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi)DescriptionanddimensionsDE80037mm inC RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.3.461 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress). 2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving). 3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).1.812.83(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.DE51666ConnectionbThe sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors bFiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors. The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="185">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO InterfacesnetworkPE00FunctionACE969TP communication interface.The ACE969 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80. They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks: bThe S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port is used to connect Sepam to a communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the three following protocols: vIEC 60870-5-103 vDNP3 vModbus RTU. The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting. bThe E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software. There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces, which are identical except for the S-LAN port: bACE969TP (Twisted Pair), for connection to an S-LAN network using a 2-wire RS 485 serial link bACE969FO (Fiber Optic), for connection to an S-LAN network using a fiber-optic connection (star or ring). The E-LAN port is always a 2-wire RS485 type port.4PE0ACE969FO communication interfac]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO InterfacesnetworkPE00FunctionACE969TP communication interface.The ACE969 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80. They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks: bThe S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port is used to connect Sepam to a communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the three following protocols: vIEC 60870-5-103 vDNP3 vModbus RTU. The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting. bThe E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software. There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces, which are identical except for the S-LAN port: bACE969TP (Twisted Pair), for connection to an S-LAN network using a 2-wire RS 485 serial link bACE969FO (Fiber Optic), for connection to an S-LAN network using a fiber-optic connection (star or ring). The E-LAN port is always a 2-wire RS485 type port.4PE0ACE969FO communication interfac]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="186">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO InterfacesnetworkCharacteristicsACE969 moduleTechnicalcharacteristicsWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0.285 kg (0.628 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25��C to +70��C (-13��F to +158��F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units 24 to 250 V DC -20%/+10% W &amp;lt; 10 A 100 ms % 0 ms 110 to 240 V AC -20%/+10% 3 VAPowersupplyVoltage Range Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable ripple content Acceptable momentary outages2-wireRS485communicationportsElectricalinterfaceEIA 2-wire RS 485 differential External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ��10% 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA in sending mode  Withdistributedpowersupply 12 V DC 24 V DC 0 m (000 ft) 000 m (00 ft) 0 m (90 ft) 0 m (00 ft) 0 m (0 ft) 0 m (00 ft)  m (0 ft)  m (00 ft)Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption Max. number of Sepam units Number of Sepam units  0 0 Maximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network4FiberopticcommunicationportFiberopticinterfaceFiber type Wavelength Type of connector Fiberdiameter (��m) 50/125 62.5/125 100/140 200 (HCS) Numerical aperture (NA) 0.2 0.275 0.3 0.37Graded-index multimode silica 820 nm (invisible infra-red) ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector) Attenuation (dBm/km) 2.7 3.2   Minimum opticalpower available (dBm) 5.6 9.4 14.9 19.2 Maximum fiber  length 00 m (00 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (00 ft)Maximum length of fiber optic networkMaximum length calculated with: bMinimum optical power available bMaximum fiber attenuation bLosses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm bOptical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard). Example for a 62.5/125 ��m fiber Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi).Dimensionsmm inDE800433.545.672.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO InterfacesnetworkCharacteristicsACE969 moduleTechnicalcharacteristicsWeight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0.285 kg (0.628 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25AAC to +70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF) Same characteristics as Sepam base units 24 to 250 V DC -20%/+10% W &amp;lt; 10 A 100 ms % 0 ms 110 to 240 V AC -20%/+10% 3 VAPowersupplyVoltage Range Maximum consumption Inrush current Acceptable ripple content Acceptable momentary outages2-wireRS485communicationportsElectricalinterfaceEIA 2-wire RS 485 differential External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC AA10% 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA in sending mode  Withdistributedpowersupply 12 V DC 24 V DC 0 m (000 ft) 000 m (00 ft) 0 m (90 ft) 0 m (00 ft) 0 m (0 ft) 0 m (00 ft)  m (0 ft)  m (00 ft)Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption Max. number of Sepam units Number of Sepam units  0 0 Maximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network4FiberopticcommunicationportFiberopticinterfaceFiber type Wavelength Type of connector Fiberdiameter (AAm) 50/125 62.5/125 100/140 200 (HCS) Numerical aperture (NA) 0.2 0.275 0.3 0.37Graded-index multimode silica 820 nm (invisible infra-red) ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector) Attenuation (dBm/km) 2.7 3.2   Minimum opticalpower available (dBm) 5.6 9.4 14.9 19.2 Maximum fiber  length 00 m (00 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (900 ft) 00 m (00 ft)Maximum length of fiber optic networkMaximum length calculated with: bMinimum optical power available bMaximum fiber attenuation bLosses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm bOptical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard). Example for a 62.5/125 AAm fiber Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi).Dimensionsmm inDE800433.545.672.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="187">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfacesnetwork DescriptionACE969 communication interfaces1 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid 2 Power-supply terminal block 3 RJ connector to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 Green LED: ACE969 energized 5 Red LED: ACE969 interface status bLED off = ACE969 set up and communication operational bLED flashing = ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect bLED remains on = ACE969 has faulted 6 Service connector: reserved for software upgrades 7 E-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port (ACE969TP and ACE969FO) 8 S-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port (ACE969TP) 9 S-LAN fiber-optic communication port (ACE969FO).ACE969TPDE51855ACE969FO3DE51856456Rx Rx Tx onTxE-LA NV+ V-NS-LAABO 969F ACE219741 2-wire RS485 network terminal block: b 2 black terminals: connection of RS485 twistedpair (2 wires) b 2 green terminals: connection of twisted-pair for distributed power supply 2 Indication LEDs: b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving. 3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two network cables, incoming and outgoing (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm) 4 Fixing stud for network cable ties 5 Jumper for RS485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to: b Rc, if the interface is not at the line end (default position) b Rc, if the interface is at the line end.2-wireRS485communicationportsPort S-LAN (ACE969TP)DE51863 DE51864Port E-LAN (ACE969TP or ACE969FO)RxTxonservRxTxRxS-LAN V+ V- A BE-LAN V+ V- A BRc RcRc Rc1 Indication LEDs: bflashing Tx LED: Sepam sending bflashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving. 2 Rx, female ST-type connector (Sepam receiving) 3 Tx, female ST-type connector (Sepam sending).Fiber-opticcommunicationportPort S-LAN (ACE969FO)DE51865RxTx S-LANonservRxTxE-LAN V+ V- A BRc RcTx]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfacesnetwork DescriptionACE969 communication interfaces1 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid 2 Power-supply terminal block 3 RJ connector to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 Green LED: ACE969 energized 5 Red LED: ACE969 interface status bLED off = ACE969 set up and communication operational bLED flashing = ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect bLED remains on = ACE969 has faulted 6 Service connector: reserved for software upgrades 7 E-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port (ACE969TP and ACE969FO) 8 S-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port (ACE969TP) 9 S-LAN fiber-optic communication port (ACE969FO).ACE969TPDE51855ACE969FO3DE51856456Rx Rx Tx onTxE-LA NV+ V-NS-LAABO 969F ACE219741 2-wire RS485 network terminal block: b 2 black terminals: connection of RS485 twistedpair (2 wires) b 2 green terminals: connection of twisted-pair for distributed power supply 2 Indication LEDs: b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving. 3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two network cables, incoming and outgoing (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm) 4 Fixing stud for network cable ties 5 Jumper for RS485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to: b Rc, if the interface is not at the line end (default position) b Rc, if the interface is at the line end.2-wireRS485communicationportsPort S-LAN (ACE969TP)DE51863 DE51864Port E-LAN (ACE969TP or ACE969FO)RxTxonservRxTxRxS-LAN V+ V- A BE-LAN V+ V- A BRc RcRc Rc1 Indication LEDs: bflashing Tx LED: Sepam sending bflashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving. 2 Rx, female ST-type connector (Sepam receiving) 3 Tx, female ST-type connector (Sepam sending).Fiber-opticcommunicationportPort S-LAN (ACE969FO)DE51865RxTx S-LANonservRxTxE-LAN V+ V- A BRc RcTx]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="188">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfacesnetwork ConnectionPowersupplyandSepambThe ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.84 ft, green RJ45 fittings) bThe ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 230 V AC.HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Terminalse1-e2 - supplyDE51727 DANGERTypeScrew terminalsWiringb Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm��(u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm��(u AWG 24-18) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm�� (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm�� (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in). 1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft) and max. cross-section 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) Earthing braid, supplied for connection to cubicle grounding4DE51845 DE51962Protective earth Functional earthScrew terminal 4 mm (0.16 in) ring l]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfacesnetwork ConnectionPowersupplyandSepambThe ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.84 ft, green RJ45 fittings) bThe ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 230 V AC.HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. Terminalse1-e2 - supplyDE51727 DANGERTypeScrew terminalsWiringb Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mmAA(u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mmAA(u AWG 24-18) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mmAA (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mmAA (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in). 1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft) and max. cross-section 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) Earthing braid, supplied for connection to cubicle grounding4DE51845 DE51962Protective earth Functional earthScrew terminal 4 mm (0.16 in) ring l]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="189">
		<raw><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfacesnetwork Connection2-wireRS485communicationports (S-LAN or E-LAN)DE52078bConnection of RS 485 twisted pair (S-LAN or E-LAN) to black terminals A and B bConnection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V+ and VbThe interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: vthe network cable must be stripped vthe cable shielding must be around and in contact with the clamp vshielding continuity of incoming and outgoing cables is ensured by the electrical continuity of the clamps bAll cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals of the ACE969 interface (protective and functional earthing), i.e. the shielding of the RS 485 cables is earthed as well bOn the ACE969TP interface, the cable clamps for the S-LAN and E-LAN RS 485 networks are earthed.4Fiberopticcommunicationport (S-LAN)  CAUTIONHAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the fiber optic. Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury. The fiber optic connection can be made: bpoint-to-point to an optic star system bin a ring system (active echo). The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors. The fiber optics are screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.DE521]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Communication interfacesACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfacesnetwork Connection2-wireRS485communicationports (S-LAN or E-LAN)DE52078bConnection of RS 485 twisted pair (S-LAN or E-LAN) to black terminals A and B bConnection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V+ and VbThe interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: vthe network cable must be stripped vthe cable shielding must be around and in contact with the clamp vshielding continuity of incoming and outgoing cables is ensured by the electrical continuity of the clamps bAll cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals of the ACE969 interface (protective and functional earthing), i.e. the shielding of the RS 485 cables is earthed as well bOn the ACE969TP interface, the cable clamps for the S-LAN and E-LAN RS 485 networks are earthed.4Fiberopticcommunicationport (S-LAN)  CAUTIONHAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the fiber optic. Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury. The fiber optic connection can be made: bpoint-to-point to an optic star system bin a ring system (active echo). The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors. The fiber optics are screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.DE521]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="190">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersACE909-2 RS 232 / RS 485 converterFunctionPE00The ACE909-2 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped with a V24/RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire RS 485 network. Without requiring any flow control signals, after the parameters are set, the ACE909-2 converter performs conversion, network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two-way simplex (half-duplex, single-pair) transmission. The ACE909-2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces. The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor communication settings.ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter.HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionswillresult in death or serious injury. DANGERCharacteristicsWeight AssemblyMechanical characteristics Electricalcharacteristics0.280 kg (0.617 lb) On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail 110 to 220 V AC �� 10%, 47 to 63 Hz 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min 1000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min 1 A rating4Power supply Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame, and between ACE power supply and interface supply Galvanic isolation between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 in x 0.79 in) Data format Transmission delay Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply Operating temperatureCommunicationandSepaminterfacedistributedsupply11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop &amp;lt; 00 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC Environmentalcharacteristics Electromagneticcompatibility IEC standard60255-22-4 -5��C to +55��C (+23��F to +131��F)ValueFast transient bursts, 5 ns1 MHz damped oscillating wave 1.2/50 ��s impulse waves60255-22-1 60255-54 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 kV common mode 0.5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mod]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersACE909-2 RS 232 / RS 485 converterFunctionPE00The ACE909-2 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped with a V24/RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire RS 485 network. Without requiring any flow control signals, after the parameters are set, the ACE909-2 converter performs conversion, network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two-way simplex (half-duplex, single-pair) transmission. The ACE909-2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces. The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor communication settings.ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter.HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionswillresult in death or serious injury. DANGERCharacteristicsWeight AssemblyMechanical characteristics Electricalcharacteristics0.280 kg (0.617 lb) On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail 110 to 220 V AC AA 10%, 47 to 63 Hz 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min 1000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min 1 A rating4Power supply Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame, and between ACE power supply and interface supply Galvanic isolation between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 in x 0.79 in) Data format Transmission delay Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply Operating temperatureCommunicationandSepaminterfacedistributedsupply11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop &amp;lt; 00 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC Environmentalcharacteristics Electromagneticcompatibility IEC standard60255-22-4 -5AAC to +55AAC (+23AAF to +131AAF)ValueFast transient bursts, 5 ns1 MHz damped oscillating wave 1.2/50 AAs impulse waves60255-22-1 60255-54 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 kV common mode 0.5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mod]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="191">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersACE909-2 RS 232 / RS 485 converterDescriptionanddimensionsDE80038mm inA Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m (33 ft). distributed power supply. 1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter. C Power-supply terminal block3.34 4.13B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with1.77 4.13 2.561 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC. 2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn. 3 LEDs: bON/OFF: on if ACE909-2 is energized b Tx: on if RS 232 sending by ACE909-2 is active b Rx: on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909-2 is active. 4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors. Function SW1/1ON ON ONSW1/2SW1/3DE80022mm in1.75Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 W Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 W 2-wire RS 485 network impedance matching by 150 W resistor42.221.425 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format (same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2-wire RS 485 network). Rate (bauds) SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/300 00 00 900 900 00  0  0  0   0 0       0 00.63Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE909-2.FormatWith parity check Without parity check 1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam)  stop bitsSW2/40 SW2/5DE516680 Converter configuration when delivered b12 V DC distributed power supply b11-bit format, with parity check b2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.ConnectionRS232link bTo 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A bMaximum length 10 m (33 ft) bRx/Tx: RS 232 receiving/sending by ACE909-2 b0V: Rx/Tx common, do not earth. 2-wireRS485linkwithdistributedpowersupply bTo connector B female 9-pin sub-D b2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, LbDistributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V. Powersupply bTo 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C bReversible phase and neutral bEarthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersACE909-2 RS 232 / RS 485 converterDescriptionanddimensionsDE80038mm inA Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m (33 ft). distributed power supply. 1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter. C Power-supply terminal block3.34 4.13B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with1.77 4.13 2.561 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC. 2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn. 3 LEDs: bON/OFF: on if ACE909-2 is energized b Tx: on if RS 232 sending by ACE909-2 is active b Rx: on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909-2 is active. 4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors. Function SW1/1ON ON ONSW1/2SW1/3DE80022mm in1.75Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 W Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 W 2-wire RS 485 network impedance matching by 150 W resistor42.221.425 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format (same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2-wire RS 485 network). Rate (bauds) SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/300 00 00 900 900 00  0  0  0   0 0       0 00.63Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE909-2.FormatWith parity check Without parity check 1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam)  stop bitsSW2/40 SW2/5DE516680 Converter configuration when delivered b12 V DC distributed power supply b11-bit format, with parity check b2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.ConnectionRS232link bTo 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A bMaximum length 10 m (33 ft) bRx/Tx: RS 232 receiving/sending by ACE909-2 b0V: Rx/Tx common, do not earth. 2-wireRS485linkwithdistributedpowersupply bTo connector B female 9-pin sub-D b2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, LbDistributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V. Powersupply bTo 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C bReversible phase and neutral bEarthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="192">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 convertersFunctionPE00The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire RS 485 network. Without requiring any flow control signals, the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching. The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces. There are 2 types of ACE919 converter: bACE919CC, DC-powered bACE919CA, AC-powered.ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converter.HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionswillresult in death or serious injury. DANGERCharacteristicsWeight AssemblyMechanical characteristics Electricalcharacteristics0.280 kg (0.617 lb) On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN railACE919CAACE919CC24 to 48 V DC ��20% 1 A rating 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz,  min4Power supply Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 in x 0.79 in) Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame, and between ACE power supply and interface supply Data format Transmission delay Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply Operating temperature110 to 220 V AC ��10%, 47 to 63 Hz 1 A ratingCommunicationandSepaminterfacedistributedsupply11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop &amp;lt; 00 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC Environmentalcharacteristics Electromagneticcompatibility IECstandard60255-22-4 -5��C to +55��C (+23��F to +131��F)ValueFast transient bursts, 5 ns1 MHz damped oscillating wave 1.2/50 ��s impulse waves60255-22-1 60255-54 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 kV common mode 0.5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mod]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 convertersFunctionPE00The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire RS 485 network. Without requiring any flow control signals, the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching. The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces. There are 2 types of ACE919 converter: bACE919CC, DC-powered bACE919CA, AC-powered.ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converter.HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bStart by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. bScrew tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionswillresult in death or serious injury. DANGERCharacteristicsWeight AssemblyMechanical characteristics Electricalcharacteristics0.280 kg (0.617 lb) On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN railACE919CAACE919CC24 to 48 V DC AA20% 1 A rating 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz,  min4Power supply Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 in x 0.79 in) Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame, and between ACE power supply and interface supply Data format Transmission delay Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply Operating temperature110 to 220 V AC AA10%, 47 to 63 Hz 1 A ratingCommunicationandSepaminterfacedistributedsupply11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop &amp;lt; 00 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC Environmentalcharacteristics Electromagneticcompatibility IECstandard60255-22-4 -5AAC to +55AAC (+23AAF to +131AAF)ValueFast transient bursts, 5 ns1 MHz damped oscillating wave 1.2/50 AAs impulse waves60255-22-1 60255-54 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 kV common mode 0.5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mod]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="193">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 convertersDescriptionanddimensionsDE80039mm inA Terminal block for 2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply. B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with distributed power supply. 1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter. C Power supply terminal block. Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC. Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn. ON/OFF LED: on if ACE919 is energized. SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors. SW1/1ON ON ON3.344.131 2 3 41.77FunctionPolarization at 0 V via Rp -470 W Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 W 2-wire RS 485 network impedance matching by 150 W resistorSW1/2SW1/34.132.56DE80022mm in1.7542.22Converter configuration when delivered b12 V DC distributed power supply b2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.1.420.63Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919.Connectionb t Shielding.2-wireRS485linkwithoutdistributedpowersupply bTo 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A bL+, L-: 2-wire RS 485 signals 2-wireRS485linkwithdistributedpowersupply bTo connector B female 9-pin sub-D b2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, LbDistributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V. Powersupply bTo 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C bReversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA) bEarthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).DE5167]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 convertersDescriptionanddimensionsDE80039mm inA Terminal block for 2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply. B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with distributed power supply. 1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter. C Power supply terminal block. Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC. Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn. ON/OFF LED: on if ACE919 is energized. SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors. SW1/1ON ON ON3.344.131 2 3 41.77FunctionPolarization at 0 V via Rp -470 W Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 W 2-wire RS 485 network impedance matching by 150 W resistorSW1/2SW1/34.132.56DE80022mm in1.7542.22Converter configuration when delivered b12 V DC distributed power supply b2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.1.420.63Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919.Connectionb t Shielding.2-wireRS485linkwithoutdistributedpowersupply bTo 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A bL+, L-: 2-wire RS 485 signals 2-wireRS485linkwithdistributedpowersupply bTo connector B female 9-pin sub-D b2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, LbDistributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V. Powersupply bTo 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C bReversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA) bEarthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).DE5167]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="194">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850PE80033-36FunctionThe ECI850 connects Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 units to an Ethernet network using the IEC 61850 protocol. It acts as the interface between the Ethernet/IEC 61850 network and a Sepam RS485/Modbus network. Two PRI surge arresters (cat. no. 16595) are supplied with the ECI850 to protect its power supply.CharacteristicsECI850moduleTechnicalcharacteristicsSepam ECI850 server for IEC 61850. Weight Assembly 0.17 kg (0,37 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail 24 V DC (��10 %) supplied by a class 2 supply W 1.5 kV -25 ��C to +70 ��C (-13 ��F to +158 ��F) -40 ��C to +85 ��C (-40 ��F to +185 ��F) 5 to 95 % (without condensation) at +55 ��C (131 ��F) Class 2 IP30PowersupplyVoltage Maximum consumption Dielectric strength Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Pollution degree Degree of protectionEnvironmentalcharacteristics4ElectromagneticcompatibilityEmissiontestsEmission (radiated and conducted) Electrostatic discharge Radiated radio-frequency fields Magnetic fields at power frequency Fast transient bursts Surges Conducted disturbances, induced by radiofrequency fields International United States Canada Australia / New Zealand Europe EN 55022/EN 55011/FCC Class A EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-6Immunitytests���RadiateddisturbancesImmunitytests���ConducteddisturbancesSafetyCEI 60950 UL 508/UL 60950 cUL (in compliance with CSA C22.2, no. 60950) AS/NZS 60950 eCertification 2-wire/4-wire RS485 communication portsElectricalinterfaceStandard Max. number of Sepam units Number of Sepam units   Number of ports Type of port Protocols Transmission rateEIA 2-wire/4-wire RS485 differential  Maximum length 000 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft)Maximum length of 2-wire/4-wire RS485 networkEthernetcommunicationport 10/100 Base Tx HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850 TCP/IP 10/100 Mbits/]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850PE80033-36FunctionThe ECI850 connects Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 units to an Ethernet network using the IEC 61850 protocol. It acts as the interface between the Ethernet/IEC 61850 network and a Sepam RS485/Modbus network. Two PRI surge arresters (cat. no. 16595) are supplied with the ECI850 to protect its power supply.CharacteristicsECI850moduleTechnicalcharacteristicsSepam ECI850 server for IEC 61850. Weight Assembly 0.17 kg (0,37 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail 24 V DC (AA10 %) supplied by a class 2 supply W 1.5 kV -25 AAC to +70 AAC (-13 AAF to +158 AAF) -40 AAC to +85 AAC (-40 AAF to +185 AAF) 5 to 95 % (without condensation) at +55 AAC (131 AAF) Class 2 IP30PowersupplyVoltage Maximum consumption Dielectric strength Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Pollution degree Degree of protectionEnvironmentalcharacteristics4ElectromagneticcompatibilityEmissiontestsEmission (radiated and conducted) Electrostatic discharge Radiated radio-frequency fields Magnetic fields at power frequency Fast transient bursts Surges Conducted disturbances, induced by radiofrequency fields International United States Canada Australia / New Zealand Europe EN 55022/EN 55011/FCC Class A EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-6ImmunitytestsAAARadiateddisturbancesImmunitytestsAAAConducteddisturbancesSafetyCEI 60950 UL 508/UL 60950 cUL (in compliance with CSA C22.2, no. 60950) AS/NZS 60950 eCertification 2-wire/4-wire RS485 communication portsElectricalinterfaceStandard Max. number of Sepam units Number of Sepam units   Number of ports Type of port Protocols Transmission rateEIA 2-wire/4-wire RS485 differential  Maximum length 000 m (00 ft) 0 m (00 ft)Maximum length of 2-wire/4-wire RS485 networkEthernetcommunicationport 10/100 Base Tx HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850 TCP/IP 10/100 Mbits/]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="195">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850Characteristics (cont.)PRIsurgearresterElectricalcharacteristicsUtilisation voltage Full discharge current Rated discharge current Level of protection Response time 12 to 48 V 10 kA (8/20 ��s wave) 5 kA (8/20 ��s wave) 70 V &amp;lt;  ms Normal operation Arrester must be replaced Wires with maximum cross-section of 0.5 to 2.5 mm�� (AWG 24-12)Mechanical operation indicatorWhite RedConnectionTunnel terminalsDescription41 2      3       4 5 6 7 8 9/ LED: Power on and maintenance Serial-link LEDs: bRS485 LED: link to network activated vOn: RS485 mode vOff: RS232 mode bflashing TX LED: ECI850 sending bflashing RX LED: ECI850 receiving Ethernet LEDs: bgreen LK LED on: link to network activated bflashing green Tx LED: ECI850 sending bflashing green Rx LED: ECI850 receiving bgreen 100 LED: vOn: transmission rate = 100 Mbit/s vOff: transmission rate = 10 Mbit/s 10/100 Base Tx port for Ethernet connection via RJ connector 24 V DC connection Reset button RS485 connector RS485 setup switches RS232 connectorPE00DE53201Recommended settingsRS485networksetupThe RS485 setup switches are used to select the network-polarisation (bias) and line-impedance matching resistors and the type of RS485 network (2-wire/4-wire). The default settings are for a 2-wire RS485 with network-polarization and lineimpedance matching resistors. Line-impedance matching usingresistors2-wire RS485 4-wire RS4851234562 wires (default)SW1OFF ONSW2ON ONSW3SW4SW5SW6123456Polarisation (bias)at 0 V at 5 VSW1SW2SW3ONSW4ONSW5SW64 wiresRS485 network setup.RS485networktype2-wire 4-wireSW1SW2SW3SW4SW5ON OFFSW6ON OFFEthernetlinkset-upThe TCSEAK0100 configuration kit can be used to connect a PC to the ECI850 to set up the Ethernet link]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850Characteristics (cont.)PRIsurgearresterElectricalcharacteristicsUtilisation voltage Full discharge current Rated discharge current Level of protection Response time 12 to 48 V 10 kA (8/20 AAs wave) 5 kA (8/20 AAs wave) 70 V &amp;lt;  ms Normal operation Arrester must be replaced Wires with maximum cross-section of 0.5 to 2.5 mmAA (AWG 24-12)Mechanical operation indicatorWhite RedConnectionTunnel terminalsDescription41 2      3       4 5 6 7 8 9/ LED: Power on and maintenance Serial-link LEDs: bRS485 LED: link to network activated vOn: RS485 mode vOff: RS232 mode bflashing TX LED: ECI850 sending bflashing RX LED: ECI850 receiving Ethernet LEDs: bgreen LK LED on: link to network activated bflashing green Tx LED: ECI850 sending bflashing green Rx LED: ECI850 receiving bgreen 100 LED: vOn: transmission rate = 100 Mbit/s vOff: transmission rate = 10 Mbit/s 10/100 Base Tx port for Ethernet connection via RJ connector 24 V DC connection Reset button RS485 connector RS485 setup switches RS232 connectorPE00DE53201Recommended settingsRS485networksetupThe RS485 setup switches are used to select the network-polarisation (bias) and line-impedance matching resistors and the type of RS485 network (2-wire/4-wire). The default settings are for a 2-wire RS485 with network-polarization and lineimpedance matching resistors. Line-impedance matching usingresistors2-wire RS485 4-wire RS4851234562 wires (default)SW1OFF ONSW2ON ONSW3SW4SW5SW6123456Polarisation (bias)at 0 V at 5 VSW1SW2SW3ONSW4ONSW5SW64 wiresRS485 network setup.RS485networktype2-wire 4-wireSW1SW2SW3SW4SW5ON OFFSW6ON OFFEthernetlinkset-upThe TCSEAK0100 configuration kit can be used to connect a PC to the ECI850 to set up the Ethernet link]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="196">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850DimensionsDE80153mm in65,8 2.5935 1.3857,9 2.2880,8 3.18 90,7 3.5745,2 1.7872 2.8349,5 1.95 68,3 2.692,5 0.10TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECI850 bConnect the two PRI surge arresters as indicated in the diagrams below. bCheck the quality of the earthing conductors connected to the surge arresters. Theequipmentmaybedamagedifthese instructionsarenotfollowed.CAUTIONbConnect the supply and the RS485 twisted pair using the y 2.5 mm�� cable (u AWG 12). bConnect the 24 V DC supply and earth to inputs 1, 5 and 3 on the PRI surge arresters supplied with the ECI850. bConnect outputs 2 and 6 of PRI surge arresters (cat. no. 16595) to the - and + terminals on the terminal block with black screws. bConnect the RS485 twisted pair (2 or 4 wires) to the terminals (RX+ RX- or RX+ RX- TX+ TX-) on the terminal block with black screws. bConnect the shielding of the RS485 twisted pair to the terminal on the terminal block with black screws. bConnect the Ethernet cable to the green RJ45 connector. 2-wireRS485networkDE80156Connection4+ +24 V ()()() PRI () () ()()() PRI () () ECI850 () V+ () VRx+ () Rx- () () A B A B ACE949-2 V+ VL+ LACE949-2 A V+ VL+ L-4-wireRS485networkDE80157+ +24 V ()()()PRI()()()PRI() ()() ()ECI850 () V+ () VRx+ () Rx- () Tx+ () Tx- () ()ACE959 V+ VTx+ TxRx+ Rx-ACE959 V+ VTx+ Tx-ABARx+ Rx-]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850DimensionsDE80153mm in65,8 2.5935 1.3857,9 2.2880,8 3.18 90,7 3.5745,2 1.7872 2.8349,5 1.95 68,3 2.692,5 0.10TO AVOID DAMAGING THE ECI850 bConnect the two PRI surge arresters as indicated in the diagrams below. bCheck the quality of the earthing conductors connected to the surge arresters. Theequipmentmaybedamagedifthese instructionsarenotfollowed.CAUTIONbConnect the supply and the RS485 twisted pair using the y 2.5 mmAA cable (u AWG 12). bConnect the 24 V DC supply and earth to inputs 1, 5 and 3 on the PRI surge arresters supplied with the ECI850. bConnect outputs 2 and 6 of PRI surge arresters (cat. no. 16595) to the - and + terminals on the terminal block with black screws. bConnect the RS485 twisted pair (2 or 4 wires) to the terminals (RX+ RX- or RX+ RX- TX+ TX-) on the terminal block with black screws. bConnect the shielding of the RS485 twisted pair to the terminal on the terminal block with black screws. bConnect the Ethernet cable to the green RJ45 connector. 2-wireRS485networkDE80156Connection4+ +24 V ()()() PRI () () ()()() PRI () () ECI850 () V+ () VRx+ () Rx- () () A B A B ACE949-2 V+ VL+ LACE949-2 A V+ VL+ L-4-wireRS485networkDE80157+ +24 V ()()()PRI()()()PRI() ()() ()ECI850 () V+ () VRx+ () Rx- () Tx+ () Tx- () ()ACE959 V+ VTx+ TxRx+ Rx-ACE959 V+ VTx+ Tx-ABARx+ Rx-]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="197">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850ArchitectureexampleDE53202The diagram below shows an example of a communication architecture using the ECI850.Supervisor or RTUEthernet TCP/IP/IEC 61850 ECI850 S-LAN and E-LAN Rc RS 485/Modbus ACE949-2 Rc Up to 8 Sepam units ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-24Sepam series 20 Note: Rc = line-impedance matching resistor.Sepam series 40Sepam series 8]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersSepamECI850server for IEC 61850ArchitectureexampleDE53202The diagram below shows an example of a communication architecture using the ECI850.Supervisor or RTUEthernet TCP/IP/IEC 61850 ECI850 S-LAN and E-LAN Rc RS 485/Modbus ACE949-2 Rc Up to 8 Sepam units ACE949-2 Rc ACE949-24Sepam series 20 Note: Rc = line-impedance matching resistor.Sepam series 40Sepam series 8]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="198">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX100gatewayFunctionE90PB0The EGX100 serves as an Ethernet gateway for PowerLogic�� System devices and for any other communicating devices utilizing the Modbus protocol. The EGX100 gateway offers complete access to status and measurement information provided by the connected devices, for example, via the System ManagerTM Software (SMS) installed on a PC.ArchitectureDE527904SetupSetupviaanEthernetnetwork Once connected to an Ethernet network, the EGX100 gateway can be accessed by a standard internet browser via its IP address to: bspecify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway bconfigure the serial port parameters (baud rate, parity, protocol, mode, physical interface, and timeout value) bcreate user accounts bcreate or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters bconfigure IP filtering to control access to serial devices baccess Ethernet and serial port diagnostic data bupdate the firmware. Setupviaaserialconnection Serial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX100 via an RS232 link. This setup: bspecifies the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway bspecifies the language used for the setup session]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX100gatewayFunctionE90PB0The EGX100 serves as an Ethernet gateway for PowerLogicAA System devices and for any other communicating devices utilizing the Modbus protocol. The EGX100 gateway offers complete access to status and measurement information provided by the connected devices, for example, via the System ManagerTM Software (SMS) installed on a PC.ArchitectureDE527904SetupSetupviaanEthernetnetwork Once connected to an Ethernet network, the EGX100 gateway can be accessed by a standard internet browser via its IP address to: bspecify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway bconfigure the serial port parameters (baud rate, parity, protocol, mode, physical interface, and timeout value) bcreate user accounts bcreate or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters bconfigure IP filtering to control access to serial devices baccess Ethernet and serial port diagnostic data bupdate the firmware. Setupviaaserialconnection Serial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX100 via an RS232 link. This setup: bspecifies the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway bspecifies the language used for the setup session]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="199">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX400serverPE0FunctionThe EGX400 server is used as an Ethernet coupler for Sepam, the PowerLogic devices and for any other communicating devices operating under the Modbus RS 485 protocol. It contains HTML pages (set up using the WPG software tool) that can be accessed using a standard internet browser. The HTML pages are used to display the information provided by the devices connected to the server. Supervisorandinternetbrowser The EGX400 server makes it possible to implement two types of user interface: bsupervision software ba standard internet browser providing access to the main information organised in predefined HTML pages.Ethernet EGX400 gateway.PE00These two approaches, supervisor and internet browser, are complementary: bthe supervisor offers complete access to all information, but requires specific software bthe HTML pages offer partial access to the main information via any PC connected to the network.Architecture4DE52081SetupInitialsetup The initial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX400 via an RS232 link. This setup: bspecifies the IP address of the EGX gateway bselects the type of Ethernet port (wire or optic fiber) blists the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters. SetupviatheEthernetnetwork Once connected to the Ethernet network, the EGX400 server can be accessed by a standard internet browser via its IP address to: bcreate or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters bupdate the firmware]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX400serverPE0FunctionThe EGX400 server is used as an Ethernet coupler for Sepam, the PowerLogic devices and for any other communicating devices operating under the Modbus RS 485 protocol. It contains HTML pages (set up using the WPG software tool) that can be accessed using a standard internet browser. The HTML pages are used to display the information provided by the devices connected to the server. Supervisorandinternetbrowser The EGX400 server makes it possible to implement two types of user interface: bsupervision software ba standard internet browser providing access to the main information organised in predefined HTML pages.Ethernet EGX400 gateway.PE00These two approaches, supervisor and internet browser, are complementary: bthe supervisor offers complete access to all information, but requires specific software bthe HTML pages offer partial access to the main information via any PC connected to the network.Architecture4DE52081SetupInitialsetup The initial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX400 via an RS232 link. This setup: bspecifies the IP address of the EGX gateway bselects the type of Ethernet port (wire or optic fiber) blists the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters. SetupviatheEthernetnetwork Once connected to the Ethernet network, the EGX400 server can be accessed by a standard internet browser via its IP address to: bcreate or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters bupdate the firmware]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="200">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX100gateway EthernetEGX400serverEGX100CharacteristicsWeight Dimensions (H x W x D) Mounting Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Power supply Operating temperature Humidity ratingEGX100170 g 91 x 72 x 68 mm Din rail Class 3 24 V DC if not using PoE -25 ��C to +70��C 5 % to 95 % relative humidity (without condensation) at +55 ��C EN 55022/EN 55011/ FCC class A EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-8EGX400700 g 25 x 190 x 115 mm Symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Front or side position None 24 V DC 100-240 V AC/24 V DC adapter supplied -30 ��C to +80��C 5 % to 95 % relative humidity (without condensation) at +40 ��C EN 55022/FCC class A EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-11DB109282Regulatory/standards compliance for electromagnetic interferenceEmissions (radiated and conducted) Immunity for industrial environments: - electrostatic discharge - radiated RF - electrical fast transients - surge - conducted RF - power frequency magnetic field International (CB scheme) USA Canada Europe Australia/New Zealand1 2 3 4 5 6 7 824 Vdc power connection. 10/100 Base TX (802.3af) port for connection to Ethernet via an RJ45 connector. Ethernet and serial indication LEDs. Power/Status LED. Reset button. RS485 connection. Dip switches for biasing, termination, and 2-wire/4-wire jumpers. RS232 connection.4Regulatory/standards compliance for safetyIEC 60950 UL508/UL60950 cUL (complies with CSA C22.2, no. 60950) EN 090 AS/NZS25 60950  RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or 4wire), depending on settings UL0 cUL (complies with CSA C22.2, no. 14-M91)EGX400SerialportsNumber of ports Types of portsDB100978Protocol Power connector. Ethernet indication LEDs. 10/100 Base TX port for connection to Ethernet via an RJ45 connector. 4 100 Base FX port for connection to Ethernet via fiber optic cable (LC connector). 5 COM1: terminal block for RS485 serial link. 6 COM1 indication LEDs. 7 COM2: terminal block for RS485 serial link. 8 COM2 indication LEDs. 9 Dip-switches for setup of COM1 and COM2 ports bias and termination. 10 COM2: Sub D-9 connector for the RS232 serial link. 1 2 3 Maximum baud rate Maximum number of directly connected devicesModbus RTU/ASCII PowerLogic�� (SY/MAX) 00 or 00 baud depending on settings  COM1: RS485 (2-wire or 4-wire) COM2: RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or 4-wire), depending on settings Modbus RTU/ASCII PowerLogic�� (SY/MAX) 00 baud 32 per port, 64 in allEthernetportNumber of ports Types of ports Protocol Baud rate  One 10/100 base TX (802.3af) port HTTP, SNMP, FTP, Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 MB None  One 10/100 base TX port One 100 base FX port (multimode optic fiber) HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, SNTP, FTP, Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 MB 16 MBWebserverMemory for custom HTML pages]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX100gateway EthernetEGX400serverEGX100CharacteristicsWeight Dimensions (H x W x D) Mounting Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Power supply Operating temperature Humidity ratingEGX100170 g 91 x 72 x 68 mm Din rail Class 3 24 V DC if not using PoE -25 AAC to +70AAC 5 % to 95 % relative humidity (without condensation) at +55 AAC EN 55022/EN 55011/ FCC class A EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-8EGX400700 g 25 x 190 x 115 mm Symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Front or side position None 24 V DC 100-240 V AC/24 V DC adapter supplied -30 AAC to +80AAC 5 % to 95 % relative humidity (without condensation) at +40 AAC EN 55022/FCC class A EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-11DB109282Regulatory/standards compliance for electromagnetic interferenceEmissions (radiated and conducted) Immunity for industrial environments: - electrostatic discharge - radiated RF - electrical fast transients - surge - conducted RF - power frequency magnetic field International (CB scheme) USA Canada Europe Australia/New Zealand1 2 3 4 5 6 7 824 Vdc power connection. 10/100 Base TX (802.3af) port for connection to Ethernet via an RJ45 connector. Ethernet and serial indication LEDs. Power/Status LED. Reset button. RS485 connection. Dip switches for biasing, termination, and 2-wire/4-wire jumpers. RS232 connection.4Regulatory/standards compliance for safetyIEC 60950 UL508/UL60950 cUL (complies with CSA C22.2, no. 60950) EN 090 AS/NZS25 60950  RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or 4wire), depending on settings UL0 cUL (complies with CSA C22.2, no. 14-M91)EGX400SerialportsNumber of ports Types of portsDB100978Protocol Power connector. Ethernet indication LEDs. 10/100 Base TX port for connection to Ethernet via an RJ45 connector. 4 100 Base FX port for connection to Ethernet via fiber optic cable (LC connector). 5 COM1: terminal block for RS485 serial link. 6 COM1 indication LEDs. 7 COM2: terminal block for RS485 serial link. 8 COM2 indication LEDs. 9 Dip-switches for setup of COM1 and COM2 ports bias and termination. 10 COM2: Sub D-9 connector for the RS232 serial link. 1 2 3 Maximum baud rate Maximum number of directly connected devicesModbus RTU/ASCII PowerLogicAA (SY/MAX) 00 or 00 baud depending on settings  COM1: RS485 (2-wire or 4-wire) COM2: RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or 4-wire), depending on settings Modbus RTU/ASCII PowerLogicAA (SY/MAX) 00 baud 32 per port, 64 in allEthernetportNumber of ports Types of ports Protocol Baud rate  One 10/100 base TX (802.3af) port HTTP, SNMP, FTP, Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 MB None  One 10/100 base TX port One 100 base FX port (multimode optic fiber) HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, SNTP, FTP, Modbus TCP/IP 10/100 MB 16 MBWebserverMemory for custom HTML pages]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="201">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX100gateway EthernetEGX400serverInstallation DIN rail mounting (EGX100)DE52765 DE52766Side mounting on DIN rail (EGX400)DE527674Front mounting on DIN rail (EGX400)DE52769 DE5277000DE527]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersEthernetEGX100gateway EthernetEGX400serverInstallation DIN rail mounting (EGX100)DE52765 DE52766Side mounting on DIN rail (EGX400)DE527674Front mounting on DIN rail (EGX400)DE52769 DE5277000DE527]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="202">
		<raw><![CDATA[ConvertersWPGsoftwaretool HTML page generatorFunctionPE0Very easy to use, the WPG software tool generates HTML pages for the EGX400 server. It is used to: bselect the devices connected to the server btransfer the HTML pages corresponding to the selected devices to the server. The WPG tool can set up HTML pages for the following devices: bSepam series 20, Sepam series 40, Sepam series 80 and Sepam 2000 bMasterpact equipped with Micrologic A, P and H control units bPower Meter PM500, PM700 and PM800 bCircuit Monitor Series 2000, 3000 and 4000. The WPG tool is PC software that can be used in three languages, French, Spanish and English. To obtain WPG, contact your Schneider Electric representative.HTML page with summary information on all the equipment in a switchboard.HTML pagesFollowing transfer, the EGX400 contains HTML pages that can be used to remotely monitor equipment under secure conditions. bst service level based on the summary pages. bnd service level based on specific pages for each type of device. Summarypages Five summary pages are available for overall monitoring of the switchboard. They present the main measurements recorded by the devices connected to the server. bPage 1 v3-phase average rms current vactive power vpower factor vcircuit-breaker position bPage 2 vrms current per phase bPage 3 vdemand current per phase bPage 4 vdemand power vpeak power vtime-stamping data bPage 5 vactive power vreactive power vdate and time of last reset of energy meters. Specific pages for each device A number of specific pages present detailed information on each device for in-depth analysis, e.g.: boperating information: vinstantaneous current per phase vdemand current per phase vactive and reactive power vaverage voltage (phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase) vmaximum unbalance vpower factor vfrequency bevent information: vminimum and maximum current values vmaximum demand current vdate and time of last reset bhistorical data: vrecording over 38 days of three user-selectable parameters (energy by default), every 15, 30 or 60 minutes, with graphic display and data export to an Excel file.PE04Single device operating information HTML page.PE0Single device HTML page showing historical data]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[ConvertersWPGsoftwaretool HTML page generatorFunctionPE0Very easy to use, the WPG software tool generates HTML pages for the EGX400 server. It is used to: bselect the devices connected to the server btransfer the HTML pages corresponding to the selected devices to the server. The WPG tool can set up HTML pages for the following devices: bSepam series 20, Sepam series 40, Sepam series 80 and Sepam 2000 bMasterpact equipped with Micrologic A, P and H control units bPower Meter PM500, PM700 and PM800 bCircuit Monitor Series 2000, 3000 and 4000. The WPG tool is PC software that can be used in three languages, French, Spanish and English. To obtain WPG, contact your Schneider Electric representative.HTML page with summary information on all the equipment in a switchboard.HTML pagesFollowing transfer, the EGX400 contains HTML pages that can be used to remotely monitor equipment under secure conditions. bst service level based on the summary pages. bnd service level based on specific pages for each type of device. Summarypages Five summary pages are available for overall monitoring of the switchboard. They present the main measurements recorded by the devices connected to the server. bPage 1 v3-phase average rms current vactive power vpower factor vcircuit-breaker position bPage 2 vrms current per phase bPage 3 vdemand current per phase bPage 4 vdemand power vpeak power vtime-stamping data bPage 5 vactive power vreactive power vdate and time of last reset of energy meters. Specific pages for each device A number of specific pages present detailed information on each device for in-depth analysis, e.g.: boperating information: vinstantaneous current per phase vdemand current per phase vactive and reactive power vaverage voltage (phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase) vmaximum unbalance vpower factor vfrequency bevent information: vminimum and maximum current values vmaximum demand current vdate and time of last reset bhistorical data: vrecording over 38 days of three user-selectable parameters (energy by default), every 15, 30 or 60 minutes, with graphic display and data export to an Excel file.PE04Single device operating information HTML page.PE0Single device HTML page showing historical data]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="203">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsSelectionguidePhasecurrentsensorsTwo types of sensor may be used with Sepam to measure phase current: b1 A or 5 A current transformers bLPCT (Low Power Current Transducer) type current sensors.Selectionguide1Aor5Acurrentsensorsare: bto be sized case by case: accuracy, electrical characteristics, etc. bdefined according to the IEC 60044-1 standard. The LPCT type current sensors are: bsimple to size: a given LPCT sensor is suitable for the measurement of different rated currents: for example, the CLP1 sensor measures rated currents of 25 to 1250 A bdefined according to the IEC 60044-8 standard (rated secondary voltage = 22.5 mV).4The residual current value may be obtained using different sensors and assemblies, which are chosen according to the required performance (measurement accuracy and earth fault protection sensitivity). Residual current may be: bmeasured by a specific CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT bmeasured by a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), with an ACE990 adapter. bcalculated by Sepam from the vector sum of the 3 phase currents.ResidualcurrentsensorsSelectionguideCSH120 or CSH200 core balance CTMeasurement sensorsAccuracy*** ** ** *Recommended minimumsetpoint&amp;gt; 1A 0.10 InCT (DT) 0.05 InCT (IDMT) 0.10 InCT (DT) 0.05 InCT (IDMT) 0.30 InCT (DT) (1) 0.10 InCT (IDMT) (1)Easy assembly*1 or 3 x 1 A or 5 A CT+ CSH30 Core balance CT + ACE990 3 phase CT (I0 calculated by Sepam)** ** revamping * new ***(1) Recommended minimum set point for ANSI 50N/51N function with H2 restraint: 0.10 InCT (DT) or 0.05 InCT (IDMT).It is advisable not to set the earth fault protection functions below the recommended minimum set point to avoid any risk of unwanted tripping caused by oversensitive detection of residual current or false residual current due to the saturation of a CT. Lower settings may be used to trigger alarms]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsSelectionguidePhasecurrentsensorsTwo types of sensor may be used with Sepam to measure phase current: b1 A or 5 A current transformers bLPCT (Low Power Current Transducer) type current sensors.Selectionguide1Aor5Acurrentsensorsare: bto be sized case by case: accuracy, electrical characteristics, etc. bdefined according to the IEC 60044-1 standard. The LPCT type current sensors are: bsimple to size: a given LPCT sensor is suitable for the measurement of different rated currents: for example, the CLP1 sensor measures rated currents of 25 to 1250 A bdefined according to the IEC 60044-8 standard (rated secondary voltage = 22.5 mV).4The residual current value may be obtained using different sensors and assemblies, which are chosen according to the required performance (measurement accuracy and earth fault protection sensitivity). Residual current may be: bmeasured by a specific CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT bmeasured by a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), with an ACE990 adapter. bcalculated by Sepam from the vector sum of the 3 phase currents.ResidualcurrentsensorsSelectionguideCSH120 or CSH200 core balance CTMeasurement sensorsAccuracy*** ** ** *Recommended minimumsetpoint&amp;gt; 1A 0.10 InCT (DT) 0.05 InCT (IDMT) 0.10 InCT (DT) 0.05 InCT (IDMT) 0.30 InCT (DT) (1) 0.10 InCT (IDMT) (1)Easy assembly*1 or 3 x 1 A or 5 A CT+ CSH30 Core balance CT + ACE990 3 phase CT (I0 calculated by Sepam)** ** revamping * new ***(1) Recommended minimum set point for ANSI 50N/51N function with H2 restraint: 0.10 InCT (DT) or 0.05 InCT (IDMT).It is advisable not to set the earth fault protection functions below the recommended minimum set point to avoid any risk of unwanted tripping caused by oversensitive detection of residual current or false residual current due to the saturation of a CT. Lower settings may be used to trigger alarms]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="204">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsVoltage transformersFunction0N 0NSepam may be connected to any standard voltage transformer with a rated secondary voltage of 100 V to 220 V. Schneider Electric offers a range of voltage transformers: bto measure phase-to-neutral voltages: voltage transformers with one insulated MV terminal bto measure phase-to-phase voltages: voltage transformers with two insulated MV terminals bwith or without integrated protection fuses.VRQ3 with fuses.VRQ3 without fuses.Consult us for more information.ConnectionThe voltage transformers connect to Sepam: bdirectly, for Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 bor via the CCT640 connector for Sepam B21, B22 and the additional voltage inputs for Sepam B83. The table below presents the different connection possibilities for voltage transformers to Sepam. Sepam Sepam Sepam B21andB22 series40 series80Number of voltage inputs Intermediate connector Sepam connector (1) Sepam B83 only.  CCT640 B  E  main E  additional (1) CCT640 B4bwhen voltage transformers are connected directly to the E connector on Sepam, four transformers built into the Sepam base unit ensure matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits. When voltage transformers are connected via the CCT640 connector, the four transformers for matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits are contained in the CCT640]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsVoltage transformersFunction0N 0NSepam may be connected to any standard voltage transformer with a rated secondary voltage of 100 V to 220 V. Schneider Electric offers a range of voltage transformers: bto measure phase-to-neutral voltages: voltage transformers with one insulated MV terminal bto measure phase-to-phase voltages: voltage transformers with two insulated MV terminals bwith or without integrated protection fuses.VRQ3 with fuses.VRQ3 without fuses.Consult us for more information.ConnectionThe voltage transformers connect to Sepam: bdirectly, for Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 bor via the CCT640 connector for Sepam B21, B22 and the additional voltage inputs for Sepam B83. The table below presents the different connection possibilities for voltage transformers to Sepam. Sepam Sepam Sepam B21andB22 series40 series80Number of voltage inputs Intermediate connector Sepam connector (1) Sepam B83 only.  CCT640 B  E  main E  additional (1) CCT640 B4bwhen voltage transformers are connected directly to the E connector on Sepam, four transformers built into the Sepam base unit ensure matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits. When voltage transformers are connected via the CCT640 connector, the four transformers for matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits are contained in the CCT640]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="205">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sensors1 A / 5 A current transformersFunction0N 0NSepam may be connected to any standard 1 A or 5 A current transformer. Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents from 50 A to 2500 A. Consult us for more information.SizingofcurrenttransformersForovercurrentprotectionfunctionsCurrent transformers are sized so as not to be saturated by the current values they are required to measure accurately (minimum 5 In).ARJA1.ARJP3.bwith DT tripping curve: the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the setting bwith IDMT tripping curve: the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the highest working value on the curve. PracticalsolutionwhenthereisnoinformationonthesettingsRatedsecondary current (in) 1A 5A Accuracy burden 2.5 VA 7.5 VA Accuracy class P 0 P 0 CTsecondary resistanceRCT &amp;lt;W &amp;lt; 0.2 W Wiring resistanceRf &amp;lt; 0.075 W &amp;lt; 0.075 W]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sensors1 A / 5 A current transformersFunction0N 0NSepam may be connected to any standard 1 A or 5 A current transformer. Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents from 50 A to 2500 A. Consult us for more information.SizingofcurrenttransformersForovercurrentprotectionfunctionsCurrent transformers are sized so as not to be saturated by the current values they are required to measure accurately (minimum 5 In).ARJA1.ARJP3.bwith DT tripping curve: the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the setting bwith IDMT tripping curve: the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the highest working value on the curve. PracticalsolutionwhenthereisnoinformationonthesettingsRatedsecondary current (in) 1A 5A Accuracy burden 2.5 VA 7.5 VA Accuracy class P 0 P 0 CTsecondary resistanceRCT &amp;lt;W &amp;lt; 0.2 W Wiring resistanceRf &amp;lt; 0.075 W &amp;lt; 0.075 W]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="206">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sensors1 A / 5 A current transformers CCA630/CCA634 connectorFunctionDE80051The current transformers (1 A or 5 A) are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector on the rear panel of Sepam: bThe CCA630 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam bThe CCA634 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a residual current transformer to Sepam. The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through primaries, which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents. The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuit.DE80059CCA634HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bTo remove current inputs to the Sepam unit, unplug the CCA630 or CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it. The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits. bBefore disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector, short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANGER]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sensors1 A / 5 A current transformers CCA630/CCA634 connectorFunctionDE80051The current transformers (1 A or 5 A) are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector on the rear panel of Sepam: bThe CCA630 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam bThe CCA634 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a residual current transformer to Sepam. The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through primaries, which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents. The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuit.DE80059CCA634HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bTo remove current inputs to the Sepam unit, unplug the CCA630 or CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it. The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits. bBefore disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector, short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DANGER]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="207">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sensors1 A / 5 A current transformersConnecting and assembling the CCA630 connectorMT104901. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after wiring. 2. If necessary, remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1, 2 and 3. This strap is supplied with the CCA630. 3. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits. The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10). 4. Close the side shields. 5. Plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear panel (item B ). 6. Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam.41. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after wiring. 2. According to the wiring required, remove or reverse the bridging strap. This is used to link either terminals 1, 2 and 3, or terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9 (see picture opposite). 3. Use terminal 7 (1 A) or 8 (5 A) to measure the residual current according to the CT secondary. 4. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits. The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm�� (AWG 16-10). The wires only exit from the base. 5. Close the side shields. 6. Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit. 7. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector (principle similar to that of the MES module). 8. Tighten the mounting screw.Bridging of terminals 1, 2 and 3Connecting and assembling the CCA634 connectorDE80068Bridging of terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION Sepamseries20,Sepamseries40 bDo not connect the connector A residual current input I0 (terminals 18 and 19) and the CCA634 residual current input (terminal 9 and 7 or 8) simultaneously. These  residual current input use the same Sepam analog channel. Sepamseries80 b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1 and residual current input I0 on connector E (terminals 14 and 15) simultaneously. Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634 on connector B1 will disturb input I0 on connector E. b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B2 and residual current input I���0 on connector E (terminals 17 and 18) simultaneously. Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634 on connector B2 will disturb input I���0 on connector E. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncan causeequipmentdamage.CAUTION0DE800]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sensors1 A / 5 A current transformersConnecting and assembling the CCA630 connectorMT104901. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after wiring. 2. If necessary, remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1, 2 and 3. This strap is supplied with the CCA630. 3. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits. The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10). 4. Close the side shields. 5. Plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear panel (item B ). 6. Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam.41. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after wiring. 2. According to the wiring required, remove or reverse the bridging strap. This is used to link either terminals 1, 2 and 3, or terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9 (see picture opposite). 3. Use terminal 7 (1 A) or 8 (5 A) to measure the residual current according to the CT secondary. 4. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits. The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mmAA (AWG 16-10). The wires only exit from the base. 5. Close the side shields. 6. Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit. 7. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector (principle similar to that of the MES module). 8. Tighten the mounting screw.Bridging of terminals 1, 2 and 3Connecting and assembling the CCA634 connectorDE80068Bridging of terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION Sepamseries20,Sepamseries40 bDo not connect the connector A residual current input I0 (terminals 18 and 19) and the CCA634 residual current input (terminal 9 and 7 or 8) simultaneously. These  residual current input use the same Sepam analog channel. Sepamseries80 b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1 and residual current input I0 on connector E (terminals 14 and 15) simultaneously. Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634 on connector B1 will disturb input I0 on connector E. b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B2 and residual current input IAAA0 on connector E (terminals 17 and 18) simultaneously. Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634 on connector B2 will disturb input IAAA0 on connector E. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncan causeequipmentdamage.CAUTION0DE800]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="208">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsLPCT type current sensorsFunctionPE00Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors are voltage-output sensors, which are compliant with the IEC 60044-8 standard. The Merlin Gerin range of LPCTs includes the following sensors: CLP1, CLP2, CLP3, TLP160 and TLP190.CLP1 LPCT sensorCCA670/CCA671 connectorFunctionDE516744The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear panel of Sepam. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position. The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose, the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs: bCCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 bCCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 80.Description1 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors. 2 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670/CCA671 to the rated phase current value. 3 Microswitch setting/selected rated current equivalency table (2 In values per position). 4 9-pin sub-D connector to connect test equipment (ACE917 for direct connector or via CCA613).Rating of CCA670/CCA671 connectorsHAZARD OF NON-OPERATION bSet the microswitches for the CCA670/ CCA671 connector before commissioning the device. bCheck that only one microswitch is in position 1 for each block L1, L2, L3 and that no microswitch is in the center position. bCheck that the microswitch settings on all 3 blocks are identical. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionscancause incorrectoperation.CAUTIONThe CCA670/CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors. In is the current value that corresponds to the rated secondary current of 22.5 mV. The possible settings for In are (in A): 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150. The selected In value should be: bentered as a Sepam general setting bconfigured by microswitch on the CCA670/CCA671 connector. Operating mode: 1. Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the ���LPCT settings��� zone; the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1, L2, L3. 2. On the L1 block, set the microswitch for the selected rated current to ���1��� (2 In values per microswitch). bThe table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected rated current In is printed on the connector bLeave the 7 other microswitches set to ���0���. 3. Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 blockandclosetheshield]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsLPCT type current sensorsFunctionPE00Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors are voltage-output sensors, which are compliant with the IEC 60044-8 standard. The Merlin Gerin range of LPCTs includes the following sensors: CLP1, CLP2, CLP3, TLP160 and TLP190.CLP1 LPCT sensorCCA670/CCA671 connectorFunctionDE516744The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear panel of Sepam. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position. The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose, the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs: bCCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 bCCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 80.Description1 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors. 2 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670/CCA671 to the rated phase current value. 3 Microswitch setting/selected rated current equivalency table (2 In values per position). 4 9-pin sub-D connector to connect test equipment (ACE917 for direct connector or via CCA613).Rating of CCA670/CCA671 connectorsHAZARD OF NON-OPERATION bSet the microswitches for the CCA670/ CCA671 connector before commissioning the device. bCheck that only one microswitch is in position 1 for each block L1, L2, L3 and that no microswitch is in the center position. bCheck that the microswitch settings on all 3 blocks are identical. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionscancause incorrectoperation.CAUTIONThe CCA670/CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors. In is the current value that corresponds to the rated secondary current of 22.5 mV. The possible settings for In are (in A): 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150. The selected In value should be: bentered as a Sepam general setting bconfigured by microswitch on the CCA670/CCA671 connector. Operating mode: 1. Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the AAALPCT settingsAAA zone; the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1, L2, L3. 2. On the L1 block, set the microswitch for the selected rated current to AAA1AAA (2 In values per microswitch). bThe table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected rated current In is printed on the connector bLeave the 7 other microswitches set to AAA0AAA. 3. Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 blockandclosetheshield]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="209">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsLPCT type current sensors Test accessoriesAccessoryconnectionprinciple DANGERHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DE516751 LPCT sensor, equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which is plugged directly into the CCA670/CCA671 connector. 2 Sepam protection unit. 3 CCA670/CCA671 connector, LPCT voltage interface, with microswitch setting of rated current: b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 b CCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 80.44 CCA613 remote test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped with a 3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670/ CCA671 interface connector (9-pin sub-D). 5 ACE917 injection adapter, to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard injection box. 6 Standard injection box]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsLPCT type current sensors Test accessoriesAccessoryconnectionprinciple DANGERHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.DE516751 LPCT sensor, equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which is plugged directly into the CCA670/CCA671 connector. 2 Sepam protection unit. 3 CCA670/CCA671 connector, LPCT voltage interface, with microswitch setting of rated current: b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 b CCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 80.44 CCA613 remote test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped with a 3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670/ CCA671 interface connector (9-pin sub-D). 5 ACE917 injection adapter, to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard injection box. 6 Standard injection box]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="210">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsLPCT type current sensors Test accessoriesACE917 injection adapterFunctionDE800652.75The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection box, when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors. The ACE917 adapter is inserted between: bThe standard injection box bThe LPCT test plug: vintegrated in the Sepam CCA670/CCA671 interface connector vor transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory. The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter: bPower supply cord b3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on CCA670/CCA671 or CCA613.10.24 6.70CharacteristicsPower supply Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 x 0.79 in ) 115/230 V AC 0.25 A ratingDE50564CCA613 remote test plugFunctionThe CCA613 test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle, is equipped with a 3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670/ CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam.4DimensionsDE80045 DE80117mm inmm inLugAccessory connection principle67,5 2.66Wire67,5 2.6644 1.7313 0.5150 1.97 80 3.15Front view with cover lifted.Right side view.HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges. Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury.DE80047CAUTIONmm in69 2.7246 1.81Cut-out.2]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsLPCT type current sensors Test accessoriesACE917 injection adapterFunctionDE800652.75The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection box, when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors. The ACE917 adapter is inserted between: bThe standard injection box bThe LPCT test plug: vintegrated in the Sepam CCA670/CCA671 interface connector vor transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory. The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter: bPower supply cord b3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on CCA670/CCA671 or CCA613.10.24 6.70CharacteristicsPower supply Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 x 0.79 in ) 115/230 V AC 0.25 A ratingDE50564CCA613 remote test plugFunctionThe CCA613 test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle, is equipped with a 3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670/ CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam.4DimensionsDE80045 DE80117mm inmm inLugAccessory connection principle67,5 2.66Wire67,5 2.6644 1.7313 0.5150 1.97 80 3.15Front view with cover lifted.Right side view.HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges. Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury.DE80047CAUTIONmm in69 2.7246 1.81Cut-out.2]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="211">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsCSH120andCSH200 CorebalanceCTsFunctionPE00The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct residual current measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter. Due to their low voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.CharacteristicsInner diameter Weight AccuracyCSH120CSH200CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs.Transformation ratio Maximum permissible current Operating temperature Storage temperature120 mm (4.7 in) 200 mm (7.9 in) 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb) ��5% at 20��C (68��F) ��6% max. from -25��C to 70��C (-13��F to +158��F) 1/470 20 kA - 1 s -25��C to +70��C (-13��F to +158��F) -40��C to +85��C (-40��F to +185��F)Dimensions4DE10228Dimensions ACSH120 (in) CSH200 (in) 0 (4.75) 00 (7.87)B (6.46)  (10.1)D (1.73)  (1.81)E90 (7.48)  (10.8)F (2.99) 0 (4.72)H0 (1.57) 0 (2.36)J (6.54)  (10.1)K (2.44) 0 (4.09)L (1.38)  (1.46]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsCSH120andCSH200 CorebalanceCTsFunctionPE00The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct residual current measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter. Due to their low voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.CharacteristicsInner diameter Weight AccuracyCSH120CSH200CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs.Transformation ratio Maximum permissible current Operating temperature Storage temperature120 mm (4.7 in) 200 mm (7.9 in) 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb) AA5% at 20AAC (68AAF) AA6% max. from -25AAC to 70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF) 1/470 20 kA - 1 s -25AAC to +70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF) -40AAC to +85AAC (-40AAF to +185AAF)Dimensions4DE10228Dimensions ACSH120 (in) CSH200 (in) 0 (4.75) 00 (7.87)B (6.46)  (10.1)D (1.73)  (1.81)E90 (7.48)  (10.8)F (2.99) 0 (4.72)H0 (1.57) 0 (2.36)J (6.54)  (10.1)K (2.44) 0 (4.09)L (1.38)  (1.46]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="212">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsCSH120andCSH200 CorebalanceCTsHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bOnly CSH120, CSH200 and CSH280 core balance CTs can be used for direct residual current measurement. Other residual current sensors require the use of an intermediate device, CSH30, ACE990 or CCA634. bInstall the core balance CTs on insulated cables. bCables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an earthed shielding. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionswillresult in death or serious injury.Group the MV cable (or cables) in the middle of the core balance CT. Use non-conductive binding to hold the cables. Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding earthing cables through the core balance CT.E0E0Assembly on MV cables.Assembly on mounting plate.DE51678DANGERAssembly4ConnectiontoSepamseries20andSepamseries40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). ConnectiontoSepamseries80 bTo residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) bTo residual current I���0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding). Recommendedcable bSheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid bMinimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm�� (AWG 18) bResistance per unit length &amp;lt; 100 mW/m (30.5 mW/ft) bMinimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms) bConnect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam bFlatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other means. ThemaximumresistanceoftheSepamconnectionwiringmustnotexceed4W (i.e.20mmaximumfor100mW/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mW/ft).HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH core balance CTs to earth. This connection is made in Sepam. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause Sepamtooperateincorrectly.CAUTIONConnectionDE800]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsCSH120andCSH200 CorebalanceCTsHAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS bOnly qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. bNEVER work alone. bTurn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. bAlways use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. bOnly CSH120, CSH200 and CSH280 core balance CTs can be used for direct residual current measurement. Other residual current sensors require the use of an intermediate device, CSH30, ACE990 or CCA634. bInstall the core balance CTs on insulated cables. bCables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an earthed shielding. Failuretofollowtheseinstructionswillresult in death or serious injury.Group the MV cable (or cables) in the middle of the core balance CT. Use non-conductive binding to hold the cables. Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding earthing cables through the core balance CT.E0E0Assembly on MV cables.Assembly on mounting plate.DE51678DANGERAssembly4ConnectiontoSepamseries20andSepamseries40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). ConnectiontoSepamseries80 bTo residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) bTo residual current IAAA0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding). Recommendedcable bSheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid bMinimum cable cross-section 0.93 mmAA (AWG 18) bResistance per unit length &amp;lt; 100 mW/m (30.5 mW/ft) bMinimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms) bConnect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam bFlatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other means. ThemaximumresistanceoftheSepamconnectionwiringmustnotexceed4W (i.e.20mmaximumfor100mW/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mW/ft).HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH core balance CTs to earth. This connection is made in Sepam. Failuretofollowthisinstructioncancause Sepamtooperateincorrectly.CAUTIONConnectionDE800]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="213">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsCSH30 InterposingringCTFunctionE E0The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.CharacteristicsWeight Vertical assembly of CSH30 interposing ring CT. Horizontal assembly of CSH30 interposing ring CT. Assembly 0.12 kg (0.265 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail In vertical or horizontal positionDimensionsDE80023mm in0.180.161.183.230.21.970.63 0.1842.360.315 1.14ConnectionThe CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT: b5 A rating - 4 turns b1 A rating - 2 turns Connectionto5AsecondarycircuitDE80118 PE00 PE00Connectionto1Asecondarycircuitturns turns1. Plug into the connector. 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT 4 times.1. Plug into the connector. 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT twice.DE80119ConnectiontoSepamseries20andSepamseries40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). ConnectiontoSepamseries80 bTo residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) bTo residual current I���0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding). Recommendedcable bSheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid bMinimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm�� (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mm��, AWG 12) bResistance per unit length &amp;lt; 100 mW/m (30.5 mW/ft) bMinimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms) bMaximum length: 2 m (6.6 ft). It is essential for the CSH30 interposing ring CT to be installed near Sepam (Sepam - CSH30 link less than 2 m (6.6 ft) long). Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other means.turns tur]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsCSH30 InterposingringCTFunctionE E0The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.CharacteristicsWeight Vertical assembly of CSH30 interposing ring CT. Horizontal assembly of CSH30 interposing ring CT. Assembly 0.12 kg (0.265 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail In vertical or horizontal positionDimensionsDE80023mm in0.180.161.183.230.21.970.63 0.1842.360.315 1.14ConnectionThe CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT: b5 A rating - 4 turns b1 A rating - 2 turns Connectionto5AsecondarycircuitDE80118 PE00 PE00Connectionto1Asecondarycircuitturns turns1. Plug into the connector. 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT 4 times.1. Plug into the connector. 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT twice.DE80119ConnectiontoSepamseries20andSepamseries40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). ConnectiontoSepamseries80 bTo residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) bTo residual current IAAA0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding). Recommendedcable bSheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid bMinimum cable cross-section 0.93 mmAA (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mmAA, AWG 12) bResistance per unit length &amp;lt; 100 mW/m (30.5 mW/ft) bMinimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms) bMaximum length: 2 m (6.6 ft). It is essential for the CSH30 interposing ring CT to be installed near Sepam (Sepam - CSH30 link less than 2 m (6.6 ft) long). Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other means.turns tur]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="214">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsACE990  CorebalanceCTinterfaceFunctionPE00The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.CharacteristicsWeight Assembly Amplitude accuracy Phase accuracy Maximum permissible current 0.64 kg (1.41 lb) Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail ��% &amp;lt; 2�� 20 kA - 1 s (on the primary winding of an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not saturate) -5��C to +55��C (+23��F to +131��F) -25��C to +70��C (-13��F to +158��F)ACE990 core balance CT interface.Operating temperature Storage temperatureDE80040mm in1.97 0.43DescriptionanddimensionsE ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the core balance CT. S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current.41.813.90.43 0.78 3.03 2.83 0.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsACE990  CorebalanceCTinterfaceFunctionPE00The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.CharacteristicsWeight Assembly Amplitude accuracy Phase accuracy Maximum permissible current 0.64 kg (1.41 lb) Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail AA% &amp;lt; 2AA 20 kA - 1 s (on the primary winding of an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not saturate) -5AAC to +55AAC (+23AAF to +131AAF) -25AAC to +70AAC (-13AAF to +158AAF)ACE990 core balance CT interface.Operating temperature Storage temperatureDE80040mm in1.97 0.43DescriptionanddimensionsE ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the core balance CT. S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current.41.813.90.43 0.78 3.03 2.83 0.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="215">
		<raw><![CDATA[SensorsACE990 CorebalanceCTinterfaceConnectionofcorebalanceCT Only one core balance CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface. The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals. To define the 2 input terminals, it is necessary to know the following: bCore balance CT ratio (1/n) bCore balance CT power bClose approximation of rated current In0 (In0 is a general setting in Sepam and defines the earth fault protection setting range between 0.1 In0 and 15 In0). The table below can be used to determine: bThe 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT secondary bThe type of residual current sensor to set bThe exact value of the rated residual current In0 setting, given by the following formula: In0 = k x number of core balance CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below. The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation: the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the terminal with the lowest index (Ex). Kvalue0.00578 0.00676 0.00885 0.00909 0.01136 0.01587 0.01667 0.02000 0.02632 0.04000 0.05780 0.06757 0.08850 0.09091 0.11364 0.15873 0.16667 0.20000 0.26316Connection4Example: Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A. How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990? 1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current In0, i.e. 5 A. 2. Calculate the ratio: approx. In0/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125. 3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to k = 0.01136. 4. Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT: 2 VA core balance CT &amp;gt; 0.1 VA V OK. 5. Connect the core balance CT secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4. 6. Set Sepam up with: In0 = 0.01136 x 400 = 4.5 A. This value of In0 can be used to monitor current between 0.45 A and 67.5 A. Wiring of MV core balance CT secondary circuit: b S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal b S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal.DE51682ACE990 input terminalstobe connectedE1 - E5 E2 - E5 E1 - E4 E3 - E5 E2-E4 E1 - E3 E4 - E5 E3 - E4 E2 - E3 E1 - E2 E1 - E5 E2 - E5 E1 - E4 E3 - E5 E2 - E4 E1 - E3 E4 - E5 E3 - E4 E2 - E3Residualcurrent sensorsettingACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2Min. MV core balanceCT power0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.2 VA 2.5 VA 2.5 VA 3.0 VA 3.0 VA 3.0 VA 4.5 VA 4.5 VA 5.5 VA 7.5 VAConnectiontoSepamseries20andSepamseries40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). ConnectiontoSepamseries80 bTo residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) bTo residual current I���0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding). Recommendedcables bCable between core balance CT and ACE990: less than 50 m (160 ft) long bSheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam, maximum length 2 m (6.6 ft) bCable cross-section between 0.93 mm�� (AWG 18) and 2.5 mm�� (AWG 12) bResistance per unit length less than 100 mW/m (30.5 mW/ft) bMinimum dielectric strength: 100 Vrms. Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible (2 cm or 5.08 in maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector. Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other mean]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[SensorsACE990 CorebalanceCTinterfaceConnectionofcorebalanceCT Only one core balance CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface. The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals. To define the 2 input terminals, it is necessary to know the following: bCore balance CT ratio (1/n) bCore balance CT power bClose approximation of rated current In0 (In0 is a general setting in Sepam and defines the earth fault protection setting range between 0.1 In0 and 15 In0). The table below can be used to determine: bThe 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT secondary bThe type of residual current sensor to set bThe exact value of the rated residual current In0 setting, given by the following formula: In0 = k x number of core balance CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below. The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation: the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the terminal with the lowest index (Ex). Kvalue0.00578 0.00676 0.00885 0.00909 0.01136 0.01587 0.01667 0.02000 0.02632 0.04000 0.05780 0.06757 0.08850 0.09091 0.11364 0.15873 0.16667 0.20000 0.26316Connection4Example: Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A. How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990? 1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current In0, i.e. 5 A. 2. Calculate the ratio: approx. In0/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125. 3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to k = 0.01136. 4. Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT: 2 VA core balance CT &amp;gt; 0.1 VA V OK. 5. Connect the core balance CT secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4. 6. Set Sepam up with: In0 = 0.01136 x 400 = 4.5 A. This value of In0 can be used to monitor current between 0.45 A and 67.5 A. Wiring of MV core balance CT secondary circuit: b S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal b S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal.DE51682ACE990 input terminalstobe connectedE1 - E5 E2 - E5 E1 - E4 E3 - E5 E2-E4 E1 - E3 E4 - E5 E3 - E4 E2 - E3 E1 - E2 E1 - E5 E2 - E5 E1 - E4 E3 - E5 E2 - E4 E1 - E3 E4 - E5 E3 - E4 E2 - E3Residualcurrent sensorsettingACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2Min. MV core balanceCT power0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.2 VA 2.5 VA 2.5 VA 3.0 VA 3.0 VA 3.0 VA 4.5 VA 4.5 VA 5.5 VA 7.5 VAConnectiontoSepamseries20andSepamseries40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). ConnectiontoSepamseries80 bTo residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) bTo residual current IAAA0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding). Recommendedcables bCable between core balance CT and ACE990: less than 50 m (160 ft) long bSheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam, maximum length 2 m (6.6 ft) bCable cross-section between 0.93 mmAA (AWG 18) and 2.5 mmAA (AWG 12) bResistance per unit length less than 100 mW/m (30.5 mW/ft) bMinimum dielectric strength: 100 Vrms. Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible (2 cm or 5.08 in maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector. Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other mean]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="216">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="217">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures��� bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts���These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.2]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: bcomplete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochuresAAA bselection guides from the e-catalog. bproduct discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contactsAAAThese technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.2]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="218">
		<raw><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Order formIntroduction Sepamseries20andSepamseries40 Sepamseries80 Additionalmodulesandaccessories 07 47 85 139Order formSepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80 Sepam 100 LD Sepam 100 MI Sepam accessories and spare parts218218 219 220 221 222 2232]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Sepamseries20 Sepamseries40 Sepamseries80Order formIntroduction Sepamseries20andSepamseries40 Sepamseries80 Additionalmodulesandaccessories 07 47 85 139Order formSepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 80 Sepam 100 LD Sepam 100 MI Sepam accessories and spare parts218218 219 220 221 222 2232]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="219">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepamseries20 Ready-to-use configurationNumber of identical Sepam configurations ordered Baseunit,connectorsandapplicationBase unit and UMIBase unit with advanced UMI With lead seal accessory (1) Base unit with basic UMI Remote advanced UMI module Connection cord L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Mounting plate S10UD AMT852 S10UX DSM303 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 AMT840 EN/FR EN/ES 59607 59639This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check the boxes that match your choices.ApplicationSubstation TransformerTypeS20 S23 T0 T M20 B B 59620 59626 59621 59627 59622 59624 59625SensorCT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT VT PT 59630 CCA630 59629 CCA634 59631 CCA670 59632 CCA640(1) Can be used only with an advance UMI. 59603 59608 59660 59661 59662 59670 59609 59611 CCA620 CCA622 59668 59669Motor BusbarsWorkinglanguageSepam series 20ConnectorsType Screw-type Ring-lug typeNote: CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA634: 3 phase CT + IO5Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTsCorebalanceCTs ModulesCore balance CT, �� 120 mm Core balance CT, �� 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface CSH120 CSH200 CSH30 ACE990 59635 59636 59634 59672 Input / output modules 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC MES114 59646MES114E 59651 MES114F 59652Note: only one core balance CT can be added. Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634.Note: the Sepam base unit has 4 outputs; only one input/output module can be added. Remotemodules Connectioncord 59660 MET148-2 59641 CCA770  temperature sensor  L = 0.6 m module 59661 L=2m CCA772 59662 L=4m CCA774 Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T and M. Analog output module MSA141 59647  L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 59660 59661 59662CommunicationinterfacesModbus interfaces 2-wire RS 485 interface 4-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface 2-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface ACE949-2 59642 ACE959 ACE937 59643 59644 Connectioncord    CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA61259663 59663 59663 59663 59663Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103) ACE969TP 59720 ACE969FO 59721Note: only one interface per applicatio]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepamseries20 Ready-to-use configurationNumber of identical Sepam configurations ordered Baseunit,connectorsandapplicationBase unit and UMIBase unit with advanced UMI With lead seal accessory (1) Base unit with basic UMI Remote advanced UMI module Connection cord L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Mounting plate S10UD AMT852 S10UX DSM303 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 AMT840 EN/FR EN/ES 59607 59639This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check the boxes that match your choices.ApplicationSubstation TransformerTypeS20 S23 T0 T M20 B B 59620 59626 59621 59627 59622 59624 59625SensorCT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT VT PT 59630 CCA630 59629 CCA634 59631 CCA670 59632 CCA640(1) Can be used only with an advance UMI. 59603 59608 59660 59661 59662 59670 59609 59611 CCA620 CCA622 59668 59669Motor BusbarsWorkinglanguageSepam series 20ConnectorsType Screw-type Ring-lug typeNote: CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA634: 3 phase CT + IO5Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTsCorebalanceCTs ModulesCore balance CT, AA 120 mm Core balance CT, AA 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface CSH120 CSH200 CSH30 ACE990 59635 59636 59634 59672 Input / output modules 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC MES114 59646MES114E 59651 MES114F 59652Note: only one core balance CT can be added. Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634.Note: the Sepam base unit has 4 outputs; only one input/output module can be added. Remotemodules Connectioncord 59660 MET148-2 59641 CCA770  temperature sensor  L = 0.6 m module 59661 L=2m CCA772 59662 L=4m CCA774 Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T and M. Analog output module MSA141 59647  L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 59660 59661 59662CommunicationinterfacesModbus interfaces 2-wire RS 485 interface 4-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface 2-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface ACE949-2 59642 ACE959 ACE937 59643 59644 Connectioncord    CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA61259663 59663 59663 59663 59663Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103) ACE969TP 59720 ACE969FO 59721Note: only one interface per applicatio]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="220">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepamseries40 Ready-to-use configurationNumber of identical Sepam configurations ordered Baseunit,connectorsandapplicationBase unit and UMIBase unit with advanced UMI With lead seal accessory (1) Base unit with basic UMI Remote advanced UMI module Connection cord L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Mounting plate S10MD AMT852 S10MX DSM303 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 AMT840 EN/FR EN/ES 59604 59639 59600 59608 59660 59661 59662 59670 59615 59616This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check the boxes that match your choices.ApplicationSubstationTypeS40 S41 S42 59680 59681 59682 59683 59684 59685 59686SensorCT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59630 CCA630 CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59629 CCA634 LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT 59631 CCA670(1) Can be used only with an advance UMI. Transformer Motor GeneratorT0 T M41 G0WorkinglanguageSepam series 40 Note: CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA634: 3 phase CT + IOConnectorsType Screw-type CCA620 - 59668 and CCA626 - 59656 Ring-lug type CCA622 - 59669 and CCA627 - 59657Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTsCorebalanceCTs ModulesCore balance CT, �� 120 mm Core balance CT, �� 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface CSH120 CSH200 CSH30 ACE990 59635 59636 59634 59672 Input / output modules 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC Remotemodules  temperature sensor module MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M and G. Maximum of 2 modules per application. Analog output module 59647  L = 0.6 m MSA141 L=2m L=4m Note: the MSA141 can be used with all the applications. MES114 MES114E MES114F 59646 59651 596525Note: only one core balance CT can be added. Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634.Note: the Sepam base unit has 4 outputs; only one input/output module can be added. Connectioncord CCA770 59660 CCA772 59661 CCA774 59662CCA770 CCA772 CCA77459660 59661 59662CommunicationinterfacesModbus interfaces 2-wire RS 485 interface 4-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface 2-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface ACE949-2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP ACE969FO 59642 59643 59644 59720 59721 Connectioncord    CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA61259663 59663 59663 59663 59663Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)Note: only one interface per application]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepamseries40 Ready-to-use configurationNumber of identical Sepam configurations ordered Baseunit,connectorsandapplicationBase unit and UMIBase unit with advanced UMI With lead seal accessory (1) Base unit with basic UMI Remote advanced UMI module Connection cord L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Mounting plate S10MD AMT852 S10MX DSM303 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 AMT840 EN/FR EN/ES 59604 59639 59600 59608 59660 59661 59662 59670 59615 59616This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check the boxes that match your choices.ApplicationSubstationTypeS40 S41 S42 59680 59681 59682 59683 59684 59685 59686SensorCT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59630 CCA630 CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59629 CCA634 LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT 59631 CCA670(1) Can be used only with an advance UMI. Transformer Motor GeneratorT0 T M41 G0WorkinglanguageSepam series 40 Note: CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA634: 3 phase CT + IOConnectorsType Screw-type CCA620 - 59668 and CCA626 - 59656 Ring-lug type CCA622 - 59669 and CCA627 - 59657Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTsCorebalanceCTs ModulesCore balance CT, AA 120 mm Core balance CT, AA 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface CSH120 CSH200 CSH30 ACE990 59635 59636 59634 59672 Input / output modules 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC Remotemodules  temperature sensor module MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M and G. Maximum of 2 modules per application. Analog output module 59647  L = 0.6 m MSA141 L=2m L=4m Note: the MSA141 can be used with all the applications. MES114 MES114E MES114F 59646 59651 596525Note: only one core balance CT can be added. Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634.Note: the Sepam base unit has 4 outputs; only one input/output module can be added. Connectioncord CCA770 59660 CCA772 59661 CCA774 59662CCA770 CCA772 CCA77459660 59661 59662CommunicationinterfacesModbus interfaces 2-wire RS 485 interface 4-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface 2-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface ACE949-2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP ACE969FO 59642 59643 59644 59720 59721 Connectioncord    CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA61259663 59663 59663 59663 59663Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)Note: only one interface per application]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="221">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepamseries80 Ready-to-use configurationNumber of identical Sepam configurations orderedThis order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces according to your choices.Sepamseries80baseunit,cartridge,connectorsandapplicationBase unit and UMI Application TypeSubstation Base unit with mimic-based UMI Base unit with advanced UMI With lead seal accessory (1) Base unit without basic UMI Remote advanced Connection cord L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Mounting plate Note: 8 mounting clips included SEP888 SEP383 AMT852 SEP080 DSM303 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 AMT880 59705 59704 59639 59703 59608 59660 59661 59662 59706 Generator MMS020 SFT080 59707 59711 Busbar Capacitor EN/FR EN/ES 59709 59710 59668 59669 Note: CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA634: 3 phase CT + IO Motor Transformer S80 59729 S81 59730 S82 59731 S84 59732 T 59733 T 59734 T 59735 M81 59736 M87 59737 M88 59738 G 59739 G 59741 G 59742 B0 59743 B 59744 C86 59745B1sensorCT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59630 CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59629LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCTB2sensorUMI module (compulsory with SEP080)CT CT CT CT CTCT CT CT CT CT VTLPCT LPCTMemory cartridgeMemory cartridge Logipam optionNote: option required to use Logipam program.WorkinglanguageSepam series 80CT 59630CT 59629 59702 5963259702CCA630 CCA634 CCA671 CCA630 CCA634 CCA671 CCT640ConnectorsType Screw-type CCA620 Ring-lug CCA622 type (1) Can be used only with an advance UMI5Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTsCorebalanceCTs ModulesCore balance CT, �� 120 mm Core balance CT, �� 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface CSH120 59635 CSH200 59636 CSH30 59634 Input / output modules 14 inputs (24-250 V DC) + 6 outputs 14 inputs (220-250 V DC) + 6 outputs 14 inputs (110-125 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120 59715 MES120G 59716 MES120H 59722ACE990 59672 Note: the total number of core balance CTs cannot exceed 2. Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634.Note: the Sepam base unit comes with 5 outputs; 3 input/output modules can be added. Remotemodules Connectioncord  temperature sensor module MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 59660 59661 59662  Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M, G and C. Maximum of 2 MET 148-2 modules per application. Analog output module MSA141 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59647 L=2m L=4m Note: the MSA141 can be used with all the applications. Synchro-check module Mounting plate MCS025 AMT840 CCA772 CCA77459660 59661 59662 59712 59670Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications S, B, G and T. Comes with connection cord CCA785 and voltage connector CCT640.CommunicationinterfacesModbus interfaces 2-wire RS 485 interface 4-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface 2-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface ACE949-2 59642 ACE959 ACE937 59643 59644 Connectioncord CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 59663 59663 59663 59663 59663Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103) ACE969TP 59720 ACE969FO 59721Note: the total number of communication interfaces cannot exceed 2]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepamseries80 Ready-to-use configurationNumber of identical Sepam configurations orderedThis order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces according to your choices.Sepamseries80baseunit,cartridge,connectorsandapplicationBase unit and UMI Application TypeSubstation Base unit with mimic-based UMI Base unit with advanced UMI With lead seal accessory (1) Base unit without basic UMI Remote advanced Connection cord L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m Mounting plate Note: 8 mounting clips included SEP888 SEP383 AMT852 SEP080 DSM303 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 AMT880 59705 59704 59639 59703 59608 59660 59661 59662 59706 Generator MMS020 SFT080 59707 59711 Busbar Capacitor EN/FR EN/ES 59709 59710 59668 59669 Note: CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA634: 3 phase CT + IO Motor Transformer S80 59729 S81 59730 S82 59731 S84 59732 T 59733 T 59734 T 59735 M81 59736 M87 59737 M88 59738 G 59739 G 59741 G 59742 B0 59743 B 59744 C86 59745B1sensorCT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59630 CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 59629LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCT LPCTB2sensorUMI module (compulsory with SEP080)CT CT CT CT CTCT CT CT CT CT VTLPCT LPCTMemory cartridgeMemory cartridge Logipam optionNote: option required to use Logipam program.WorkinglanguageSepam series 80CT 59630CT 59629 59702 5963259702CCA630 CCA634 CCA671 CCA630 CCA634 CCA671 CCT640ConnectorsType Screw-type CCA620 Ring-lug CCA622 type (1) Can be used only with an advance UMI5Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTsCorebalanceCTs ModulesCore balance CT, AA 120 mm Core balance CT, AA 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface CSH120 59635 CSH200 59636 CSH30 59634 Input / output modules 14 inputs (24-250 V DC) + 6 outputs 14 inputs (220-250 V DC) + 6 outputs 14 inputs (110-125 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120 59715 MES120G 59716 MES120H 59722ACE990 59672 Note: the total number of core balance CTs cannot exceed 2. Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634.Note: the Sepam base unit comes with 5 outputs; 3 input/output modules can be added. Remotemodules Connectioncord  temperature sensor module MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m L=2m L=4m CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 59660 59661 59662  Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M, G and C. Maximum of 2 MET 148-2 modules per application. Analog output module MSA141 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59647 L=2m L=4m Note: the MSA141 can be used with all the applications. Synchro-check module Mounting plate MCS025 AMT840 CCA772 CCA77459660 59661 59662 59712 59670Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications S, B, G and T. Comes with connection cord CCA785 and voltage connector CCT640.CommunicationinterfacesModbus interfaces 2-wire RS 485 interface 4-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface 2-wire RS 485 interface Fiber optic interface ACE949-2 59642 ACE959 ACE937 59643 59644 Connectioncord CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 CCA612 59663 59663 59663 59663 59663Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103) ACE969TP 59720 ACE969FO 59721Note: the total number of communication interfaces cannot exceed 2]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="222">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepam 100 LDWhen ordering Sepam 100 LD, stabilization plate and/or surge limiters, please enclose a photocopy of this page with your order, filling in the requested quantities in the spaces provided and ticking off the boxes to indicate your choices.QuantitySepam 100 S01 LD (supplied with connections and mounting lugs)50 Hz 60 Hz Single-phase Three-phase 24 to 30 V DC 48 to 125 V DC 220 to 250 V DC 100 to 127 V AC 220 to 240 V AC 68 W - 280 W 150 W - 280 W 270 W - 280 W 470 W - 180 W 680 W - 180 WRated frequency Version Auxiliary power supplyResistanceStabilizationplateSingle unit Triple unitSurgelimiter]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepam 100 LDWhen ordering Sepam 100 LD, stabilization plate and/or surge limiters, please enclose a photocopy of this page with your order, filling in the requested quantities in the spaces provided and ticking off the boxes to indicate your choices.QuantitySepam 100 S01 LD (supplied with connections and mounting lugs)50 Hz 60 Hz Single-phase Three-phase 24 to 30 V DC 48 to 125 V DC 220 to 250 V DC 100 to 127 V AC 220 to 240 V AC 68 W - 280 W 150 W - 280 W 270 W - 280 W 470 W - 180 W 680 W - 180 WRated frequency Version Auxiliary power supplyResistanceStabilizationplateSingle unit Triple unitSurgelimiter]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="223">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepam 100 MIOrange boxcorresponds to none priced functions.Sepam 100 MIType Sepam 100M I-X00 Sepam 100M I-X01 Sepam 100M I-X02 Sepam 100M I-X03 Sepam 100M I-X10 Sepam 100M I-X11 Sepam 100M I-X12 Sepam 100M I-X13 Sepam 100M I-X14 Sepam 100M I-X15 Sepam 100M I-X16 Sepam 100M I-X17 Sepam 100M I-X18 Sepam 100M I-X22 Supplyvoltage 24/30 V AC/DC 48/127 V AC/DCQuantit]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepam 100 MIOrange boxcorresponds to none priced functions.Sepam 100 MIType Sepam 100M I-X00 Sepam 100M I-X01 Sepam 100M I-X02 Sepam 100M I-X03 Sepam 100M I-X10 Sepam 100M I-X11 Sepam 100M I-X12 Sepam 100M I-X13 Sepam 100M I-X14 Sepam 100M I-X15 Sepam 100M I-X16 Sepam 100M I-X17 Sepam 100M I-X18 Sepam 100M I-X22 Supplyvoltage 24/30 V AC/DC 48/127 V AC/DCQuantit]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="224">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepamaccessories andsparepartsCheck the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces according to your choices.Mounting accessoriesMounting plate Mead seal accessorySepam series 20, Sepam series 40 or MCS025:AMT840 AMT852 AMT880 AMT820 SFT2841 CD CCA783 CD SFT2885 CD SFT85059670 59639 59706 59699 59679 59664 TSXCUSB232 59727 59726Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 with advanced UMI Sepamseries80Mounting plate Blanking plateSoftwaretoolsSepam PC software: SFT2841 and SFT2826 (1 CD-ROM without connection cord CCA783) PC connection cord Logipam SFT2885 programming software IEC 61850 configuration softwareUSB/RS232 interface (CCA783 cord must be ordered separately)Input / output modules10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DCSepamseries20andseries40MES114 MES114E MES114F MES120 MES120H MES120G MET148-2 MSA141 DSM303 MCS025 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 CCA785 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC59646 59651 59652 59715 59722 59716 59641 59647 59608 59712 59660 59661 59662 59665Sepamseries8014 inputs + 6 outputs, 24-250 V DC 14 inputs + 6 outputs, 110-125 V DC 14 inputs + 6 outputs, 220-250 V DCRemotemodulesandcords temperature sensor module Analog output module Remote advanced UMI module Synchro-check module (including connection cord CCA785) Remote module connection cord L = 0.6 m Remote module connection cord L = 2 m Remote module connection cord L = 4 m Synchro-check module connection cord L = 2 m (spare parts)5CommunicationaccessoriesSepamcommunicationinterfacesACE949-2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP ACE969FO CCA612 ACE909-2 ACE919CA ACE919CC EGX100 EGX400 ECI850 59642 59643 59644 59720 59721 59663 59648 59649 59650 EGX100MG EGX400MG 59638 TCSEAK0100 CSH120 CSH200 CSH30 ACE990 ACE917 CCA613 59635 59636 59634 59672 59667 596662-wire RS 485 Modbus interface (without CCA612) 4-wire RS 485 Modbus interface (without CCA612) Fiber optic Modbus interface (without CCA612) RS 485 multi-protocol 2-wire interface (without CCA612) Fiber optic multi-protocol interface (without CCA612) Connection cord, L = 3 mConvertersRS 232 / RS 485 converter RS 485 / RS 485 interface (AC) RS 485 / RS 485 interface (DC) Ethernet gateway (Merlin Gerin) Ethernet webserver (Merlin Gerin) Sepam IEC 61850 server (with one ECI850 cat. no. 59653 and two surge arresters cat. no. 16595) Ethernet configuration kit for ECI850CorebalanceCTsCore balance CT, �� 120 mm Core balance CT, �� 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface LPCT injection adapter Remote LPCT test plugAccessories for phase-current sensors (LPC]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepamaccessories andsparepartsCheck the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces according to your choices.Mounting accessoriesMounting plate Mead seal accessorySepam series 20, Sepam series 40 or MCS025:AMT840 AMT852 AMT880 AMT820 SFT2841 CD CCA783 CD SFT2885 CD SFT85059670 59639 59706 59699 59679 59664 TSXCUSB232 59727 59726Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 with advanced UMI Sepamseries80Mounting plate Blanking plateSoftwaretoolsSepam PC software: SFT2841 and SFT2826 (1 CD-ROM without connection cord CCA783) PC connection cord Logipam SFT2885 programming software IEC 61850 configuration softwareUSB/RS232 interface (CCA783 cord must be ordered separately)Input / output modules10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DCSepamseries20andseries40MES114 MES114E MES114F MES120 MES120H MES120G MET148-2 MSA141 DSM303 MCS025 CCA770 CCA772 CCA774 CCA785 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC59646 59651 59652 59715 59722 59716 59641 59647 59608 59712 59660 59661 59662 59665Sepamseries8014 inputs + 6 outputs, 24-250 V DC 14 inputs + 6 outputs, 110-125 V DC 14 inputs + 6 outputs, 220-250 V DCRemotemodulesandcords temperature sensor module Analog output module Remote advanced UMI module Synchro-check module (including connection cord CCA785) Remote module connection cord L = 0.6 m Remote module connection cord L = 2 m Remote module connection cord L = 4 m Synchro-check module connection cord L = 2 m (spare parts)5CommunicationaccessoriesSepamcommunicationinterfacesACE949-2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP ACE969FO CCA612 ACE909-2 ACE919CA ACE919CC EGX100 EGX400 ECI850 59642 59643 59644 59720 59721 59663 59648 59649 59650 EGX100MG EGX400MG 59638 TCSEAK0100 CSH120 CSH200 CSH30 ACE990 ACE917 CCA613 59635 59636 59634 59672 59667 596662-wire RS 485 Modbus interface (without CCA612) 4-wire RS 485 Modbus interface (without CCA612) Fiber optic Modbus interface (without CCA612) RS 485 multi-protocol 2-wire interface (without CCA612) Fiber optic multi-protocol interface (without CCA612) Connection cord, L = 3 mConvertersRS 232 / RS 485 converter RS 485 / RS 485 interface (AC) RS 485 / RS 485 interface (DC) Ethernet gateway (Merlin Gerin) Ethernet webserver (Merlin Gerin) Sepam IEC 61850 server (with one ECI850 cat. no. 59653 and two surge arresters cat. no. 16595) Ethernet configuration kit for ECI850CorebalanceCTsCore balance CT, AA 120 mm Core balance CT, AA 200 mm Interposing ring CT Core balance CT interface LPCT injection adapter Remote LPCT test plugAccessories for phase-current sensors (LPC]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="225">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formSepamaccessories andsparepartsCheck the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces according to your choices.ManualsSepamseries20User���s manual PCRED301005 PCRED301006 SEPED303001 SEPED303002 SEPED303003 SEPED305001 SEPED305002 EN EN EN EN EN EN EN FR FR FR FR FR FR FRSepamseries40User���s manualSepamseries80Metering, protection, control and monitoring user���s manual Modbus communication user���s manual Installation and operation manualCommunicationprotocolDNP3 protocol IEC 60870-5-103 protocolNote: the technical manuals must be ordered separately form the CDI centre in Evreux.SpareconnectorsSepam20-pin screw-type connector 20-pin ring lug connector 6-pin screw-type connector 6-pin ring lug connector 1 A / 5 A CT current connector 1 A / 5 A CT + IO current connector LPCT lateral current connector LPCT radial current connector CCA620 CCA622 CCA626 CCA627 CCA630 CCA634 CCA670 CCA671 CCT640 Kit 2640 SEP888 SEP383 SEP080 59668 59669 59656 59657 59630 59629 59631 59702 59632 59676 59705 59704 59703 XBTZ30025VT voltage connectorMES modulesConnectors for 2 MES114 and 2 MES120SpareSepamseries80baseunitsWith mimic-based UMI With advanced UMI Without UMI 12 spring clipsNote: the base units are supplied without connectors and without memory cartridges.SpareSepamseries80memorycartridgeMemory cartridges Note: memory cartridges cannot be sold without application. Application Substation Type S80 S81 S82 S84 Transformer T T T Motor M81 M87 M88 Generator G G G Busbar Capacitor B0 B C86 59729 59730 59731 59732 59733 59734 59735 59736 59737 59738 59739 59741 59742 59743 59744 59745 Workinglanguage 59709 EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR 59710 EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP Logipam 59711 MMS020 597]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formSepamaccessories andsparepartsCheck the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces according to your choices.ManualsSepamseries20UserAAAs manual PCRED301005 PCRED301006 SEPED303001 SEPED303002 SEPED303003 SEPED305001 SEPED305002 EN EN EN EN EN EN EN FR FR FR FR FR FR FRSepamseries40UserAAAs manualSepamseries80Metering, protection, control and monitoring userAAAs manual Modbus communication userAAAs manual Installation and operation manualCommunicationprotocolDNP3 protocol IEC 60870-5-103 protocolNote: the technical manuals must be ordered separately form the CDI centre in Evreux.SpareconnectorsSepam20-pin screw-type connector 20-pin ring lug connector 6-pin screw-type connector 6-pin ring lug connector 1 A / 5 A CT current connector 1 A / 5 A CT + IO current connector LPCT lateral current connector LPCT radial current connector CCA620 CCA622 CCA626 CCA627 CCA630 CCA634 CCA670 CCA671 CCT640 Kit 2640 SEP888 SEP383 SEP080 59668 59669 59656 59657 59630 59629 59631 59702 59632 59676 59705 59704 59703 XBTZ30025VT voltage connectorMES modulesConnectors for 2 MES114 and 2 MES120SpareSepamseries80baseunitsWith mimic-based UMI With advanced UMI Without UMI 12 spring clipsNote: the base units are supplied without connectors and without memory cartridges.SpareSepamseries80memorycartridgeMemory cartridges Note: memory cartridges cannot be sold without application. Application Substation Type S80 S81 S82 S84 Transformer T T T Motor M81 M87 M88 Generator G G G Busbar Capacitor B0 B C86 59729 59730 59731 59732 59733 59734 59735 59736 59737 59738 59739 59741 59742 59743 59744 59745 Workinglanguage 59709 EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR EN/FR 59710 EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP EN/SP Logipam 59711 MMS020 597]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="226">
		<raw><![CDATA[Schneider Electric Industries SAS89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F - 92500 Rueil-Malmaison (France) Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00 http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.sepamrelay.merlin-gerin.comAs standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. Printed on recycled paper.Design: Ameg Publication: Schneider Electric Printed:SEPED303005EN / 503-2007ART.52475 �� 2007 Schneider Electric - All rights reserv]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Schneider Electric Industries SAS89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F - 92500 Rueil-Malmaison (France) Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00 http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.sepamrelay.merlin-gerin.comAs standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. Printed on recycled paper.Design: Ameg Publication: Schneider Electric Printed:SEPED303005EN / 503-2007ART.52475 AA 2007 Schneider Electric - All rights reserv]]></basicChars>
	</page>

</searchText>